SolidCAM 2010 Milling User Guide

SOLIDCAM - THE LEADERS IN INTEGRATED CAM
The complete integrated Manufacturing Solution inside SolidWorks
SOLIDCAM 2010
MILLING USER GUIDE
www.solidcam.com
SolidCAM 2010
Milling User Guide
©1995-2010 SolidCAM
All Rights Reserved.

Contents
Contents
1. SolidCAM Basics
1.1 Installing the SolidCAM Software..................................................................................................... 24
1.1.1 System requirements.................................................................................................................. 24

1.1.2 Supported CAD systems.......................................................................................................... 24
1.1.3 SolidCAM Single License installation..................................................................................... 25
1.1.4 SolidCAM Network License Installation............................................................................... 29
1.2 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................... 31
1.3 Starting SolidCAM............................................................................................................................... 31
1.4 SolidCAM Interface............................................................................................................................. 32
1.4.1 SolidCAM Manager................................................................................................................... 32

1.4.2 Coordinate System..................................................................................................................... 37
1.5 Getting Help.......................................................................................................................................... 38
2. CAM-Part
2.1 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part....................................................................................................... 40
2.1.1 New Milling Part dialog box.................................................................................................... 41

2.1.2 The structure of the CAM-Part.............................................................................................. 42
2.1.3 Milling Part Data dialog box.................................................................................................... 42
2.2 Coordinate System................................................................................................................................ 43
2.2.1 Defining the Coordinate System (CoordSys)........................................................................ 43

2.2.2 CoordSys dialog box.................................................................................................................. 44
2.2.3 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 3-axis CNC-machine............................................... 50
2.2.6 Coordinate System definition methods.................................................................................. 53
2.2.7 CoordSys Data dialog box........................................................................................................ 54
5
2.2.8 SolidCAM Coordinate System................................................................................................. 56
2.3 CoordSys Manager............................................................................................................................... 57
2.4 Stock and Target Model....................................................................................................................... 59
2.4.1 Stock model................................................................................................................................ 60

2.4.2 Target model............................................................................................................................... 62
2.4.3 Common controls for Stock model and Target model dialog boxes................................. 62
2.4.4 Associativity of Stock and Target models.............................................................................. 63
2.5 Tool Options......................................................................................................................................... 65
2.6 Mac Options.......................................................................................................................................... 67
2.7 Work Material........................................................................................................................................ 67
2.8 CNC-Controller and Axis Type.......................................................................................................... 68
2.8.1 Axis type...................................................................................................................................... 68

2.9 Default GCode numbers..................................................................................................................... 70
2.10 Part Settings......................................................................................................................................... 72
2.10.1 Units........................................................................................................................................... 74
2.10.2 Synchronization........................................................................................................................ 75
2.10.3 Interoperational tool movements.......................................................................................... 78
2.10.4 Update Stock calculation........................................................................................................ 79
2.10.5 Automatic CAM-Part definition............................................................................................ 82
2.10.6 Machining Process................................................................................................................... 83
2.10.7 Tool path simulation................................................................................................................ 84
2.10.8 GCode generation.................................................................................................................... 85
2.10.9 Template defaults..................................................................................................................... 89
2.10.10 Tool coolant............................................................................................................................ 91
2.10.11 Gouge check........................................................................................................................... 91
2.11 Compressed CAM-Part..................................................................................................................... 92
2.11.1 Compressed CAM-Part file format....................................................................................... 92

2.11.2 Creating a new compressed CAM-Part................................................................................ 92
2.11.3 Converting CAM-Parts to Compressed mode.................................................................... 93
2.11.4 Opening/Closing Compressed CAM-Parts......................................................................... 93
6
Contents
2.12 Managing CAM-Parts........................................................................................................................ 95
2.12.1 SolidCAM menu....................................................................................................................... 95

2.12.2 CAM-Part menu....................................................................................................................... 99
2.13 CAM-Part Documentation............................................................................................................. 103
2.13.1 Documentation Editor.......................................................................................................... 103

2.14 Tool sheet documentation............................................................................................................... 105
2.14.1 Generating the tool sheet..................................................................................................... 106

2.14.2 Capturing the CAM-Part image........................................................................................... 106
2.14.3 Definition of tool sheet parameters................................................................................... 107
2.14.4 The output file........................................................................................................................ 110
2.14.5 Show Last Tool Sheet............................................................................................................ 113
2.14.6 Tool sheet template definition in the XLS format........................................................... 114
2.15 Cleanup CAM-Part........................................................................................................................... 129
2.16 SolidCAM controls in SolidWorks environment......................................................................... 130
2.16.1 SolidCAM tab in SolidWorks CommandManager............................................................ 130

2.16.2 SolidCAM toolbars in SolidWorks environment.............................................................. 134
2.17 Milling-STL CAM-Part.................................................................................................................... 136
2.17.1 Starting a new Milling-STL CAM-Part............................................................................... 136

2.17.2 Coordinate System definition............................................................................................... 138
2.17.3 Stock model definition.......................................................................................................... 139
2.17.4 Target model definition........................................................................................................ 139
2.18 Support of DriveWorks................................................................................................................... 140
3. Tools
3.1 User-Defined Tool Types.................................................................................................................. 144
3.1.1 End mill..................................................................................................................................... 145

3.1.2 Ball nose mill............................................................................................................................ 146
3.1.3 Bull nose mill............................................................................................................................ 147
3.1.4 Dove tail mill............................................................................................................................ 148
7
3.1.5 Face mill..................................................................................................................................... 149
3.1.6 Slot mill...................................................................................................................................... 150
3.1.7 Taper mill.................................................................................................................................. 151
3.1.8 Engraving tool.......................................................................................................................... 153
3.1.9 Tap tool..................................................................................................................................... 154
3.1.10 Lollipop mill........................................................................................................................... 155
3.1.11 Thread mill.............................................................................................................................. 157
3.1.12 Thread taper........................................................................................................................... 159
3.1.13 Drill.......................................................................................................................................... 159
3.1.14 Center drill.............................................................................................................................. 160
3.1.15 Spot drill.................................................................................................................................. 162
3.1.16 Chamfer drill........................................................................................................................... 163
3.1.17 Reamer..................................................................................................................................... 164
3.1.18 Bore.......................................................................................................................................... 165
3.1.19 Shaped Tools.......................................................................................................................... 166
3.1.20 Add new tool types................................................................................................................ 166
3.1.21 Tool type options................................................................................................................... 167
3.2 Tool Libraries...................................................................................................................................... 168
3.3 Working with the Part Tool Table.................................................................................................... 169
3.4 Working with the Current Tool Library.......................................................................................... 170
3.5 Managing Tool Libraries.................................................................................................................... 171
3.5.1 Edit Tool Library..................................................................................................................... 171

3.5.2 Create Tool Library.................................................................................................................. 171
3.5.3 Copy Tool Library.................................................................................................................... 172
3.5.4 Delete Tool Library................................................................................................................. 173
3.6 Tool Table dialog box........................................................................................................................ 174
3.6.1 Tools Filter................................................................................................................................ 174

3.6.2 Tool range................................................................................................................................. 175
3.6.3 Show........................................................................................................................................... 176
3.6.4 View........................................................................................................................................... 177
3.6.5 Edit............................................................................................................................................. 177
8
Contents
3.7 Managing tools.................................................................................................................................... 180
3.8 Tool data.............................................................................................................................................. 184
3.8.1 Tool Topology page................................................................................................................. 185

3.8.2 Default Tool Data page........................................................................................................... 190
3.8.3 Tool Message page................................................................................................................... 195
3.8.4 Tool Coolant page.................................................................................................................... 196
3.8.5 Holder page............................................................................................................................... 197
3.8.6 Shape page................................................................................................................................ 198
3.9 Tool Holding system.......................................................................................................................... 200
3.9.1 Tool Holders dialog box......................................................................................................... 200

3.9.2 Tool Holder Geometry definition......................................................................................... 204
3.9.3 Tool Holder segments............................................................................................................. 205
3.9.4 Using Tool Holders................................................................................................................. 206
3.10 Shaped Tools..................................................................................................................................... 208
3.10.1 Shaped Tools dialog box....................................................................................................... 208

3.10.2 Shaped tool geometry definition......................................................................................... 211
3.10.3 Shaped Tool segments........................................................................................................... 211
3.10.4 Using Shaped tools................................................................................................................ 213
3.11 Spin and Feed defaults..................................................................................................................... 215
4. Geometry
4.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................ 218
4.2 Drilling geometry................................................................................................................................ 219
4.2.1 Defining a Drilling geometry................................................................................................. 219

4.2.2 Editing a Drilling geometry.................................................................................................... 220
4.2.3 Drill Geometry Selection dialog box.................................................................................... 220
4.2.4 Around 4th Axis Drill Geometry Selection dialog box..................................................... 224
4.3 3D Model geometry........................................................................................................................... 227
4.3.1 Defining a 3D Model geometry............................................................................................. 227

4.3.2 Editing a 3D Model geometry............................................................................................... 228
9
4.4 Wireframe geometry.......................................................................................................................... 229
4.4.1 Defining the Profile/Pocket geometry................................................................................. 229

4.4.2 Defining the Working Area.................................................................................................... 230
4.4.3 Defining the Slot geometry.................................................................................................... 230
4.4.4 Defining the Section geometry.............................................................................................. 231
4.4.5 Defining the Limit geometry.................................................................................................. 232
4.5 Editing chain geometries................................................................................................................... 233
4.5.1 Geometry Name...................................................................................................................... 233

4.5.2 Configurations.......................................................................................................................... 233
4.5.3 Adding a Chain......................................................................................................................... 233
4.5.4 Managing chains....................................................................................................................... 234
4.5.5 Chain direction......................................................................................................................... 235
4.5.6 Selecting single entities............................................................................................................ 235
4.5.7 Automatic selection................................................................................................................. 240
4.5.8 Chain buttons........................................................................................................................... 242
4.5.9 Options...................................................................................................................................... 243
4.5.10 Gap control............................................................................................................................. 243
4.5.11 Add Multi-Chain.................................................................................................................... 244
4.5.12 Mark Open Edges dialog box.............................................................................................. 244
4.6 Chains Selection dialog box.............................................................................................................. 246
4.6.1 Chains Direction dialog box................................................................................................... 248

4.6.2 Chain sorting............................................................................................................................ 249
4.7 Managing geometries......................................................................................................................... 251
4.7.1 Synchronization of the Wireframe geometry...................................................................... 252

4.7.2 Synchronization of the 3D Model geometry...................................................................... 256
4.7.3 Boolean operations.................................................................................................................. 258
10
Contents
5. Operations
5.1 Adding an operation........................................................................................................................... 262
5.2 SolidCAM Operation Interface........................................................................................................ 263
5.2.1 Operation name....................................................................................................................... 265

5.2.2 Template.................................................................................................................................... 267
5.2.3 Info............................................................................................................................................. 279
5.2.4 Operation buttons.................................................................................................................... 280
5.2.5 Calculator.................................................................................................................................. 283
5.2.6 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 286
5.2.7 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 288
5.2.8 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 293
5.2.9 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 300
5.2.10 Advanced Technology page................................................................................................. 300
5.2.11 Link page................................................................................................................................. 308
5.2.12 Miscellaneous parameters page............................................................................................ 308
5.3 Working with operations................................................................................................................... 311
5.3.1 Add Operation......................................................................................................................... 311

5.3.2 Add Operation from Template.............................................................................................. 312
5.3.3 Add Operations from Process Template............................................................................. 312
5.3.4 Add Machining Process.......................................................................................................... 313
5.3.5 Create Template....................................................................................................................... 313
5.3.6 Edit............................................................................................................................................. 313
5.3.7 Calculate/Calculate All............................................................................................................ 313
5.3.8 GCode/GCode All.................................................................................................................. 313
5.3.9 Calculate & GCode All........................................................................................................... 313
5.3.10 Tool Sheet............................................................................................................................... 314
5.3.11 Simulate................................................................................................................................... 314
5.3.12 Simulate External................................................................................................................... 314
5.3.13 File............................................................................................................................................ 314
5.3.14 Operation Group................................................................................................................... 314
11
5.3.15 Cut/Copy/Paste..................................................................................................................... 315
5.3.16 Rename.................................................................................................................................... 315
5.3.17 Change tool............................................................................................................................. 316
5.3.18 Change tool data.................................................................................................................... 316
5.3.19 Info........................................................................................................................................... 317
5.3.20 Delete/Delete All.................................................................................................................. 317
5.3.21 Suppress/Unsuppress........................................................................................................... 317
5.4 Managing Operations in the SolidCAM Manager tree................................................................. 320
5.4.1 Operation Sequence................................................................................................................ 320

5.4.2 Undo Sequence........................................................................................................................ 320
5.4.3 Split............................................................................................................................................ 320
5.4.4 Expand tree............................................................................................................................... 322
5.4.5 Collapse tree.............................................................................................................................. 322
5.4.6 Show/Hide Tools in tree........................................................................................................ 322
5.4.7 Show/Hide CoordSys in tree................................................................................................. 323
5.4.8 Automatic Sorting.................................................................................................................... 324
5.5 Operation Transformations.............................................................................................................. 326
5.5.1 Operation transformations..................................................................................................... 327

5.5.2 Options...................................................................................................................................... 328
5.5.3 Transformations table............................................................................................................. 328
5.5.4 Transformation buttons.......................................................................................................... 329
5.6 Fixture.................................................................................................................................................. 334
5.6.1 Fixture dialog box.................................................................................................................... 335
6. 2.5D Milling
6.1 Profile Operation................................................................................................................................ 338
6.1.1 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 339

6.1.2 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 339
6.1.3 Link page................................................................................................................................... 362
6.2 Face Milling Operation...................................................................................................................... 371
12
Contents
6.2.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 371

6.2.2 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 374
6.2.3 Link page................................................................................................................................... 385
6.3 Contour 3D Operation...................................................................................................................... 387
6.3.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 387

6.3.2 Link page................................................................................................................................... 391
6.4 Pocket Operation................................................................................................................................ 393
6.4.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 394

6.4.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 395
6.4.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 396
6.4.4 Link page................................................................................................................................... 417
6.5 Pocket Recognition Operation......................................................................................................... 433
6.5.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 433

6.5.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 439
6.5.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 440
6.5.4 Link page................................................................................................................................... 444
6.6 Drilling Operation.............................................................................................................................. 445
6.6.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 445

6.6.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 447
6.6.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 448
6.7 Drill Recognition Operation............................................................................................................. 473
6.7.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 473

6.7.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 479
6.7.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 484
6.8 Thread Milling Operation................................................................................................................. 487
6.8.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 487

6.8.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 488
6.8.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 489
6.8.4 Link page................................................................................................................................... 492
13
6.9 Slot Operation..................................................................................................................................... 493
6.9.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 494

6.9.2 Pre-drilling geometry generation........................................................................................... 501
6.10 T-Slot Operation............................................................................................................................... 503
6.10.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................. 504

6.10.2 Technology page.................................................................................................................... 505
6.10.3 Link page................................................................................................................................. 510
6.11 Translated Surface Operation......................................................................................................... 511
6.11.1 Technology page.................................................................................................................... 511

6.11.2 Link page................................................................................................................................. 522
7. 3D Milling
7.1 3D Milling Operation......................................................................................................................... 524
7.1.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 524

7.1.2 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 537
7.1.3 Roughing................................................................................................................................... 538
7.1.4 Hatch roughing......................................................................................................................... 553
7.1.5 Contour roughing.................................................................................................................... 553
7.1.6 Plunging pattern....................................................................................................................... 553
7.1.7 Semi-Finish/Finish.................................................................................................................. 554
7.1.8 Semi-Finish/Finish strategies................................................................................................. 560
7.1.9 Linear Finish strategy.............................................................................................................. 560
7.1.10 Offset Cutting Finish strategy............................................................................................. 564
7.1.11 Spiral finish strategy.............................................................................................................. 567
7.1.12 Circular Pocket finish strategy............................................................................................. 571
7.1.13 Constant Z Finish Strategy................................................................................................... 573
7.1.14 Constant Step over strategy................................................................................................. 580
7.1.15 Pencil milling.......................................................................................................................... 585
7.1.16 Tolerance page........................................................................................................................ 589
14
Contents
7.2 3D Engraving Operation.................................................................................................................. 591
7.2.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 591

7.2.2 Tolerance page.......................................................................................................................... 594
7.3 3D Drilling Operation....................................................................................................................... 595
7.3.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 595

7.3.2 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 596
7.3.3 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 597
7.3.4 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 597
8. Machining Processes
8.1 Introduction & Basic concepts......................................................................................................... 600
8.1.1 Operation templates................................................................................................................ 600

8.1.2 Parameters & Expressions...................................................................................................... 601
8.1.3 Default sets............................................................................................................................... 602
8.1.4 Machining Process Table........................................................................................................ 602
8.2 Creating Machining Processes.......................................................................................................... 603
8.3 Defining Machining Process Table.................................................................................................. 604
8.3.1 Adding MAC file(s).................................................................................................................. 604

8.4 Machining Process Table Manager.................................................................................................. 606
8.4.1 Managing Machining Process Tables.................................................................................... 607

8.4.2 Machining Process Group Types........................................................................................... 609
8.5 Managing Machining Processes........................................................................................................ 611
8.6 Machining Process Define Manager................................................................................................ 612
8.6.1 Operation Templates page...................................................................................................... 612

8.6.2 Defining operation templates................................................................................................. 612
8.6.3 Managing operation templates............................................................................................... 613
8.6.4 Parametric field menu.............................................................................................................. 615
8.6.5 Default Sets page..................................................................................................................... 616
8.6.6 Parameters & Expressions Tables......................................................................................... 617
15
8.6.7 Add new parameter................................................................................................................. 619
8.6.8 Variables and expressions....................................................................................................... 619
8.6.9 Parametric tool definition....................................................................................................... 624
8.7 Using the Machining Processes........................................................................................................ 626
8.8 Inserting the Machining Process...................................................................................................... 627
8.8.1 Choosing the tool..................................................................................................................... 629

8.9 Machining Process Insert Manager.................................................................................................. 630
8.9.1 Operation Templates Page..................................................................................................... 630

8.9.2 Default Sets Page..................................................................................................................... 631
8.9.3 Parameters Table...................................................................................................................... 632
8.9.4 Operation Points...................................................................................................................... 632
8.9.5 Parameters definition............................................................................................................... 632
9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining (AFRM)
9.1 Introduction and Basic Concepts..................................................................................................... 636
9.2 Preparation to Holes Recognition.................................................................................................... 638
9.2.1 Definition of Coordinate Systems........................................................................................ 638

9.2.2 Target model............................................................................................................................. 638
9.3 Start Holes Recognition..................................................................................................................... 639
9.4 Holes Recognition User Interface.................................................................................................... 640
9.4.1 Holes Recognition Manager................................................................................................... 640

9.4.2 Holes Recognition Toolbar.................................................................................................... 641
9.5 Hole Feature Model............................................................................................................................ 643
9.5.1 Cylindrical Hole Feature segment.......................................................................................... 644

9.5.2 Cone Hole Feature segment................................................................................................... 644
9.5.3 Chamfer Hole Feature segment............................................................................................. 645
9.5.4 Planar Hole Feature segment................................................................................................. 645
9.5.5 Torus Hole Feature segment.................................................................................................. 645
9.5.6 Sphere Hole Feature segment................................................................................................ 646
9.5.7 Compound Holes processing................................................................................................. 646
16
Contents
9.5.8 Disconnected Holes processing............................................................................................. 647

9.5.9 Reaming recognition................................................................................................................ 647
9.5.10 Hole Feature Shapes and Groups....................................................................................... 647
9.5.11 Hole Features page................................................................................................................ 648
9.6 Preparing Hole Features for machining.......................................................................................... 653
9.6.1 Undercut processing................................................................................................................ 653

9.6.2 Undercut substitution.............................................................................................................. 654
9.6.3 Segments Union....................................................................................................................... 657
9.6.4 Machinable Hole Features...................................................................................................... 659
9.6.5 Machinable Hole Feature conversion................................................................................... 665
9.6.6 Machinable Hole Features page............................................................................................. 673
9.7 Feature Sets.......................................................................................................................................... 682
9.7.1 Creating Feature Sets............................................................................................................... 682

9.7.2 Assigning Hole Features to Feature Sets.............................................................................. 682
9.7.3 Automatic CoordSys Positions definition............................................................................ 683
9.7.4 Feature Sets page...................................................................................................................... 685
9.7.5 Compatible/Incompatible Hole features............................................................................. 685
9.7.6 Operating Feature Sets............................................................................................................ 686
9.7.7 Defining the CoordSys Position origin location for the Feature Set............................... 687
9.8 Technology.......................................................................................................................................... 689
9.8.1 Choosing a Technological Solution....................................................................................... 689

9.8.2 Choosing the tool..................................................................................................................... 690
9.8.3 Technology Page...................................................................................................................... 697
9.8.4 Managing Technology............................................................................................................. 698
9.9 Generating Operations...................................................................................................................... 701
9.10 Technology Database....................................................................................................................... 702
9.10.1 Global and Local Technology databases............................................................................ 703

9.10.2 Technology Database interface............................................................................................ 704
9.10.3 Configurations page............................................................................................................... 704
9.10.4 Current Configuration........................................................................................................... 705
9.10.5 Segments page........................................................................................................................ 706
17
9.10.6 Conditions............................................................................................................................... 707
9.10.7 Variables.................................................................................................................................. 710
9.10.8 Defining a new technological solution............................................................................... 713
9.10.9 Holes Recognition Functions.............................................................................................. 714
9.11 Holes Recognition Settings............................................................................................................. 716
9.11.1 System settings....................................................................................................................... 716

9.11.2 Part settings............................................................................................................................. 719
10. Simulation
10.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 722
10.1.1 Simulation control panel....................................................................................................... 722

10.1.2 Simulation modes................................................................................................................... 724
10.1.3 Simulation controls................................................................................................................ 724
10.2 2D simulation mode......................................................................................................................... 725
10.2.1 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 725

10.3 Host CAD simulation mode........................................................................................................... 727
10.4 3D simulation mode......................................................................................................................... 728

10.4.2 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 729
10.5 SolidVerify simulation mode........................................................................................................... 730

10.5.3 Selection mode....................................................................................................................... 737
10.5.4 Measurement.......................................................................................................................... 738
10.5.5 Updated Stock model............................................................................................................ 738
10.5.6 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 740
10.6 SolidVerify for 3D simulation mode............................................................................................. 747

10.6.2 Rendering of the simulation model.................................................................................... 748
18
Contents

10.6.4 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 750
10.7 Rest Material simulation mode....................................................................................................... 751
10.8 RapidVerify simulation mode......................................................................................................... 752
10.8.1 RapidVerify control panel..................................................................................................... 752

10.8.2 Updated Stock Model............................................................................................................ 753
10.8.5 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 754
10.9 Machine Simulation.......................................................................................................................... 755
10.9.1 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 756

10.9.2 Simulation windows............................................................................................................... 768
10.9.3 Simulation toolbars................................................................................................................ 779
10.9.4 CNC-machine definition parameters.................................................................................. 781
10.9.5 CNC-machine model definition.......................................................................................... 798
10.10 External Simulation........................................................................................................................ 833
10.10.1 Show SolidCAM Manager.................................................................................................. 834

10.10.2 Run as main process/Run as background process......................................................... 835
10.10.3 Simulation toolbar............................................................................................................... 835
11. GCode
11.1 Generate............................................................................................................................................. 839
11.2 List......................................................................................................................................................841
11.3 Copy...................................................................................................................................................841
11.4 Print....................................................................................................................................................841
19
12. SolidCAM Settings
12.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 844
12.2 User Directories settings................................................................................................................. 848
12.2.1 User Directory for SolidCAM Parts................................................................................... 848

12.2.2 User Directory for SolidCAM Tables................................................................................. 848
12.2.3 Excel file for Threading tables............................................................................................. 848
12.3 Default CNC-controller settings.................................................................................................... 849
12.3.1 Post-processor files directory............................................................................................... 849

12.3.2 CNC-controllers..................................................................................................................... 849
12.4 Units settings..................................................................................................................................... 850
12.4.1 Metric/Inch............................................................................................................................ 850

12.4.2 Approximation....................................................................................................................... 850
12.4.3 Chain selection....................................................................................................................... 851
12.4.4 Fillet size for last cut.............................................................................................................. 852
12.4.5 Tool Start and Clearance Levels.......................................................................................... 852
12.5 Synchronization settings.................................................................................................................. 853
12.5.1 Synchronization of CAM geometry with design model.................................................. 853

12.5.2 Synchronization tolerance.................................................................................................... 854
12.5.3 Synchronization of design model with original model.................................................... 854
12.5.4 Synchronization when design model configuration changes.......................................... 854
12.6 Compressed CAM-Part settings..................................................................................................... 855
12.7 Tool Settings...................................................................................................................................... 856
12.7.1 Update Part Tool Table according to Machine Tool Table............................................. 856
12.7.2 Print in documentation – Only used tools......................................................................... 856
12.7.3 Show in SolidCAM Manager................................................................................................ 857
12.7.4 Import tools............................................................................................................................ 857
12.7.5 Set Tool as Permanent when user changes the tool number.......................................... 857
12.8 Color settings.................................................................................................................................... 858
12.9 Default Geometry Names............................................................................................................... 860
20
Contents
12.10 Interoperational tool movements................................................................................................ 861
12.11 AutoSave settings........................................................................................................................... 862
12.12 Automatic CAM-Part definition.................................................................................................. 863
12.12.1 Automatic Stock model definition.................................................................................... 863

12.12.2 Automatic Target model definition................................................................................... 864
12.12.3 Definition of Coordinate System...................................................................................... 864
12.13 Tool path simulation settings........................................................................................................ 865
12.14 Machine simulation settings.......................................................................................................... 866
12.14.1 Directory for Machine simulation definition................................................................... 866

12.14.2 Tool path coordinates......................................................................................................... 866
12.14.3 Background........................................................................................................................... 866
12.14.4 Enable collision control...................................................................................................... 868
12.14.5 Solid verification.................................................................................................................. 868
12.14.6 Environment........................................................................................................................ 869
12.15 DNC settings.................................................................................................................................. 869
12.16 Editors settings............................................................................................................................... 870
12.17 External program settings............................................................................................................. 871
12.18 Machining Process settings........................................................................................................... 872
12.18.1 On MP insertion (for milling only)................................................................................... 872

12.18.2 Operation name in SolidCAM Manager.......................................................................... 872
12.18.3 Update extra parameters on CNC-controller change.................................................... 872
12.19 User interface settings.................................................................................................................... 873
12.20 CoordSys settings........................................................................................................................... 874
12.21 GCode Generation......................................................................................................................... 875
12.22 Tool search...................................................................................................................................... 878
12.23 Internal Post-processor................................................................................................................. 878
12.24 SolidCAM Manager settings......................................................................................................... 879
12.25 Template defaults........................................................................................................................... 879
21
12.26 Miscellaneous settings.................................................................................................................... 880
12.27 Tool coolant.................................................................................................................................... 881
12.28 Gouge check................................................................................................................................... 881
12.29 CAM Messages............................................................................................................................... 882
Appendix.................................................................................................................................................... 883
Index...........................................................................................................................................................889
22
SolidCAM
Basics 1
SolidCAM is a powerful CAM product that has been designed
especially for the shop floor. SolidCAM supports the complete
range of major manufacturing applications including 2.5D
Milling, 3D Milling, Turning, Turning with Driven tools and Wire
EDM, in one integrated solution. Machining operations can
be defined on 2D Design Drawings as well as on 3D Solid
and Surface Models. SolidCAM also has a powerful general
post-processor tool that enables the easy customization of
the GCode file output to various types of CNC-controllers.
This chapter discusses some basic concepts and terminology
used throughout SolidCAM.
 Installing SolidCAM
 Starting SolidCAM
 SolidCAM Basic Concepts
 SolidCAM Interface
 Getting Help
1.1 Installing the SolidCAM Software
1.1.1 System requirements
Supported Operating Systems
Microsoft® Windows 7 x32/x64 Professional and Ultimate editions

Microsoft® Windows Vista x32/x64 Business and Ultimate editions with Service Pack 1
Microsoft® Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 or 3
Microsoft® Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
CPU
Intel® Core™, Intel® Core™2 Duo, Intel® Core™ Quad, Quad-core Intel® Xeon®,
AMD Phenom™, AMD Phenom™ II, AMD Athlon™ X2 Dual-Core - class processor
RAM
2 GB RAM or more (4 GB or more for x64 operating system is recommended for large
CAM-Parts machining)
Video
A OpenGL workstation graphics card (512 MB RAM recommended) and latest driver
Other
• Mouse or other pointing device;

• CD drive;
• Internet Explorer version 6 if you are using the SolidCAM Online Help;
• For viewing the What’s New manual, Adobe Acrobat version 9 or higher is
recommended.
1.1.2 Supported CAD systems

The following CAD systems are supported by SolidCAM 2010:
• SolidWorks® 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010;
SolidWorks® 64-bit version is supported.
24
1. SolidCAM Basics
• Autodesk® Inventor™ 2008, 2009, 2010;

• Bentley Microstation/J Modeler;
• Autodesk® Mechanical Desktop 2005;
• Autodesk® AutoCAD® 2005.
1.1.3 SolidCAM Single License installation
1. Insert the SolidCAM Installation CD into the computer CD drive;

the installation starts automatically.
You can also start the installation by running the Setup.exe file.
This file is located in the SolidCAMXXXX/Disk1 folder on the
SolidCAM Installation CD (XXXX stands for the current version
of SolidCAM).
2. The Choose Setup Language dialog box is displayed.
Choose English.
When you have to install a localized version of SolidCAM, choose

the appropriate language from the combo box.
The installation procedure is continued.
3. The following message is displayed.
Close all running applications and confirm the message with the OK button.
25
4. The Installing SolidCAM dialog box is displayed. Click on the Next button.
5. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box enables you to choose the destination folder for SolidCAM.
You have to either confirm the default destination folder (C:\Program Files\
SolidCAMXXXX) with the Next button or choose another destination folder
with the Browse button and confirm it with the Next button.
6. The Select Components dialog box is displayed.
Choose the necessary SolidCAM components and confirm your choice with
the Next button.
26
1. SolidCAM Basics
Make a note that the Program Files component cannot be cleared.
7. The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed.
Confirm the default Program Folder name SolidCAMXXXX with the Next
button.
SolidCAM installation is continued.
8. When the installation is finished, the Choose Language dialog box is

displayed.
Choose English and click on the OK button.
When you install a localized version of SolidCAM, choose the

appropriate language from the combo box.
9. SolidCAM installs drivers for the hardware key. When the drivers are installed,
the following message is displayed.
Click on the OK button.
27
10. When SolidCAM is connected to the defined CAD system (SolidWorks), the
following message is displayed.
Click on the OK button.
11. The following dialog box is displayed.
Click on the Finish button.
The installation is finished.
28
1. SolidCAM Basics
1.1.4 SolidCAM Network License Installation

SolidCAM enables you to install SolidCAM Network
several SolidCAM copies through hardware key
your network and use network
licensing to manage them. In this case, SolidCAM
the SolidCAM Network hardware key License Server
has to be connected to the server. The
License Manager has to be installed on
the network server computer, which SolidCAM Licenses
distributes SolidCAM Licenses to
client computers. When the SolidCAM
software runs on a client computer, it
obtains the necessary license from the
server.
SolidCAM Client Computers
Setting up the SolidCAM License Server
SolidCAM network licensing supports TCP/IP network protocol.
1. SolidCAM Network hardware keys are available in two configurations: for

USB port or for LPT port. Connect your SolidCAM Network hardware key
to the correct port of your server.
2. Install SolidCAM software on the server as explained in topic 1.1.3. During

the installation, the necessary driver for the hardware key is automatically
installed.
3. After the SolidCAM installation, the server must be restarted.
4. Install the License Manager software by running Lmsetup.exe application

located in the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder.
5. Check the IP address of the server in the network by clicking on the Start
button located at the Windows taskbar and then choosing the Command
Prompt item from the All Programs/Accessories submenu. The Command
Prompt window is displayed.
6. Type the ipconfig command and confirm it with the Enter key.
The IP address of the server will be displayed.
29
Setting SolidCAM licenses on client computers
1. Install SolidCAM on client computer as described in topic 1.1.3.
2. Copy the NethaspTCPIP.ini file located in the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder to

the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Solidcam folder.
3. Rename the copied file from NethaspTCPIP.ini to Nethasp.ini.
4. Open the renamed Nethasp.ini file in the Notepad editor. The

[NH_TCPIP] section in this file contains the following string:
NH_SERVER_ADDR = XX.XX.XX.XX; This parameter should define the IP
address of the License Server. Type the IP address of the server instead of
XX.XX.XX.XX, for example: 72.14.207.99. Save the Nethasp.ini file and close
the Notepad application.
After the License Manager is installed on the SolidCAM Licensing server and SolidCAM Licenses
are configured on each client computer, the SolidCAM software can be launched.
30
1. SolidCAM Basics
1.2 Basic Concepts
Every manufacturing project in SolidCAM contains the following data:
• CAM-Part
The CAM-Part defines the general data of the workpiece, including the model name,
the Coordinate System, tool options, CNC-controller, etc.
• Geometry
By selecting edges, curves, surfaces or solids, define what and where you are going to
machine. This geometry is associated with the native SolidWorks model.
• Operation
An operation is a single machining step in SolidCAM. Technology, Tool parameters

and Strategies are defined in the operation. In short, operation means how you want
to machine.
1.3 Starting SolidCAM
To start SolidCAM, click on the SolidCAM field in the main menu of SolidWorks and choose
Milling from the New submenu.
SolidCAM is started.
31
1.4 SolidCAM Interface
Coordinate System SolidWorks window
SolidCAM
toolbars
SolidCAM
Manager
Machining
Solid model
1.4.1 SolidCAM Manager
After the CAM-Part is loaded, the CAM-Part header

SolidCAM Manager is displayed
in the left part of the screen. Tool header
The SolidCAM Manager tree is Machining Process

the main interface feature of header
SolidCAM. It displays complete
information about the CAM- Geometries header
Part and contains the following
headers:
• CAM-Part header
Operations header
} Operations
This header displays the name of the current SolidCAM CAM-Part. By right-clicking
on it, you can display the menu to manage your CAM-Parts. The CoordSys Manager,
Stock, Target, and Settings subheaders are located under the CAM-Part header.
Double-clicking on this header displays the Milling Part Data dialog box.
For more information on CAM-Parts, please refer to Chapter 2.
32
1. SolidCAM Basics
• Tool header
This header displays the name of the current Tool Table. By right-clicking on it, you can
activate the menu to manage the Tool Libraries.
Double-clicking on this header displays the Part Tool Table.
For more information on Tools, please refer to Chapter 3.

• Machining Process header
This header displays the name of the current Machining Process Table. By right-
clicking on it, you can activate the menu to manage the MP Tables.
Double-clicking on this header displays the Current Machining Process Table.
For more information on Machining Processes, please refer to Chapter 8.

• Geometries header
This header displays all SolidCAM geometries not used in the operations. You can view
the list of these geometries by clicking on the “+” icon near the Geometries header.
You can display the geometries managing menu by right-clicking on the Geometries
header. You can also open the relevant menu by right-clicking on each geometry name.
Double-clicking on a geometry name displays the selected geometry.
For more information on Geometries, please refer to Chapter 4.

• Operations header
This header shows you all the SolidCAM operations defined for the current CAM-Part.
The operations managing menu is available by right-clicking on the Operations header.
You can also open the relevant menu by right-clicking on each operation name.
Double-clicking on an operation name enables you to edit the operation parameters in
the operation dialog box.
For more information on operations, please refer to Chapter 5.
Item search in SolidCAM Manager
The SolidCAM Manager search system works similarly

to a regular Windows searching functionality. To activate
it, click anywhere in the SolidCAM Manager area and
press Ctrl+F. The Find dialog box is displayed, and you
can set the parameters for searching.
33
Look in
You may look for the required items in the whole CAM-Part or only in its operations,
coordinate systems or geometries taken separately.
Whole items only
Select this check box if you want to check the availability of whole items as opposed
to partial output.
Match case
This check box enables you to determine the case sensitivity of the search.
Direction
You may also decide whether the search results will be displayed from bottom to top
or from top to bottom of the SolidCAM Manager tree.
Find next
Click this button if you want to view the search results one by one.
Find all
Click this button if you prefer to have all of the search results to be displayed
simultaneously.
General
The whole line where the sought-for word appears

is highlighted in the SolidCAM Manager tree. When
you close the Find dialog box, these lines remain
highlighted.
34
1. SolidCAM Basics
Display of tool path for CAM-Part operations
SolidCAM enables you to display the tool path of CAM-Part operations directly on the SolidWorks
model from SolidCAM Manager. The tool path can be rotated, zoomed or panned.
Display of tool path for several operations
Each operation entry in SolidCAM Manager has a related tool path visibility check box,
which can be selected to display the tool path of the corresponding operation.
When several operations are selected in SolidCAM

Manager, clicking on the check box related to one of
the selected operations changes the tool path visibility
status for all the selected operations, and the tool path
of all these operations is displayed on the model.
When one of the tool path visibility check boxes related to selected operations is
clicked again, the tool path display and the check boxes are cleared.
35
Display of tool path for all operations
The tool path visibility check box located near the

Operations header enables you to control the tool path
visibility status for all the operations defined for the
CAM-Part.
When this check box is selected, the tool path visibility

check boxes are selected for all the operations and
SolidCAM displays the tool path for all of the
operations.
When this check box is cleared, SolidCAM clears the tool path display and the tool
path visibility check boxes for all the operations.
When a CAM-Part contains operations with different status of the tool path visibility,
the tool path visibility check box related to the Operations header has a solid black fill.
When the mixed tool path visibility check box related to the Operations header is
clicked again, it is cleared; the tool path display and all the related tool path visibility
check boxes are cleared.
36
1. SolidCAM Basics
1.4.2 Coordinate System
The Coordinate System is shown on the model. It defines the Coordinate System
origin for all the machining operations of the CAM-Part.
For more information on Coordinate Systems, see topic 2.2.
37
1.5 Getting Help
SolidCAM Online Help enables you to get online help about various options in SolidCAM. The Help
is installed in the Documentation folder after the standard installation procedure.
The Help is available via the SolidWorks Help menu. Click on the Help item in the main menu of
SolidWorks and choose the SolidCAM Help Topics, Milling items from the submenu.
SolidCAM Help is fully context-sensitive. You can get a Help topic for each SolidCAM dialog box by
pressing the F1 key. To get information about a specific dialog box area like field or button, click on
the question mark in the upper-right corner of the dialog box and then click on the field or button
you need. The Online Help is displayed and then the appropriate topic is explained.
The Machining Portfolio is also available in the Documentation folder. This document provides an
overview of various features of SolidCAM.
38
CAM-Part 2
At the stage of the CAM-Part definition, you have to specify all the
information relevant to the machining project or workpiece you want to
manufacture. The CAM-Part folder includes all machining geometries,
operation definitions and generated GCode files.
The parameters and values defined at the CAM-Part level, such as
Coordinate System, Milling levels and Tools will serve as default values
for separate machining operations. All specified parameters can be
changed in single operations.
 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part

 Managing CAM-Parts
 Defining the Coordinate System
 Defining the Stock model
 Defining the Target model
 CAM-Part Documentation
2.1 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part
After the SolidWorks model is loaded, do the following:
1. Click on the SolidCAM item in the SolidWorks

menu. The SolidCAM main menu is displayed.
2. Choose the New option from the menu to

define a new CAM-Part.
3. Choose the Milling type of new CAM-Part

from the submenu.
or
1. In the SolidWorks CommandManager, click on the SolidCAM tab.
2. Click on the arrow near the New button.
3. Choose the Milling type of new CAM-Part from the list.
or
1. Right-click on the frame of the SolidWorks

window to display the list of available
toolbars.
2. Choose the SolidCAM New toolbar from

the list.
3. Click on the Milling button on the

SolidCAM New toolbar.
The New Milling Part dialog box is displayed.
40
2. CAM-Part
When you start to program a CAM-Part, you have to decide on:

• What type of CNC-machine you are going to use (3-, 4- or 5-axis);
• Where you are going to clamp this part;
• Where your Coordinate System positions are located (on a 4- or 5-axis CNC-
machine, every clamping position is represented by the Coordinate System to
which all additional positionings are related).
2.1.1 New Milling Part dialog box

When you create a new CAM-Part, you have to enter a name for the CAM-Part and for the model
that contains the CAM-Part’s geometry.
Directory
In this field, you specify the location of the CAM-Part.

The default directory is the SolidCAM user directory
(defined in the SolidCAM Settings). You can enter the
path or use the Browse button to define the location.
The Use Model file directory option enables you to automatically create CAM-Parts in the same
folder where the original CAD model is located.
Name
In this field, you enter the name for the CAM-Part. You can give any name to identify your machining
project. By default, the name of the design model is used.
Model name
This field shows the name and the location of the SolidWorks design model that you are using
for the CAM-Part definition. The default name is that of the active SolidWorks document. With
the Browse button, you can choose any other SolidWorks document to define the CAM-Part. The
chosen document is loaded into SolidWorks.
Every time the CAM-Part is opened, SolidCAM automatically checks the

correspondence of the dates of the CAM-Part and the original SolidWorks design
model. When the date of the original SolidWorks model is later than the date of
the CAM-Part creation, this means that the SolidWorks original model has been
updated. You can then replace the SolidWorks design model on which the CAM-Part
is based with the updated SolidWorks design model.
41
After the Directory, Name and Model name fields are defined, click on the OK button to confirm
the CAM-Part creation. The CAM-Part is defined and its structure is created. The Milling Part Data
dialog box (see topic 2.1.3) is displayed.
2.1.2 The structure of the CAM-Part

Cavity.prt
The Cavity CAM-Part includes the following data:
Cavity
• The Cavity.prt file located in the SolidCAM User directory. Cavity.SLDASM
CAM.SLDPRT
• The Cavity subdirectory containing all the data generated
for the CAM-Part. DesignModel.SLDPRT
SolidCAM copies the original SolidWorks model to the Cavity subdirectory and creates
a SolidWorks assembly that has the same name as the CAM-Part (Cavity.sldasm). There are two
components in this assembly:
• DesignModel.sldprt – a copy of the SolidWorks model file.
• CAM.sldprt – a file that contains SolidCAM Coordinate Systems

and geometry data.
SolidCAM CAM-Part uses the assembly environment of SolidWorks. This

enables you to create auxiliary geometries (e.g. sketches) without making
changes in the original design model. You can also insert some additional
components into the assembly file such as stock model, CNC-machine
table, clamping and other tooling elements.
2.1.3 Milling Part Data dialog box
In this dialog box, you specify all the information relevant to the machining
project or workpiece you want to manufacture. The parameters and
values defined at the CAM-Part level will later serve as default values for
machining levels, etc. Naturally, all parameters can be changed in single
machining operations.
42
2. CAM-Part
2.2 Coordinate System
The Coordinate System position defines the

origin for all machining operations of the
CAM-Part. You can create multiple CoordSys Y-direction
positions and specify in each machining step
X-direction
which CoordSys you want to use for the
operation. The CAM-Part definition cannot
be completed if the Coordinate System is not
defined.
The Coordinate System can be defined

directly on the solid model. You can define
its origin location and axes orientation by
selecting the model elements or by choosing
the already defined SolidWorks Coordinate Coordinate System
Origin
Systems.
2.2.1 Defining the Coordinate System (CoordSys)
Click on the Define button in the in the Coordinate System area of the Milling Part
Data dialog box.
If you define the first Coordinate System in the current CAM-Part, the CoordSys
dialog box (see topic 2.2.2) is displayed. This dialog box enables you to define the
Coordinate Systems.
If the CoordSys that you define is not the first, the CoordSys Manager dialog box
(see topic 2.3) is displayed. This dialog box enables you to manage your Coordinate
Systems.
You can also define new Coordinate Systems at the later stages of operation
definition by clicking on the CoordSys button available in the Geometry
page of the operation dialog box (see topic 5.2.6).
43
2.2.2 CoordSys dialog box
This dialog box enables you to define a new 3-, 4-, and 5-axis Coordinate
System directly on the solid model. The newly created Coordinate System
automatically receives the next sequential number.
• Mac CoordSys number – this number corresponds with the

built-in controller functions (for example, G54, G55, etc. in the
Fanuc type controllers). It can be used for different clamping
positions (Machine Coordinate Systems) in different operations
on the CAM-Part.
• Position – this number defines the sequential number of

the CoordSys. For each Machine Coordinate System (Mac
CoordSys), several Positions are defined for different
positionings; each such Position is related to the Machine
CoordSys.
• In multi-sided machining on 4- and 5-axis CNC-

machines, the SolidCAM post-processor uses the
specific controller Macro language to create the
positioning relative to the Machine Coordinate
System.
• For Machine Coordinate System, you have to

define three points: the Origin, the X-direction, and
the Y-direction. For the related position (e.g. for
4-axis CNC-machine), you have to define only the
Origin and a point on the plane to rotate to; the
rotation axis is defined by the type of the 4-axis
(_4th_axes_around = X/Y in the MAC file).
SolidCAM enables you to define the Coordinate System by one of the

following methods:
Select face
When you define the Coordinate System by selecting a face, the box surrounding the model is
calculated. For this box, SolidCAM generates a number of sketch points to facilitate the CoordSys
definition. The points are located in the box corners, in the middle of each edge and in the centers
of the planes (in the intersection point of the diagonals).
44
2. CAM-Part
The face can be one of the following:
• Planar face
The Z-axis of the Coordinate System is normal to the selected face.
• Cylindrical/Conical face
The Z-axis of the Coordinate System is parallel to the axis of revolution of the
specified cylindrical/conical face.
Pick face
Selecting this check box enables you to pick a face on the model for the Coordinate
System definition. The selected model face is highlighted.
Change to opposite/Change to original
This button enables you to reverse the direction of the Z-axis of the Coordinate
System.
45
Place CoordSys origin to:
• Corner of model box
The upper plane of the model box is

parallel to the XY-plane of the defined
CoordSys. The CoordSys is located in
the corner of the model box with the
following coordinates (XMIN, YMIN, ZMAX).
CoordSys
Origin
• Center of revolution face
The origin is located at the intersection of the

rotation axis of the part and the face of the model CoordSys
box with the maximal Z-coordinate (the Z-axis is Origin
directed along the rotation axis).
Z
• Top center of model box
The CoordSys origin is placed in the center

of the upper plane of the model, and the
Z-axis of the CoordSys is normal to the
selected face.
CoordSys
Origin
• Corner box projection on the Z-level of the face
The CoordSys origin is placed in the corner

of the generated model box on the same
Z-level with the selected face, and the Z-axis
of the CoordSys is normal to the selected
face.
CoordSys
Origin
46
2. CAM-Part
Define
This option enables you to define the CoordSys origin and axes by
selecting points.
• Origin
Select the origin point on the graphic screen.

• X-direction
Select a point relative to the origin that defines the X-axis.

• Y-direction
Select a point that defines the plane (the Y-axis is 90 degrees to the X-axis; the selected
point defines the plane).
After a point has been selected, the next button is automatically activated.
If you miss the selection, you can at any time click the required button and
continue automatically to the next button.
Select Coordinate System
SolidCAM enables you to choose the Coordinate System defined in the

CAD model file as the SolidCAM Coordinate System.
47
Normal to current view
This option enables you to define the Coordinate System with the
Z-axis normal to the model view you are facing on your screen. You
may bring the model to the desired orientation by using the CAM
Views toolbar or just rotate it in an arbitrary fashion; then click on the
Capture current view CoordSys button, and the Coordinate System will
be generated relative to the model view you are using. The CoordSys
origin will lie in the origin of the SolidWorks Coordinate System, and
the Z-axis will be directed normally to the chosen view of the model.
You may change the location of the CoordSys Y-axis of the

using the placing options of the Select face Normal to current view
CoordSys
mode, and then choose the Normal to current
view mode to adjust the directions of the
axes to the current model view.
Editing the Coordinate System
After the face has been selected, you can

edit the Coordinate System location by
picking entities on the model and change the
directions of its axes.
X-axis of the
Normal to current view
Pick CoordSys
• Pick origin
This option enables you to define a new location for the

CoordSys origin. The direction of the axes is not changed.
• Pick XY origin
This option enables you to define a new location for the CoordSys origin in the XY-
plane by picking a point on the model. The Z-level of the CoordSys origin and the
directions of the axes remain the same.
• Pick X-direction
This option enables you to choose a new direction for the X-axis by picking a point
on the model.
48
2. CAM-Part
• Pick Y-direction
This option enables you to choose a new direction for the Y-axis by picking a point
on the model.
Flip
• Flip X&Y
Click on this button to rotate the Z-axis 180 degrees by

mutual replacement of the X- and Y-axes (X becomes Y,
and Y becomes X).
• Flip around X
This button rotates the CoordSys 90 degrees around the

X-axis.
• Flip around Y
This button rotates the CoordSys 90 degrees around the Y-axis.

• Flip around Z
This button rotates the defined CoordSys 90 degrees around the Z-axis.
Delta
This option enables you to move the CoordSys origin in the

X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates relative to the point in which it was
previously defined.
Rotation around axis
This option enables you to rotate the defined CoordSys

a given number of degrees around the X-, Y- and Z-axes, but
the rotation can only be defined around each axis separately.
You cannot rotate the CoordSys around more than one axis
simultaneously.
49
2.2.3 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 3-axis CNC-machine
During the CoordSys definition for a 3-axis CNC-machine, you have to define three points with the
CoordSys dialog box.
• Origin – Select the origin point (1st point) on the graphic screen.
• X-direction – Select a point (2nd point) relative to the origin that defines the X-axis.
• Y-direction – Select a point (3rd point) to finish the definition of the XY-plane.
Use the mouse to define the origin, X- and Y-direction. You do not have to click on the X-direction
or the Y-direction button in the CoordSys dialog box, they are automatically selected after you have
defined a point.
Y-direction
(third point) X-direction
(second point)
CoordSys origin
(first point)
Coordinate System definition Clamping
For the next Coordinate System, you also have to define three points.
Y-direction X-direction
(third point) (second point)
CoordSys origin
(first point)
SolidCAM automatically assigns a new Position number to each Coordinate System. You can change
the Mac CoordSys number for a new clamping (Machine Coordinate System).
50
2. CAM-Part

When you define the Machine Coordinate System (Mac CoordSys) for a 4-axis CNC-machine, you
have to define three points with the CoordSys dialog box:
defined a point.
Y-direction
(second point)
CoordSys origin
(first point)
To add a new Position, you have to define only two points:
• The point for the CoordSys origin.
• The point on the plane to rotate to. If the rotation axis is X, you have to define the
Y-direction. If the rotation axis is Y, you have to define the X-direction.
X-direction
(determined
Y-direction automatically)
(second point)
CoordSys origin
(first point)
SolidCAM automatically assigns the new Position number to each CoordSys. You can change the
Mac CoordSys number for a new clamping (Machine Coordinate System).
51
The rotation axis is automatically defined by SolidCAM according to the Axis type (see topic 2.8.1).
The Shift and Rotation around parameters are calculated automatically.

When you define the Machine Coordinate System (Mac CoordSys) for a 5-axis CNC-machine, you
have to define three points with the CoordSys dialog box:
defined a point.
X-direction
Y-direction (second point)
(third point)
CoordSys origin
(first point)
To add a new CoordSys, you have to define three points.

Y-direction
(second point)
CoordSys origin
(first point)
52
2. CAM-Part
SolidCAM automatically assigns the new Position number to each CoordSys. You can change the
Mac CoordSys number for a new clamping (Machine Coordinate System).
The rotation axis is defined automatically by SolidCAM according to the Axis type (see topic 2.8.1).
The Shift and Rotation around parameters are calculated automatically.
2.2.6 Coordinate System definition methods
Coordinate System definition using a sketch
In some cases, you cannot define the CoordSys origin position or the
direction of the axes without adding a geometry.
Then you have to create a sketch that contains two perpendicular lines;
the intersection point of the lines defines the CoordSys origin, and the
lines define the X- and Y-axis directions.
Y-direction
CoordSys
Choose the origin location at the intersection point of the lines origin
and define the axes directions. X-direction
Coordinate System definition using a stock box
SolidCAM enables you to generate the stock box surrounding the model
automatically with a defined offset (see topic 2.4.1). The top stock plane is
parallel to the XY-plane of the Machine Coordinate System.
Define the CoordSys in the stock box corner.
Sometimes the model is located in the assembly in

such a way that you need to rotate it before using
the 3D Box option in order to calculate the optimal
stock.
53
2.2.7 CoordSys Data dialog box
• Position defines the sequential number of
the Coordinate System. For each Machine
Coordinate System, several Positions can
be defined for different positionings; each
such Position is related to the Machine
Coordinate System.
• X shows the X-coordinate of the

CoordSys origin.
• Y shows the Y-coordinate of the

CoordSys origin.
• Z shows the Z-coordinate of the

CoordSys origin.
• Machine CoordSys number defines the

number of the Coordinate System in the
CNC-machine. The default value is 1.
If you use another number, the GCode
file will contain the G-function that tells
the machine to use the specified number
stored in the controller of your machine.
• The Tool start level defines the Z-level at which the tool starts.
• The Clearance level is the Z-level to which the tool rapidly travels when moving from
one operation to another (in case the tool does not change).
• The CAM-Part Upper level defines the height of the upper surface of the part to be
milled.
• The CAM-Part Lower level defines the lower surface level of the part to be milled.
Tool start
level
Rapid movements area
Part Upper
Clearance Feed movements area level
level Part Lower
level
54
2. CAM-Part
• The Tool Z-level is the height that the tool moves to before the rotation of the 4/5
axes to avoid collision between the tool and the workpiece. This level is related to the
CoordSys position and you have to check if it is not over the limit switch of the machine.
It is highly recommended to send the tool to the reference point or to a point related to
the reference point.
• The Plane box defines the default work plane for the operations using this CoordSys, as it
is output to the GCode program. In the SolidCAM CAM module, you must always work
on the XY-plane. Some CNC-machines, however, have different axes definitions and
require a GCode output with rotated XY-planes. Choose one of the following options:
• XY – the XY-plane is the work plane; the Z-axis is the depth (G17).
• YZ – the YZ-plane is the work plane; the X-axis is the depth (G18).
• ZX – the ZX-plane is the work plane; the Y-axis is the depth (G19).
This option works correctly only when your post-processor has been
customized to support this function. Please contact customer support for
further details.
• Shift is the distance from the Machine Coordinate System (Mac CoordSys) to the location
of the Position in the coordinate system and the orientation of the Mac CoordSys.
• Rotation is the angle of rotation around the main axes X, Y and Z.
• For the first Position number related to a new Mac CoordSys number, the Shift
and Rotation around parameters are always 0.
• Shift and Rotation for other Position Numbers related to the same Mac CoordSys
number are determined automatically.
• The Edit CoordSys button enables you to change the CoordSys location or orientation
of the axes with the CoordSys dialog box.
55
• Create planar surface at Part Lower level
This option enables you to generate a transparent

planar surface at the minimal Z-level of the part
so that its lower level plane is visible. This planar
surface provides you the possibility to select points
that do not lie on the model entities. It is suppressed
by default and not visible until you unsuppress it
in the FeatureManager Design tree. To unsuppress
the feature, right-click on its entry under the CAM
component in the FeatureManager Design tree and
click on the Unsuppress button.
This option is available only when the Coordinate System has been defined
by selecting a face.
2.2.8 SolidCAM Coordinate System

SolidCAM changes the model orientation by setting the model to the Machine Isometric view.
This orientation is suitable for machining on a CNC machine (with the Z-axis pointing vertically
upwards).
Y Z
Y
Z X
X
SolidWorks Coordinate System SolidCAM Coordinate System
Use the SolidCAM Views toolbar to see the SolidCAM coordinate

system. These views are related to the orientation of the selected
CoordSys position.
56
2. CAM-Part
2.3 CoordSys Manager
The CoordSys managing commands are available in the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the first
CoordSys is defined. You can display the CoordSys Manager dialog box by clicking on the Define
button in the Coordinate System area of the Milling Part Data dialog box or on the icon in the
SolidCAM Manager tree.
1. Right-click on an item in the CoordSys Manager

dialog box.
2. Choose a command from the menu.
Add CoordSys
This command enables you to add a new Coordinate System to the

current CAM-Part.
Edit CoordSys
This command enables you to change the data of an existing Coordinate System. It also enables you
to change the CoordSys position.
1. Choose the Coordinate System you want to edit.
2. The CoordSys Data dialog box is displayed showing the default Coordinate
System position values. The fields and values can be changed, if necessary.
If you change the CoordSys position, you must recalculate the

operations in which this CoordSys is used. You are also advised to
review the simulation.
Inquire CoordSys
This command enables you to view the relevant information about a particular Coordinate System
position, but you cannot edit the data.
57
Delete CoordSys
This command deletes an existing Coordinate System. You can only delete Coordinate Systems if
more than one CoordSys has been defined for the current CAM-Part. You cannot delete the first
Machine CoordSys and a CoordSys that is used for the operation (the Delete command in the menu
is disabled in these cases).
1. Select the Coordinate Systems you want to

delete. The confirmation prompt is displayed.
2. Click Yes to confirm.
When this prompt is confirmed, all the selected Coordinate Systems are deleted.
If some of the Coordinate Systems cannot be deleted,

SolidCAM displays the following message:
Rename CoordSys
This command enables you to rename the chosen

Coordinate System.
Default name
This command enables you to return the Coordinate System name to the default value.
Create/Delete Planar surface
This option enables you to create the planar surface at the Z-level of the model if you have not
selected the Create planar surface at Part lower level check box at the stage of CoordSys data
definition, or to delete the created planar surface if you have selected this check box.
CoordSys visibility
The CoordSys Manager dialog box

enables you to control the visibility
of Coordinate Systems. This feature
simplifies the work when you have a
number of coordinate systems.
In the CoordSys Manager dialog box,

clear the check boxes for the coordinate
systems in order to hide them.
58
2. CAM-Part
2.4 Stock and Target Model
Stock model is the material placed on the machine before you

start machining the CAM-Part.
The Stock model is used for:
• SolidVerify, SolidVerify for 3D and Machine simulation;
• For rest material calculation in 3D Milling operations.
The stock model is not automatically

associated with the solid model. If the model is changed and the stock is
not correct any more, you will see it in the simulation; you can then replace
the defined stock with the updated one.
Note that the SolidVerify and SolidVerify for 3D simulations do not work
without the Stock model defined.
Target model is the final shape of the CAM-Part after the machining.
The Target model is used for:

• 3D simulation;
• Rest material calculation;
• Gouge checking in the SolidVerify simulation.
During all machining operations, the remaining rest material is

removed so that the Target model can be obtained.
Facet tolerance
The Facet tolerance parameter defines the accuracy of triangulation of the stock and target models,
fixture or clamp.
59
2.4.1 Stock model
The Stock model option enables you to define the actual material that has
to be removed.
1. Click on the Stock button in the Milling Part Data

dialog box.
2. In the Stock model dialog box, choose the stock

model definition mode and click on the Define
button.
3. Select the geometry.
4. Confirm the geometry selection.
Stock definition modes
• The 2D Boundary mode enables you to define the 2D

stock geometry with the chain of geometric elements
(lines, arcs, splines, edges, etc.). Before selecting the stock
material, you have to draw the boundaries of the stock
material around the CAM-Part. When you choose this
mode and click on the Define button, the Geometry Edit
dialog box is displayed.
• The 3D Model mode enables you to define the stock

model via 3D model selection and is useful for casting
machining. When you choose this mode and click on the
Define button, the 3D Geometry dialog box is displayed.
• The Box (Auto) mode enables SolidCAM to automatically determine the box
surrounding the model. When you choose this mode and click on the Define button, the
3D Box dialog box is displayed.
60
2. CAM-Part
3D Box dialog box
This dialog box is used to select a 3D model to create a 3D box

around the model.
• The Name option enables you to define the name for

the stock model. The default geometry name is assigned
automatically and can be edited if necessary.
• The Type option enables you to choose the type of model
elements that will be selected: Solids (solid models),
Surfaces, or Both.
• The Expand box at option enables you to define how

much access stock material you have in each direction of
the stock material.
• The CAD selection button enables you to pick the model
with the Host CAD tools.
• The Add box to CAD model button enables you to add
the stock box to the CAD model.
• The STL file mode enables you to define the stock model based
on a STL file that exists in your system. When you choose this
mode and click on the Define button, the Choose STL dialog box
is displayed. This dialog box enables you to choose the STL file
for the stock definition.
Choose STL dialog box
• The Name option enables you to define the name of

the STL stock geometry. The default geometry name is
assigned automatically and can be edited if necessary.
• The STL File section shows the path to the STL file
chosen for the stock geometry definition.
• The Browse button enables you to display the browser dialog box from which
you will choose the required STL file.
• The Show button enables you to display the defined stock in the Rest material
window of SolidCAM (see topic 2.4.3).
• The Show on model button enables you to display the defined stock in the
SolidCAM graphic area applied to the solid model (see topic 2.4.3).
61
2.4.2 Target model
The Target model option enables you to define the final part after machining.
1. Click on the Target button in the Milling Part Data dialog

box.
2. In the Target model dialog box, click on the Define 3D

Model button to start the geometry selection.
3. Select the geometry with the 3D Geometry dialog box (see

topic 4.3.1).
4. Confirm the Target model definition with the button.
In future operations, you can use the Target model as a geometry.
2.4.3 Common controls for Stock model and Target model dialog boxes
Name
In this field, you can see the stock or target model name and choose the model from the previously
defined 3D geometries.
Show
Click on this button to show the Stock or Target model in the Rest material window of SolidCAM.
Target model Stock model
To control the quality of the Stock and Target models visualization, you
can change the Facet tolerance in the Milling Part Data dialog box. The
recommended value is 0.01 mm. A smaller tolerance will improve the quality
and reduce the visualization speed.
62
2. CAM-Part
Show on model
Click on this button to see the selected Target model in the Host CAD window.
Target model Stock model
Self-intersections
The Check and fix button in the Self-intersections section enables you to check the model for self-
intersections and fix them if they are found.
When self-intersections are detected, the following message is displayed:
Confirm it with the Yes button to fix the self-intersections.
Note that the process of self-intersection fixing can take a long time to complete, depending on the
complexity of the model.
For more information on self-intersections, see topic 10.5.6.
2.4.4 Associativity of Stock and Target models

SolidCAM enables you to keep the associativity between Stock/Target model and the SolidWorks
model. When the SolidWorks model is updated, SolidCAM enables you to check the compliance of the
Stock and Target model geometry to the updated SolidWorks model. If the SolidCAM geometry is not
synchronized with the SolidWorks model, you can synchronize it.
The Check synchronization command enables you to check the

synchronization status of the Stock/Target model geometry
relative to the SolidWorks model.
63
If SolidCAM determines a misfit between the SolidWorks model and the Stock/Target model
geometry, this geometry is marked with the synchronization mark .
If the Stock/Target model geometry is not synchronized with the SolidWorks model, the
Synchronize command enables you to update the Stock/Target model geometry according to the
updated SolidWorks model.
64
2. CAM-Part
2.5 Tool Options
The Tool options enable you to define additional data about the tools for your CAM-Part. You can
enter the start and end position of your tool as well as the coordinates for tool changes on your
CNC-machine. After you click on the button, you can change the parameters in the Tool Options
dialog box.
The default values you receive in this dialog box are input from the MAC file of the selected post-
processor.
A sample from the MAC file is shown below. The first three values of each line are metric coordinates
and the last three values are in inches.
;Positioning
dflt_start = 0.0000 200.0000 100.0000, 0.0000 7.8740 3.9370
dflt_end = 0.0000 200.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 7.8740 0.0000
set_z_chng = Y
dflt_tool_chng = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
In the Tool Options dialog box, you can edit the values for the current
CAM-Part.
Start point
This field determines the position of the first tool in the

beginning of the milling.
End point
This field determines the position of the last tool in the end
of the milling.
• In most of the cases, the value in this dialog

box will only affect the simulation. To affect
the generated NC-program, the post-processor
must use these values.
• Normally, the new CNC-controllers do not

need the start and end position. In the post-
processor, you use the machine command to
move to the machine reference point.
65
Tool change XY
This field defines the XY-coordinates of the tool change position. There are two
options:
• Default as in MAC file
The XY-coordinates of the tool change position are defined by the end point of
the operation that was executed before the tool change.
• Define
The XY-coordinates of the tool change position are defined by the user.
Tool change Z
This field defines the Z-coordinate of the tool change position. There are two options:
• Default as in MAC file
The Z-level where tool changes are performed is automatically read from the Tool
start plane specified in the CoordSys Data dialog box (default input from the MAC
file).
• Define
The Z-coordinate of the tool change position is defined by the user.
Feed type
Defines the default type of feed used for the tool of this CAM-Part. There are two
options:
• Mm/Min – Millimeters per Minute;
• Mm/Rev – Millimeters per Revolution.
66
2. CAM-Part
2.6 Mac Options
If the MAC file of your post-processor has extra fields

(parameters) defined, they can be accessed through
this field. In the Machine Options List dialog box, you
can enter unique information related to the machine
controller you have selected.
• In case of Numeric or Integer

field type, the Numeric/Integer
Value dialog box is displayed
and you are prompted to enter
a value.
• In case of Logical field type, the Logical Value dialog box is displayed and
you are prompted to choose between Yes and No.
Refer to the GPPTool manual for additional information.
2.7 Work Material
This option enables you to define the work material. Choose the work material from the list.
The Work material field enables you to get Speed/Feed Defaults (see topic 3.11) based on the
work and tool materials that you are using. If you choose the None option, the system will offer
you the internal standard value spin of 1000 rpm and the default feed for X, Y movement of
100 mm/min.
At the stage of tool definition, you can define cutting conditions for various work materials (see
topic 3.11).
67
2.8 CNC-Controller and Axis Type
Select the CNC-machine controller. Click on the arrow next to the

controller field to display the list of post-processors installed on your
system.
2.8.1 Axis type
This field displays the CNC-controller type. This field cannot be edited;
it is defined in the post-processor file.
The axis type can be one of the following:

• 3 axis;
• 4_axis_around_X or 4_axis_around_Y;
• 5 axis.
The axis type defines the Coordinate System definition method:
3 axis
In this type of machine, every side

requires a new clamping (new Machine
CoordSys). For each Mac CoordSys, you
have to define the origin position, the
X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction.
4 axis
• 4_axis_around_X
This type is used for vertical machines with the 4th axis on the table along the X-axis.
When defining the Machine CoordSys, you have to

define the origin position, the X-axis direction and the
Y-axis direction. For all additional positionings, based on
this clamping, you have to define the origin position and
the Y-axis direction only (the angle); the X-axis direction
is determined automatically by the X-axis direction of
the Machine CoordSys.
68
2. CAM-Part
• 4_axis_around_Y
This type is used for horizontal machines with the 4th

axis along the Y-axis.
When defining the Machine CoordSys, you have to

define the origin position, the X-axis direction and the
Y-axis direction. For all additional positionings, based on
this clamping, you have to define the origin position and
the X-axis direction only (the angle); the Y-axis direction
is determined automatically by the Y-axis direction of the
Machine CoordSys.
5 axis
This type is used for 5-axis CNC-machines. For the Machine CoordSys,
you have to define the origin position, the X-axis direction and the
Y-axis direction. All additional positioning is related to this Machine
CoordSys.
Take care of the machine limitations (angles

or undercuts). A message on the limit can be
generated only during the GCode generation.
In the definition process, it is not necessary to consider the kinematics

of the CNC-machine. This is done in the last step when you generate the
NC-program.
• A CAM-Part created for a CNC-controller of 3-axis type cannot be

converted to 4- or 5-axis type.
• A CAM-Part created for the CNC-controller of 4-axis type can be

converted to 3-axis type.
• A CAM-Part created for the CNC-controller of 5-axis type can be

converted to 3-axis type.
69
2.9 Default GCode numbers
The fields in this area are displayed according to a parameter defined in the MAC file.
; Program numbers
get_prog_num = N or Y
get_proc_num = N or Y
If N – the field is not displayed.
If Y – the field is displayed.
get_prog_num = Y
get_proc_num = N
Program number
This field enables you to define the number of the main program that will be generated in the
output NC-program.
This field has ranges that are controlled from the MAC file parameters.
prog_num_min = 1
prog_num_max = 9999
prog_num_dflt = 5000
70
2. CAM-Part
In this case, the default number is 5000. You can change this value and type a number between 1
and 9999. Typing any number beyond this range is followed with the message:
Subroutine number
In this field, you can define the number of the first subroutine in the generated output
NC-program.
This field has ranges that are controlled from the MAC file parameters.
proc_num_min = 1000
proc_num_max = 5000
proc_num_dflt = 1000
In this case, the default number is 1000. You can change this value and type a number between
1000 and 5000. Typing any number beyond this range is followed with the same message as above.
In some machines (for example, Fanuc), the main program number and subroutine number cannot
be the same. SolidCAM does not warn you about this problem. In order to prevent this situation,
you can set the main program range to 1 – 1000 and the subroutines range to 1001 to 9999 in the
MAC file.
71
2.10 Part Settings
SolidCAM enables you to define a number of

parameters specific for the current CAM-Part
using the Part Settings dialog box.
This dialog box is available by clicking on the

Settings button in the Milling Part Data dialog box
or by double-clicking on the Part settings icon
under the CAM-Part header in SolidCAM Manager.
72
2. CAM-Part
Resetting the settings
SolidCAM enables you to reset the customized settings to their default values.
• The Reset Page button enables you to reset all the parameters of the current settings
page to their default values. When you click on this button, a confirmation message is
displayed:
When this message is confirmed, SolidCAM resets all the settings of the current page.
• The Reset All button enables you to reset all the parameters of the SolidCAM settings
to their default values. A confirmation message is displayed:
When this message is confirmed, SolidCAM resets all the settings to their default values.
During reset, the CAM-Part settings parameters, that are based on parameters in SolidCAM Settings,
inherit new values from the SolidCAM Settings. The CAM-Part Settings parameters, that are based
on hard-coded values, are reset to their default hard-coded values.
73
2.10.1 Units
The Units page shows the measurement units used

in the current CAM-Part.
74
2. CAM-Part
2.10.2 Synchronization
This page enables you to define the synchronization settings for the current CAM-Part.
Synchronization of CAM geometry with design model
• Check synchronization always
The synchronization check is

performed automatically each time
you click on the SolidCAM Manager
tree.
Ask before synchronization check
When this check box is

selected, after every change
in the part or in the assembly
and rebuild, SolidCAM will
prompt you before checking
the synchronization of the
geometries with the model or
sketches.
When this check box is not selected, the synchronization checking will be
performed without any message or question.
Synchronize automatically
This option enables you to perform the synchronization of geometries

automatically.
When this check box is selected, the synchronization check is performed

and then all the unsynchronized operations and geometries are automatically
synchronized. When the synchronization fails for certain operations or
geometries, SolidCAM marks the operations/geometries with an exclamation
mark and deletes the operation tool path; such operations are marked with
asterisk.
This option is available only when the Check synchronization always

check box is selected.
75
Calculate operations after the synchronization
This option enables you to perform the calculation of the synchronized

operations automatically. When this check box is selected, SolidCAM
automatically calculates all the synchronized operations. The operations marked
with the exclamation mark are not calculated.
This option is available only when the Automatically synchronize

geometries check box is selected.
• Check synchronization on user demand
In this case, SolidCAM will not check the

synchronization automatically. The Check
Synchronization item in the operation and
geometry menus is enabled, and you can
choose it to start the synchronization.
Synchronization of design model with original

model
Every time the CAM-Part is opened, SolidCAM

automatically checks the correspondence of the dates of
the CAM-Part and the original SolidWorks design model.
When the date of the original SolidWorks model is later
than the date of the CAM-Part creation, this means that
the SolidWorks original model has been updated. You
can then replace the SolidWorks design model on which
the CAM-Part is based with the updated SolidWorks
design model.
The Ask user to find original model option defines the sequence of SolidCAM operations in case
the original model is not found in the location specified in the CAM-Part. This option enables you
to use the browser window to look for the original model.
76
2. CAM-Part
Synchronization when design model configuration changes
This section provides you with the following options:
• Keep the geometry associative with the parent configuration
This option enables you to keep the link between the geometry and the parent
configuration. SolidCAM always keeps the geometry linked to the parent configuration
(the configuration used for the geometry definition). When you switch between the
model configurations, the geometry is not affected; synchronization is required only if
the parent configuration is changed.
Geometry Geometry
Configuration #1 Configuration #2
• Associate the geometry with the current configuration
This option enables you to establish the link between the geometry and the current
configuration and perform the synchronization according to the current configuration.
Geometry
Geometry
Configuration #1 Configuration #2
After such synchronization, the geometry is linked to the current configuration until
you switch to another one.
77
2.10.3 Interoperational tool movements
This page contains options that enable you to

control the interoperational movements (see topic
5.2.8).
For each new CAM-Part, these settings are copied

from the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.10) and
can be adjusted according to your preferences.
SolidCAM enables you to change

the settings even when a CAM-Part
is opened.
Part Clearance level
All interoperational movements are performed through the Part Clearance level. This is the default
option.
When you switch to the Part Clearance level mode, SolidCAM disables the Start level field in all
operations. All SolidCAM operations (except for Sim. 5 Axis operations) have to be recalculated.
After the recalculation, all interoperational movements are implemented through the Part Clearance
levels of the appropriate Coordinate Systems.
Operation Start level
When two neighboring operations use the same Coordinate System, Tool and Tool offset, the
interoperational movement between them is performed through the Operation Start level of the
second operation.
When you switch to the Operation Start level mode, SolidCAM enables the Start level fields in all
operations and defines the Start levels equal to the Part Clearance level of the related Coordinate
Systems. All interoperational movements will be implemented through the appropriate Start levels.
78
2. CAM-Part
2.10.4 Update Stock calculation

This page contains three tabs with Updated Stock
model settings for the SolidVerify simulation (see
topic 10.5), Rest Material calculation (see topic 10.7)
and SolidVerify for 3D simulation (see topic 10.6).
SolidVerify tab
This tab enables you to define the Updated Stock

parameters and options relevant for the SolidVerify
simulation.
Update stock accuracy
This section enables you to define

the USM accuracy parameters for the
SolidVerify simulation.
• Tool facet tolerance
This option controls the precision of the tool for the SolidVerify simulation.
• Tool facet type
In addition to changing the tolerance used for faceting, the application controls
the manner in which the faceted tool representation approximates the tool
by forcing the representation to be bigger or smaller than the actual tool. For
example, if you want to know whether the tool gouged the target part, it would
probably be preferable to have a tool representation that is guaranteed to lie
outside the bounds of the actual tool.
Internal. The tool representation lies within the actual tool. The vertices
of the tool representation will lie on the surface of the actual tool and the
facets will lie within the actual tool.
External. The actual tool lies within the tool representation. The vertices
will lie at distances up to the faceting tolerance from the surface of the
actual tool.
Mixed. This is a combination of the Internal and External modes. The

vertices lie outside the actual tool but parts of the facets may lie inside
it. This mode is the default and should be used unless there is a specific
reason for using one of the other modes as it generates fewer facets and
will therefore be faster.
79
5 Axis
The Linear interpolation option enables you to perform the linear interpolation of
5-axis tool movement. The Max. interpolation angle value defines the angular tolerance
for the interpolation.
Update stock model method

This section enables you to choose the method of Stock model updating.
• Automatic
Save updated stock model for every specified number of operations: SolidCAM
automatically calculates and saves the Updated Stock model. The specified
number enables you to define the quantity of intermediate USM files. For
example:
• if the specified number is 1, SolidCAM automatically saves intermediate
USM files for each operation;
• if the specified number is 2, SolidCAM automatically saves intermediate
USM files for all even operations (2nd, 4th, 6th, etc.);
• if the specified number is 0, SolidCAM does not save intermediate USM
files.
Save updated stock model for operations with a long tool path only: SolidCAM
automatically estimates the time required for simulation of operations and saves
the updated stock for those operations whose tool path is considered too long.
• Manual
SolidCAM enables you to manually save the updated stock model for a specific
operation during the SolidVerify simulation. The simulation of the next
operations can be performed on the updated stock model. Further 3D Milling
operations can also use the saved USM for the cutting in Rest material areas.
Automatically remove noise from input data

During the faceting of Stock and Target models, the coordinates of facets generated
by SolidCAM are often calculated as numbers of the float type with many digits after
the point. These numbers cause problems during the SolidVerify simulation, such as
self-intersections and gaps in model. The Automatically remove noise from input data
check box enables you to use a smart rounding algorithm that removes the noise in
facet coordinates so that the model is displayed properly.
Note that the process of removing the noise may take a long time to
complete.
80
2. CAM-Part
Rest Material calculation tab
This tab enables you to define the Updated Stock parameters and options used for the Rest
material calculation in 3D Milling operations.
Update stock accuracy
This section enables you to define the

USM accuracy parameters for the Rest
material calculation.
5 Axis
The Linear interpolation option enables

you to perform the linear interpolation
of 5-axis tool movement. The
Max. interpolation angle value
defines the angular tolerance for the
interpolation.
Current Stock model method
This section displays the method of Stock model updating used for the Rest Material
calculation. The setting of this section can be changed in the SolidVerify tab.
SolidVerify for 3D tab
This tab enables you to define the Updated Stock

parameters and options relevant for the SolidVerify
for 3D simulation.
The Updated Stock calculation parameters defined

for this type of simulation are similar to those
defined for SolidVerify. Since in this simulation
mode analytical surfaces are used instead of facet
models used for SolidVerify, the Updated Stock
model accuracy section is not relevant.
81
2.10.5 Automatic CAM-Part definition
SolidCAM provides you with a number of features

aimed to automate the process of the CAM-Part
definition. These features enable you to avoid a
number of routine steps required to be performed
during the CAM-Part definition and perform
them automatically.
This page contains a number of settings related to

the Automatic CAM-Part definition. For each new
CAM-Part, these settings are copied from the
SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.12) and can be
adjusted according to your preferences.
Automatic Stock model definition
The Definition of Stock (as 3D box) option enables you to automatically define the 3D box stock
model during the CAM-Part definition. The stock model is based on all solid bodies and/or surfaces
of the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.
• Define Stock by. This option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies
and/or surfaces) from the DesignModel model to use.
• Expand box at. This option gives you complete control over how much access stock
material you have in each direction of the stock material.
The Add box to CAD model option enables you to add the stock model box to the CAD model.
Automatic Target model definition
The Definition of Target check box enables you to automatically define the target model during
the CAM-Part definition. The target model is based on all the solid bodies and/or surfaces of the
DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.
The Define Target by option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies and/or
surfaces) from the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.
Definition of Coordinate System
When the Single CoordSys check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to shorten the process
of CoordSys definition by skipping the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the first CoordSys
definition. This option is useful when defining CAM-Parts with only one Coordinate System.
82
2. CAM-Part
When the Single CoordSys check box is cleared, SolidCAM displays the CoordSys Manager dialog
box after the first CoordSys definition. The CoordSys Manager enables you to define an additional
Coordinate System. This option is useful when defining CAM-Parts with several Coordinate
Systems.
2.10.6 Machining Process
On MP insertion (for milling only)
Select the Perform auto calculation check box

in case you want the operations to be calculated
automatically after the Machining Process is
inserted into the CAM-Part.
If you select the Ask before calculation check

box, the message that enables you to confirm
the calculation is displayed. If this check box is
cleared, the calculation starts without prior notice.
Operation name in SolidCAM Manager
The setting of this field defines how the operation names

appear in SolidCAM Manager when a Machining Process Table
is loaded and a Machining Process is added to the CAM-Part.
When the Show group name check box is selected, the operation
names are preceded with the names of the operation groups and
default sets defined in Machining Process Table Manager.
Prismatic part_20-6_finish_wall
Operation Default set Operation
group name name name
When this check box is not selected, only the operation names appear
in the SolidCAM Manager tree.
83
2.10.7 Tool path simulation
Default simulation option
This section enables you to define the default

simulation mode.
• Use Host CAD simulation as default

When this option is chosen, the
Host CAD simulation mode is used
as default for each new simulation
session.
• Remember last simulation option

When this option is chosen,
simulation starts in the last used
mode.
Default External simulation option
This section enables you to define the default mode of External simulation (see topic 10.10).
• Use 2D/Turning simulation as default

When this option is chosen, the 2D simulation mode is used as default for each new
External simulation session.

When this option is chosen, External simulation starts in the last used mode.
Auto-build Target and Stock model for external simulation
When this check box is selected, building of faceted Stock and Target models is performed
automatically for further use in External simulation. This option is useful since in External
simulation there is no CAD system in which faceting can be performed, therefore selecting this
check box enables you to prepare the Stock and Target in advance.
Note that the process of faceted Stock and Target generation can be time-
consuming.
84
2. CAM-Part
2.10.8 GCode generation
This page enables you to define the parameters of the GCode generation.
The Save GCode files box offers three options

to define the parameters related to saving of
GCode files:
In the CAM-Part directory
SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the

CAM-Part directory. The path to this directory is
displayed in the read-only field. This option is
used by default.
According to the MAC file
SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files

according to the parameters defined in the MAC
file. The path to the directory that appears in the
MAC file is displayed in the read-only field.
In the GCode directory
SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the specified GCode folder location. When the
GCode generation is started, SolidCAM creates a new folder with the CAM-Part name in the
specified GCode directory and saves the GCode files there. If this folder already exists, SolidCAM
uses it for the GCode output.
This group box enables you to define the path for the GCode directory. You can enter the path or
click on the Browse button and choose the destination folder using the Browse For Folder dialog
box.
If you have entered the path to a non-existing folder, the following message
is displayed after the confirmation of the Part Settings dialog box:
85
The Create button enables you to create the folder that will be used for
GCode directory in the specified location. The Browse button displays the
browser dialog box that enables you to choose another location that will be
used for the GCode directory.
If the new folder cannot be created, the following message is displayed:
If the chosen folder has the read-only attribute, the following message
is displayed after the confirmation of the Browse dialog box or the Part
Settings dialog box:
By default, the GCode directory location is not defined. You have to specify it when you choose the
In the GCode directory option for the first time.
Create subfolders for split GCode files
When split marks are detected in SolidCAM Manager during the GCode generation for
the entire CAM-Part, SolidCAM creates a number of GCode segment files. Each such
GCode segment file is created for one or several operations enclosed by split marks.
These files are named with the CAM-Part name followed by the “-” sign and the order
number of a split segment.
Split marks are ignored in case of GCode generation for several operations.
With the In the GCode directory option, SolidCAM creates separate CAM-Part GCode
folders in the specified folder location.
When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box is
selected, SolidCAM creates a separate folder for each GCode
segment file and saves the GCode segments files there. The
folder is created in the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the
specified GCode folder location. The name of the folder is the
same as the GCode segment file name.
86
2. CAM-Part
When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box
is not selected, SolidCAM generates all the GCode segment
files directly into the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the
specified GCode folder location.
By default, the Create subfolders for split GCode files option

is not selected.
Create separate folders for each CAM-Part
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM creates a folder for each CAM-Part and
saves the GCode file there. Otherwise, the GCode files for all CAM-Parts are generated
into the GCode directory.
Additional control of GCode
When the Customize GCode file name check box is

selected, you can alter the GCode file name and location.
When you click one of the GCode generation commands,
the Windows-style Save GCode browser is displayed with
the default CAM-Part name and location that might be
edited.
All the GCode files previously

generated for the current CAM-
Part remain in the specified folder.
When this check box is not selected, the GCode is generated and automatically saved in the defined
location.
87
GCode generation for the entire CAM-Part
The Erase all previous GCode files check box

enables you to choose whether the old GCode
files generated for this CAM-Part remain or are
removed when a new one is generated.
This check box is not available

if the Create a separate folder
for each CAM-Part check box
is not selected and when the
Customize GCode file name
GCode generation for separate operations
The Erase all previous GCode files check box

enables you to choose whether the old GCode
files generated for separate operations remain
or are removed when a new one is generated.
This check box is not available

if the Create a separate folder
for each CAM-Part check box
is not selected and when the
Customize GCode file name
88
2. CAM-Part
2.10.9 Template defaults
This page enables you define the default location

of the operation templates and to specify the
default templates used for each new operation of
the loaded CAM-Part.
When a new CAM-Part is being

created and defined, the Part
settings for Template defaults
are copied from the SolidCAM
Settings.
SolidCAM Template Directory
This section enables you to define the default location for SolidCAM templates. You can define the
path by entering it in the box or by clicking on the Browse button and choosing the location. In case
the chosen folder does not exist, the error message is displayed.
• The Create button enables you to create the folder

with the specified location and set it as the SolidCAM
Template directory.
• The Browse button displays the browser dialog box

that enables you to choose another location for the
SolidCAM Templates directory.
The default Templates directory location is ..\Tables\Metric\Templates for Metric units and
..\Tables\Inch\Templates for Inch
units.
Operation default templates
This section enables you to assign a default template to each operation type. It contains the
following tabs:
• The 2.5D Milling tab lists the templates of 2.5D Milling operations.
• The 3D Milling tab lists the templates of 3D Milling operations.
• The HSM and HSS tabs list the templates of HSM and HSS operations.
• The Sim. 4 Axis and Sim. 5 Axis tabs list the templates of Sim. 4 Axis and Sim. 5 Axis
operations.
89
Each tab contains a table that enables you to define
the default templates for each operation type.
When the default template use is activated for a
specific operation (the check box in the operation
type line is selected), the Template column offers
you the list of available templates appropriate for
this type of operation.
When the template use is activated for an operation

type, each new operation of this type will be loaded
with the data of the specified template.
Templates activation/deactivation
When you clear the check box in an operation type

row to deactivate the use of templates, the list in
the Template column is unavailable.
When you select the check box to activate template use for an operation type, the search is
performed in the SolidCAM Template Directory for suitable templates of this type. The names of
the found templates appear in the list, and the first of them is being chosen automatically. If no
suitable templates are found, SolidCAM deactivates the use of templates for this operation.
Changing the SolidCAM Template Directory
When you change the path to the SolidCAM Template Directory, SolidCAM performs a search for
suitable templates for all the operations with the activated default template use. When a template for
some operation type is not found, SolidCAM deactivates the default template use for this operation
type. Found templates are added into the related list. The first found template name is displayed.
The search for templates is not performed for the operation types for which
the use of templates is deactivated.
Creating sets of templates (working style)
Consider a folder containing a set of templates. This set contains only one template for each operation
type, therefore, all operation types have assigned templates. The set of templates is customized
for a specific application (e.g. Mold machining). Consider an additional folder containing a set of
templates for another application.
By switching between these folders for SolidCAM Template Directory, SolidCAM switches templates
for all operation types. This enables you to choose a set of templates for a specific application
quickly and easily.
90
2. CAM-Part
2.10.10 Tool coolant
This page enables you define the tool coolant

options that will be applicable to each new tool
added for use in the current CAM-Part.
When a check box is selected, the related coolant

option is used.
The coolant options available for use on the

current CNC-machine, according to the MAC-file
settings, are marked with asterisks (*).
2.10.11 Gouge check
This page enables you to control the gouge

checking parameters at the CAM-Part level.
The Check gouges on calculation check box

enables you to define the default state of the
corresponding edit box in the operation dialog
box (see topic 5.2.12). This state is inherited by
each new 2.5D Milling operation.
91
2.11 Compressed CAM-Part
SolidCAM provides you with the Compressed CAM-Part feature.

SolidCAM
This feature enables SolidCAM to save all the CAM-Part data in
one file compressed using the ZIP technology.
SolidCAM saves all the CAM-Part data in ZIP archive file. Extracted
During the SolidCAM session, this file is extracted in the specific CAM-Part
temporary location and SolidCAM works with the extracted
Open Close
CAM-Part data. When the CAM-Part is closed, the content of the
ZIP file has to be replaced with the updated CAM-Part data. When Compressed
the update process is finished, SolidCAM erases the extracted CAM-Part
CAM-Part from the temporary location.
• SolidCAM supports simultaneous work with both file formats: compressed

CAM-Part and non-compressed CAM-Part.
• Each newly created CAM-Part can be created either in the compressed

mode or in the non-compressed mode, depending on SolidCAM Settings
(see topic 12.6).
• Each CAM-Part can be converted from open to compressed mode

depending on the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.6).
2.11.1 Compressed CAM-Part file format
The SolidCAM Compressed CAM-Part format is ZIP SolidCAM Compressed CAM-Part

(compatible with WinZIP application). This file has
the *.prz extension and contains all CAM-Part data. SolidCAM CAM-Part
SolidCAM CAM-Part folder
2.11.2 Creating a new compressed CAM-Part
When you confirm the CAM-Part creation in the New

Milling Part dialog box, SolidCAM creates the empty
compressed CAM-Part file in the location specified
in the Directory field and with the name specified
in the <Name> field. SolidCAM also creates the
<Name>.prt file and the <NAME> folder in the
SolidCAM Temporary folder.
92
2. CAM-Part
The SolidCAM Temporary folder is automatically created by SolidCAM. By default, this folder has
the following path: C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local Setting\SolidCAM Temporary
files. You can choose your own location for the SolidCAM Temporary folder via SolidCAM Settings
(see topic 12.6).
For example, the structure of the Shaft CAM-Part is the following:

C:\Program Files\SolidCAM2010\User
Shaft.prz
C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Local Settings\SolidCAM Temporary files

Shaft.prt
Shaft
If the compressed CAM-Part already exists in the location defined in the

Directory box; you cannot define a new CAM-Part with the same name.
SolidCAM offers you to choose an alternative name or location.
After the CAM-Part definition, SolidCAM works with the CAM-Part data located in the SolidCAM
Temporary folder. When the CAM-Part is being closed, SolidCAM updates the compressed
CAM-Part with the CAM-Part data. After the update, the non-compressed copy is removed from
the SolidCAM Temporary folder.
2.11.3 Converting CAM-Parts to Compressed mode
SolidCAM enables you to work with both types of CAM-Parts: compressed and non-compressed.
Each non-compressed CAM-Part can be converted to the compressed mode in the opening process
(according to the SolidCAM Settings). During this operation, SolidCAM compresses all CAM-
Part data to the compressed CAM-Part. After these operations, SolidCAM removes the original
CAM-Part.
2.11.4 Opening/Closing Compressed CAM-Parts
When opening a compressed CAM-Part, SolidCAM extracts all its content into the SolidCAM
Temporary folder and loads the non-compressed CAM-Part.
When closing a CAM-Part, SolidCAM updates the corresponding compressed CAM-Part with the
data from the SolidCAM Temporary folder. After the update, the non-compressed data is removed
from the SolidCAM Temporary folder.
The smart algorithm of opening compressed CAM-Parts enables SolidCAM to prevent data loss in
case the CAM-Part session was not completed correctly.
93
If the CAM-Part session was not completed correctly and the Compressed CAM-Part was not
updated successfully, the non-compressed data is not removed from the SolidCAM Temporary
folder. In this case, SolidCAM finds the corresponding non-compressed data in the next Compressed
CAM-Part and displays the following dialog box.
• Continue with compressed CAM-Part version
The non-compressed data in the SolidCAM Temporary folder is updated with the
content of the compressed CAM-Part.
• Continue with SolidCAM Temporary folder version
The compressed CAM-Part is updated with the non-compressed data from the
SolidCAM Temporary folder.
The Exit button enables you to cancel the operation and solve the problem
manually.
94
2. CAM-Part
2.12 Managing CAM-Parts
SolidCAM menus and toolbars enable you to manage existing CAM-Parts and create new ones.
2.12.1 SolidCAM menu
The SolidCAM menu contains the following commands:
New
This command creates a new CAM-Part. According to SolidCAM

Settings (see topic 12.6), the CAM-Part can be created either in the
compressed mode or in the non-compressed mode.
Open
This command loads a CAM-Part (compressed and non-compressed)

that has been previously saved. According to SolidCAM Settings (see
topic 12.6), the non-compressed CAM-Parts can be converted to the
compressed mode. When you choose this option, the CAM-Parts
browser is displayed.
1. Select the CAM-Part you

want to load.
2. Double-click on the
CAM-Part or select it
and click on the Open
button.
The default type for the Files of Type filter is defined in SolidCAM Settings.
If a CAM-Part was created with the previous SolidCAM version, the backup can be performed
during the CAM-Part opening, if necessary. The backup is created as a copy of the original file in
the Backup of <CAM-Part name> folder.
You can also open CAM-Parts by double-clicking on the *.prt files in the
Windows Explorer environment.
95
Return to the latest used directory
When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM uses the directory defined in SolidCAM Settings as
the default location when the browser dialog box is displayed.
When this check box is selected, each time you open a CAM-Part using the Open command in the
SolidCAM menu, the browser dialog box is displayed with the last location chosen in the browser.
Manage Templates
This command enables you to manage your

operation and process templates using the
Template Manager dialog box.
For more information on operation templates and

process templates, see topic 5.2.2.
Calculate CAM-Parts
This command enables you to calculate tool

paths of all CAM-Parts (compressed and non-
compressed) in the specified folder. The Calculate
Parts dialog box is displayed.
1. Click on the Add Directory button.
2. Choose the folder where the CAM-Part is situated via the standard Windows
browser.
3. Click on the Calculate button to start the operation.
The compressed CAM-Part is extracted into the SolidCAM Temporary folder. The resulting
non-compressed CAM-Part is opened by SolidCAM and calculated. The compressed CAM-Part
is then updated and the non-compressed CAM-Part is removed from the SolidCAM Temporary
folder.
96
2. CAM-Part
Copy
This command creates an identical copy of

a CAM-Part in another folder or drive for backup
purposes or for making modifications without
changing the original. The Copy Parts dialog box
is displayed.
1. Choose the drive from

which you want to copy
the original CAM-Part.
2. Choose the CAM-Parts

you want to copy from the
CAM-Parts list.
3. Transfer the list of the CAM-Parts you want to copy to the middle field by
clicking on the Left to Right arrow.
4. Choose the drive and the directory you want to copy to.
5. Click on the Copy button.
This feature is unavailable for compressed files; they can be copied

using standard Windows tools.
Delete
This command enables you to delete a CAM-

Part (compressed and non-compressed). The
Part to Delete dialog box is displayed.
The Files of type filter enables you to display

either compressed or non-compressed CAM-
Parts. The default filter value depends on
SolidCAM Settings.
1. Select the CAM-Part you want to delete. Use the Ctrl key to select several
CAM-Parts together.
2. Click on the Delete button.
97
3. The confirmation dialog box is displayed:
4. Choose Yes to All to delete all selected CAM-Parts.
Tool Library
This command displays the menu that enables you to manage the Tool libraries (see topic 3.2).
SolidCAM Settings
This command displays the SolidCAM Settings dialog box (see topic 12.1).
Technology Database
This command displays the Technology Database dialog box (see topic 9.10).
Recent CAM-Parts
This option displays a list of the last nine CAM-Parts you worked with in SolidCAM. You can open
the file by clicking on its name.
Hardware Key Info
This command displays the Hardware Key Info dialog box.
98
2. CAM-Part
2.12.2 CAM-Part menu
The right-click menu available on the CAM-Part header of the SolidCAM

Manager tree contains the following commands:
CAM-Part Definition
This option enables you to view and edit the values, options and
parameters of the current CAM-Part. The Milling Part Data dialog box
is displayed.
CAM-Part Properties
This option displays the Milling part properties dialog box. This dialog
box provides you with information such as name and location of the
CAM-Part and of the model used in the CAM-Part.
Change Model Reference
SolidCAM enables you to change the reference to original SolidWorks model. This operation
enables you to substitute the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly with some
SolidWorks model.
1. Choose the Change Model Reference command

in the menu. The Change Model Reference
99
2. Enter the path to the model in the Model name edit box or choose the model
with the Browse button. This button displays the browser dialog box that
enables you to choose the SolidWorks model.
3. Confirm the dialog box. The following message is displayed.
When the message is confirmed, the CAM-Part is closed, the CAM-Part

Reference is updated, and then the updated CAM-Part is loaded again.
Close
SolidCAM closes the active CAM-Part. The Compressed CAM-Part file is being updated, if necessary.
Save As
This option enables you to save the active CAM-Part to the disk with a new name or in a new
location.
When this option is chosen, the Part Save As dialog box is displayed.
Save as type
This option enables you to choose the

type of the CAM-Part: compressed or
non-compressed. The default value of
the Save as type filter is the same as the
type of the original CAM-Part.
The conversion of compressed

CAM-Part to non-compressed
is unavailable.
100
2. CAM-Part
Save as copy
• When this option is not available, the saved CAM-Part is loaded instead of the current
CAM-Part.
• When this option is available, SolidCAM stays with the current CAM-Part.
Save updated stock to STL
SolidCAM parts can be machined in a sequence of stages on different CNC-machines, while the
updated stock model is shared between these stages.
This functionality enables you to define a new CAM-Part

based on some other pre-machined CAM-Part, using the
result of machining of the pre-machined part for the stock
definition. Machining of a part can thus be performed in
several stages, with one CAM-Part for each stage, by passing
the machining results from one stage to the next through
an updated stock model obtained after the last operation of
each CAM-Part and saved in the STL format.
1. Right-click on the CAM-Part header

in SolidCAM Manager and choose
the Save updated stock to STL
command from the menu.
2. The Save updated stock to STL dialog box is displayed.
Define the name and location

for your file. The default name
of the updated stock model STL
file is inherited from the CAM-
Part name. The default location of
the STL file is the SolidCAM Part
folder for regular SolidCAM Parts
(*.prt). For compressed CAM-Parts
(*.prz), the default location is that
of the compressed CAM-Part files.
3. Click on the Save button.
SolidCAM generates the STL file according to the HostCAD coordinate

system.
101
When the STL file is successfully generated, the notification message is
displayed.
User Documentation
This option enables you to document your tool list, operations sequence, etc. (see topic 2.13).
Documentation
This option enables you to summarize the CAM-Part information by generating a tool sheet
documentation in the HTML, RTF or XLS format (see topic 2.14).
Check Synchronization
This option enables you to check for synchronization of CAM-Part geometries, Stock and Target
models, etc. (see topic 2.4.4).
Synchronize
This option enables you to synchronize CAM-Part geometries, Stock and Target models, etc., if
necessary (see topic 2.4.4).
Cleanup CAM-Part
This option enables you to perform the cleaning of the CAM-Part data. The cleaning operation
automatically removes unused geometries, updated stock model files (which can be later automatically
recalculated), and any other unused data saved in the CAM-Part.
For more information, see topic 2.15.
102
2. CAM-Part
2.13 CAM-Part Documentation
This option enables you to document your tool list,

operations sequence, etc.
• Generate
This option enables you to create the

document.
• Edit
This option enables you to edit the

document after it has been generated.
2.13.1 Documentation Editor

With the documentation editor you can browse the generated CAM-Part documentation. The
toolbar and the application menu on the top of the documentation editor work the same as in any
typical windows application.
The left panel enables you to switch pages and the right page enables you to view and edit each
page.
Note that you need to change the font to get appropriate results in different
languages.
• Cover page
This page shows contents of the Cover

page file defined in SolidCAM Settings.
• Header page
This page contains general information

about the CAM-Part: the CAM-Part
name, the program number, the amount
of operations and the type of operations.
To edit, simply click in the right field and
make any changes or additions.
103
• Tool Table page
This page contains all the relevant

information about the tools used in the
CAM-Part: the tool number, the tool
diameter, the corner radius, the tool
type, the number of teeth and any other
information that is relevant to each tool.
To edit, simply click in the right field and
make any changes or additions.
• Operations table page
This page contains the list of all

operations in the CAM-Part.
• Operation pages
Under this page, there is a page for each

operation name. This page gives you a
detailed list of all of the fields you have
chosen in the operation and their values.
104
2. CAM-Part
2.14 Tool sheet documentation
This option enables you to summarize the CAM-Part information by generating a tool sheet
documentation in the HTML, RTF or XLS format.
105
2.14.1 Generating the tool sheet
For each tool sheet project, SolidCAM creates the Doc folder in the CAM-Part directory for
saving the tool sheet file. In this folder, two subfolders are automatically created: the Tools Images
subfolder for image files of the tools used in the part operations, and the Images subfolder for
image files of the machined part.
The tool sheet generation commands are available in the right-click menu on the CAM-Part header
2.14.2 Capturing the CAM-Part image
The Capture Image command enables you to create a part image captured from the SolidWorks
graphic area and save it in the PNG format. Later this image file can be attached to your tool sheet.
When you choose this command, SolidCAM captures the image of the part as it is displayed in the
SolidWorks graphic area. This image is saved as a PNG file in the Images folder.
106
2. CAM-Part
2.14.3 Definition of tool sheet parameters
The Tool Sheet command is available for the entire

CAM-Part (in the right-click menu available on the
CAM-Part header) or for separate operations (in the
right-click menu available on each operation entry). The
Tool Sheet Extra Parameters dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box enables you to define and manage the
content of the documentation file.
Images
In this section, you can specify the logo and part image
files in the PNG format that will be attached to your
tool sheet. To attach a logo and/or a part image, click
on the button and choose a file from the standard
Windows-style Browse dialog box.
The attached logo appears in the upper right corner in

the document header. The attached images appear in
the separate Images page.
107
Parameters
This section contains the table that enables you to define

your own variables and values to be inserted into the tool
sheet. In the Label column, you specify the name of the
parameter you want to appear in the tool sheet; in the
Value column, you can enter its value. In the Location
column, you can specify where this parameter is supposed
to appear in the documentation file, either in the main
page or in the header.
The buttons enable you to manage the table rows:

• The button adds new rows to the table.
• The button removes the selected row from the table.
• The buttons move the selected rows in the table, changing their order.
Part notes
This section enables you to add comments and notes

related to your part. The note will appear under the part
image, in the main page of the tool sheet document.
Style
This section enables you to choose the template that will be used for generation of the output
document.
The available templates are located in the following folder:
<SolidCAM install directory>\SolidCAM\_XmlDoc\Files\
For explanation of tool sheet template definition, see topic 2.14.6.
Sections
This group enables you to define which elements of the information sheet
will appear in the output, by selecting the corresponding check boxes.
• The Main page check box defines whether the main page will be
included in the tool sheet.
108
2. CAM-Part
• The Images check box defines whether the Images page will be included in the tool
sheet. The button displays the location of the part captured images in the Windows
Explorer.
• The Tool table check box defines whether the Tool table pages will be included in the tool
sheet. The button displays the dialog box that enables you to specify the required tool
data to appear in the Tool table summary by selecting check boxes.
• The Operations summary check box defines whether the Operation summary page will
be included in the tool sheet.
• The Fixtures check box defines whether the Fixture page will be included in the tool
sheet.
109
2.14.4 The output file
The output tool sheet file consists of the following sections:
Main page
This section summarizes the general information about the CAM-Part, including its graphic
representation and the comments you have added.
Comment entered
in the Parameters table
(Location - Header) Part name
Company logo
Part definition
Comment entered Part picture

in the Parameters table
(Location - Main page)
Part notes
Part properties
110
2. CAM-Part
Tool table
This section displays the list of the tools used for the operations of the current CAM-Part, with
their parameters and illustrations.
111
Operations summary
This section summarizes the operations defined for the current CAM-Part.
112
2. CAM-Part
Fixtures
This section shows how the part must be fixed on the CNC-machine table.
2.14.5 Show Last Tool Sheet

This command enables you to display the last
generated tool sheet for the current part, instead of
generating it anew. The Tool Sheet Extra Parameters
dialog box is displayed so that you can view the
defined parameters of the last tool sheet generation.
In this dialog box, you can edit only the Style and
the Sections parameters to alter the document
appearance and define which sections of the last
tool sheet you want to display.
The Show button displays the generated tool sheet.
113
2.14.6 Tool sheet template definition in the XLS format
Before you generate your tool sheet, you need to define the tool sheet template in the Microsoft
Excel application.
Defining the security settings
Before you create your tool sheet template, you need

to define the Excel security settings.
In the Excel Options dialog box, click on the Trust

Center Settings button.
In the Trust Center dialog box, switch to the Macro

Settings tab and choose the Disable all macros with
notification option, then confirm the dialog boxes by
clicking on the OK button.
The advantage of this

setting is better protection
against undesired macros
with unknown content.
The disadvantage of this

setting is that every time
you open the template
*.xls file you will have to
enable macros manually.
The Security Warning will
be displayed.
114
2. CAM-Part
When you click on the Options button, the Microsoft Office Security
Options dialog box will be displayed, and you will need to choose the Enable
this content option.
If you choose the Enable all macros option, you will have low protection against macros with
unknown content, but you will no more need to care about allowing macros on each session of
template editing.
Definition of the security settings is needed only to run the test during the
template creation.
Template creation
Template files must be located in the following folder:
<SolidCAM install directory>\SolidCAM\_XmlDoc\Files\
SolidCAM offers you by default the Default_XLS_ToolSheet.xls file. It is

recommended to create new templates based on this file by copying the file
and editing the required parameters.
Template structure
A template consists of several worksheets. These worksheets are mandatory and have hard-coded
names, which means that they cannot be deleted or renamed. Each worksheet contains special
template data.
115
Final document
This worksheet contains the preview of the actual template design. This worksheet is
updated and activated after every test call.
Design
This worksheet contains the design of the template. In this worksheet you can edit the
content of the tool sheet to be generated, define its sections, images, parameters, etc.
116
2. CAM-Part
Test
This worksheet serves for test process calling.
Options
This worksheet contains the general settings that affect the final document generating
process.
117
DataXMLgeneral
This worksheet contains a list of general SolidCAM data parameters for user reference
that can be used in the Design worksheet.
DataXMLtools
This worksheet contains a list of SolidCAM tool data parameters for user reference
118
2. CAM-Part
DataXMLoperations
This worksheet contains a list of SolidCAM operation data parameters for user
reference that can be used in the Design worksheet.
DataXMLfixtures
This worksheet contains a list of SolidCAM fixture data parameters for user reference
119
DataXMLpictures
This worksheet contains a list of image data parameters for user reference that can be
used in the Design worksheet.
DataXMLuser
This worksheet contains a list of user-defined parameters for user reference that can
be used in the Design worksheet. Here you can store your own parameters derived
from SolidCAM data.
120
2. CAM-Part
Template design
The design of a template is divided into several sections: (main, tool head line, tools, operations,
fixtures, etc).
There are two types of sections:
• sections copied to the final document only once (for example, Main section and Tool
head line section);
• sections copied to the final document as many times as specified by the number of
particular elements (for example, Tools section and Operations section).
Each section is defined by continual range of cells (so the shape of each range is rectangular).
Design Final document
Main section Main section
Tool head line section Tool head line section
Tools section Tool #1

Tool #2
Operations section Operation #1
Operation #2
Operation #3
Operation #4
121
The sections are order sensitive: Design Final document
for example, if you want to have
the Main section located at the Tool head line section Tool head line section
bottom of the final document,
this section must be located after Tools section Tool #1
all of the other sections in the Tool #2
Design worksheet.
Operations section Operation #1
Operation #2
Operation #3
Operation #4
Main section Main section
Defining the sections
In the Design worksheet, you need to assign a certain number of table cells to each
tool path section. Click on the Name Manager button.
122
2. CAM-Part
The Name Manager dialog box is displayed. This dialog box contains a list of variables
that represent the names of tool sheet sections and parameters that can be used in the
template design.
Section names in the Name Manager dialog box are preceded with the underscore
symbol. These names are hard-coded and cannot be edited. The following section
names are available:
• _MainSection – Main section
The Main section is usually located at the top of the final document.
This section always has only one replication in the final document.
• _ToolSectionHeadline – Tool head line section

• _ToolSection – Tools section
• _OperationSectionHeadline – Operation head line section
• _OperationSection – Operations section
• _FixtureSectionHeadline – Fixture head line section
• _FixtureSection – Fixtures section
• _GeneralSectionXX – General section (XX stands for the numerical index of
the section)
The General section is used to enter general data such as comments,

signatures, summary information, etc. You can insert several
General sections between other sections of the tool sheet
template. The maximum number of General sections that can
be used is 50. The number of these sections is defined by the
opt_num_of_general_sections parameter setting in the
Options worksheet.
123
To define a section, select the variable that represents the section name in the Name
Manager dialog box and click on the button.
Select the range of cells to be included in the section in the Design worksheet of your
template and click on the button in the Name Manager - Refers to dialog box.
124
2. CAM-Part
Confirm by clicking on the button in the Name Manager dialog box.
Managing template content
Linking data to cell
Each cell can contain simple text, formulas or link for picture insertion. To link data to
cells, select the cell for which you want to add a value and enter the text string in the
Insert Function line.
• Simple text
In simple text you define the headlines, company contact info, and so on.
• Formulas
Formulas are used for entering SolidCAM data. SolidCAM data are stored
in variables with special names. These variables are stored in several groups:
125
General data (a list of these parameters can be found in the DataXMLgeneral
worksheet)
• all parameters inside this group have the sc_ prefix at the beginning of
the variable names;
• data containing general CAM-Part information, such as CAM-Part
name, Units, date of creation, part type, etc.
Tool data (a list of these parameters can be found in the DataXMLtools

worksheet)
• all parameters inside this group have the tool_ prefix at the beginning
of the variable names;
• data containing information about tools, such as tool number, diameter,
comment, etc.
Operation data (a list of these parameters can be found in the

DataXMLoperations worksheet)
• all parameters inside this group have the operation_ prefix at the
beginning of the variable names;
• data containing information about operations, such as Coordinate
System position, operation name, operation type, etc.
Fixture data (a list of these parameters can be found in the DataXMLfixtures

worksheet)
• all parameters inside this group have the fixture_ prefix at the beginning
of the variable names;
• data containing information about fixtures, such as preview image,
name, etc.
When you start typing a formula, you have to enter = as a first character in
the sequence. Afterwards you can continue by entering the variable name you
want to use. As you are typing, you will see a list of available variables, so you
can pick the variable name directly from this list.
126
2. CAM-Part
• Pictures
Pictures are defined by a text string in the following format:
<img>path;
where <img> is a special tag to indicate that the cell will contain image; after
this tag the path to and the name of inserted image appear.
For example,
<img>D:/ToolSheet/Images/main_part.png
Picture file name has to be defined exactly (including extension). File path
can be both absolute and relative. Instead of the path to the location of the
current template you can use substitution tag: %f%.
If picture size is bigger than the cell area, the picture is automatically resized
to fit the cell accurately. Proportions of image size are not changed. If picture
size is smaller than the cell area, the picture retains its original size.
Cell alignment settings are used for image

alignment in the same way as for text
alignment.
All common image formats are supported: BMP, JPG, PNG, GIF, TIF.
Table formatting
Table formatting is defined by using Excel functions.
You can use the Excel’s Conditional formatting function to make an odd lines different
formatted from an even lines for better readability of long lists of parameters.
Template design test
During template definition, you can preview the actual design of template – to see how it is working
with real data. To get the preview, click on the Test worksheet.
127
The tool sheet will start generating, and at the end of this process the Final document worksheet
will be activated with the preview of the tool sheet will be showed.
128
2. CAM-Part
2.15 Cleanup CAM-Part
This option enables you to perform the cleaning of the

CAM-Part data. The cleaning operation automatically
removes unused geometries, updated stock model files
(which can be later automatically recalculated), and any
other unused data saved in the CAM-Part.
The Cleanup CAM-Part command displays the Cleanup

CAM-Part dialog box.
This dialog box enables you to define the options of the CAM-Part cleanup.
• Remove GCode files. When this check box is selected, SolidCAM removes all the GCode
files from the CAM-Part folder. The files to be removed are determined according to the
GCode Files Extension parameter specified in the MAC file used in the current CAM-
Part.
• Remove Updated Stock model files used for simulation. When this check box is selected,
SolidCAM removes all the Updated Stock model files used for the SolidVerify simulation
(*.stf).
• Remove Updated Stock model files used for rest material calculation. When this check
box is selected, SolidCAM removes all the Updated Stock model files used for the rest
material calculation (*.stfrm).
• Remove unused geometries. When this check box is selected, SolidCAM removes all the
geometries that are not used in the operations of the current CAM-Part.
• Remove unused tools. When this check box is selected, SolidCAM removes all the tools
located in the Part Tool Table that are not used in the operations of the current CAM-
Part.
129
2.16 SolidCAM controls in SolidWorks environment
2.16.1 SolidCAM tab in SolidWorks CommandManager
In the SolidWorks CommandManager, the SolidCAM tab appears when SolidCAM is activated.
The SolidCAM tab contains the following buttons:
• About SolidCAM
This button displays the dialog box that contains the information about the
SolidCAM software. This button corresponds to the About SolidCAM command in
the SolidCAM menu.
• New CAM-Part
This button displays the list of available SolidCAM

modules such as Milling, Turning, Mill-Turn, and so forth.
This button corresponds to the New command in the

SolidCAM menu (see topic 2.12.1).
130
2. CAM-Part
• Open CAM-Part
This button displays the CAM-Parts

browser that enables you to open a
CAM-Part stored in the specified
location.
This button corresponds to the
Open command in the SolidCAM
menu (see topic 2.12.1).
• Copy CAM-Parts
This button displays the Copy Parts dialog

box that enables you to copy parts from one
location to another.
This button corresponds to the Copy

command in the SolidCAM menu (see topic
2.12.1).
• Delete CAM-Parts
This button displays the Part to delete

dialog box that enables you to delete
CAM-Parts from the specified
location.

Deletecommand in the SolidCAM
• Calculate CAM-Parts
This button displays the Calculate Parts browser that enables you to calculate the
CAM-Parts stored in the specified location.
This button corresponds to the Calculate

CAM-Parts command in the SolidCAM
131
• Template Manager
This button displays the Template

Manager dialog box that enables you
to manage the operation and process
templates.

Manage Templates command in the
• New Tool Library
This button enables you to create a new tool library of the

following types: Milling, Turning, and Mill-Turn.
This button corresponds to the Create Tool Library command in

the Tool Library submenu of the SolidCAM menu (see topic 2.12.1).
• Load Tool Library
This button displays the Load browser

that enables you to load the tool library
to be edited.
This button corresponds to the Edit Tool

Library command in the Tool Library
submenu of the SolidCAM menu (see
topic 2.12.1).
• Tool Library options
This button displays the list of options for managing the tool
libraries and other too related options.
The options in this list correspond to the commands in the Tool

Library submenu of the SolidCAM menu (see topic 2.12.1).
132
2. CAM-Part
• SolidCAM Settings
This button displays the SolidCAM

Settings dialog box that enables you to
manage the settings of the SolidCAM
software.

SolidCAM Settings command in the
• Technology Database
This button displays the Technology

Database dialog box that enables
you to manage the SolidCAM
technology database.

Technology Database command
in the SolidCAM menu (see topic
2.12.1).
• Hardware Key info
This button displays the

Hardware Key Info dialog
box that enables you to get
the hardware key info.
This button corresponds to the Hardware Key Info command in the

133
• CAM Views
The CAM Views toolbar contains buttons that enable you to manage the model views
related to the orientation of the selected CoordSys position.
• Exit
This button enables you to exit SolidCAM.
This button corresponds to the Exit SolidCAM command in the SolidCAM menu.
2.16.2 SolidCAM toolbars in SolidWorks environment
The following SolidCAM toolbars are available in the SolidWorks window:
134
2. CAM-Part
SolidCAM General
This toolbar contains the general buttons corresponding to the commands in the SolidCAM menu
and the CAM Views toolbar.
SolidCAM Holes Recognition
This toolbar contains buttons used for SolidCAM Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining
(see topic 9.4.2).
SolidCAM New
This toolbar contains buttons that enable you to activate the available SolidCAM modules: Milling,
Mill-Turn, Turning, Turn-Mill, Milling STL, and Wire Cut.
This toolbar corresponds to the New command in the SolidCAM menu.
SolidCAM New Tool Library
This toolbar contains buttons that enable you to start the definition of a new SolidCAM Tool
Library (Milling, Turning, or Mill-Turn).
This toolbar corresponds to the Create Tool Library command in the Tool Library submenu of the
SolidCAM menu.
SolidCAM Tool Library Options
This toolbar contains buttons that enable you to manage the existing Tool Libraries and the related
features such as Tool Types, Tool Holders, and so forth.
This toolbar corresponds to the Tool Library commands in the SolidCAM menu.
135
2.17 Milling-STL CAM-Part
This functionality enables you to define the machining projects based on output of 3D scanning
devices in the STL format. The received STL file contains data on the shape and visual properties
of the scanned real-world object upon which the machining project will be based. Such parts can
be machined using the SolidCAM 3D, HSM and 5-Axis milling capabilities. The peculiarity of such
projects definition is that the STL graphic body cannot be divided into separate elements in the
way a CAD design model can be. Therefore, the definition of such CAM-Part is different from a
regular milling project.
2.17.1 Starting a new Milling-STL CAM-Part
1. Click SolidCAM, New, Milling-STL,
or click on the corresponding button on the SolidCAM New toolbar.
2. The New Milling Part dialog box is displayed and enables you to choose an
STL file similar to the CAD design file chosen for CAM-Part definition.
136
2. CAM-Part
3. In the Directory section, specify the path to the location where the CAM-Part
will be saved by entering manually or by clicking on the Browse button.
4. In the Model name section, click on the Browse button and choose the
required STL file.
5. In the Name section, enter the name for your machining project.
When you confirm the New Milling Part dialog box, the Milling Part Data dialog box is displayed
as for a regular milling project definition. The graphic body is displayed in the SolidWorks graphic
area. It can be zoomed and rotated.
137
2.17.2 Coordinate System definition
Similar to a regular milling CAM-Part, the first definition stage is that of Coordinate System. Click
on the Define button in the Coordinate System section. Since you cannot select separate elements
of the STL graphic body, you can define the Coordinate System by entering the coordinates in
the Define mode (X,Y,Z) and/or by rotating the model into the required view and capturing in the
Normal to current view mode (see topic 2.2.2).
138
2. CAM-Part
2.17.3 Stock model definition
When the Coordinate System is defined, a box is calculated surrounding the model. Using this box,
you can define the Stock model with the 3D Box option (see topic 2.4.1).
2.17.4 Target model definition
The target model is defined by clicking on the Browse button in the Choose STL dialog box and
choosing the original STL file from the browser dialog box.
When the CAM-Part is defined, you can add 3D Milling, HSM, HSS and 5-Axis operations for its
machining.
139
2.18 Support of DriveWorks
The DriveWorks Design Automation software automates repetitive

tasks and allows you to generate your design and manufacturing outputs
automatically. This software is integrated in SolidCAM enabling the
automation of the design-to-manufacture processes.
The main principle of the DriveWorks functionality is creating rule-based

tasks for automatic modification of parameters of the parts. Based on
a SolidWorks model with given parameters, DriveWorks enables you to
create similar models with modified parameters and/or features (for
example, size changed, holes removed, etc.).
When DriveWorks is used to modify a SolidWorks model on which a SolidCAM Part is based,
DriveWorks copies the original model into a separate directory and performs the required
modifications.
DriveWorks SolidCAM
Original CAM-Part
Original model
Change
Reference
Model
Copy of CAM-Part
Modified model Synchronize

&
Calculate
Modified CAM-Part
140
2. CAM-Part
After this stage, DriveWorks automatically starts SolidCAM, where the original part is copied into
the same location with the updated model. The copied CAM-Part is opened in SolidCAM and the
reference model of the opened CAM-Part is automatically replaced with the modified model, the
synchronization is automatically performed and the operations are recalculated.
In such manner, machining of new parts with different parameters and features can be performed
automatically using the defined modification rules.
For more information about the DriveWorks software, visit www.driveworks.co.uk.
141
142
Tools and
Tool Libraries 3
The tool commands can be used to create and manage tools and tool
libraries in SolidCAM. You can save your programming time if you save
the tools you use most often in customizable tool libraries.
The tool libraries can be based on machine tooling, materials or any
other personal criteria. When you define your machining operations,
you can then load the tool, and all its parameters, feed and spin values
are automatically copied into the operation.
 Working with Part Tool Table

 Working with Current Tool Library
 Managing Tool Libraries
 Defining tools
 Tool types
 Shaped tools
 Tool holding system
3.1 User-Defined Tool Types
For easier identification and classification of tools, you can define your own tool types.
SolidCAM offers you the following default tool types:
• End mill
• Ball nose mill
• Bull nose mill
• Face mill
• Dove tail mill
• Taper mill
• Slot mill
• Lollipop mill
• Engraving tool
• Center drill
• Spot drill
• Drill
• Chamfer drill
• Tap
• Reamer
• Bore
• Thread mill
• Thread taper
User-defined tool types can also be used to define new tools and to search tool libraries.
144
3. Tools and Tool Libraries
3.1.1 End mill
This tool type is used for the definition of rough/finish end mills.
The tools of this type are defined with the parameters shown in the image.
Arbor Diameter
Total
Length
Outside
Holder
Shoulder Length
Length Cutting
Length
Diameter
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total
Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal
to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.
When a new tool is created, the default value of the Arbor Diameter is equal to that of the Diameter,
and the default value of the Shoulder Length is equal to that of the Cutting Length.
145
3.1.2 Ball nose mill
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown in the image.
Arbor Diameter
Total
Length
Outside
Shoulder Holder
Length Cutting Length
Length
Diameter Corner Radius
The Corner Radius value of a Ball nose mill tool is equal to half the Diameter value and cannot be
changed.
146
3.1.3 Bull nose mill
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown in the image.
Arbor Diameter
Total
Length
Outside
Shoulder Holder
Length Cutting Length
Length
Diameter Corner Radius
The Corner Radius value of a Bull nose mill tool must be in the range from 0 to half the Diameter
value.
147
3.1.4 Dove tail mill
Outside
This tool type is used for dove tail slot machining. Arbor Holder
Length
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown Diameter
in the image. Shoulder
Length
Total Angle
Length
Cutting
Length
Corner Radius Diameter
Parameter limitations
Parameter Range
Angle 0° < Angle < 90°
Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Diameter/2
Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length
Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length
Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length
148
3.1.5 Face mill Arbor Diameter

Total Length
This tool type is used for face milling.
A tool of this type is defined with the
parameters shown in the image. Shoulder Outside
Length Holder
Length
Cutting
Length Angle
Tip Diameter
Diameter
Parameter Range
Tip Diameter Tip Diameter < Diameter
Corner Radius <= Cutting Length

Corner Radius
Corner Radius <= Tip Diameter/2
149
3.1.6 Slot mill Arbor
Diameter
This tool is used in a variety of applications from
simple 2.5D undercut profiles all the way up to
machining cavities in Sim. 5 Axis operations.
The parametric definition of a slot mill tool also Total
enables you to define a cylindrical tool with a Length Outside
Holder
tool shank with a relieved diameter.
Length
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters

shown in the image.
Corner Cutting
Radius Length
Diameter
150
3.1.7 Taper mill Outside

Holder
Length
This tool type is supported in the calculations of Arbor
the Sim. 5 Axis and 3D Milling Rough and Finish Diameter
operations. In 2.5D Milling operations such as Angle
Profile and Pocket, only the bottom diameter is
taken into account in the tool path calculation.
This tool is used for milling internal or external
walls with a constant draft angle. Total
Length Shoulder
Length Cutting
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters Length
shown in the image.
Cone
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool Length
arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total Diameter
Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The
Shoulder Length value must be greater than or Tip Corner
equal to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to Diameter Radius
or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.
• The default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter;
• The Shoulder Length value is equal to that of the following expression:

Cutting Length + (Outside Holder Length – Cutting Length)/2.
To define the taper tool by Tip diameter or by Cone Length, select the appropriate check box near
the Tip Diameter or the Cone Length edit boxes.
When the Tip Diameter check box is selected, the Cone Length check box is unselected and the
relevant edit box is disabled; the Cone Length value is thus automatically calculated.
151
When the Cone Length check box is selected, the Tip Diameter check box is unselected and the
relevant edit box is disabled; the Tip Diameter value is thus automatically calculated.
Note that the Tip Diameter is the diameter of the virtual intersection of the
conical shape with the bottom plane.
Tip Diameter
Parameter Range

Corner Radius <= Tip Diameter/2
Corner Radius
Corner Radius < Cone length
152
3.1.8 Engraving tool Arbor Diameter
This tool type is used for engraving. A tool

of this type is defined with the parameters
shown in the image. Total
Length
Diameter Outside
Holder
Shoulder Length
Length
Cutting
Length Angle
Tip Diameter Corner Radius
Parameter Range
Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Diameter/2
153
3.1.9 Tap tool
This tool is used to machine the internal threads

in Drilling operations. It consists of two parts: Arbor Diameter
cylindrical and conical. A tool of this type is defined
with the parameters shown in the image. Total
Length Outside
Holder
Length
Chamfer Cutting
Length Length
Tip Diameter
Diameter
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total
Length - Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal
to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length. The
default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter, and the Shoulder Length value is
equal to that of the Cutting Length.
Parameter Range
Chamfer Length Chamfer Length < Cutting Length
Pitch 0 < Pitch < min (Diameter, Cutting Length)
Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Outside Holder Length
This tool can be used only in Drilling/3D Drilling operations.
154
3.1.10 Lollipop mill
This tool is used in the Simultaneous 5 Axis operations. There are two shapes of the lollipop mill
tool: with conical shoulder and without one. A tool of this type is defined with the parameters
shown in the image.
Arbor Diameter Arbor Diameter
Total Total
Length Length
Outside Outside
Holder Holder Shoulder
Length Length Length
Shoulder Cutting
Cutting
Length Length
Length
Diameter Diameter
Lollipop mill without conical shoulder
When the Conical shoulder check box is not selected, SolidCAM enables you to define the tool with
the cylindrical shoulder.
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical arbor are defined as
Arbor Diameter and (Total Length – Shoulder Length), respectively.
The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal to that of
the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside
Holder Length. The default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that
of the Diameter. The Shoulder Length value is equal to that of the
Cutting Length.
155
Lollipop mill with conical shoulder
When the Conical shoulder check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to define the tool with
the conical shoulder.
The Arbor diameter value defines the upper diameter of the cone. The lower diameter of the cone
is calculated automatically as the diameter of the circle resulting from section of the sphere by the
horizontal plane located at the Cutting length distance from the tool nose. The cone starts from the
Cutting length distance and continues till the Shoulder length distance. Therefore, the cone length
is equal to the difference between the Shoulder length and Cutting length parameters.
Parameter Range
Cutting Length <= (Diameter+sqrt(Diameter^2-Arbor Diameter^2))/2

Cutting Length
Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Outside Holder
Outside Holder Length <= Total Length
Length
156
3.1.11 Thread mill Arbor

Diameter
This tool is intended to machine the internal and
external threads in Thread Milling operations.
The following parameters define the geometry of Total

thread mill tools. Length
Outside
Holder
Length Shoulder
Length
Thread Diameter Thread

Cutting
Length
Pitch
SolidCAM enables you to define the Pitch of the thread as a Metric value (MM) or as a number of
tracks per inch (TPI).
When defining the tool parameters in the Part Tool Table, you can
define the Pitch in accordance with international standards such as ISO,
Whitworth, and so forth.
In the Pitch/Standard field, choose the Table option and click on the arrow to open the list and
choose the standard according to which you want to define the thread pitch.
This list is available only if the

Threading table is defined in the
SolidCAM Settings dialog box (see
topic 12.2.3).
When you choose one of the standards from the list, the
corresponding table is displayed in a separate window.
157
Choose the required value and confirm with the OK button.
You can open this table as an Excel file and edit its content. The path to
the table file can be found on the User directories page of the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box (see topic 12.2.3).
SolidCAM provides you with a link to the Vardex software for thread milling tool selection from
the Vardex tools library – TM Gen (www.vardex.com). This link enables you to define the thread mill
tool parameters and, based on this, it will search the Vardex library for the thread milling tools that
fit these parameters; you can then choose one of the offered tools for the operation.
When the Vardex option is chosen in the Standard combo box, SolidCAM launches the Vardex
tool library wizard (TM Wizard). The wizard guides you through the steps to define the parameters
of the tool you are looking for, selects a number of tools from the library that fit these parameters
and then enables you to choose one of these tools. When the tool is chosen, it is imported into the
SolidCAM tool library.
158
3.1.12 Thread taper

Arbor
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown Diameter
in the image. The Thread taper tool definition is similar
to the Thread Mill tool definition (see topic 3.1.11).
Total
Angle Length
Outside
Holder
Length Shoulder
Length
Thread Diameter Thread

Cutting
Length
3.1.13 Drill
Arbor Diameter
This tool type is used for the definition of drills, bores,
reams, threading tools, etc. A tool of this type is defined
with the parameters shown in the image.
Total
Outside
Length Shoulder
Length Cutting Holder
Length Length
Angle
Diameter
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and
(Total Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value should be greater than
or equal to the Cutting Length value, and equal to or smaller than the Outside Holder Length value.
When a new tool is created, the default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter. The
default Shoulder Length value is equal to that of the Cutting Length.
159
3.1.14 Center drill
Arbor
This tool type is used for center drilling in Drilling Diameter
operations. A tool of this type is defined with the
parameters shown in the image.
Shoulder
Angle Total
Outside Length
Holder
Length
Cutting
Length
Angle
Tip Diameter Tip

Length
When this tool is used in combination with the Use chamfer option, SolidCAM calculates the
drilling depth according to the following expression:
Drilling Depth = Tip Length + Arbor Diameter/2 + cotan(Shoulder Angle/2)
Arbor Diameter
Cutting Length
Shoulder Angle
Chamfer Diameter
Drilling Depth
Tip Diameter Tip Length

Chamfer Diameter
160
Parameter Range
Tip Diameter Tip Diameter < Arbor Diameter
Tip Angle 0° < Tip Angle < 180°
Shoulder Angle 0° < Shoulder Angle < 180°
Tip Length Tip Length <= Cutting Length
The length of the conical part defined by Tip Diameter and Tip Angle must be equal to or smaller
than the Tip Length value. The length of conical part can be calculated according to the following
expression: Cone Length = Tip diameter/(2*tan( Tip angle/2)).
161
3.1.15 Spot drill Arbor Diameter
This tool type is used for center drilling and

chamfering. A tool of this type is defined with the Diameter
Total Outside
Length Holder
Shoulder
Length
Length
Angle
Cutting Length
Parameter Range
Tip Length Tip Length <= Cutting Length
Note that the Cutting Length edit box is unavailable. This value is calculated
automatically according to the Diameter and Angle values.
162
3.1.16 Chamfer drill Arbor Diameter
This new tool type is used for chamfering. A tool

of this type is defined with the parameters shown
in the image.
Total
Length Outside
Shoulder
Holder
Length
Length Cutting
Length
Angle
Diameter
Parameter Range
Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Cutting Length
163
3.1.17 Reamer Arbor
Diameter
This tool is used to machine precise holes in Drilling
operations. A tool of this type is defined with the
Total
Outside
Length
Holder
Length
Cutting
Length
Chamfer
Diameter Length
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and
(Total Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or
equal to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.
The default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter.
Parameter Range
Cutting Length Chamfer Length <= Cutting Length <= Outside Holder Length
164
3.1.18 Bore
Arbor
Diameter
This tool type is used for boring in
Drilling operations. A tool of this
type is defined with the parameters
shown in the image.
Total
Outside
Length
Holder Diameter
Length
Shoulder
Length
Corner Radius
Cutting Angle
Length
Parameter Range
Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Cutting Length
165
3.1.19 Shaped Tools
This tool type is used for the definition of shaped end/rough mills and drill tools. The tool shape
is defined by a sketch. The Tool Diameter defined in the Part Tool Table describes the cutting
diameter of the shaped tool that will be coincident to the machining geometry.
For more information on Shaped tools, see topic 3.10.
3.1.20 Add new tool types
Based on one of the default tool types, you can create your own ones.
1. Click SolidCAM in the SolidWorks

main menu and choose Tool Library,
Tool type names, or click on the
corresponding button on the Tool
Library Options toolbar.
The Tool Type Names dialog box is

displayed. This dialog box shows
the user-defined tool type names
and their actual SolidCAM default
internal tool types.
2. In the Tool Type Names dialog box, right-click on an existing tool type name,
e.g. End Mill.
3. Choose Add from the menu.
166
4. A new entry is created. Enter the

name of the user-defined tool
type.
5. By default, the new entry is of the

Drill tool type. Right-click on the
Drill field and select the relevant
tool type from the list.
6. When you are finished making

changes in the Tool type list, click
on the Save button to confirm
your changes.
Double-click the tool type name to rename existing entries.
3.1.21 Tool type options
You can manage the user-defined tool types in the list.
1. In the Tool Type Names dialog box, right-click an existing tool type name.
2. Choose the Add or Rename option from the menu.
167
3.2 Tool Libraries
The tool libraries can be based on machine tooling, materials or any other personal criteria. When
you define your machining operations, you can then load the tool, and all its parameters, feed and
spin values are automatically copied to the operation.
The Part Tool Table is the tool library that contains all tools available for use in a specific CAM-Part.
The Part Tool Table is stored within the CAM-Part.
When you start a new CAM-Part and you want to copy the contents of a specific tool library into
the Part Tool Table of this CAM-Part automatically, specify its name in the MAC file of the CNC-
machine. This file is called the Machine Tool Table.
The Machine Tool table is defined in the MAC file by the following parameter:
tool_table_name = name; where name (without an extension) is the name
of the Tool Library located in the SolidCAM Tool Libraries folder defined in
the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.2.2).
Generally, the Machine Tool Table contains the tools situated in the Tool Magazine of the specified
CNC-machine.
SolidCAM enables you to define any

number of Tool Libraries. Each tool Operation Operation Operation
from the Tool Libraries can be imported

into the Part Tool Table. You can define Tool Tool Tool
CAM-Part
one Tool Library that has a top priority
in the list for import: the Current Tool Part Tool Table
Library.
Tools imported at start Tools imported at user choise

Machine Tool Table Current Tool Library
Tool Library ToolLibrary

Tool Library
Tool Library
Tool Library
168
3.3 Working with the Part Tool Table
The Part Tool Table is the tool library that contains all tools available for use in a specific CAM-Part.
The Part Tool Table is stored within the CAM-Part.
The Part Tool Table dialog box (see topic 3.6) enables you to manage the tools contained in the Part
Tool Table.
1. Choose the Part Tool table option from the right-click menu of the Tool
header in SolidCAM Manager.
2. The Part Tool Table dialog box is displayed.
169
3.4 Working with the Current Tool Library
SolidCAM enables you to manage your Current Tool

Libraries using the right-click menu of the Tool header in
SolidCAM Manager.
• Set Tool Library
This option enables you to set

the Current Tool Library. You
have to specify the type of the
Current Tool Library (Milling,
Turning or Turn-Mill) and choose
the relevant Tool Library from
the browser dialog box. The
Current Tool Library is selected
and displayed in the Tool Table
dialog box (see topic 3.6).
• Close Tool Library
This option enables you to close

the Current Tool Library.
This option is available only when the Current Tool Library is already defined.
• Show Tool Library
This option enables you to display the content of the Current Tool Library. The Tool
Table dialog box enables you to manage the tools in the Current Tool Library.
This option is available only when the Current Tool Library is already defined.
• Recent Tool Libraries
This option displays the list of recently loaded Current Tool Libraries. You can open
a file by simply clicking on its name in the list. The Tool Table dialog box is displayed.
170
3.5 Managing Tool Libraries
SolidCAM enables you to manage your Tool Libraries

using the Tool Library menu available in the SolidCAM main
menu and the corresponding toolbars.
3.5.1 Edit Tool Library
This option enables you to display the content of the

specific Tool Library.
When you choose this option, the Load dialog box is

displayed.
1. Select the name of the tool library you want to load.
2. Double-click on its name or select it and click on the Open button. The Tool
Table dialog box is displayed. This dialog box enables you to manage the
tools in the chosen Tool Library.
3.5.2 Create Tool Library
This option enables you to define a new Tool Library.
1. Choose the Tool Library type (Milling,

Turning or Turn-Mill) from the
submenu.
171
2. Define the Tool Library name.
3. Confirm the Tool Library creation with the OK button. The Tool Library is
created. The Tool Table dialog box is displayed enabling you to add tools to
the new Tool Library.
4. Confirm the Tool Table dialog box with the OK button.
3.5.3 Copy Tool Library
This option enables you to create an identical copy of a tool library in another folder or drive for
backup purposes or for making modifications without changing the original. The Copy Tool Library
1. In the left window, choose

the drive and directory from
which you want to copy the
original tool library.
2. Select the tool library you

want to copy.
172
3. Move the selection of tool libraries you want to copy to the middle window
by clicking the Left to Right arrow.
4. Choose the drive and the directory into which you want to copy in the right
window.
5. Click on the Copy button.
3.5.4 Delete Tool Library
This field enables you to delete tool libraries. The Delete dialog box is displayed.
1. Select the tool libraries you want to delete. Use the Ctrl key to select several
tool libraries together.
2. Click on the Delete button.
3. The confirmation message is displayed:
4. Choose Yes or Yes to All to delete all selected tool libraries.
173
3.6 Tool Table dialog box
The Tool Table dialog box contains

structured information about all tools
included in the specified Tool Library. This
dialog box enables you to add new tools to
the Tool Library, remove tools from the
Tool Library, edit the tool definition, etc.
The dialog box contains two pages:
• View
This page displays the tools

of the Tool Library in a table
format.
• Edit
This page enables adding of new tools or editing of existing tools in the Tool Library.
3.6.1 Tools Filter

SolidCAM enables you to filter tools
displayed in the Tool Table dialog box.
• All
All the tools are displayed.
• Used
Only the tools used in

Operations of the current
CAM-Part are displayed.
• Unused
Only the tools unused in operations of the current CAM-Part are displayed.
The filter is available only for the Part Tool Table.
174
3.6.2 Tool range

If you work with large tool libraries, you can use this
option to reduce the number of tools displayed. You can
also search the tool table for tools that match your criteria.
In the Range dialog box, enter the required properties

of the tool. Enter only values that are different; leave the
other fields unchanged.
The User-defined tool type section enables you to choose

the type of tools you would like to have listed in the tool
library.
The Rough tools only and Do not display rough tools

options enable you to handle Rough tools (see topic 3.6.5)
during the tools sorting.
• The Rough tools only option enables you to

display only rough tools in the tools list.
• When the Do not display rough tools check box is selected, the tools marked as Rough
are not displayed.
The Tool number section lists results according to the tool numbers.
The Diameter section enables you to choose the range using the diameter of the tools you would
like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools with a diameter
from 1 to 16, enter 1 in the From box and 16 in the To box.
The Number of flutes section enables you to choose the range using the number of flutes of the
tools you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools
with 1 to 4 flutes, enter 1 in the From box and 4 in the To box.
The Pitch section enables you to choose the range using the pitch of the tap tools you would like
to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tap tools with the Pitch
from 0.5 to 1.5, enter 0.5 in the From box and 1.5 in the To box.
The Arbor diameter section enables you to choose the range using the arbor diameter of the tools
you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools with
an arbor diameter from 1 to 16, enter 1 in the From box and 16 in the To box.
The Taper angle section enables you to choose the range using the taper angle of the tools you
would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have
a taper angle from 20° to 30°, enter 20 in the From box and 30 in the To box.
175
The Number of threads section enables you to choose the range using the number of threads of the
tools you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools
with 2 to 4 threads, enter 2 in the From box and 4 in the To box.
The ID number section enables you to choose the range of the ID numbers of the tools you would
like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools with an ID
number from 10 to 100, enter 10 in the From box and 100 in the To box.
The Corner radius section enables you to choose the range using the corner radius of the tools you
a corner radius from 0 to 4, enter 0 in the From box and 4 in the To box.
The Angle section enables you to choose the range using the angle of the tools you would like to
have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have an angle from
90° to 180°, enter 90 in the From box and 180 in the To box.
The Chamfer length section enables you to choose the range using the chamfer length of the tools
you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that
have a chamfer length from 2 to 5, enter 2 in the From box and 5 in the To box.
The Tip diameter section enables you to choose the range using the tip diameter of the tools you
a tip diameter from 5 to 10, enter 5 in the From box and 10 in the To box.
The Tip length section enables you to choose the range using the tip length of the tools you would
like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have a tip
length from 5 to 10, enter 5 in the From box and 10 in the To box.
The Cutting length section enables you to choose the range using the cutting length of the tools you
a cutting length from 5 to 10, enter 5 in the From box and 10 in the To box.
Click on the Execute button to start searching the tool library for the tools that meet your
requirements. SolidCAM will return to the tool library and display the result of the range search.
The Reset to defaults button returns you to the original program settings of this dialog box.
3.6.3 Show
This button enables you to display the selected tool.
176
3.6.4 View
Tool data
This page displays the tool data in the table

format. The table contains the following
columns:
• Tool Number
This column displays the

number of a tool in the Tool
Library.
• ID Number
This column displays the ID

number of a tool.
• User-defined tool type name
This column displays the tool type.

• Description
This column displays the description of a tool.
This page also displays the geometric parameters of a tool depending on its type.
3.6.5 Edit
This page enables you to edit the existing

tools in the Tool Library (see topic 3.7).
177
Rough tools
SolidCAM enables you to define rough tools of all the following types:
• End mill
• Bull nose mill
• Ball nose mill
• Face mill
• Taper mill
• Slot mill
• Drill
• Bore
• Dove tail mill
The Rough check box enables you to mark the tool as suitable for
rough milling. The Rough status of the tool can be used for the tools
sorting with the Range option (see topic 3.6.2).
Tool units
You can assign different unit of measurement data for each tool
in the tool library. The tool library can simultaneously store tools
with Metric parameters along with those defined in Inches. This
functionality enables you to use tools defined in units different from
those of the CAM-Part, without converting the tool parameters into
the CAM-Part units. You can choose the units for the tool diameter
values and tool lengths separately.
The Mm and Inch buttons enable you to switch between the Metric
and the Inch system of measurement.
178
When a tool library created in a previous SolidCAM version is loaded, the

following message is displayed:
When you confirm this message, the Assign Units dialog box is displayed so
that you can assign units for tools.
Angular dimensions
The button appears in the parameters with angular values.
By clicking this button, you can switch

the angle value from the degrees/
minutes/seconds format to the decimal
format and vice versa. In the first case,
the edit box that displays the value is
disabled.
When the value is displayed as a decimal,

the edit box is available, and the value
can be edited.
179
3.7 Managing tools
SolidCAM enables you to manage the tools in the tool library with the buttons at the bottom of
the dialog box. These commands are also available in the right-click menu on the Tool List entries.
The following options are available:
Permanent Tool
If a particular tool is always used in the same magazine position in the machine, this tool can be
marked as Permanent Tool. If you use the Tool Renumbering function, a tool marked as Permanent
Tool is not renumbered.
Add Tool
This option enables you to add a new tool

to the tool library. When you choose this
option, the Tool Type dialog box is displayed
so that you can choose the tool type.
When you click on a tool to add it to the

library, the Tool Type dialog box is closed
automatically and the Part Tool Table is
displayed again.
180
Change tool type
This option enables you to add the type of the existing tool. When you choose this option, the Tool
Type dialog box is displayed so that you can choose the required tool type.
Copy Tool
This option enables you to create a copy of an existing tool.
Delete Tool
This option enables you to delete the selected tool.
Renumber Tools
This option enables you to perform automatic tool renumbering.
When the tool numbers in the list are not sequential increments of 1,
this option enables you to renumber the tools sequentially by increments
of 1. The tools can also be renumbered starting from a specific number
that you choose.
1. Right-click on a tool in the list and choose

the Renumber Tools command, from the
menu, or click on the Renumber button at
the bottom of the dialog box.
2. You are prompted to enter a new number
for the first tool.
The Sort by option enables you to assign

numbers to tools according to the operation
sequence or the Tool sequence.
When you confirm the Tools Renumbering
dialog box, the tools are renumbered accordingly,
starting from the number of the first tool.
181
3. Recalculate the CAM-Part. The CAM-Part must be recalculated to ensure
that the GCode contains the correct tool number for each operation.
A tool marked as Permanent tool is not renumbered.
Import Tool
This option enables you to import tools to the Tool Library from the Current Tool Library or any
other Tool Library. The Tool Libraries list is displayed. The Current Tool Library, which is the first
in the list, is automatically chosen.
You can choose the location of the Tool Libraries for the tools import.
The Library name box enables you to choose the Tool table for the tools import.
The File type box enables you to import tools from SolidCAM Tool libraries, Excel files and from
CSV files.
If the Current Tool Library is defined, it is automatically chosen as a source for tool import.
The Tool list displays all the tools contained in the specified
tool library. The right-click menu is available.
The Copy to Table option imports the selected tools to the

Tool Library. To import all tools from the list, click Copy all
to Table.
182
Update to Machine tool table
This option enables you to update the Machine Tool Table with the tools of an active Tool Library.
This option is available only when:
• The Tool Table dialog box is loaded outside the operation.
• The Machine Tool Table is defined in the MAC file.
The Update to Machine tool table dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box displays the name of the Machine Tool Table. The Used
Tools only option enables you to update the Machine Tool Table only
with the tools used in operations.
Update of the tools is affected by the Tool search parameters defined in

the SolidCAM Settings. The system compares the tool parameters with
corresponding check boxes selected and performs the update accordingly.
Export all tools
This option enables you to export all the tool data to an Excel-compatible file (*.xls, *.csv).
Export selected tools
This option enables you to export the data of the selected tools to an Excel-compatible file.
183
3.8 Tool data
SolidCAM enables you to define the Tool with the following data:
• Geometric parameters;
• Feed and Spin defaults;
• Tool holder.
Tool definition
erial Speed and

Feed Tool Holder Geometry definition
L
H
The Tool Data area displays the parameters of the selected tool.
184
The Tool Topology page contains the Topology data of the tool, such as diameter, length, angle,
corner radius, etc.
The Default Tool Data page contains the default Tool Material data, Feed and Spin data and diameter
and length offset numbers.
The Tool Message page contains fields, in which user messages are entered.
The Tool Coolant page enables you to choose the coolant options that will be used by default for
the current tool.
The Holder page enables you to define the tool holder by choosing it from the global or local tool
table and specifying the related parameters.
The Shape page enables you to choose a shaped tool for the operation.
3.8.1 Tool Topology page
Tool number
The Tool number is a numerical identifier of the tool, i.e. the numerical name of the tool, whose
value has to be an integer. It enables you to define tool numbers according to the numbering
system that you are used to. The Tool number is used in the GCode when the tool changes, the tool
length and radius values for tool compensation (G4x) are read from the machine controller.
The Max_Tool_Number parameter in the MAC file defines the total number of tools that can be
defined. In other words, this parameter defines the capacity of the cutter magazine of your CNC-
machine.
185
SolidCAM checks the total number of tools in the Part Tool Table during the following operations:
• Adding, copying or importing tools;
• Loading the CAM-Part;
• Inserting Machining Process;
• Creating new tools by AFRM.
When the total number of tools exceeds the Max_Tool_Number, SolidCAM displays an error
message.
The Tools in list field displays the total number of tools defined in the Tool Library.
ID number
You can use any number, e.g. the catalog number of the tool to facilitate its identification.
When a new tool is defined, SolidCAM sets the Tool number to the first
unused number. This default Tool number can be changed. When you
change the Tool number, make a note that this parameter has to be unique
for each tool.
If a particular tool always has the same number and cannot be changed, this tool can be marked as
Permanent. For example, when the Tool number represents the number of a tool magazine pocket
used for the tool, the Permanent mark means that the tool is always located in this pocket.
If you use the Tool Renumbering function (see topic 3.7), a tool marked as Permanent is not
renumbered.
Diameter
This field defines the cutting diameter of the tool.
Corner Radius/Angle
When the tool type is End mill/Ball nose mill/Bull nose mill, the Corner Radius field is displayed.
When the tool type is Drill, the Angle field is displayed.
186
• Corner Radius
This field defines the corner radius of the tool. There are three possibilities:
R R
D D D
In Ball nose mills, the In Bull nose mills, the corner
In End mills, the corner
corner radius is equal to the radius is smaller than the
radius is zero.
radius of the tool. radius of the tool.
• Angle
This field defines the drill point angle of the tool (between 0.01 and
180 degrees). D
Arbor diameter
This field defines the diameter of the tool arbor.

A
Arbor diameter
This parameter is relevant only for Slot, Lollipop
and Taper tools.
Thread diameter
This field defines the diameter of the thread of the Tap tool.
Tip Diameter
This field defines the lower diameter of the conical part of the Tap tool.
187
Chamfer length
This field defines the length of the conical part of the

Tap tool.
Pitch Total
Length
This field defines the pitch of the Tap tool. The Pitch Chamfer
Cutting
is the distance between corresponding vertices of Length
Length
adjacent teeth of a thread.
The Thread diameter, Tip

Tip Diameter
diameter, Chamfer length and
Pitch parameters are relevant Thread Diameter
only for Tap tools.
Length
This field defines the length of the tool. In

milling calculations, the system does not use
this data; the length of the tool is only the
output to the GCode file.
• Total
This parameter defines the total

tool length.
• Outside Holder
Total
This parameter defines the Outside
Length
Shoulder Holder
length of the tool outside the Cutting
Length
Length
tool holder. Length
• Cutting
Diameter
This parameter defines the length of the cutting part of the tool.
When a new tool is created in a SolidCAM operation, its Cutting Length is automatically
assigned the value of the machining depth in this operation. The depth is determined
as follows:
• For Face Milling, Profile, Pocket, Drilling, Thread Milling, and Slot (with constant
section) operations, the Depth parameter is defined directly in the operation
interface.
188
• For Drill Recognition and Pocket Recognition operations, the Depth parameter is
automatically determined as the depth of the deepest hole/pocket machined in
the operation.
• For Contour 3D, 3D Milling, 3D Drilling, 3D Engraving, HSM, Slot (with shaped
section), T-Slot, Translated Surface, Sim. 5-Axis and HSS operations, the Depth
parameter cannot be automatically determined – the default hard-coded value is
used for the new tool length definition.
• H Length
This parameter defines the distance Spindle

from the tool end to the CNC-machine
spindle.
The check box enables you to define

the H Length value either automatically
or manually. When the check box is not
selected, the H length edit box is disabled,
and the automatically calculated value is
Tool Holder H Length
displayed. When the check box is selected, Outside
the H Length edit box is enabled, and you Holder
can customize the value. Length
Number of flutes
This field defines the number of teeth of the tool. This field is used when calculating the feed in
the Feed rate type FZ.
For Tap tools, the Number of flutes value is always 1. The value cannot be
edited.
Description
This field enables you to enter a description of the tool (up to 40 characters).
189
3.8.2 Default Tool Data page
Cutting conditions
This button displays the Cutting Conditions dialog box that enables you to define sets of
cutting parameters relevant for machining of different work materials by the current tool
(Sets sub-table). This dialog box also enables you to specify the correction data for different CNC-
machines (Corrections sub-table).
When the work material is chosen from the Work Material list, SolidCAM displays the Sets sub-
table that contains a number of cutting condition sets relevant for the chosen work material. For
each such set, several sets of correction data for different CNC-machines, are displayed.
If no cutting condition sets are defined for the specified material, you can create a new set and fill
it with the cutting parameters data.
190
Managing sets of cutting conditions
You can add, edit and remove the sets of working conditions using the buttons at the
bottom of the Sets section of the Cutting Conditions dialog box.
• The Add button enables you to define a new set of cutting conditions. This
button displays the Cutting Condition dialog box that enables you to define
a set of cutting parameters for machining of the specified work material by
the current tool.
• The Edit button enables you to edit the existing sets of cutting conditions in
the Cutting Condition dialog box.
• The Remove button enables you to remove the existing sets of cutting
conditions from the table.
When one of the rows listed in the Sets sub-table is marked with a selected check box,
this means the following: when this tool will be chosen for machining of a CAM-Part
with specific work material, the corresponding parameters will be used by default.
191
Adjusting the cutting parameters to a specific CNC-machine
The Corrections sub-table enables you to adjust the defined cutting conditions for
use on a specific CNC-machine. The buttons at the bottom enable you to manage the
defined corrections.
• The Add button enables you to add a new set of corrections. This button
displays the CNC-Machine Definition dialog box that enables you to define
a set of corrections. These corrections will be applied to the default parameters
for machining of the current material, by the current tool, on a specified CNC-
machine. The correction is defined as percentage from the original default
value.
• The Edit button enables you to edit the existing sets of corrections in the
CNC-Machine Definition dialog box.
• The Remove button enables you to remove the existing sets of corrections
from the table.
The selected check box that marks one of the rows listed in the Corrections sub-table
indicates the current active CNC-machine correction.
The CNC-machine chosen for the current CAM-Part is marked by default (if it was
added to the corrections table), otherwise the Default correction set is marked (this set
is automatically added to each corrections sub-table).
192
When you have defined cutting conditions for tools in your Part Tool Table and then
you change the CNC-machine in the CAM-Part definition, the following prompt is
displayed:
If you confirm this prompt, the feed and spin data in the Part Tool Table are updated
according to the corrections of the newly chosen machine (if these are defined), or are
changed to values specified in the Default corrections set.
Spin
This field defines the spinning speed of the tool. It defines two spin values:
• Spin Rate – Normal spin rate; used in rough milling.
• Spin Finish – Finish spin rate; used in finish milling.
The Spin finish check box enables you to optionally define different
values for Spin rate and Spin finish. When this check box is selected,
the corresponding edit box is available so that you can edit its value.
When this check box is not selected, the specified Spin rate value is
used for both rough and finish machining.
For Drill and Tap tools, the Spin Finish parameter is not relevant.
The spin value can be defined in two types of units: S and V.
S is the default and it signifies Revolutions per Minute. V signifies Material cutting speed in Meters/
Minute in the Metric system or in Feet/Minute in the Inch system; it is calculated according to the
following formula:
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 1000 (for the Metric system);
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 12 (for the Inch system).
193
Feed
This field defines the feed rate of the tool. It defines three feed values:
• Feed XY – Feed rate in the XY plane.
• Feed Z – Feed rate in the Z direction.
• Feed Finish – Feed rate used for finish milling.
The Feed finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Feed XY and Feed
finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box is available so that you can edit
its value. When this check box is not selected, the specified Feed XY value is used for both rough
and finish machining.
For Drill and Tap tools, the Feed XY and Feed Finish parameters are not relevant.
The feed value can be defined in two types of units: F and FZ.
F is the default and it signifies Units per minute. FZ signifies Units per tooth and is calculated
according to the following formula:
FZ = F/(Number of Flutes * S)
For Tap tools, SolidCAM automatically calculates Feed Z (F and FZ) according
to the following formulas:
F=Spin Rate * Pitch
FZ=Pitch
Calculated values are displayed in Feed Z field. These values cannot be changed. The F/FZ buttons
enable you to check the parameter values.
3D Model - entry only
When this check box is selected, the defined Feed Z is used for vertical movements only.
When this check box is not selected, the defined Feed Z is used for all movements when the
Z-coordinate changes.
This option is available only for 3D Milling operations.
194
Diameter offset number
This parameter defines the number of the Diameter Offset Register of the current tool in the
Offset table of the CNC-machine.
Length offset number
This parameter defines the number of the Length Offset Register of the current tool in the Offset
table of the CNC-machine.
Second offset number
This parameter defines the register number of the upper cutting face offset, in the offset table of
the CNC-machine. This option enables SolidCAM to automatically take into account the minor size
differences between the defined tool and the one actually used for cutting the workpiece, if there
are any. You may choose not to use this option by clearing the check box.
This option is available only for T-Slot operations.
3.8.3 Tool Message page
In this page, you can enter text messages for the GCode.
The text strings entered in the

Message 1 – Message 5 fields appear
in the GCode file to help you easily
find information related to the tool
in the GCode file when converting
from one machine to another.
195
3.8.4 Tool Coolant page
This page enables you to choose the coolant options that will be used by default for the current tool.
When a tool is chosen for use in a specific operation, the default coolant options are automatically
applied to the tool use in this operation. The tool coolant options can be changed for each operation.
All the existing coolant types are listed with corresponding check boxes. When a check box is
selected, the related coolant option is used.
The coolant options available for use on the current CNC-machine, according to
the MAC-file settings, are marked with asterisks (*).
The Minimum Quantity Lubrication edit box is enabled only when the corresponding check box is
selected. The default value of this parameter is 0; the possible values are integers in the range from
0 to 99999. When the entered value is out of range, the error message is displayed.
When a new tool is defined, it is assigned the default tool coolant options according to the following
rules:
• When a tool is created in the Part Tool Table, it is assigned the options according to the
Part Settings.
• When a new tool is defined not in context of CAM-Part (all the tool tables except for the
Part Tool Table), it is assigned the options according to the SolidCAM Settings.
196
When a tool is defined in the Part Tool Table with the coolant options not supported by the current
CNC-machine, a notification message is displayed when you confirm the Part Tool Table dialog box.
The Yes button returns you to the Part Tool Table dialog box to edit the coolant options. The No
button confirms the defined coolant options and continues the process. The GCode will not be
generated for the tool coolant options that are not supported.
3.8.5 Holder page
This page enables you to choose the tool holder parts from the tool holders table (for more
information on the tool holders use, see topic 3.9).
When a holder is chosen for use with the current tool, the Use Holder check box is selected.
The tool adaptor is defined in the MAC file according to your CNC-machine.
If the tool adaptor is not described in the MAC file, the first tool adaptor
from the table is used.
Global holders table
The Tool Holders dialog box is displayed so that you can choose the tool holder components from
the Global holders table. The selected tool is copied to the Local holders table related to the current
CAM-Part, and its parameters are displayed in the Tool adaptor and Tool extension fields after you
confirm the Tool Holders dialog box.
197
Local holders table
This option enables you to choose the tool holder component previously used in the current
CAM-Part from the Local holders table. The Tool Holders dialog box is displayed. The parameters
of the selected tool are displayed in the Tool adaptor and Tool extension fields after you confirm
the Tool Holders dialog box.
Shape Edit
This option enables you to change dimensions of the selected clamping adaptor. The Tool Holders
dialog box is displayed. Click on the Edit page to modify the parameters of the tool holder.
3.8.6 Shape page
This page enables you to choose the shaped tool from the local/global shaped tools table (for more
information on the shaped tools use, see topic 3.10).
When a shaped tool is chosen for use with the current tool, the Use Shape check box is selected.
Global shaped tools table
The Shaped tools dialog box is displayed enabling you to choose the shaped tool from the Global
shaped tools table. The selected tool is copied to the Local shaped tools table related to the current
CAM-Part, and its parameters are displayed in the Group name and Shape name fields after you
confirm the Shaped tools dialog box.
198
Local shaped tools table
This option enables you to choose the previously used in the current CAM-Part shape tool from the
Local shaped tools table. The Shaped tools dialog box is displayed. The parameters of the selected
tool are displayed in the Group name and Shape name fields after you confirm the Shaped tools
dialog box.
Shape Edit
This option enables you to change dimensions of the selected shape tool. The Shaped tools dialog
box is displayed. Click on the Edit page to modify the parameters of the tool.
STL
This option enables you to export tools saved in the STL format. The Export Tool dialog box is
displayed.
Choose the required file and click on the Open button.
199
3.9 Tool Holding system
SolidCAM enables you to define a variety of tool holders to help
}
you check and prevent all possible collisions of the tool holding
system with the workpiece. This feature also enables you to see a
more realistic simulation in the SolidVerify mode. Tool
holding
system
The SolidCAM tool holder is defined by combining two
components. The first component is the tool adaptor mounted in
the spindle unit of the milling machine. The second component
may consist of different types of extensions and reductions like
collet chucks, arbors, shanks and any other components that you
may have.
Tool adaptor
Tool
Extensions and
reductions
3.9.1 Tool Holders dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define and operate your tool holders.
1. Click on the SolidCAM item in the

SolidWorks main menu.
2. Choose the Tool Holders item from

the Tool Library submenu.
or
1. Click on the corresponding button

on the SolidCAM Tool Library
Options toolbar.
200
The Tool Holders dialog box is displayed. A CAD

model file is also displayed so that you can define
the geometry of the new holders.
Tool holder component tables
The first list displayed above enables you to

define and manage your tool adaptors.
1. Right-click on an item name in the table.
2. Choose a command from the submenu.

• Add Holder Component
This option enables you to define the geometry of the new tool adaptor that will be
added to the table. The Holder Geometry dialog box is displayed.
• Generate
This option generates the sketch in the model file with the geometry of the selected
tool adaptor.
• Replace
This option enables you to replace the existing tool adaptor geometry with a new one.
The Holder Geometry dialog box is displayed. Select the new geometry.
• Delete
This option enables you to remove the tool adaptor part from the list.
• Rename
This option enables you to assign a new name to the tool adaptor.
• Copy
This option enables you to create a copy of the existing tool adaptor.
201
The second list enables you to define and manage groups of reductions and
extensions such as collet chucks, arbors, shanks, etc.
1. Right-click on the group/component name in the table.

2. Choose a command from the submenu.
• Add Group
This option enables you to create a group of components and to define separate
groups for tool holders components of the same type.
• Add Holder Component
This option enables you to define the geometry of the new component that will be
added to the current group of the parts table. The Holder Geometry dialog box is
displayed.
• Generate
This option generates the sketch in the model file with the geometry of the selected
tool holder.
• Replace
This option enables you to replace the existing holder geometry with a new one. The
Holder Geometry dialog box is displayed. Select the new geometry.
• Delete
This option enables you to remove the tool holder component from the list.
• Rename
This option enables you to assign a new name to the tool holder component or group.
• Copy
This option enables you to create a copy of the existing tool holder component.
202
Description
SolidCAM enables you to type a brief description of the tool holder component (reduction or
extension).
Show page
This page enables you to see a 3D model of the tool holder.
In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the tool holder.
Use the following combinations:
• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool holder
• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool holder
• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool holder
Edit page
This page enables you to edit the parameters of the selected tool holder component.
1. Select the tool holder component.

2. Switch to the Edit page to change the dimensions of the tool holder
component.
The interactive picture of the selected tool holder component is displayed. The parameters pages
are located below the picture.
SolidCAM divides the tool holder component into

solid segments like cylinders, cones or toruses. For
each solid primitive, SolidCAM determines the
actual dimensions. For more information on this
subject, see topic 3.9.3.
You can change the dimensions of each segment

with its specific page.
1. Select the segment on the

picture or through the tabs
below the picture.
2. Enter the new value of the
parameter.
203
Holder overhang length
The Holder overhang length parameter defines

the suggested distance between the tool adaptor
end face and the end face of the spindle. This
parameter is defined for each tool adaptor
Holder Overhang
component of the tooling system defined in Length
SolidCAM.
3.9.2 Tool Holder Geometry definition
The Holder Geometry Definition dialog box enables you to define the geometry
of the tool holder component.
Define chain
This option enables you to define a new chain of the component geometry.
The Chain Options dialog box is displayed. In the model file displayed, you can
sketch the shape of half the tool holder component and then define the chain.
The direction of the chain does not matter.
Note that the left side of the sketch is the bottom of

the tool holder component and the right side is the top.
Replace chain
This command enables you to replace a chain in the current chain geometry.
Edit chain
This command enables you to update a chain in the current chain geometry.
Reference point
This option enables you to define the reference point through which the rotation axis of the tool
holder component passes.
204
3.9.3 Tool Holder segments Diameter
SolidCAM determines three types of segments of holder or shaped tool

geometry.
Height
Cylinder
• Diameter
• Height
Angle
Cone
• Top Diameter Top Diameter
Height
• Bottom Diameter
• Height
• Angle
Bottom Diameter
The following rules apply when parameters are changed:

• Changing of the Angle causes Top Diameter change
• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Height change
• Changing of the Top Diameter causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Height causes Bottom Diameter change
Torus Top Diameter

• Top Diameter Start
• Radius Angle
• Start Angle Sweep

• Sweep
• Bottom Diameter Bottom Diameter Radius

• Changing of the Radius causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Top Diameter change
• Changing of the Start Angle causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Sweep Angle causes Top Diameter change
205
3.9.4 Using Tool Holders
SolidCAM enables you to choose the tool holder component from the Tool Holders dialog box.
Note that the tool adaptor section is inactive and you cannot select the
adaptor type. SolidCAM enables you to define the Tool adaptor in the MAC
file with the following string:
mac_holder = BT45
If the parameter is not defined in the MAC file, SolidCAM will use the first
adaptor from the list; the extenders are the same for all the adaptors.
If all your machines use the same type of adaptor, you do not need to define
the mac_holder parameter. In the table, drag and drop the requested
adaptor to the first place on the list.
In the Show area, SolidCAM displays the 3D model of the selected tool holder.
of the tool holder.

• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool holder
206
Holders Edit dialog box
The Holders Edit dialog box enables you to

edit the dimensions of the selected tool holder
component. This dialog box contains two tabs:
Show
This page displays a 3D model of the

selected tool holder component.
In the graphic area of this

page you can rotate, zoom
and pan the 3D model of
the tool holder.

• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool holder.
Edit
The interactive picture of the selected

tool holder component is displayed.
The tool holder component is divided
into segments such as cylinders, cones
and toruses.
The Parameters table below the

picture enables you to edit the
actual dimensions of the tool holder
component.
1. Select the holder’s

element on the
picture or through the
parameter pages.
2. Enter the new value of the parameter.
207
3.10 Shaped Tools
In addition to three built-in tool types, SolidCAM enables you

to use shaped tools. The geometry of these tools is defined with
a sketch. This way you can create your own database of tapered
mills, T-shaped mills, etc.
3.10.1 Shaped Tools dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define and operate your shaped
tools.
1. Click on the SolidCAM item in the

SolidWorks main menu.
2. Choose the Shaped tools item from

the Tool Library submenu.
or
1. Click on the corresponding button

on the SolidCAM Tool Library
Options toolbar.
The Shaped Tools dialog box is

displayed. A CAD model file is also
displayed so that you can define the
geometry of new shaped tools.
208
Tool list
This field displays the database of shaped tools defined in SolidCAM. With this list you can define
and manage shaped tools.
1. Right-click on any item in the browser

field of the Shaped Tools dialog box. The
following menu is displayed.
2. Choose the specific command from the

menu.
• Add Group
This option enables you to create a group of shaped

tools. You can define separate groups for shaped
tools of the same type.
• Add Tool
This option enables you to define the geometry of the newly shaped tool that will
be added to the current group of the shaped tools table. The Shaped Tool Geometry
• Generate
This option generates a sketch in the model file with the geometry of the selected
shaped tool.
• Replace
This option enables you to replace the existing shaped tool geometry with a new one.
The Shaped Tool Geometry dialog box is displayed. Select the new geometry.
• Delete
This option enables you to remove the shaped tool from the database.
• Rename
This option enables you to assign a new name to the selected shaped tool or group.
• Copy
This option enables you to create a copy of the selected shaped tool.
209
Description
You can place a brief description of the shaped tool here.
Show page
This page displays a 3D model of the selected shaped tool.
of the shaped tool.
• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool
• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool
• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool
Edit page
This page enables you to edit the parameters of

the selected shaped tool.
1. Select a shaped tool.
2. Switch to the Edit page to

change the shaped tool
dimensions.
The interactive picture of the selected shaped tool

is displayed. The parameters pages are located
below the picture.
SolidCAM divides the tool into solid segments like

cylinders, cones or toruses. For each solid primitive,
SolidCAM determines actual dimensions.
You can change the dimensions of each segment in its specific page.
1. Select the tool’s element on the picture or through the parameter pages.
2. Enter the new value of the parameter.
210
3.10.2 Shaped tool geometry definition
This dialog box enables you to define the geometry of the shaped tool.
Define chain
This option enables you to define a new chain of the shaped tool geometry.
The Chain Options dialog box is displayed. In the model file displayed, you can
sketch half of the shaped tool and then define the chain. The direction of the
chain does not matter.
Note that the left side of the sketch is the bottom of the
tool and the right side is the top.
Replace chain
This command enables you to replace a chain in the current chain geometry.
Edit chain
This command enables you to update a chain in the current chain geometry.
Reference point
This option enables you to define the reference point through which the rotation axis of the shaped
tool passes.
3.10.3 Shaped Tool segments

Diameter
SolidCAM determines three types of segments of the Shaped Tool
Geometry.
Cylinder
Height
• Diameter
• Height
211
Cone Angle
• Top Diameter
Top Diameter
• Bottom Diameter Height
• Height
• Angle
Bottom Diameter
• Changing of the Angle causes Top Diameter change.
• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Height change.
• Changing of the Top Diameter causes Bottom Diameter change.
• Changing of the Height causes Bottom Diameter change
Torus
• Top Diameter Top Diameter
Start
• Radius
Angle
• Start Angle
Sweep
• Sweep
• Bottom Diameter Bottom Diameter Radius
• Changing of the Radius causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Top Diameter change
• Changing of the Start Angle causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Sweep Angle causes Top Diameter change
212
3.10.4 Using Shaped tools

SolidCAM enables you to choose the specific shaped tool using the Shaped tools dialog box.
 In the Show area, SolidCAM displays the 3D model of the selected tool.
of the tool.
Shape edit
The Edit page of the Shaped tools dialog box

enables you to edit the dimensions of the selected
tool.
This dialog box contains two pages:
Show
This page displays a 3D model of the

selected tool.
213
of the tool.

Edit
The interactive picture of the selected shaped tool will be displayed. The tool is divided
into segments like cylinders, cones and toruses.
With the Parameters table below

the picture, you can edit the actual
dimensions of the shaped tool.
1. Select the tool’s element

on the picture or through
the parameter pages.
2. Enter the new value of

the parameter.
214
3.11 Spin and Feed defaults
SolidCAM enables you to assign for each tool a table that

contains different sets of spin and feed defaults to be used
with different work materials and different CNC-machines.
Choose the Work Materials item from the Tool Library

submenu.
Work Material
Speed/Feed
Defaults
or
Click on the corresponding button on the SolidCAM Tool Library Options toolbar.
The Work material dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box displays the list of available work

materials and enables you to set the tool related
parameters for each of them. You can edit the list
by adding new items and/or deleting the existing
ones.
215
Add/Delete page
This page enables you to operate the Work materials and define the Speed and Feed values for the
combination of the tool and work materials.
Right-click on an entry in the list and choose

a command from the menu.
• Add Work Material
This option adds a new Work

material.
• Delete
This option removes the selected

Work material from the list.
• Rename
This option enables you to assign a new name to the selected Work material.
Work material parameters
In this area, you have to assign the Speed and Feed values for the selected Tool/Work material
combination.
SolidCAM enables you to define the following values:
• V Signifies the Rough Material cutting speed in Meters/Minute in the

Metric system or in Feet/Minute in the Inch system.
• V fin Signifies the Finish Material cutting speed in Meters/Minute in the
Metric system or in Feet/Minute in the Inch system.
• FZ XY Feed rate in the XY plane, in Units per tooth.
• FZ Z Feed rate in the Z direction, in Units per tooth.
• FZ fin Feed rate used for finish milling, in Units per tooth.
216
Geometry 4
Whenever you work in CAD, you use 2D wireframe curves and 3D
models to describe real life parts. With SolidCAM, you can turn these
models into GCode for any CNC-machine.
A major step in the process from modeling to manufacturing is to tell
SolidCAM what and where you want to machine. In SolidCAM, existing
models are used to pass this information to the CAM module.
 Defining a new Geometry

 Drilling Geometry
 3D Model Geometry
 Wireframe Geometries
 Managing Geometries
 Geometry synchronization
4.1 Introduction
SolidCAM enables you to turn 3D models, 2D and 3D sketches built with SolidWorks into GCode
for any CNC-machine. In this process of modelling to manufacturing, geometries have to be
defined to determine where the model will be machined.
Geometry
3D Wireframe Drill
3D Model Profile
Faces Pocket
Working Area
Slot
Limit
Section
In SolidCAM, you can define geometries in the operation dialog box; this enables SolidCAM to
check if the geometry follows the necessary rules needed in this type of operation.
The geometries defined in SolidCAM are associative to the SolidWorks model. Any change made to
the model or sketch will propagate to referenced SolidCAM geometry.
218
4. Geometry
4.2 Drilling geometry
A Drilling geometry consists of one or more points (drilling

centers) that are defined by the X-, Y- and Z-values. They
can be selected on models using a number of different
methods.
4.2.1 Defining a Drilling geometry
In Drilling operations, you have to define the coordinate points where SolidCAM will execute the
drilling cycles. The powerful selection tool enables you to define and edit drilling positions quickly
and easily.
In the example above, the drilling points have been selected by their radius and Z-level on a 3D
solid model. With automatic selection the distance between two drilling points is optimized to
reduce machining time.
The button in the Geometry page of the Drilling Operation and

Thread Milling Operation dialog boxes enables you to choose the
mode of the geometry definition.
• The Plane mode enables you to define the geometry on
the plane/face parallel to the XY-plane of the current
CoordSys. Click on the Define button to display the Drill
Geometry Selection dialog box (see topic 4.2.3).
• The Around 4th axis mode enables you to select the drilling geometry wrapped on the
solid model around the 4th axis. The Define button displays the Around 4th Axis Drill
Geometry Selection dialog box (see topic 4.2.4).
Revolution axis
This method enables you to select

only the holes whose axis intersects
with the revolution axis of the
CAM-Part.
This method can be chosen when
the appropriate CoordSys that
enables the use of the 4th axis is
selected.
219
4.2.2 Editing a Drilling geometry
You can add or remove drilling positions from previously saved drilling
geometries.
1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on a Drill

geometry and choose the Edit option from the
menu.
2. The Drill Geometry Selection dialog box is

displayed. With the Select/Unselect option, you
can add or remove drilling points.
4.2.3 Drill Geometry Selection dialog box
For Drilling operations, you have to define the coordinate points where
SolidCAM executes the drilling cycles.
The powerful selection tool enables you to define and edit drilling positions
quickly and easily. Whenever you have to define a drilling geometry, the
Drill Geometry Selection dialog box is displayed.
Name
This option enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM
offers you the Default Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.
Configurations
This option enables you to switch between SolidWorks configurations.

Choose the necessary configuration for the geometry definition.
Select/Unselect drilling centers
Use the Select/Unselect mode to add and remove drilling positions from
the geometry. The Undo/Redo button cancels or restores the last selection.
220
4. Geometry
All the selected points are shown in the list at the bottom of the dialog
box. To remove a point from the list, right-click on its entry in the list and
choose the Delete option from the menu or choose the Delete All option
to remove all of the points.
Sequence of drilling positions
You can change the sequence of drilling positions in the list by dragging
and dropping.
You can also define and edit the sequence of

drilling positions in the Drilling Operation dialog
box (see topic 6.6.3).
Selecting modes (Select centers by)
You can add drilling positions to the current geometry using the following
options:
• Pick position. You can define drilling positions one by one

using the CAD point selection options. You can also type the
coordinates into the X,Y,Z dialog box and confirm each drilling
point by clicking on the Enter button.
1. Pick drilling center position – select the drilling

point.
2. Confirm the selection by clicking on the Enter

button.
• 3 Points on circumference. Usually, all curves and arcs of imported models are converted
into splines by the exporting CAD system. Due to the nature of spline curves or surface
boundaries, you cannot pick a center position like you could on a circle or arc. SolidCAM
calculates the center position of an arc defined by three points positioned on the spline
edges. This facilitates the selection of drilling centers on spline surfaces.
1. Pick the first point – pick a point on the circumference of the circle or arc
using the CAD point selection options or type the coordinates into the X,Y,Z
dialog box and confirm.
2. Pick the second point.
221
3. Pick the third point.
4. SolidCAM calculates the center of the three points and displays the drilling
position.
• Multi-positions. With this option, you can select model faces. SolidCAM automatically
determines all arcs/circles located on the selected face and defines the center points as
drilling positions. You can also use the mouse to drag a box over the area of the model.
SolidCAM automatically recognizes all arcs inside this area and defines the center points
as drilling positions.
The options you have selected in Filter affect the search when you
apply the Multi-positions command.
1. Check whether the Filter options you have selected are correct.
2. Click on the solid model face.
3. SolidCAM starts searching the selected face for drilling positions and
displays the search result.
• All circle/arc centers. SolidCAM is searching the solid model for arcs and circles and
adds all center points as drilling positions to the geometry.
The options you have selected in Filter affect the search result when
using the All command.
2. Click on the All circle/arc centers button to start the search.
3. SolidCAM starts searching the solid model for drilling positions and display
the search result.
222
4. Geometry
• CAD selection. SolidCAM enables you to select the drilling geometry with the SolidWorks
selection tools.
2. Click on the CAD selection button. The CAD selection button changes to
Resume.
3. Select the geometry with SolidWorks tools.

4. Click on the Resume button.
Selection filter (Filter for circle/arc selection)
You can use various filters to search circles/arcs on the model for drilling
positions. SolidCAM selects only the drilling positions with the attributes
set in the Filter options. You can select the following attributes:
• Include arcs. If this check box is selected, SolidCAM also

includes arc centers in the search for drilling positions. This
option can solve the occasional problem caused by imported
2D sketches that have circle entities cut to halves. It also enables
you to place drills in filleted corners.
• All circles. SolidCAM is searching the model for circles. Arcs or broken circles are not
included in the search result.
• By Radius. You can limit the search by defining a radius value. Only arcs and circles with
the given radius are selected and their center position is added to the drilling geometry.
You can define the radius value on the model. Click

on the By Radius button. In the Select radius by
dialog box, you can choose how you want to pick the
radius from your model. Select the corresponding
option and pick the radius from an existing circle/
arc or use the 3 Points on circumference definition.
• Z-Level. You can also limit the search to the Z-level. Only arcs
and circles on the given XY-plane are selected and their center
positions are added to the drilling geometry.
You can select the Z-level on your model. Click on the On Z-level button
and select a point on your model using the point selection options. The
Z-coordinate of the selected point is passed to the corresponding field.
223
Selected circles/arcs
• The No longer can be selected option enables you to select

drills that were not selected previously.
• The Show the center points option enables you to see the
drills picked in the previous drilling geometry.
4.2.4 Around 4th Axis Drill Geometry Selection dialog box
Geometry Name
This field enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM offers you the Default
Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.
Configurations
This field enables you to switch between SolidWorks configurations. Choose the necessary
configuration for the geometry definition.
Mode
You can switch between the Select/Unselect mode to define or remove drilling positions from the
geometry. All the selected drilling positions are shown in the list at the bottom of the dialog box.
224
4. Geometry
Type
Pick face
SolidCAM automatically selects all the holes starting from the selected face. The Full
holes only option
enables you to select only full diameter holes.
Pick hole
This mode enables you to select the holes around the 4th axis one by one.
225
Pick 3 points
This mode enables you to define the drilling geometry by selection of three points on
the holes edge.
CAD selection
SolidCAM enables you select the drilling geometry with the SolidWorks selection tools.
Drilling positions list
This list displays all the selected drilling positions, their angle around the 4th axis and location along
the revolution axis. The right-click menu is available.
• The Unselect/Unselect All options enable you to unselect

the drilling positions chosen for the operation.
• The Reverse option enables you to reverse the angle

value 180° around the 4th axis.
• The Sort by Angle/Coordinate options enable you to sort

the drilling positions in the list.
226
4. Geometry
4.3 3D Model geometry
Any surface, solid or a combination of surfaces and solids can be

selected as a 3D Model geometry. These models can be machined with
the 3D Milling operation in SolidCAM using various milling strategies.
4.3.1 Defining a 3D Model geometry
SolidCAM enables you to define the 3D Model geometry using the

3D Geometry dialog box.
Name
Configurations

Choose the relevant configuration for the geometry definition.
Type
This option enables you to define the type of objects that will be selected:
• Solid – to select solid objects only;
• Surfaces – to select surfaces only;
• Both – to select both surfaces and solids.
The default option is Both.
CAD selection
This option enables you to select the 3D geometry with the SolidWorks tools.
When an object is selected in the CAD selection mode, the CAD selection
button changes to Resume.
227
List of selected objects
You can select an object by clicking on it. When an object is selected, its
icon is displayed in the list in the bottom of the dialog box.
To unselect the object, click on it again or right-click on its icon in the

list and choose Unselect from the menu. To remove selection from all
objects in the list, click Unselect all.
4.3.2 Editing a 3D Model geometry
SolidCAM enables you to add, remove or replace entities in 3D

geometries that have been previously defined. Actual changes in
dimensions or topology of your model must be performed with
SolidWorks.
1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the

3D Model Geometry icon. Choose the Edit
2. The 3D Geometry dialog box is displayed.
3. The default Type settings enable you to add solids and surfaces to your model.
A click on a model object selects it; the next click removes the selection.
You can also unselect objects by right-clicking on their icons in the list and
choosing Unselect/Unselect all.
4. Confirm your selection by clicking on the button.
Use the CAD selection mode to select the geometry with Host
CAD tools.
228
4. Geometry
4.4 Wireframe geometry
Wireframe geometry has several subtypes, each with its own set of rules. All the subtypes use the
same interface to select the geometry.
Chain geometries are defined by picking the following entities: edges of models, 2D curves, 3D
curves, circles, lines and splines. Each chain is composed from one or more entities and defines an
open or closed contour.
Wireframe
Geometry
Profile Working Area Limit
Pocket Slot Section
4.4.1 Defining the Profile/Pocket geometry
Chains for Profile Milling (see topic 6.1) can be either open or closed. You can machine one or more
profiles in a single operation.
Closed chain Open chain
Chains for Pocket Milling (see topic 6.4) must be closed. The first chain defines the contour of the
pocket. All closed chains inside the first chain of each pocket are automatically treated as pocket
islands. Overlapping chains are milled as separate pockets, not as islands. To select multiple pockets
with islands, continue adding chains to the geometry.
Closed chain Closed chain with island
229
1. Select a chain to define the geometry.
2. Confirm the chain definition with the Apply button.
3. When you have completed the geometry definition,

confirm the Geometry Edit dialog box (see topic 4.5) with
the button.
4.4.2 Defining the Working Area

Working areas are used in 3D Milling (see topic 7.1) to constrain the machining
to certain areas of the 3D model. The working area is defined by a closed chain.
The chain can consist either of selected points or of 2D/3D edges, curves or
splines.
As in pocket geometries, working areas can be
defined with internal chains, so that the islands
are excluded from machining.
In this example, the working area has been
selected to machine the cavity. The external
chain defines the outside boundary of the area.
The internal chain excludes the parting surface
from machining.
2. Confirm the chain definition with the button.
3. When you have completed the geometry definition, confirm the Geometry
Edit dialog box (see topic 4.5) with the button.
4.4.3 Defining the Slot geometry

Chains for Slot Milling (see topic 6.9) can be either open or closed. You can machine one or more
slots in one operation.
1. Click on the edges or lines that make up your slot.
3. When you have completed the geometry definition,

confirm the Geometry Edit (see topic 4.5) dialog
box with the button.
230
4. Geometry
4.4.4 Defining the Section geometry
In the Slot (see topic 6.9) and Translated Surface (see topic 6.11) operations, you need to select
a Section geometry. These 2.5D operations can be defined using 2D geometries only. Use section
geometries to define depth profiles for Slot and Translated Surface operations.
Adding a Section geometry
1. In the Section Geometry dialog box, click on the

Add button in order to add chains.
The Chain options dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the edges or lines that make up your section and confirm by clicking
on the button.
3. Click on the Pick Point button to pick the reference point. This point defines
the level of the section relative to the upper level of the operation.
4. The Pick Z-Reference Point dialog box is displayed.

Pick the point on the model and confirm with
the button.
5. Confirm the Section Geometry dialog box with

the button.
231
Editing a Section geometry
You can edit the section or redefine the reference point of the section.

Section geometry and choose Edit from the
menu.
2. In the Section Geometry dialog box, click on

the Pick Point button to pick the reference
point again or on the Edit/Replace buttons
to edit or replace the section chain using the
Chain Selection dialog box.
3. Click on the button to confirm your changes

and close the dialog box.
Spline Approximation
This field enables you to define the Spline approximation tolerance for the
chain selection.
4.4.5 Defining the Limit geometry
A Translated Surface Operation (see topic 6.11) can be defined using 2D

geometries only. With Limit geometries you can define boundaries for this
operation.
3. When you have completed the geometry

definition, confirm the Geometry Edit
dialog box with the button.
Section Limit
232
4. Geometry
4.5 Editing chain geometries
To edit a chain, right-click on a geometry entry

in SolidCAM Manager and choose Edit from
the submenu.
The Geometry Edit dialog box is displayed.
4.5.1 Geometry Name
4.5.2 Configurations

Choose the relevant configuration for the geometry definition.
4.5.3 Adding a Chain
You can add a chain to the existing set of chains in the current geometry.
The new chain is added under the next sequential number.
1. Select the chain geometry using the Single entities (see topic 4.5.6) and
Automatic selection options (see topic 4.5.7).
or
Use the Add Multi-chain button to automatically define a number of chains (see topic
4.6).
233
4.5.4 Managing chains
All the selected chains are displayed in this dialog box. To edit a chain,
right-click on its entry and choose the appropriate command from the
menu.
Replace
This command enables you to update a chain in the current geometry.

The old chain is deleted and you can define a new chain.
Insert
This command enables you to insert a chain between two existing chains.
Edit
This command enables you to edit an existing chain. You can reverse the chain or undo the selection
steps to change the chain.
Reverse
This command enables you to reverse the direction of the chain.
Rename
This command enables you to rename the geometry chain.
Set CW/Set CCW
These commands enable you to set either clockwise or counterclockwise direction for the selected
chains.
Mark open edges
This option enables you to define the geometry for the Open Pocket machining by defining open
edges on the conventional wireframe geometry. The Mark Open Edges dialog box is displayed (see
topic 4.5.12).
This option is available only for Pocket operations (see topic 6.4).
Delete
This command enables you to delete a chain from the current geometry.
234
4. Geometry
4.5.5 Chain direction

Some of the operations in SolidCAM use the Direction arrow Start point
direction of the chain geometry to calculate the
tool path. In Profile Milling, for example, you
have to specify the tool side, which is relative to
the direction of the selected contour. The selected
edges or sketch segments are highlighted. The arrow
at the start point of the chain indicates the direction
of the chain.
Use the Reverse command to reverse the direction

of the chain during or after the chain selection, if
necessary.
4.5.6 Selecting single entities
You can define the geometry by selecting edges, sketch segments and
points on the contour. The following options are available:
• Curve
This option enables you to create a continuous geometry

chain by picking its successive entities. During the geometry
definition, the gaps between selected entities are detected.
They can be closed taking into account the Gap Minimum and
Gap Maximum tolerances (see topic 4.5.10).
235
1. Pick start curve – select the first entity (a wireframe element or a solid
model edge). SolidCAM determines the start point of the picked entity
closest to the picked position. The direction of the picked first chain
entity is defined automatically from the start point to the picked position.
Start point
Direction
Picked position
Geometry chain
2. Pick next curve – select the next curve that belongs to the chain. If the
detected gap is smaller than the Gap Minimum tolerance, it is being closed
automatically by extending/shortening chosen entities up to their virtual
intersection point. If the gap is greater than the Gap Minimum tolerance
but smaller than the Gap Maximum tolerance, a message is displayed
asking you if you want to close the gap. If you confirm the message, the
gap is being closed automatically by extending/shortening chosen entities
up to their virtual intersection point. If you cancel, the gap is not being
closed, and the last entity is being unselected. In case the gap is larger than
the Gap Maximum tolerance, the selected entity is not accepted, and the
3. To complete the selection, click on the button.
Associativity
SolidCAM keeps the associativity to any edge or sketch entity.

Any change made to the model or sketch automatically updates
the selected geometry.
236
4. Geometry
• Curve + Close corners
This option enables you to close the gaps between successive chain entities irrespective
of the Gap Minimum and Gap Maximum values by virtually extending the entities up
to their intersection.
First selected entity
Next selected entity
Splines and arcs are extended by lines tangential to the

arc/spline at its end point.
1. Pick start curve – select the first entity (a

wireframe element or the solid model edge).
2. Pick next curve – select the next curve that belongs to the chain. When
a gap is detected between these entities, the chain is continued by virtually
extending the selected entities, according to the direction of the first
entity, up to the virtual intersection point. If an intersection point cannot
be found by extending either one or both selected entities, the following
message is displayed:
In case several possible intersection points exist, the point

closest to the last vertex of the first selected entity is chosen.
Associativity
When the model used for the geometry definition is modified,

SolidCAM enables you to synchronize the geometry with
the updated model. During the synchronization SolidCAM
determines gaps areas created using the Curve + Close Corners
option and regenerates the extension of the chain elements so
as to close the gaps.
237
• Loop
This option enables you to select a loop by picking one of the model edges.
Loop #2
Loop #1
1. Pick an edge shared by two model faces. Two faces to which this edge
belongs are determined, and their loops are highlighted. The first
determined loop is considered to be the primary and is highlighted with
the yellow color. The second loop is considered to be the secondary and
is highlighted with the cyan color.
2. Click on the button. The primary loop (highlighted with the yellow
color) is chosen and displayed in the Chains list section; a closed geometry
chain is defined on this loop, and the secondary loop is rejected.
3. You can make a loop primary by clicking on it. Then you can switch
between both loops to choose the loop to be used for the chain definition.
Associativity
SolidCAM keeps the associativity to any edge or sketch entity.

Any change made to the model or sketch automatically updates
• Point to point
This option enables you to

connect the specified points
with a straight line.
238
4. Geometry
1. Pick the start point – pick a point on the model or enter the coordinates
into the XYZ dialog box.
2. Pick the next point – pick the following point (enter the coordinates
into the command line), and the chain element will be created from the
previous point up to this point.
Associativity
SolidCAM does not keep the associativity to any selected point.

SolidCAM saves the X-, Y- and Z-coordinates of the selected
points. Any change made to the model or sketch does not update
You cannot select a point that is not located on a SolidWorks
entity (if you need to select such a point, add a planer surface
under the model and select the points on that surface).
The following rules are applicable to virtual line selection with the Point to Point option:
1. When you select a virtual line between two edges, the line behaves as a spring.
Whenever the model is changed and synchronized, the geometry is updated
with the model.
2. When you select a sequence of several virtual lines, only the points connected
to model edges or sketch elements are updated, but all the other points stay
fixed at the defined X-, Y- and Z-positions.
• Arc by points
This option enables you to create a chain segment on an arc up to a specific point on
the arc. Third
Second
Point
Point
1. Pick the start point –
choose a point on the arc
where you want the chain
to start. If this is not the
first point on the chain, go First
to step 2. Point
2. Pick the next point – choose a point on the arc between the first point on
the arc and the third point on the arc.
3. Pick the end point – choose a third point on the arc where you want the
chain to end.
239
Associativity
SolidCAM does not keep the associativity to any selected arcs

by points. SolidCAM saves the X,- Y- and Z-coordinates of the
selected points. Any change made to the model or sketch does
not update the selected geometry.
4.5.7 Automatic selection
SolidCAM automatically determines the chain entities and closes the chain contour. The following
options are available:
Auto-to
The chain is selected by specifying the start curve, the direction of the
chain and the element up to which the chain is created. SolidCAM enables
you to choose any model edge, vertex or sketch entity to determine the
chain end.
When the end item is chosen, SolidCAM determines the chain according
to the rules of the chosen selection mode (Auto-general, Auto-Constant Z
or Auto-Delta Z). The chain selection is terminated when the selected end
item is reached.
End entity
Start entity Selected chain
If the chosen end item cannot be reached by the chain flow, the chain definition is terminated when
the start chain segment is reached. The chain is automatically closed.
End entity
Start entity Selected chain
240
4. Geometry
The confirmation message is displayed.
The Don't ask again check box enables you to avoid displaying the message after
it appears on the screen for the first time.
When the message box is confirmed, the message will not be displayed until you
switch this option back on in SolidCAM Settings.
The Auto-to option is useful if you do not want to define a closed chain, but
an open chain up to a certain element.
• Auto-general
SolidCAM highlights all entities connected to the last chain entity. You have to select
the entity along which you want the chain to continue.
• Auto-constant Z
This option identifies only entities on the same XY-plane with the previously selected
chain entity. You are only prompted to identify the next chain element when two
entities on the same Z-level are connected to the chain. The system tolerance for this
option can be set in the SolidCAM Settings.
241
• Auto-Delta Z
You are required to enter a positive and negative

Z-deviation into the Delta Z dialog box. Only entities
within this range are identified as the next possible entity
of the chain.
1. Pick start curve – select the start entity of

the chain.
2. Pick point in chain direction – indicate the chain direction by choosing

a point on the selected start entity of the chain.
3. You are prompted to select one of the possible curves if the system
detects that more than one entity can be the next element of the chain.
Indicate your choice.
4. When the system can close the chain, the confirmation

message is displayed. Choose Yes to accept. If you
answer No, you can continue the chain selection:
for example, undo the last step or cancel the chain
selection.
4.5.8 Chain buttons
• Undo step
This button enables you to undo the last selection of a chain element.
• Reverse
This button enables you to reverse the direction of the chain you are currently
working with. The direction is indicated by an arrow at the chain start point.
• Accept Chain
This button enables you to confirm the chain selection.
• Reject Chain
This button enables you to cancel the single chain selection.
242
4. Geometry
4.5.9 Options
Spline approximation
This field enables you to define the Spline approximation tolerance for the chain selection. Arcs on
the XY-plane are saved as arcs in the SolidCAM database; if you select an arc or spline that is not
on the XY-plane of the actual part Coordinate System, SolidCAM will do the following:
1. Project the arc or spline on the XY-plane of the active CoordSys and divide it into
segments according to the specified tolerance.
Tolerance
2. In order to reduce the number of Tolerance

Arc
segments, SolidCAM tries to fit arcs
on the segments generated in step 1
according to the specified tolerance Spline
multiplied by 3.
4.5.10 Gap control

This field enables you to change the gap tolerances for the current geometry during the geometry
definition.
The automatic selection function for chain geometries uses certain tolerances to decide whether
two consequent elements are connected or not. The behavior of this function depends on the gap
between the entities. The Gap minimum and Gap maximum parameters define the range of gap
tolerance values used for the chain geometry definition.
The default values of these parameters are inherited from the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.4.3).
In the Geometry Edit dialog box, you can edit the tolerance values during any stage of any chain
definition (for example, at start of chain definition or during the chain definition). During the
geometry chains definition, SolidCAM uses these parameters in order to decide whether to connect
two successive chain entities, if a gap between them is detected.
243
• If the gap between the edges is smaller than the specified Gap minimum value, the system
automatically continues the chain and closes the gap with a line.
• If the gap is in the range between the Gap minimum and Gap
maximum values, you are asked whether the gap should be
closed.
If you answer Yes, the gap is automatically closed with a line.
• If the gap is larger than the Gap maximum value, the

When the message is confirmed, the last selected chain entity

is rejected.
4.5.11 Add Multi-Chain

SolidCAM enables you to define a number of chains on the model by
selecting its elements. The program automatically creates chains from the
selected elements.
For more information on Multi-chain selection, see topic 4.6.
4.5.12 Mark Open Edges dialog box

This dialog box enables you to mark the open edges on already selected
pocket chains by picking them.
Closed edges Pocket geometry
Open edge
Open pocket
244
4. Geometry
Mark as
This section offers you the following selection modes:

• Open
When this option is chosen, picking a pocket geometry edge marks it as open.
• Wall
When this option is chosen, picking a pocket geometry edge marks it as closed (wall).
• Toggle
When this option is chosen, picking a closed edge marks it as open and the next
picking marks it as closed, and so on.
Select
This section offers you the following selection methods:

• Single entity
When this method is chosen, you can pick single entities in order to mark them as
open/closed.
• From/To entities
When this method is chosen, you can mark a segment of the pocket geometry by
picking the start and the end entities.
CAD Selection
This button enables you to perform the selection using the CAD tools.
The marking of open edges is available only for Pocket operations (see
topic 6.4).
245
4.6 Chains Selection dialog box
The Chains Selection dialog box enables you to define a number of chains on the model by
selecting its elements. The system automatically creates chains from the selected elements.
Mode
• Select – this mode enables you to select the elements to define

the chains.
• Unselect – this mode enables you to unselect the previously

selected elements.
Type
• Edges
SolidCAM enables you to choose model edges to build

a chain geometry.
• Text
SolidCAM enables you to choose text to build a chain

geometry.
• Faces
When this mode is chosen, SolidCAM enables you to pick

a model face. All the loops of this face are collected and
closed geometry chains are created. The Loops filter is
applied to the collected loops to exclude all those that do
not match the specified criteria.
Selection Filter
When this check box is selected, you can define a range of Z-levels as a filtering criterion using
the From and To edit boxes. The range can be defined either by typing the values in the edit boxes
or by direct picking on the solid model when the cursor is placed in the relevant edit box. The
Z-coordinate of the picked position is displayed in the edit box.
246
4. Geometry
Loops filter
When this check box is selected, the External loop External loop
and Internal loops check boxes are available.
When the External loop check box is selected, all the

internal loops are excluded from the picked face and
only the external loops are collected.
The Mark all edges of the loop as open check box

enables you to automatically mark all the edges of
the external loop of the selected face as open. Such
loops will be treated as open pockets, and the tool will
machine over the open edges.
This check box is available only for Pocket operations.
Internal loops
When the Internal loops check box is selected, all the
external loops are excluded from the picked face and
only the internal loops are collected.
When both the External loop and the Internal loops

check boxes are selected, the system collects both
internal and external loops from the picked face.
This section is enabled only

when the Faces mode is
chosen.
247
CAD selection
Click on this button to select the chains with the Host CAD tools.
Get All
This button enables you to select all of the model elements.
Sort Type
When there is more than one chain, this option enables you to determine the chain you would like
to start from. The Sort chains dialog box is displayed (see topic 4.6.2).
Chains direction
This option enables you to determine the cutting direction of each chain. The Chains Direction
dialog box is displayed (see topic 4.6.1).
View Chains
This option enables you to see the chains before they are created.
4.6.1 Chains Direction dialog box

The Chains Direction dialog box enables you to determine the direction of the chain.
Closed chains direction
This option enables you to determine the direction of closed chains.

• External chains direction
External chains are the outer borders of a pocket. You

can determine if you want the chain to go clockwise or
counterclockwise by choosing CCW or CW.
• Internal chains opposite
Internal chains are located within the boundaries of external

chains. Selecting this check box, you can have the internal
chains go in the direction opposite to that of the external
chains.
248
4. Geometry
Open chains direction
This option enables you to determine the direction of open chains.
• To center: the chain start point is the end of the chain furthest from the given center
point.
• From center: the chain start point is the end of the chain closest to the given center
point.
Selecting the Change center position check box enables you to choose the center position by
entering the X- and Y-values or by picking a point on the model.
If you do not change the center position, the CoordSys origin is used as center point.
4.6.2 Chain sorting
The Chain sorting option enables you to define the order in which you
want the chains to be created.
Sort by Distance
The chain closest to the last chain is chosen using two options:
• End to Start
The next chain is the chain with the start point closest to the
end point of the last chain.
• Start to Start
The next chain is the chain with the start point closest to the
start point of the last chain.
Sort by Value
The next chain that is closest to the last chain in a given direction is chosen.
• X start
The next chain is the one in the X-direction.

• Y start
The next chain is the one in the Y-direction.
249
• Reverse
The direction of the chains changes (X-start: Left to Right; Y-start: Upward or
Downward).
Polar Sort
Chains are selected around a specific point. If no point is chosen, the default point is the CoordSys
origin of the CAM-Part.
• CW Direction
The order of the chains is in clockwise direction around the point.

• CCW Direction
The order of the chains is in counterclockwise direction around the point.

• Change center position
The center position is chosen either by entering X-/Y-values or by picking a point on

the model.
• Start angle
This field controls the angle between the start point of the chain and the point of
rotation.
250
4. Geometry
4.7 Managing geometries
You can edit and manage your geometries using the Geometries header in the SolidCAM Manager
tree. Geometries used in machining operations can be edited through SolidCAM Manager: they
appear under the corresponding operation. SolidCAM also enables you to define and show
geometries inside the operation dialog box, so that you can select the geometry and machining
strategy in one step.
1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on a geometry

entry. The menu is displayed.
2. Choose a command from the menu.
Show
This command displays a 3D Model, Drill or Wireframe geometry

highlighted in the SolidWorks window.
To exit from this mode, click on the button in the displayed Show Geometry dialog box.
Edit
You can change or update the selected geometry. If the tool path of an operation was calculated
before, it is deleted. You have to recalculate the operation after making changes to the geometry.
Generate Sketch
This command enables you to generate a SolidWorks sketch containing chains of the current
wireframe geometry. The sketch is generated in the CAM component of the SolidCAM Part
assembly.
This command is available only for wireframe geometries.
Copy
This command enables you to duplicate the selected geometry. The

Geometry Name dialog box is displayed to define the name of the
geometry.
251
Copy as Working area
This command copies the selected geometry as a working area.
SolidCAM generates a SolidWorks sketch containing chains of the

selected geometry. The sketch will be generated in the CAM component
of the SolidCAM Part assembly. A new Working area geometry is
defined using this sketch.
The Geometry Name dialog box enables you to define the name of the geometry.
Delete/Delete All
You can delete geometries not used in any machining operation. These geometries are displayed
under the Geometries header. Any geometry used in operations appears under the respective
operations only and cannot be deleted unless the operation is deleted as well.
The Delete all command is only available when you right-click on the
Geometries header. It deletes all geometries not currently used in any
machining operation. Whenever you click on a single geometry, the Delete
command is available for the selected geometry only.
Synchronize/Check synchronization
When the SolidWorks model is updated, you can check the compliance of the SolidCAM geometry
to the updated SolidWorks model. If the SolidCAM geometry is not synchronized with the
SolidWorks model, you can synchronize it.
4.7.1 Synchronization of the Wireframe geometry
SolidCAM Wireframe geometry is based on the SolidWorks model elements such as edges, vertices
or sketches.
SolidWorks Model SolidCAM Geometry

based on the
SolidWorks Model
252
4. Geometry
When the SolidWorks model is changed, SolidCAM uses the synchronization algorithm to
synchronize the geometry with the updated SolidWorks model.
SolidWorks Model has changed, SolidCAM Geometry

SolidCAM Geometry has to is updated
be updated
Synchronization check SolidCAM Geometry
SolidCAM marks all SolidWorks entities used for the

Tag Tag
geometry definition with tags. The list of these tags is
saved. The tags enable you to establish a connection
between the SolidCAM geometry and the SolidWorks
Tag Tag
model entities. The relations between the tagged
SolidWorks geometry and SolidCAM geometry is saved
in the geometry file (*.gem).
SolidCAM enables you to check the synchronization

status automatically or manually depending on the
SolidWorks Model
Synchronization settings (see topic 12.5).
When you need to check the synchronization status of the geometry

manually, do the following:
1. Right-click on an operation or geometry

entry in SolidCAM Manager.
2. Choose the Check Synchronization item

from the menu.
SolidCAM checks all the geometry entities in the following method:

• The SolidWorks model elements are compared
geometrically to the relevant entities in the SolidCAM
geometry file.
• If a misfit is determined between the SolidWorks model and the SolidCAM geometry,
this geometry is marked with the synchronization mark .
253
• If there is a gap or overlapping entities, the geometry is also marked with the
synchronization mark .
The synchronization mark points to the problematic geometries and enables you to solve
the problems with the geometries that were not synchronized.
Geometry synchronization
When the geometry has to be synchronized (this geometry is marked with the synchronization
mark), do the following to synchronize it:
1. Right-click on a geometry entry in SolidCAM Manager.
2. Choose Synchronize from the menu.
or
254
4. Geometry
1. Right-click on an operation entry in SolidCAM Manager.
The Synchronize & Calculate command enables you to synchronize

the operation geometries and calculate the tool path.
All of the geometries used in the operation are synchronized.
During the synchronization, SolidCAM tries to update the SolidCAM geometry according to the
updated SolidWorks model.
SolidCAM finds the updated edges according to the saved tags data and tries to re-create the
geometry chain. SolidCAM recognizes gaps between geometry entities and closes them.
255
SolidCAM closes the gaps by using the smallest number of entities. There are two methods of
closing gaps:
• If the original geometry entities are in the

SolidCAM
same plane with the Coordinate System, Geometry
SolidCAM tries to close the gap with
entities in the same plane only.
• If the original geometry entities are not
on a plane, SolidCAM is using a random
search algorithm that closes the gap in
the geometry. This search algorithm can SolidWorks
Model
find different solutions to close the same
gap; this depends on the sequence of the
entities involved in the loops that connect Gap area
to the geometry entity.
The geometry that cannot be updated is marked with an exclamation

mark .
You have to edit such geometries and manually update the problematic
chains.
SolidCAM does not find new chains that are

not directly connected to old chains. The
number of chains in the geometry remains
the same. For example, SolidCAM does not
find a new island in a pocket geometry.
4.7.2 Synchronization of the 3D Model geometry
The calculation of the tool path for the 3D Model

geometry is based on a facet model produced for
the whole SolidWorks model.
SolidWorks Model SolidCAM Geometry
When SolidCAM determines that the solid has

changed, it does not need to detect what has
changed; it simply recalculates the facet model.
Updated SolidWorks Updated SolidCAM

Model Geometry
256
4. Geometry
Synchronization check
SolidCAM enables you to check the synchronization status by

comparing the SolidWorks model and the SolidCAM 3D Model
geometry. You can check the synchronization status automatically
or manually, which depends on the Synchronization settings.
When you need to check the synchronization status of the geometry

manually, do the following:
1. Right-click on an operation or geometry

entry in SolidCAM Manager.
2. Choose the Check Synchronization item

from the menu.
If a difference is found, SolidCAM marks the geometry and related

operations with the synchronization mark .
Geometry synchronization
When the geometry has to be synchronized (the one marked with the
synchronization mark), do the following to synchronize it:
1. Right-click on a geometry entry in SolidCAM

Manager.
or
257
1. Right-click on an operation entry in
SolidCAM Manager.
The Synchronize & Calculate

command enables you to
synchronize the operation
geometries and calculate the tool
path.
All the SolidCAM geometries used in the operation are

synchronized.
During the synchronization, SolidCAM recalculates the facet
model.
4.7.3 Boolean operations

SolidCAM enables you to perform a number of boolean operations
between working area geometries and boundaries.
Choose the Boolean operations command from the right-click
menu on the Geometries header.
The Boolean Operations dialog box is displayed.
Coordinate System
This field enables you to choose the Coordinate System where the source
geometries for the boolean operation are located. The resulting combined
geometry is created in the chosen coordinate system.
Configurations
This field enables you to choose the SolidWorks configuration where the
source user-defined geometries for the boolean operation are located.
258
4. Geometry
Operation type
This field enables you to define the type of the boolean operation. The following boolean operations
are available:
Unite Source
geometries
This option enables you to unite selected geometries into a

single one. All internal segments are removed; the resulting
geometry is outer profile.
Geometry 1 Geometry 2
Resulting
geometry
Merge
Source
geometries
This option enables you to merge a number of geometries,
created by different methods, into a single one.
Resulting
geometry
Geometry 3
Subtract
Source
geometries
This option enables you to perform subtraction of two
geometries. The order of the geometry selection is
important; the second selected geometry is subtracted from
the first selected one.
Resulting geometry
259
Intersect Source
geometries
This option enables you to perform intersection of two

geometries.
Resulting geometry
The Accept button performs the command chosen in the Geometries section.
Geometries
The Geometries section displays all the available working area

geometries classified by the definition method.
This section enables you to choose the appropriate geometries for the
boolean operation. Select the check box near the geometry name in
order to choose it for the boolean operation.
When you click on the Accept button, the resulting geometry is

displayed in the list under the Combined 2D header. SolidCAM enables
you to edit the name of the created geometry. The newly created
geometry is automatically chosen for the further boolean operation.
The resulting combined geometry is always

a 2D geometry even if one or more of the input
geometries is a 3D boundary.
The right-click menu available on the list items enables you to perform the following operations:
• The Accept button enables you to perform the chosen

boolean operation with the selected geometries.
• The Unselect all option unselects all the chosen
geometries.
• The Delete option enables you to delete combined
geometries generated in the current session of the
Boolean Geometries dialog box.
260
Operations 5
In SolidCAM, an operation is a single machining step. A workpiece is
usually manufactured using several machining steps and technologies.
For each of these steps you can define a separate operation.
An operation can be very complex, but always uses one tool, one
major geometry and executes one machining type, e.g. 3D Milling,
Profile Milling or Drilling. You can edit any single machining operation,
change the operation sequence and generate the GCode, combine
and split the operation list of your CAM-Part.
 Adding an operation
 Operation dialog box interface
 Working with operations
 Operation Transformations
 Fixture
5.1 Adding an operation
This command enables you to add a new operation to your CAM-Part. In SolidCAM, an operation
is a single machining step. Normally, you manufacture a workpiece using several machining steps
and technologies. For each of these steps you can define a separate operation. An operation can be
very complex, but always uses one tool, one major geometry and executes one machining type, e.g.
3D milling, profile milling or drilling.
You can edit any single machining operation,

change the operation sequence and generate
the GCode, combine and split the operation
list of your CAM-Part.
1. In SolidCAM Manager,
right-click on an operation.
2. Move to the Add Operation

submenu and choose the
type of operation you want
to define.
• When you add an operation by right-clicking on the Operations header,

the new operation is added at the end of the operation list.
• When you add an operation by right-clicking on an existing operation,

the new operation is inserted after the selected operation.
262
5. Operations
5.2 SolidCAM Operation Interface
SolidCAM operation dialog box interface has the following common areas:
Operation name Template
Technology
Geometry parameters Info

Tool parameters
Machining levels
parameters
Technological parameters
Advanced Technology
Link parameters Parameters page

Miscellaneous parameters
Parameter illustration
Operation buttons
Technology
The Technology box displays the chosen technology according to the operation type.
Operation name
The Operation name box displays the operation name and enables you to choose
another already existing operation as a template.
Template
The Template box enables you to save the current operation as a template and to load
another already existing template.
Info
By clicking on this icon, you can display a window that contains the information
summary of the operation. In this window, the name of the operation, the Tool data
and the Milling levels data are listed.
263
Parameters pages and illustration
The list on the left side of the dialog box enables you to switch between the following
parameters pages:
• Geometry
This page enables you to define the geometry for the operation.
• Tool
This page enables you to define the tool for the operation.
• Levels
This page enables you to define the machining levels for the operation.
• Technology
This page enables you to define the technological parameters such as offsets,
roughing and finishing data, depth type, etc.
The Advanced Technology page contains the infrequently used parameters and
options whose definition is required only in particular machining cases.
• Link
This page enables you to define the way how the tool approaches the material and
retreats away.
• Misc. parameters
This page contains the miscellaneous parameters such as Message, Extra

parameters,
and so forth.
In the bottom left corner of the dialog box, the illustration of a currently selected
interface element is displayed to facilitate the definition of the corresponding parameter.
Operation buttons
At the bottom, the operation buttons are located. These buttons enable you to save
and calculate the operation, start its simulation, etc.
264
5. Operations
5.2.1 Operation name
When you define a geometry and a tool, SolidCAM automatically enters the default name
(e.g. 3DR_Profile_T1) based on the operation type, geometry name and tool number.
3DR_Profile_T1
Operation type Geometry

Tool
abbreviation name
You can edit the operation name, if necessary.
SolidCAM uses the following operation type abbreviations for Milling operations:
2.5D Milling
• FM_ — Face Milling

• F_ — Profile
• F3D_ — Contour 3D
• P_ — Pocket
• D_ — Drilling
• THM_ — Thread Milling
• S_ — Slot
• TSlot_ — T-Slot
• TS_ — Translated Surface
• PR_ — Pocket Recognition
• DR_ — Drill Recognition
265
3D Milling
• 3DR_ — 3D Roughing
• 3DS_Lin — Linear 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Offs — Offset cutting 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Sp — Spiral 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Cir — Circular Pocket 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_CZ — Constant Z 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Pen — Pencil Milling 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_CS — Constant Step Over 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Lin — Linear 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Offs — Offset cutting 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Sp — Spiral 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Cir — Circular Pocket 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_CZ — Constant Z 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Pen — Pencil Milling 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_CS — Constant Step Over 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DD — 3D Drilling operation
• 3DE — 3D Engraving operation
When you add a new operation, you can use an existing operation as a template for the new
operation. All values of the template operation are copied and you only need to edit some varying
parameters, e.g. select another geometry or redefine the surface offset value.
Use the Operation name list to select the template operation.
266
5. Operations
5.2.2 Template
SolidCAM enables you to create operation templates: once defined, an operation can be saved as a
template and its data can be loaded into a new operation of the same type. The saved template data
does not include the geometry which must be defined for each operation separately after loading
the template. The saved template can optionally include the tool data.
This section provides you with the following functionality:
Saving Templates
The Save Template button enables you to save all of the current operation data (except for the
geometry) as a template.
The Template Manager dialog box is

displayed. This dialog box enables you to
define a name for the template. The default
location offered by SolidCAM is defined in
the SolidCAM Templates Directory section of
the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.9).
The Operation Templates table displays all
operation templates located in the SolidCAM
Templates Directory, their types and the
technology.
The Include tool data check box enables you

to include the tool data in the saved template.
The saved tool data is used during the further
template loading.
267
Enter the name in the Template edit box to save a new template or choose an existing template from
the table to overwrite it and click on the OK button. If a template with the defined name already
exists in the current location, SolidCAM displays the following warning message:
When you confirm this warning by clicking on the Yes button, the existing template is being
overwritten with the new one. When you click on the No button, the Save template dialog box is
displayed again so that you can choose a different name for the template.
Saving an operation as a template using SolidCAM

Manager
You can also save an existing operation as operation

template by right-clicking on the operation name in
SolidCAM Manager and choosing Create Template
from the menu.
This command displays the Template Manager dialog

box that enables you to save the template data as
described above.
268
5. Operations
Loading Templates
The Load Template button enables you to load an already existing template into the current
operation. The Template Manager dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box displays only the templates of type/technology suitable for the current operation.
Choose the required template and click on the OK button. When the template is loaded, all the
current operation data is substituted with the data from the template.
When a template is loaded into the operation, its name is displayed in the edit box in the Templates
section.
When you place the mouse cursor over the edit box, the full path to the loaded template is displayed
in a pop-up message.
When any of the operation data is modified after loading the template, the template name in the
edit box is marked with asterisk (*).
269
Tool search
When an operation template is loaded, SolidCAM checks for tool data in the template. If the tool
data was saved in the operation template, the tool search is performed as follows:
• When a tool used in the operation template is defined as Permanent, the tool search
is performed according to the tool number only. First, the tool search is performed in
the Part Tool Table. If the tool with the defined number is not found in the Part Tool
Table, additional search is performed in the Current Tool Table. If a tool with the defined
number is found in the Current Tool Table, it is being copied into the Part Tool Table and
chosen for the operation. If it is not found in the Current Tool Table, the following error
When you confirm this message, the operation dialog box is displayed again so that you
can define a tool.
• When the tool in the operation template is not defined as Permanent, the tool search
is performed according to the tool parameters defined on the Tool search page of the
SolidCAM Settings dialog box. The tool search is performed in the Part Tool Table. If a
tool with the same definition as that used in the template is not found in the Part Tool
Table, additional search is performed in the Current Tool Table. If a suitable tool is found
in the Current Tool Table, it is being copied into the Part Tool Table and chosen for the
operation. If it is not found in the Current Tool Table, a new tool with the parameters
defined in the template is being added to the Part Tool Table and automatically assigned
the first not used tool number.
When you load a template with tool data into an operation in which the tool is already
defined, the following message is displayed:
When you confirm this message, SolidCAM replaces the tool defined in the operation
with the tool defined in the template.
270
5. Operations
Creating a new operation from an existing template
SolidCAM enables you create a new operation from

an existing template. Right-click on an operation entry
in SolidCAM Manager and choose Add Operation from
Template from the menu.
The Template Manager dialog box is displayed. This dialog

box enables you to choose an existing template. In this case,
the Template Manager dialog box displays all the templates
existing in the SolidCAM Templates Directory regardless of
their type/technology.
When you confirm the dialog box by clicking on the OK

button, the Template Common Data dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box enables you to define a Coordinate System,
a Geometry and Upper/Lower levels for the inserted
operation.
• The CoordSys combo box enables you to define

the Coordinate System for the operation. The
combo box enables you to choose the relevant
Coordinate System from the list. The button
enables you to define a new Coordinate System
using the CoordSys Manager dialog box.
• The Geometry combo box enables you to define the geometry for the operation by
choosing the relevant geometry from the list.
• The Upper Level and Lower Level edit boxes enable you to define the machining levels
for the operation. The corresponding buttons enable you to pick the levels on the model.
271
When you confirm the dialog box by clicking on the OK button,
SolidCAM inserts the chosen operation template into the SolidCAM
Manager tree, and its dialog box is displayed so that you can check and
edit its parameters, if necessary.
If the initial operation template used for the operation definition did
not contain tool data, the inserted operation has no tool defined and its
definition is therefore incomplete. Incomplete operations are marked
with red color in SolidCAM Manager.
Filtering Templates
When you have a large number of templates stored in your database,

it might be time-consuming to navigate through the whole list and
choose the necessary ones for particular machining tasks.
SolidCAM provides you with the possibility to filter the defined templates. In the Operation
Templates table
of the Template Manager dialog box, you can define the filtering of table items.
Template filtering can be performed by

entering the first letters in the Name/
Operation type/Technology cell and then
clicking on the corresponding button.
272
5. Operations
SolidCAM displays all items that include these letters at the beginning.
Template filtering can also be performed by selecting items in the table as filtering criteria. Click on
any row in the table to select a template. The Name, Operation type and Technology cells will be
automatically filled according to the template you have selected as a potential criterion for filtering.
Then click on the button in the column you want to consider as the filtering criterion (Name,
Operation type or Technology).
Filtering is performed according to the specified filter of the selected column.
To reset the defined filtering, click on the button at the bottom of the Template Manager dialog
box. The results of the previous filtering are displayed in the table until you click on this button.
273
Process Template
A Process Template is a template of a series of operations that execute a specific machining task.
This functionality enables you to store a complete chain of technological operations as a template
and apply it for the machining of similar cases.
Defining Process Templates
To create a process template, select in SolidCAM

Manager all the names of operations intended to be
included in the template, right-click and choose Create
Template.
The Template Manager dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box enables you to save the chosen

operations as a process template.
All the process templates existing in the SolidCAM

Templates Directory are displayed. The process
templates names are listed in the Template Folders
section under the Process Templates header. The
content of the templates is displayed in the Operation
Templates table.
The Include tool data check box enables you to include

the tool data into the saved process template.
274
5. Operations
To save the selected operations as a new process template, enter a name in the Process name edit
box or choose an existing process template from the Process Templates list and confirm by clicking
on the OK button. If a process template with the defined name already exists in the current location,
the following warning message is displayed:
When you confirm this warning by clicking on the Yes button, the existing process template is
being overwritten with the new one. When you click on the No button, the Template Manager
dialog box is displayed again so that you can choose a different name for the process template.
The Template Manager dialog box provides you with the capability to create
an empty process template and copy a number of operation templates from
different process templates into this empty one.
Using Process Templates
SolidCAM enables you to insert operation templates

contained in a process template into a CAM-Part and
convert them into regular SolidCAM operations. To insert
a process template into the CAM-Part, right-click on the
Operations header or on selected operations in SolidCAM
Manager and choose Add Operation from Process Template.
This command displays the Template Manager dialog box

that enables you to choose an existing process template to
be inserted.
275
During creation of a new operation from the process template, SolidCAM displays the CoordSys
selection dialog box that enables you to define a Coordinate System, a Geometry and Upper/Lower
levels to be common for the created operations.
• The CoordSys combo box enables you to define the

common Coordinate System for all the operations
of the process template. The combo box enables
you to choose the relevant Coordinate System from
the list. The button enables you to define a new
Coordinate System using the CoordSys Manager
dialog box.
• The Geometry combo box enables you to define the common geometry for all the
operations of the process template. The combo box enables you to choose the relevant
geometry from the list.
• The Upper Level and Lower Level edit boxes enable you to define the common machining
levels values for all the operations of the process template. The corresponding buttons
enable you to pick the levels on the model.
The defined geometry and levels data will be used only in the operations in
which these data are relevant.
Managing operation/process templates
To manage your operation and process templates, choose the

Manage Templates command in the SolidCAM menu or click on the
corresponding button on the SolidCAM General toolbar.
276
5. Operations
The Template Manager dialog box is displayed.
The Template Folders section contains the Templates and Process Templates headers.
When the Templates header is selected, all the operation templates located in the SolidCAM Template
Directory are displayed in the Operation Templates table.
All the process templates located in the SolidCAM Template Directory are listed under the Process
Templates header. When a process template is selected, all the operation templates included in it are
displayed in the Operation Templates table.
Managing process templates
SolidCAM enables you to manage the process templates with the right-click menu available on the
Process Templates header or on each process template.
This menu provides you with the following commands:

• New Process Template
This command enables you to create a new empty

process template.
• Rename
This command enables you to rename an existing

operation template.
• Delete
This command enables you to delete an existing operation template.
277
Managing operation templates
SolidCAM enables you to manage operation

templates with the right-click menu available
on the Operation Templates table entries. This
menu is available for the standalone operation
templates located in the SolidCAM Template
Directory and for operation templates included
into process templates.
• Edit
This command enables you to load the chosen operation template for editing. When
a template is loaded, SolidCAM displays the appropriate operation dialog box with the
template data.
SolidCAM enables you to edit all the parameters and options of the template, except
for the geometry and coordinate system.
The Save Template button enables you to save the template data using the Save
template dialog box.
• Rename
This command enables you to delete the active operation template.
• Create Process Template
This command enables you to create a new process template; the current operation
template is added to this process.
278
5. Operations
• Copy
This command enables you to copy the current operation template into the clipboard.
• Paste
This command enables you to paste the operation template from the clipboard. The
operation template is inserted into the chosen location (either into the active process
template or as a standalone operation template into the into the SolidCAM Template
Directory).
• Delete
This command enables you to delete the active operation template.
5.2.3 Info
The button at the right side of the operation dialog box

displays a window that contains the information summary of the
operation. In this window, the name of the operation, the Tool data
and the Milling levels data are listed.
279
5.2.4 Operation buttons
Save
All settings and parameters of the operation are saved on your disk. The tool path, however, is not
calculated. This button enables you to postpone the calculation or to calculate operations in batches.
Use the corresponding commands of SolidCAM Manager to calculate the operation later on.
In the operation list, all operations that have not been calculated are marked
with asterisk (*).
Save & Calculate
All settings and parameters of the operation are saved on your disk and the tool path
is calculated. After the calculation has been performed, you can exit from the operation dialog box
and return to SolidCAM Manager.
There is no need to recalculate an operation if its changed parameters do not affect the tool path.
These operation parameters include:
• Tool Outside Holder Length
• Tool Cutting Length
• Holder
• Operation name
• Message
• Extra parameters
• Feed
There is no need to recalculate all the operations if the CNC-machine is changed, as long as the
following MAC parameters are not changed:
• compensation
• comp_by_zero_tool
• comp_arc_arc
• comp_arc_line
• comp_line_line
• comp_x_start
280
5. Operations
• min_delt_arc_rad
• zero_value
• gen_procs
• abs_zero_chng
• full_gcode
• init_cpos
• set_dir
• loops
• eps_line
• next_angle
For more information on these parameters, refer to SolidCAM GPPTool User Guide.
Simulate
This button performs simulation of the cutting process.
If you click on this button to simulate an operation that was not previously calculated, the following
When you click on the Yes button, SolidCAM performs calculation of the operation tool path and
then continues to simulation.
When you click on the No button, SolidCAM closes the message box and returns the focus to the
operation dialog box, enabling you to perform calculation manually.
The Don’t ask again option enables you to automatically choose the Yes option, without displaying
this prompt, next time a similar situation occurs.
281
GCode
This button generates the temporary GCode file for the operation. The GCode file is generated
into the CAM-Part folder regardless of the defined settings. The generated GCode file is opened
in the text editor determined by SolidCAM Settings. When you close the operation dialog box, the
file is removed.
To save the temporary GCode file, use the text editor functionality.
If you click on this button to generate the GCode for an operation that was not previously calculated,
the following message is displayed:
When you click on the Yes button, SolidCAM performs calculation of the operation tool path and
then continues to GCode generation.
When you click on the No button, SolidCAM closes the message box and returns the focus to the
operation dialog box, enabling you to perform calculation manually.
The Don’t ask again option enables you to automatically choose the Yes option, without displaying
this prompt, next time a similar situation occurs.
Save & Copy
This button saves the current operation data and automatically creates a new operation with the
same parameters. The new operation is automatically opened for editing.
Using the Save & Copy functionality, you can quickly create a new similar operation where most
parameters are identical.
Exit
This button enables you to close the operation dialog box and return to SolidCAM Manager. Any
changes you made in the operation dialog box are lost if you exit the operation without prior saving.
282
5. Operations
5.2.5 Calculator
SolidCAM enables you to use a built-in calculator to calculate
parameter values. The Calculator is available for each numeric
parameter either by choosing the appropriate command from the
right-click menu or by pressing the F2 key.
The Calculator dialog box enables you to enter any expression (Expression edit box) and calculate
its value (Result edit box).
You can use the following symbols in the Expression edit box:
• Addition (+)
• Subtraction (-)
• Multiplication (*)
• Division (/)
Parentheses are acceptable.
When multiplication and division occur together in an expression, each operation is calculated as
it occurs from left to right. When addition and subtraction occur together in an expression, each
operation is calculated in order of appearance from left to right. Parentheses can be used to override
the order of precedence and force some parts of an expression to be evaluated before others.
Operations within parentheses are always performed before those outside. Within parentheses,
operator precedence is maintained.
SolidCAM enables you to use a set of standard mathematical functions like sine, cosine, etc. in
your formulas. Functions can be either written manually in the Expression field or chosen from the
Functions list.
The Functions button enables you to display/hide the

Functions list.
Example:
To calculate the value of the following formula:

152.8 / 2
tan (63/2
you have to write the expression: (158.8/2)/(tan(63/2))
The result (~129.56) is displayed in the Result field.
To insert the calculated result into the field from where the calculator was started, click the OK
button in the Calculator dialog box.
283
SolidCAM standard functions
sqrt()
Returns a value specifying the square root of a number.
sin()
Returns a value specifying the sine of an angle.
cos()
Returns a value specifying the cosine of an angle.
tan()
Returns a value specifying the tangent of an angle.
abs()
Returns a value of the same type that is passed to it specifying the absolute value of a
number.
The absolute value of a number is its unsigned magnitude. For example,

and abs(1) both return 1.
abs(-1)
acos()
Returns a value specifying the arccosine of a number.
asin()
Returns a value specifying the arcsine of a number.
atan()
Returns a value specifying the arctangent of a number.
atan2(,)
Returns a value specifying the arctangent of quotient first and second arguments.
284
5. Operations
dist(,) and ang(,)
Returns polar coordinates: distance and angle (in radians) of the point defined in
Cartesian coordinates.
dist(X,Y)
(X,Y)
ang(X,Y)
pow(,)
Returns a value of the first argument raised to the power of the second argument. For
example, pow(2,3) returns 8.
log10()
Returns a value specifying the base-10 logarithms of a number.
ln()
Returns a value specifying the natural logarithm of a number.

sum3( , , )
Returns the sum value of three arguments.
int()
Returns the integer portion of a number.
rad()
Converts degrees to radians.
deg()
Converts radians to degrees.
285
5.2.6 Geometry page
This page enables you to choose the appropriate Coordinate System and to define the Machining
Geometry for the operation.
CoordSys
This button enables you to define a Coordinate System for the operation.
You can choose the Coordinate System for the operation by picking it in the list or by clicking on
the CoordSys button and selecting chains on the graphic screen. The CoordSys Manager dialog
box is displayed. Together with this dialog box, SolidCAM displays the location and axes orientation
of all Coordinate Systems defined in the CAM-Part.
286
5. Operations
The Coordinate System can be chosen from the list or picked

directly on the model.
To get more information about the Coordinate System, right-

click on its name in the list and choose the Inquire option
from the menu. The CoordSys Data dialog box is displayed.
After the Coordinate System selection, the model is rotated

to the appropriate orientation.
The selection of the Coordinate

System must be the first step in the
operation definition process.
After the Coordinate System has been chosen, define the

main geometry for the operation.
If you have already defined geometries for this CAM-Part, you can choose a geometry from the list.
When you choose a geometry from the

list, the related Coordinate System is being
chosen automatically.
Define
This button enables you to define a new geometry for the operation.
Show
This button displays the model geometry in the SolidWorks window.
Browse
The button enables you to visualize the

geometries during the selection process.
Clicking on this button displays the Browse

Geometries dialog box that lists all the
geometries of the type suitable for the
chosen operation.
When a geometry is chosen in this dialog

box, it is highlighted on the model.
287
5.2.7 Tool page
The Tool page of the operation dialog

box enables you to define the tool and
the related parameters for the operation.
When the tool is defined, it displays the

following tool parameters:
• Tool type
• Number
• Diameter
• Corner radius
The 3D View section displays the image

of the chosen tool. This image can be
zoomed and rotated.
Select
This button enables you to edit the tool parameters or define the tool for the operation.
• When the tool is not defined for the operation, this button displays the View page of the
Part Tool Table dialog box that enables you to choose the tool from the table or add a new
one.
Choose the tool from the Part Tool Table and click on the Select button.
288
5. Operations
When a tool is selected in the Part Tool Table, a half-transparent image of the selected tool follows
the cursor that moves over the model. The tool image can be dynamically zoomed and rotated
together with the model.
• When the tool is defined for the operation, this button displays the Edit page of the Part
Tool Table dialog box that enables you to edit the tool parameters and choose another
tool from the list on the right or add a new one.
289
The following pages are available:
• The Tool Topology page (see topic 3.8.1) contains the Topology data of the tool, such
as diameter, length, angle, corner radius etc.
• The Default Tool Data page (see topic 3.8.2) contains the default Tool Material data,
Feed and Spin data and diameter and length offset numbers.
• The Tool Message page (see topic 3.8.3) contains the fields in which user messages are
entered.
• The Tool Coolant page (see topic 3.8.4) enables you to define the tool coolant options.
• The Holder page (see topic 3.8.5) enables you to define the tool holder by choosing it
from the global or local tool table and specifying the related parameters.
• The Shape page (see topic 3.8.6) enables you to choose a shaped tool for the operation.
Data
This button displays the Operation Tool Data dialog box. This dialog box displays the tool material,
feed and speed parameters and the diameter and length offset numbers used in the current operation.
When the tool is chosen for the operation, SolidCAM fills this dialog box with the default data of
the selected tool. The Operation Tool Data dialog box enables you to edit the tool parameters for
the specific operation only.
290
5. Operations
Spin
This field defines the spinning speed of the tool by the

following values:
• Spin rate – normal spin rate; used in rough milling.

• Spin finish – finish spin rate; used in finish milling.
The Spin finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Spin
rate and Spin finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box
is available so that you can edit its value. When this check box is not selected, the
specified Spin rate value is used for both rough and finish machining.
The spin value can be defined in two types of units: S and V.
S is the default and it signifies Revolutions per Minute. V signifies the material cutting
speed in Meters per Minute in the Metric system or in Feet per Minute in the Inch
system; it is calculated according to the following formula:
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 1000 (for the Metric system);
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 12 (for the Inch system).
Feed
This field defines the feed rate of the tool by the following
values:
• Feed XY – feed rate in the XY-plane.

• Feed Z – feed rate in the Z-direction.
• Feed finish – feed rate used for finish milling.
The Feed finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Feed
XY and Feed finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box is
available so that you can edit its value. When this check box is not selected, the specified
Feed XY value is used for both rough and finish machining.
• Feed Link – feed rate used for tool path linking

movements when the Hatch strategy is chosen.
• Feed Lead in/out – the feed rates used for approach
and retreat tool movements.
The feed value can be defined in two types of units: F and

FZ.
291
F is the default and it signifies Units per minute. FZ signifies Units per tooth and is
calculated according to the following formula:
FZ = F/(Number of Flutes * S)
3D Model - Entry only
When this check box is selected, the defined Feed Z

is used for vertical movements only. When this check
box is not selected, the defined Feed Z is used for all
movements when the Z-coordinate changes.
This option is available only for 3D Milling

operations.
Diameter offset number
This parameter defines the number of the Diameter Offset Register of the current
tool in the Offset table of the CNC-machine.
Length offset number
This parameter defines the number of the Length Offset Register of the current tool
in the Offset table of the CNC-machine.
Second offset number
This parameter defines the register number of the upper cutting face offset, in the
offset table of the CNC-machine. This option enables SolidCAM to automatically take
into account the minor size differences between the defined tool and the one actually
used for cutting the workpiece, if there are any. You may choose not to use this option
by clearing the check box.
This option is available only for T-Slot operations.
Reset according to Part Tool Table
This button enables you to update the cutting conditions defined for use of the current
tool on the chosen CNC-machine according to the parameters set in the Part Tool
Table.
292
5. Operations
5.2.8 Levels page
This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements are executed. The default
input values of these parameters are the CAM-Part values that you have specified in the CoordSys
Data dialog box.
To define the Milling levels, enter the values or use the appropriate buttons to pick the Z-levels on
your 3D model.
Start level
This option defines the Z-level that can be optionally used for interoperational movements.
The Start level button and the related edit box are available only if the
Operation Start level option is chosen in Part Settings (see topic 2.10.3).
The default Start level value is equal to the Part Clearance level value of the Coordinate System
chosen for the operation.
The Start level cannot be lower than the Operation Clearance level. If you are trying to save the
operation in which the defined Start level is lower than the Operation Clearance level, the error
293
Clearance level
This option defines the Z-level to which the tool retreats when it moves from one cut to another.
Safety distance
This option defines the distance to the Upper level at which the tool starts moving at the Z feed rate
you have entered for the tool. Movements from the Clearance level to this height are performed in
the rapid mode.
Upper level
This option defines the Z-level at which the machining starts.
Lower level (Depth)
This option defines the Z-level below which the tool does not mill in any milling strategy.
Delta depth
Delta depth is the offset for the cutting depth that can be changed with its associativity preserved.
This parameter is always relative to the Depth defined for the operation.
If the Delta depth value is positive, a blue arrow is displayed near

its field indicating a positive offset value (in the positive direction
of the Z-axis).
If the Delta depth value is negative, a red arrow is displayed near

its field indicating a negative offset value (in the negative direction
of the Z-axis).
The value of these parameters is the Z-coordinate. These parameters can be defined either by
entering the value in the edit box or by picking a point on the solid model (except for Safety
distance). In the latter case, the parameters are associative to the solid model. Associativity enables
SolidCAM to be synchronized with the solid model changes. SolidCAM automatically updates the
CAM data when the model is modified.
294
5. Operations
Depth associativity
The following operation parameters are associative to the SolidWorks model.

• Clearance level
• Upper level
• Lower level
SolidCAM enables you to define these parameters by picking the entities on the solid model.
The Depth parameter used in some operations (Profile, Pocket, etc.) is

indirectly associative. You have two possibilities:
• To define Depth by manual input.

• To define Lower level by picking on the model. In this case, Depth
is calculated automatically. The associativity is established in Lower
level. When either Upper level or Lower level is synchronized, Depth
is updated.
The associativity is saved only for the following picked items:

• Vertex
• Sketch point
• Reference point
• Part origin
• Planar face parallel to the
XY-plane of the current
Coordinate System
• Plane parallel to the XY-plane
of the current Coordinate
System
The Pick Lower level dialog box displays the Z-coordinate of the
picked point. If the value is associative to the model, the edit box is
highlighted in pink.
When the parameter is defined by picking model entities, SolidCAM
displays the Z-coordinate of the picked point in the related edit box.
The fill of the edit box changes to pink. The value displayed in this edit
box is associative to the solid model.
When you type in this edit box, the associativity is removed.
295
The associative parameters are displayed in SolidCAM Manager under
the operation entry.
When the parameters are not synchronized, the parameters and the
parent operation are marked with the synchronization mark .
The synchronization commands are available for operations in the right-click menu.
• The Synchronize command enables you to synchronize the values of the parameters
with the updated model.
• The Synchronize & Calculate command enables you to synchronize the values of the
parameters with the updated model and calculate the operation after the synchronization.
296
5. Operations
• The Check Synchronization command enables you to check the model for updates
affecting the specified parameter.
• The Break Z-Levels Associativity/Break

associativity command enables you to break the
associativity between Z-Levels parameters and the
solid model. The confirmation message is displayed.
• The Show command highlights the model entity with which the depth parameter is
associated. The Show Geometry dialog box is displayed. The Exit button enables you to
return to the normal model view.
When the synchronization fails, SolidCAM marks the operation and the
parameters with the exclamation mark.
The parameters definition can be edited in the operation dialog box. You
have to either type the necessary values or redefine the points on the
model. In the first case, the associativity is removed.
Interoperational tool movements
SolidCAM enables you to perform the interoperational tool movements either through the Part
Clearance level (same for all operations of the CAM-Part) or through the Operation Start level (can
be different from the Part Clearance Level and vary for each operation).
Interoperational tool through Part Clearance level
SolidCAM performs the interoperational movements through Part Clearance level

when two neighboring operations use the same Tool (and Tool offset) and Coordinate
System.
Part Clearance Level
Operation
Clearance Level
Operation Clearance Level Machining
levels
Safety distance
Safety distance
Rapid movements
Feed movements
297
Interoperational tool through Operation Start level
You can change the level where the interoperational movements are performed for the
specific operations when the same Coordinate system, Tool and Tool offset are used.
This mode enables to reduce the rapid movements, especially between machining areas
located significantly deeper than the Part Clearance level.
In this mode, the tool performs interoperational movements at the Operation Start
level, which can be different from the Part Clearance level. The Operation Start level
can be specified separately for each operation.
When the operation cuts are finished, the tool moves to the Operation Clearance level
with the Rapid feed.
Part Clearance Level
Operation Start Level
Operation Clearance Level

Operation
Clearance Level
Machining
Safety levels
distance
Safety
distance
Rapid movements
Feed movements
298
5. Operations
If the Start level of the next operation is higher than the Operation Clearance level, the
tool ascends to the Start level of the next operation, then performs XY-movement and
descends to the Operation Clearance level of the next operation. All these movements
are performed with the Rapid feed. The tool will then perform the rapid movement to
the Safety Distance level of the first cut and start the descent to the first cut with the
working feed.
Next Operation
Start Level
Next Operation
Clearance Level
Previous Operation
Clearance Level
Safety
distance Operation
First cut
Operation
Last cut
Rapid movements
Feed movements
If the Start level of the next operation is lower than the Operation Clearance level, the
tool performs the XY-movements at the Operation Clearance level and than descends
to Clearance level of the next operation without stopping at the Start level. All these
movements are performed with the Rapid feed. The tool then performs the rapid
movement to the Safety Distance level of the first cut and starts the descent to the
first cut with the working feed.
Previous Operation Clearance Level
Next Operation Start Level
Next Operation Clearance Level
Safety distance
Operation Operation
Last cut First cut
Rapid movements
Feed movements
299
All of these rules are relevant only when there is no Tool change, Tool offset change
and Coordinate System change between the operations. If there are such changes, the
Operation Start level is ignored and SolidCAM performs the tool movement through
the Part Clearance level.
5.2.9 Technology page

This page enables you to define the technological parameters such as offsets, roughing and finishing
data, depth type, etc.
5.2.10 Advanced Technology page

This page contains the infrequently used parameters and options whose definition is required only
in particular machining cases.
300
5. Operations
Advanced sorting
This option enables you to define the machining order in case the operation geometry is composed
from several chains. The button displays the Advanced Sorting dialog box (see topic 6.6.3) that
enables you to define the order of sorting of the chains included in the operation geometry.
At the first stage, SolidCAM calculates the box surrounding

each chain. This box is used to determine the reference point
that will be used for the advanced sorting. For Linear sorting
strategies, the reference point is automatically defined in the
box corner corresponding to the start position defined by the
sorting strategy. For example, if the start position of the chosen
sorting strategy is the upper position (with the maximal X- and
Y-coordinates), SolidCAM automatically chooses the upper
left corner of the chain box to be the reference point. For
Circular sorting strategies, the reference point is automatically
chosen in the center of the calculated box.
When the reference points are defined for all chains, SolidCAM
performs their sorting in the manner similar to the sorting of
the drill positions. The resulting order of the reference points
after the sorting defines the order of the chains.
Final cuts
This option enables you to divide the machined depth into two
regions, each with its own Step down, when the Step down of the
bottommost region is smaller.
The Final cuts dialog box enables you to define the parameters of
the final cuts machining.
When the Final cuts used check box is selected, Step down
the option is used.
The Number of steps value defines the number of

final cuts. Step value
The Step down value defines the distance between

two successive final cuts.
Final cuts
301
When the Final cuts option is used, SolidCAM performs the machining with the Operation Step
down from the Upper level till the Depth calculated according to the following formula:
Depth - Number of cuts * Step down
From this depth, the machining is performed in a number of cuts determined in the Final cuts
dialog box. The machining is performed in such manner until the full operation depth is reached.
The Final cuts button is available only for

Profile, Pocket and Contour 3D operations. In
the Contour 3D operation, the Tool side must
be set to Left or Right.
When this option is used, the check box on
the button is selected.
Wall draft angle
This option enables you to perform the machining of inclined walls with a draft angle constant
along the entire geometry.
When you click on the Wall draft angle button, the Wall Draft Angle dialog box is displayed.
When the Wall draft angle check box is selected, the inclined wall machining is performed.
302
5. Operations
The Wall draft angle button is available only for Profile and Pocket
operations. In the Profile operation, the Depth type must be set to
Constant or Define.
When this option is used, the check box

on the button is selected.
External wall angle
This parameter defines the draft angle of the wall measured from the Z-axis direction
as shown.
For the inclined wall machining, each cutting pass located at a specific Z-level is
generated according to the specified External wall angle value.
Island wall angle
This parameter defines the draft angle of the island walls measured similar to the
External wall angle parameter.
This parameter is available only for Pocket operations.
For the inclined wall machining, each cutting pass located at a specific Z-level is
generated according to the specified External wall angle/Island wall angle value.
303
External corner type
This option enables you to define how the cutting passes will be connected during
the external corners machining. There are three ways to connect between the cutting
passes:
• Sharp corner
The tool path is calculated to perform the machining of a sharp corner. This
option affects only the machining of geometry sharp corners.
Geometry
• Conical fillet
The tool path is calculated to perform the machining of the corner with a conical
fillet; the radius of the tool path rounding increases from one pass to the next.
This option affects only the machining of sharp geometry corners.
Geometry
304
5. Operations
• Cylindrical fillet
This option affects the machining of both of sharp and filleted corners of the
geometry. The machining of sharp corners is performed similar to the Conical
fillet option. For the filleted corners, the tool path is calculated to perform the
machining of the corner with a cylindrical fillet; the radius of the tool path
rounding is the same for all cutting passes.
Geometry
Trochoidal milling
This option enables you to replace the straight

lines in a tool path by circular moves with
a constant radius.
The Trochoidal button is available only for Profile, Pocket and 3D Milling
operations. In the Profile operation, the Depth type must be set to Constant.
In the 3D Milling operation, the Hatch or Contour strategy must be chosen.
When this option is used, the check box on the button is selected.
305
Potential benefits include:
• Faster metal removal
Making the constant circular curve the only direction change enables a high feed rate
to be consistently maintained.
• Longer tool life
The cutting edge is in contact with the material through only about 5% of the cutter’s
revolution vs. up to 50% for more conventional cutting. Cooling of the tool is improved.
The Trochoidal dialog box enables you to define the parameters of trochoidal milling.
• Radius
This field defines the radius of the circle that describes

the movement of the tool.
• Step
This field defines the distance between the centers of

two adjacent circles that describe the tool movement.
Radius Tool trajectory
Step
• Engagement angle
This field defines the angle measured between two vectors describing the area of
contact between the tool and the machined material.
During the calculation, SolidCAM checks the

engagement angle at each tool position defined
by the Step parameter. If the engagement angle is
greater than the specified Engagement angle value,
SolidCAM at this position performs a circular tool
movement with the radius defined by the Radius
parameter. If the engagement angle is smaller than Engagement angle
the specified Engagement angle value, SolidCAM
does not generate a circular movement at this
position; the tool moves to the next position.
306
5. Operations
Plunging
Plunging is a technology of removing material from a given area

using a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves
up and down as in a drilling motion, travelling along the path type
you choose.
The Plunging button is available only

for Profile and Pocket operations. In the
Profile operation, the Depth type must be
set to Constant.
When the Plunging option is used, the
check box on the button is selected.
The Plunging dialog box is displayed.
Step
This field defines the distance between each two adjacent

vertical plunging movements of the tool.
Drill cycle type
SolidCAM enables you to choose preferable drilling cycles for

the plunging operation.
1. Click on the Drill cycle type button and choose the

cycle type you want in the Drill cycle dialog box.
2. Click on the Data button and specify the parameters

in the Drill options dialog box.
For more information on the Drilling cycles, see topic 6.6.3.
307
5.2.11 Link page
This page enables you to define the parameters of approach and retreat of the tool, linking between
tool paths, etc.
5.2.12 Miscellaneous parameters page
This page contains the miscellaneous parameters of the operation.
Message
You can type a message that will appear in the generated GCode file.
G43G0 X-49.464 Y-38.768 Z12. S1000 M3
(Upper Face Milling)
(--------------------------)
(P-POCK-T2 - POCKET)
(--------------------------)
G0 X-49.464 Y-38.768
Z10.
308
5. Operations
Extra parameters
This field is available only when special operation options have been
implemented in the post-processor you are using for this CAM-Part.
Click on the Parameters list button. The Operation Options dialog box is displayed with the
additional parameters defined in the post-processor.
Gouge check
This option enables you to perform gouge checking after the

calculation of 2.5D Milling operations. During this checking,
SolidCAM detects all the gouges between the tool and the target
model and informs about the positions where these gouges occur.
The Check gouges during calculation check box enables you to

perform the gouge checking directly after the tool path calculation.
You can also define the gouge checking tolerance in the corresponding
edit box. If gouges are detected during this checking, SolidCAM
informs you about their location on the model by displaying the
coordinates in the Check gouges dialog box and dots showing the
gouge positions on the model in the graphic area.
309
In this dialog box, the check boxes enable you to control the visibility of the gouge positions on
the model. When a check box is selected, SolidCAM displays the corresponding gouge position on
the model with a cyan dot.
When a check box is not selected, the related gouge position is not highlighted on the model. The
Show All button enables you to display all of the detected gouge positions on the model by selecting
all of the check boxes. The Hide All button enables you to hide all of the detected gouge positions
from the model by clearing all of the check boxes.
Approximation of arcs
This option enables you to control the process of arcs approximation

at the operation level.
The Approximate arcs by lines check box that enables you to control the existence of arcs in the
GCode output for the current operation.
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM approximates all tool path arcs by lines. The precision
of the approximation depends on the arc_max_chord and arc_max_angle parameters located
in the MAC file; the resulting GCode does not contain arcs.
When this check box is not selected, the resulting GCode might contain arcs.
310
5. Operations
5.3 Working with operations
Some of the operation commands affect all existing operations, others can only be applied to
one or more selected operations. SolidCAM produces different menus, depending on whether you
right-click on the Operations header in SolidCAM Manager or on an existing operation in the list.
In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the Operations header. The

operations menu is displayed.
If you right-click on an existing operation, the operation commands

are displayed.
5.3.1 Add Operation
This command enables you to add a new operation to your CAM-Part. In SolidCAM, an operation
is a single machining step. Normally, you manufacture a workpiece using several machining steps
and technologies. For each of these steps you can define a separate operation. An operation can be
very complex, but always uses one tool, one major geometry and executes one machining type, e.g.
3D milling, profile milling or drilling.
You can edit any single machining operation, change the operation sequence and generate the
GCode, combine and split the operation list of your CAM-Part.
311
1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-
click on an operation.
2. Move to the Add submenu and

choose the type of operation
you want to define.
• When you add an operation by right-clicking on the Operations

header, the new operation is added at the end of the operations
list.
• When you add an operation by right-clicking on an existing
operation, the new operation is inserted after the selected
operation.
5.3.2 Add Operation from Template

This command enables you create a new operation from an existing template.
For more information on Operation Templates, see topic 5.2.2.
5.3.3 Add Operations from Process Template

This command enables you to insert the operation templates contained in a process template into
a CAM-Part and convert them into regular SolidCAM operations.
For more information on Process Templates, see topic 5.2.2.
312
5. Operations
5.3.4 Add Machining Process

This command enables you to use a previously created Machining Process in your CAM-Part.
For more information on Machining Processes, refer to chapter 8.
5.3.5 Create Template

This command displays the Template Manager dialog box that enables you to save operation data
as a template.
When this option is applied to several selected operations, a process template is created with all the
selected operations included.
For more information on Operation Templates and Process Templates, see topic 5.2.2.
5.3.6 Edit
This command enables you to view or change the definition and parameters of an existing
operation. If you select this command, the corresponding operation dialog box is displayed and you
can change the operation definition.
5.3.7 Calculate/Calculate All

Before you are able to generate the GCode for your CNC-machine, you have to perform the tool
path calculation. Based on the geometries, machining strategy and technological parameters you
have defined and saved in the operations, SolidCAM calculates the movements of the tool.
If you expect a long tool path calculation time, mainly in 3D Milling

operations, it is advisable to define your operations, save them and postpone
the tool path calculation. This function enables you to calculate large CAM-
Parts with many operations in a batch routine e.g. overnight.
5.3.8 GCode/GCode All

The commands in this submenu enable you to generate, list, copy or print NC-programs.
For more information on generating the GCode, refer to chapter 11.
5.3.9 Calculate & GCode All

This command enables you to calculate all the operations in your CAM-Part and produce the
GCode.
313
5.3.10 Tool Sheet
This option enables you to summarize the operations information by generating a tool sheet
documentation.
For more information on this option, see topic 2.14.
5.3.11 Simulate
You can simulate and verify operations that have been saved and calculated.
For more information on Simulation, refer to chapter 10.
5.3.12 Simulate External

You can simulate operations in a separate window, in parallel to continued working in SolidCAM.
For more information on External Simulation, refer to chapter 10.
5.3.13 File
This option enables you to append ASCII files with the GCode to
your CAM-Part.
5.3.14 Operation Group

An operation group in SolidCAM is a set of
separate operations with a defined sequential
order. The operation group menu enables you
to manage operation groups.
Define Operation Group
This option converts the selected operations into an operation group. The Define New Operation
Group dialog box is displayed.
1. Enter an operation group name in the Name
field.
2. Choose the type from the list.
3. You can also enter the Description – a text string
that describes the operation group.
The selected operations are converted into an operation group.
314
5. Operations
Add Operation Group to Machining Process Table
This option enables you to insert the selected operation group

into the current Machining Process Table.
When the operation group is added, the following message is

displayed:
Remove Operations from Operation Group
This option removes the selected operation from the operation group.
Explode Operation Group
This option turns the operation group into single operations.
5.3.15 Cut/Copy/Paste
SolidCAM enables you to cut, copy and paste operations.
• The Copy command copies the selected operations into the clipboard.
• The Paste command inserts the operations from the clipboard, after the selected
operation. The pasted operations are marked by an asterisk; they must be calculated to
obtain the tool path.
If the clipboard is empty, the Paste command is unavailable.
• The Cut command cuts the operations and copies them into the clipboard. When the
operations are pasted from the clipboard, the source operations are removed.
5.3.16 Rename
SolidCAM enables you to rename a specific operation. Right-click on the operation name in
SolidCAM Manager and choose the Rename command from the menu.
The Operation Rename dialog box is displayed. This dialog box

enables you to assign a new name to the operation.
315
5.3.17 Change tool
This option enables you to change the tool used in a particular operation directly from SolidCAM
Manager. The Tool dialog box is displayed so that you can choose another tool.
5.3.18 Change tool data
This option enables you to edit the tool parameters such as tool material, feed and speed values,
offset numbers used in a particular operation directly from SolidCAM Manager. The Operation Tool
Data dialog box is displayed so that you can edit the data.
The All operations as first check box enables you to define the listed tool parameters in all operations
identically to the first operation.
316
5. Operations
5.3.19 Info
This option enables you to obtain the summary of a specific operation

directly from SolidCAM Manager without opening the operation.
The Info dialog box is displayed with the information of the selected
operation. It contains Tool information (diameter, corner radius, taper
angle and lengths); Operation Tool data (Feed and Spin parameters) and
Levels (Upper level, Depth and Step down).
The icon located in the title bar enables you

to pin/unpin the Info dialog box.
5.3.20 Delete/Delete All
This command enables you to delete operations from the operation list of your CAM-Part.
1. Select an operation you want to delete. To delete several operations at a time,

select them while holding the Shift or Ctrl keys. Right-click on the operations
and choose the Delete command.
2. To delete several operations at a time, click Yes to all in the confirmation

message.
5.3.21 Suppress/Unsuppress
SolidCAM enables you to suppress any operation in the CAM-Part,

thus temporarily excluding it from the CAM-Part. When you suppress
an operation, the operation does not participate in the calculation,
simulation and GCode generation, as if the operation was deleted from
the CAM-Part.
In the SolidCAM Manager tree, the names of suppressed operations

appear in gray. The tool path check box is disabled for the suppressed
operations.
The Suppress/Unsuppress command is available via the right-click

menu, for a single operation or a list of operations.
317
When the selected operations are
not suppressed, right-click on the list
of selected operations and choose
Suppress. All selected operations are
suppressed.
When the selected operations are
suppressed, the Unsuppress command
available in the right-click operation
menu unsuppresses the selected
operations.
When the list of selected operations
contains both suppressed and
unsuppressed operations, both
Suppress and Unsuppress commands
are available in the right-click menu.
The Suppress command suppresses
all the unsuppressed operations in
the list. The Unsuppress command
unsuppresses all the suppressed
operations in the list.
Editing suppressed operations
SolidCAM enables you to edit a suppressed operation. However, the Save & Calculate, Simulate
and GCode buttons are unavailable.
318
5. Operations
Tool path
When an operation is suppressed, SolidCAM re-generates the CAM-Part tool path to exclude the
tool path data related to the suppressed operations.
The tool path stays unchanged till the parameters of the operation are updated.
During the unsuppressing of the suppressed operation, the CAM-Part tool path is re-generated in
order to include the data of the unsuppressed operations.
Suppressing linked operations

3D Drilling operation + 3D Milling operation
When the Suppress command is applied to the 3D Drilling operation, the result is the
following:
• The 3D Drilling operation is suppressed;

• The tool path of the related 3D Milling operation is removed and the operation
appears marked with asterisk.
When the Suppress command is applied to the 3D Milling operation, only this
operation is suppressed. Both 3D Milling and related 3D Drilling operations must be
selected in order to be suppressed together.
319
5.4 Managing Operations in the SolidCAM Manager tree
5.4.1 Operation Sequence

You can change and rearrange the sequence of operations in the
SolidCAM Manager. Drag the operation to its new place in the operation
list.
5.4.2 Undo Sequence

This command enables you to undo your last change in the sequence
of the operation list.
5.4.3 Split
This command enables you to separate your list of operations before
the GCode generation. If you place splits after operations and click
GCode All, separate NC-programs are generated for each operation or
group of operations located between the corresponding splits. Each
split has a name and acts like a folder containing operations, fixtures,
etc. In this example, you receive three separate GCode files for the
operations divided by the splits.
Adding splits
1. Right-click on the operation after which you

want to insert a split.
2. Choose the Split command from the menu.
3. Enter the split name in the Split dialog box.
3. The split is inserted.
The (-) icon located near the split icon enables you to collapse/expand all the items (operations and
fixtures) located under the split.
320
5. Operations
Managing splits
• Add
This command enables you to add an operation to the list of operations that belong
to the current split.
• Add Machining Process
This command enables you to add a Machining

Process to the list of operations that belong to
the current split.
• GCode
These commands enable you to generate and list

GCode files for the operations that belong to
the chosen split. The GCode file generated for
each split is automatically saved in the CAM-Part
folder.
321
• User documentation
These commands enable you to generate and edit

the documentation that contains the data about
the operations that belong to the current split.
• Delete
This command enables you to delete a split item. The

confirmation message is displayed. Confirm it by clicking on
the Yes button.
• Rename
This command enables you to edit the split name in the Split dialog box.
• Suppress/Unsuppress
This command enables you to suppress/unsuppress the split with all of its contents.
Just like re-sequencing operations, you can move a split mark to another
location in the operation list. Drag the split mark on the operation after
which you want to insert it.
5.4.4 Expand tree
This command enables you to open the operation list so that all the geometries used in each
operation are displayed in the tree structure of SolidCAM Manager.
5.4.5 Collapse tree
This command enables you to reduce the operation list so that only
the operation names are displayed in the tree structure of SolidCAM
Manager.
5.4.6 Show/Hide Tools in tree
This command displays or hides the entries of tools used in the part
operations.
322
5. Operations
The right-click menu available on the tool entries enables you to

change the tool and manage the tool data for multiple operations
where the same tool is used.
Change tool
This option enables you to change the selected tool directly from SolidCAM Manager. The Tool
dialog box is displayed so that you can choose another tool (see topic 5.3.17).
Change tool data
This option enables you to manage the tool data for multiple operations where the selected tool is
used. The Operation Tool Data dialog box is displayed.
The List operation section displays the list of operations that use this tool.
The Show all operations using the current tool check box enables you to include in this list all of
the CAM-Part operations in which the current tool is used. When this check box is not selected, the
List operation section displays only the operations that belong to the current tool entry chosen in
the SolidCAM Manager tree.
The All checked operations as selected one check box enables you to apply the parameters defined
in the dialog box to all the checked operations.
5.4.7 Show/Hide CoordSys in tree
This command displays or hides the entries of Coordinate Systems

used in the part operations.
323
Indent according to Tools/CoordSys
This command available in the right-click menu on the operations header enables you to indent all
the operations in the CAM-Part according to the Tools/Coordinate Systems.
5.4.8 Automatic Sorting
This command enables you to sort all of the operations that you created
to work in a specific order.
1. Choose the Automatic sort item from the menu.

The Automatic Sort Priority dialog box is displayed.
2. Choose the desired options.
3. Click on the OK button to confirm the operation.
4. All the operations are sorted in the specified order.
If you click OK without choosing any of the options in the dialog box,
the operations are sorted starting from tool number 1 and upward.
Automatic Sorting options:
• CoordSys: operations are sorted according to the Coordinate System number.
• Upper level: operations started on a higher level appear before operations started on a
lower level.
• Use center drill first: all tools tagged as center drills are moved to the top of the operation
list.
• Sort drill radius: drills can be sorted according to size, either from small diameters to
large diameters or from large diameters to small diameters.
324
5. Operations
• Move drills to end: this option moves all drills not tagged as center drills to the end of the
operation list.
The following is the order of precedence if more than one option is chosen.
1. CoordSys
2. Upper level
3. Use Center drill first
4. Sort Drill radius
5. Move Drills to end
Undo Sort
This option returns the automatic sort to the original order.
325
5.5 Operation Transformations
When you transform an operation or a group of operations, commands such as move, copy,
translate and rotate insert the corresponding G-function and cycle into the GCode file. You can
check the defined transformation during the tool path simulation.
1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the entry of the operation you need to

transform.
2. Choose the Transform option from the menu.
326
5. Operations
The Operation Transformations dialog box is displayed.
The operation transformations are enabled only if your CNC-machine

controller supports the corresponding function.
5.5.1 Operation transformations
This section offers you the choice of whether the original

operation will be transformed or its copy will be added for
transformation and, in the latter case, enables you to define the
placing of the new operation in the SolidCAM Manager tree.

• Edit operation transformations
This option enables you to perform transformation of the selected operation.

• New operation (add at current position in operations tree)
This option enables you to add a copy of the selected operation and apply the
transformation to the copied operation, without effect on the original operation. The
transformed copy is inserted immediately after the original operation in the SolidCAM
Manager tree. The original operation can be suppressed by selecting the appropriate
check box in the Options section.
• New operation (add at end of operations tree)
This option also enables you to add a copy of the selected operation and apply the
transformation to the copied operation, without effect on the original operation. The
transformed copy is inserted at the end of the operation list in the SolidCAM Manager
tree. The original operation can be suppressed by selecting the appropriate check box
in the Options section.
327
5.5.2 Options
This section contains two check boxes that enable you to manage the
original operation:
• Include original operation
When this check box is selected, the original operation is

included in the transforming action.
• Suppress original operation
When this check box is selected, the original operation is suppressed, and the
transformation is applied only for the operation copy.
This check box is available only when a new operation is added for
transformation.
5.5.3 Transformations table
The transformations table lists the details of the defined transformation.
• Operation name
This column displays the list of operations to be transformed. In case of adding

a new operation, the operation copy receives the Transform_ prefix with the sequential
number of transformation. When an additional transformation action is defined on
the existing transformation, the Transform_ prefix is added with the next sequential
number, and the names of the previously transformed operations move under the new
transformation.
328
5. Operations
• Transformation
This column displays the type of transformation action to be performed on the selected
operations. The following types of transformation are available: rotation, translation,
mirroring and repeating the tool path using the fourth axis.
• Description
This column displays the details of transformation parameters defined for the current
operations.
5.5.4 Transformation buttons
The buttons on the right represent the list of transforming actions that can be
performed on the chosen operations. Each button displays the related dialog box
that enables you to define the parameters of the transformation.
Init
This button cancels any transformation action that was performed on the operations
that do not have inheritance (operation copy added for transformation). When you
click on this button to cancel the transformation defined for operations that have
inheritance, the following error message is displayed:
If you want to cancel the transformation defined for operations with inheritance, exit the Operation
Transformations dialog box and delete the operation copy in the SolidCAM Manager tree.
329
Rotate
This button enables you to define the tool path rotation around the Z-axis of
the CoordSys origin or around the Z-axis passing through a defined point.
The rotation can be performed using two options:
• Delta
Several rotations are performed from a start angle with

a uniform delta angle. The Rotate Delta dialog box is displayed.
1. Enter the Number of Rotations.
2. Start angle – enter the start angle (+/-)

relative to the positive X-axis.
3. Delta angle – enter the delta value (+/-)

between two rotation steps.
4. Define the point around which this

operation will be rotated by clicking on
the Pick button and picking a point on the
model.
5. Confirm with the OK button.

• List
This option copies the operation tool path to a list of

angle locations defined by their angle relative to the
positive X-axis. The Rotate list dialog box is displayed.
1. Enter the value of the angle and the

number of rotations.
2. Click on the Add button to add the angle

to the list of angles.
To edit an angle value in the list, click on the

corresponding entry in the Value column and enter the
new value.
To delete an entry from the list, select it and click on

the Delete Selected button.
330
5. Operations
Translate
This button enables you to copy the operation tool path to a rectangular matrix of locations (the
Matrix option) or to a list of locations defined by their X-, Y- and Z-coordinates (the List option).
• Matrix
This option copies the operation tool path to a rectangular matrix of locations. When
you choose this option, the Matrix dialog box is displayed.
• Number of X steps: enter the number of rows.
• Number of Y steps: enter the number of
columns.
• X Step: enter the delta value between each two
columns.
• Y Step: enter the delta value between each two
rows.
• Rows first: the operation tool path is first
copied horizontally, and then vertically in the
defined matrix of locations.
• Columns first: the operation tool path is first copied vertically, and then
horizontally in the defined matrix of locations.
• List
This option copies the operation tool path to a list of locations defined by their X-,
Y- and Z-values. The origin of the operation is moved to the absolute XYZ-position
defined in the Translation List dialog box.
1. Enter the values of the absolute XYZ-
position where the operation should be
executed (separate the values by commas
or spaces) or pick a point on the model.
2. Click the Enter button to add the

position to the Translation list.
To edit a position in the translation list, select it, enter the new
values for this position into the Offset value edit box and then
click on the Enter button.
To delete a position from the translation list, select it and press
the Delete key.
331
Mirror
This button enables you to mirror the operation tool path relative to the X, Y or both axes. The
point about which the operations are mirrored is either the CoordSys position or the Mirror/Rotate
point defined in the operation. The Mirror dialog box is displayed.
1. Click on the corresponding button to define

the axis around which the operations are
mirrored:
• X – mirrors around the X-axis.
• Y – mirrors around the Y-axis.
• XY – mirrors around both the X- and
the Y-axes.
• Reset enables you to clear the entry
field.
2. Define the point around which this operation will be mirrored by clicking on the
Pick button and picking a point on the model.
4th Axis
This option enables you to execute 4-axis rotations of an operation tool path. After the 4th axis is
rotated, the operation is executed again. When you choose this option, the Rotate list dialog box is
displayed.
1. Enter the value of the angle and the number of

rotations.
2. Click on the Add button to add the angle to the

list.
To edit an angle value in the list, click on the corresponding entry in

the Value column and enter the new value.
To delete an entry from the list, select it and click on the Delete
Selected button.
332
5. Operations
Synchronize
This button enables you to perform synchronization of the operation copies with their original
operations, in case of changes to the original operations. Note that this button is available only for
the defined transformation with inheritance.
When you click on this button, the Synchronization of operations technology dialog box is displayed.
• Synchronize the technology of this operation with its original operation
When the original operation has been edited, this option enables you to synchronize
the operation copy with the performed changes.
• Synchronize the technology of all operations with original operation
When transformation is defined for multiple operations and the original operations
have been edited, this option enables you to synchronize the operation copies with the
changes made in the original operations.
333
5.6 Fixture
SolidCAM enables you to define the Part Fixtures such as clamps, vises, jig plates, etc.
This feature enables you to get a more realistic picture

during the simulation and check possible collisions
between the cutting tools and fixtures.
1. Right-click on an operation entry

in the SolidCAM Manager tree and
choose Define Fixture.
2. The Fixture dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box enables you to
define the fixture geometry.
334
5. Operations
5.6.1 Fixture dialog box
Define 3D Model
This button enables you to select the 3D model for the fixture. The 3D Geometry dialog box is
displayed.
Show on Model
With this button, you can highlight the selected fixture model in the SolidWorks window.
335
Show
With this button, you can display the Fixture in the

Rest Material window of SolidCAM.
Self-intersections
The Check and fix button in the Self-intersections

section enables you to check the model for self-
intersections (see topic 10.5.6) and fix them if they
are found.
When self-intersections are detected, the following

Confirm it with the Yes button to fix the self-intersections.
Note that the process of self-intersection fixing can take a long time to complete, depending on the
complexity of the model.
When the fixture is defined, SolidCAM adds the Fixture item to the SolidCAM Manager tree.
SolidCAM enables you to define any number of fixtures that can be used at different stages of the
CAM-Part.
336
2.5D Milling 6
SolidCAM enables you to perform a number of standard 2.5D
operations like profile, pocket, slot machining, etc. These operations
can be performed using 2D sketches as well as solid models.
Full tool path control and powerful algorithms ensure that your
manufacturing will be performed in accordance with your plans.
 Profile Operation
 Pocket Operation
 Drilling Operation
 Slot Operation
 Translated Surface Operation
6.1 Profile Operation
This operation enables you to mill on or along a contour.

The profile geometry can be either open or closed. In profile
milling you can optionally use tool radius compensation to the
right or left side of the geometry. SolidCAM offers two types
of profiling:
• Milling a single profile to the specified constant or

variable depth in one step or in several user-defined
down steps;
• Milling concentric profiles to the specified constant or variable depth. This type of
profiling generates several concentric profiles that start from the defined clear offset
distance from the profile, and finishes on the profile geometry, thus clearing the area
around the profile to a constant depth.
In the Operations right-click menu, click Add Operation, Profile. The Profile Operation dialog box
is displayed.
338
6. 2.5D Milling
6.1.1 Levels page
This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements are executed.
This page enables you to define the technological parameters of the Profile milling.
339
Modify
The Tool side option enables you to

define the tool position relative to
the geometry.
Left Right Center
• Right: the tool cuts to the right of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the
values set in the Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.
• Left: the tool cuts to the left of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the values
set in Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry. The compensation cannot
be used with this option.
When the Zigzag option is used, the Tool

side combo-box defines the tool location
for the first cut. For each successive cutting
pass, the tool position is changed relative to
the geometry direction.
Geometry
This button enables you to modify a geometry shared by several

operations separately for each operation.
The geometry modification is supported for Profile, Contour 3D, T-Slot and
Translated Surface operations.
Geometries shared by several operations can be modified separately for each operation. The
geometry modification includes assigning different values to the Extension, Offset and Define Start
parameters of the geometry, and also choosing which geometry chains are active in the operation
(in case of multiple chain geometry). The modification is relevant only for the current operation
and does not affect other operations where the geometry is used.
340
6. 2.5D Milling
The Modify Geometry dialog box enables you to perform the geometry
modification for the current operation.
• Tool side
This option enables you to define the position of the tool

relative to the geometry.
• Chains
This section displays the list of all geometry chains

participating in the current geometry. The check box
located near each chain name in the list enables you to
include/exclude the chain from the geometry of the current
operation.
The right-click menu available on the elements of the list

enables you to perform the following actions:
• The Check All command enables you to check all

the chains.
• The Uncheck All command enables you to

uncheck all the chains.
• The Invert Check States command enables you to

reverse the state of the check boxes.
• The Reverse command enables you to reverse the direction of the chain.
• The Reverse All command enables you to reverse the direction of all chains.
341
• Start/End Extension
This section enables you to define the extension for the

selected chain. The Start and End parameters define
the start and end extension lengths. The extension is
performed tangentially to the chain entities at the start
and end points of the geometry chain. The start and end
elements are determined according to the chain direction.
Start extension
End extension
Geometry chain
When a negative value is defined, SolidCAM shortens the chain by a distance measured
along the chain elements and specified by the Start and End parameters. These
parameters can be defined either by entering the values or by picking on the model
(when the cursor is placed in the edit box).
Note that extensions cannot be defined for closed chains.
The Apply to all button enables you to apply the extension defined for the selected
chain to all chains of the geometry.
• Modify offset
This section enables you to define the Machining Geometry

offset for the selected chain. Machining
is performed at the specified offset.
Modify
offset
342
6. 2.5D Milling
Geometry chain
Modify offset
Modified chain
SolidCAM enables you to define the Modify offset parameter by entering the value or
by picking on the model (when the cursor is placed in the edit box).
The Apply to all button enables you to apply the Modify offset value defined for the
selected chain for all the chains of the geometry.
The direction of the Modify offset

Negative offset
parameter for open contours is
defined according to the chain Geometry chain
direction. In case of a positive
value, the offset is defined to the
right side of the chain (according to Positive offset
the chosen chain direction). In case
of a negative value, the offset is
defined to the left side of the chain
(according to the chosen chain
direction).
For closed contours, a positive Positive offset

Modify offset value defines the offset
Geometry chain
to the outside of the geometry;
a negative Modify offset value
defines the offset to the inside of
Negative offset
the geometry.
The Take 1/2 from selected offset

option enables you to offset the
chain by half of the defined offset
value.
343
In the part shown below the central pads should be machined with a single straight
cutting pass located in the middle of the pad. After defining the geometry at the edge
of the pad, the geometry is offset using the picked position at the opposite edge and
the Take 1/2 from selected offset option.
Modified
geometry
Picked
offset position
Geometry
• Start position
When the Default option is chosen, the start position is calculated automatically using
the SolidCAM internal algorithm.
When the Shift option is chosen, you can define the

shifting of the start position for closed chains. The shifting
of the start point is defined as a percentage of the chain
length. You can define the start position shifting either by
entering the Shift value or by picking the position on the
model. For open chains, this section is disabled.
The Apply to all button enables you to apply the Shift value defined for the selected
chain to all closed chains of the current geometry.
The Auto next button enables you to define the start points successively for all closed
chains by picking the positions on the model. When this mode is activated, the first
closed chain is highlighted, enabling you to pick the start position for it. When the
position is picked, SolidCAM switches to the next closed chain and so on. The Resume
button enables you to finish the automatic definition of the next start positions.
The Set default button enables you to return the start position of the current chain
to its initial state. When the Apply to all check box is activated, the Set default button
returns the start positions of all chains to their initial state.
344
6. 2.5D Milling
Compensation
When the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
CNC-controller are used in the GCode.
• No compensation
When the Compensation check box is not selected, SolidCAM generates a trajectory
of the tool center as an offset by the tool radius from the geometry.
Tool center trajectory
Geometry
This tool center trajectory is performed in the GCode. No compensation is used.

• Radius compensation
When the Compensation check box is selected, SolidCAM generates the trajectory of
the tool center as an offset by the tool radius from the geometry.
Geometry
At the next stage, SolidCAM creates the tool path as the offset by the tool radius from
the tool center trajectory. The offset is created in the geometry direction.
Tool path
The GCode is created for the tool path. The radius compensation is used in the GCode.
The Offset value is equal to the Tool radius.
345
• Zero Compensation
SolidCAM calculates the trajectory of the tool center as the offset from the geometry.
Geometry
This trajectory is used in the GCode. The radius compensation is used. The Offset
value is equal to 0.
• Settings
SolidCAM enables you to define the type of compensation used by the specific variable
in the MAC file.
Comp_by_zero_tool = N – the Radius compensation is used.
Comp_by_zero_tool = Y – the Zero compensation is used.
When the compensation is used for the tool path linked using the Zigzag
option, SolidCAM takes into account the machining direction and the
changes in the tool position relative to the geometry direction for each
successive cut. The different compensation commands are used in the
GCode output for even and odd cuts.
Depth type
This option enables you to choose the depth type for the profile.
Constant
SolidCAM generates a tool path with a constant depth as defined in the Milling levels
area.
346
6. 2.5D Milling
Variable (Define)
You can define a different depth at different profile points.
1. Choose the Define option.
2. Click on the Pick button. The Define depth

dialog box is displayed. This dialog box
enables you to control the points where the
depth changes.
The X,Y,Z dialog box enables you to enter the coordinates of

the depth change points.
Switch between the Select and the Unselect mode to define or remove points where
the depth changes. The Undo button cancels or restores the last selection.
You can specify a certain chain in the profile geometry using the combo box with the
profile number and the Next Profile button.
The Points field contains information about selected depth changing points. You can
change the point properties by double-clicking the parameter in this area.
• Profile No. – the Profile geometry chain number.
• Z – the Z-coordinate of the profile depth at the specified point.
• Type – the type of depth change:
Vertical: the depth changes at specified points.
Sloped: the depth changes gradually over the tool path segment.
Depth change points
Vertical type Sloped type
Select the depth change point on the profile. The Depth

dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, specify the
depth and the type of depth change.
347
Helical
This option enables you to enhance the productivity of profile machining by avoiding
lead in/out movements at each Z-level and unnecessary rapid movements.
With this option, the tool performs the spiral movements
around the geometry with the continuous lowering along
the Z-axis. For each turn around the geometry, the tool
moves downward along the Z-axis according to the step
down value. When the Profile depth is reached by the
spiral movements, SolidCAM performs the last cut with
the constant Z movement at the Profile depth level.
Step down
Rest Material/Chamfer
The Rest material option enables you to define parameters to remove

the rest material left unmachined after previous operations.
Rest Material
The Chamfer option enables you to machine chamfers with a Center drill tool.
Rest material
In Profile Machining, when a large tool is used around the profile, the tool leaves
material in corners it cannot enter.
The Rest material option enables you to remove the material from this area without
defining a new geometry.
348
6. 2.5D Milling
The Rest Material dialog box is displayed. You have to define

the following parameters:
• Previous tool diameter – the diameter of the rough end

mill used in the previous operation. The button enables
you to display the Part Tool Table and select the previously
used tool so that its diameter appears in the edit box.
• Previous wall offset – the wall offset of the previous

operation.
• Extension – the overlap distance that you would like to start and end from the
previous larger end mill.
Extension Rest Material
Milling type
• Separate areas
SolidCAM generates a profile tool path to clean areas that the previous tool
could not mill.
• Around profile
SolidCAM machines the whole closed profile to mill the rest material.
349
Chamfer
This feature in Profile, Pocket and Contour 3D operations

enables you to use a drill tool as well as a taper tool to
add a chamfer to the edge of a part.
In the Tool page of the operation dialog box, click on the Select button. The Part Tool
Table dialog box is displayed. Choose a drill tool for the chamfering.
In the Levels page of the operation dialog box, enter the

size of the chamfer edge in the Profile depth field.
In the Technology page of the operation dialog box,

choose Chamfer from the Rest Material/Chamfer list and
click the Data button.
350
6. 2.5D Milling
In the Chamfer dialog box, enter the following parameters:
• Cutting diameter – the starting cutting diameter of the

tool;
• Feed – the feed rate you would like the tool to travel.
Cutting Profile depth

diameter (Chamfer length)
(Profile depth)
Chamfer height
Cutting diameter
When the Cutting diameter value is greater than the lower diameter of the taper tool
cone, you can move the tool tip outside the chamfer. In such a way, the machining is
performed by the conical part of the tool that can avoid the burr formation on the
chamfer edge.
If you choose to chamfer a part

∅6
that has a sharp corner, it is
important that the cutting diameter
is the same as the last tool used in
that geometry so that the chamfer ∅6
is equal all around.
Fillet size for last cut
This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without the
need to change the geometry.
This option is relevant for Profile, Pocket, Slot (Constant depth type) and
the 3D Milling (Roughing and Constant-Z finishing) operations.
351
• Internal
This field defines the radius of internal Tool path

corners.
Geometry External
• External fillets
This field defines the radius of external

corners.
• The maximum external fillet size

is defined in SolidCAM Settings
(see topic 12.4.4). Internal
• In the Profile operation, this fillets
option is not available when the
Tool side is set to Center.
Offsets
SolidCAM enables you to specify the machining allowances that can

be removed either by profile finishing in the same operation or in
another operation.
• Wall offset
This option defines the offset that will remain on the wall of the machined part after
roughing.
Step down
Wall offset
Profile depth
352
6. 2.5D Milling
• Floor offset
This option defines the offset that will remain on the floor of the machined part after
roughing. When the Floor offset value is specified, SolidCAM performs the machining
by the Z-levels defined with the Step down parameter. The machining is performed up
to the Floor offset.
Step down
Profile depth
Floor offset
The Wall offset and Floor offset parameters are available only when the
Rough section is activated.
Clear offset
This option generates several concentric profiles with constant depth

that start at the defined clear offset distance from the profile and
finish at the geometry of the profile, thus clearing the area around
the profile.
The Offset option defines the distance from the geometry at which the milling starts. The Offset
value must be equal to or greater than the Wall offset value. The tool starts milling the profile at the
distance defined by Clear offset and finishes at the distance defined by Wall offset.
The Step over option defines the overlap of adjacent tool passes. It determines the offset between
two successive concentric profiles.
Step over
Clear offset
Wall
offset
Modify offset
353
• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path for the Clear offset removal
containing both climb and conventional movements.
Clear offset
tool path
Profile
geometry
• The One way option enables you to create the tool path for the Clear offset removal
containing only climb movements.
Clear offset
tool path
Profile
geometry
Rough
This section enables you to perform the profile rough machining.
Step down
Profile roughing is performed in constant Step down
Z passes. The Step down value defines
the distance between each two successive Upper level
Z-levels.
The cutting passes are calculated using
the Clear offset strategy with the specified Profile depth
Offset and Step over parameters and
taking into account the specified Wall
offset and Floor offset parameters.
354
6. 2.5D Milling
Finish
This section enables you to perform the profile finishing.

• Number of passes
SolidCAM enables you to generate several finish passes to achieve the best surface
quality. You can define the number of finish passes.
• Extension/Overlap
This option enables you to extend the profile in the positive profile direction.
• Step down
This parameter defines the distance between each two successive Z-levels.
During the profile finishing, the machining

of the floor area is performed first, then the
Step down
finishing of the walls is performed.
The floor area is machined in a single cutting

pass at the Profile depth level. This cutting
pass is calculated using the Clear offset
strategy with the specified Offset and Step
over parameters and taking into account the Profile
specified Wall offset. depth Offset
Step over
Wall
offset
Offset
Step over
355
The wall finishing is performed from the Upper level down to
the Profile depth in a number of steps defined with the Step
down parameter.
Equal step down

Step down
Machining of Profiles and Pockets starts from the Upper level

and is performed in a number of successive Z-levels till the Profile
depth
specified Depth. This option enables you to keep an equal
distance between all Z-levels.
When the Equal step down check box is not

selected, the distance between each two successive
Step down
Z-levels is determined by the Step down parameter.
If the machining depth is not divisible exactly by
the Step down value, the depth of the last cut is Last cut
depth
smaller than the Step down value.
When the Equal step down check box is selected,

an equal distance is kept between all Z-levels.
Using this option, you have to specify the Max.
Step down parameter instead of the Step down
parameter. According to the Depth defined in the
operation and modified with the Floor offset and
Delta depth parameters, SolidCAM automatically
Max.
calculates the actual step down to keep an equal Step down
distance between all passes, while taking into
account the specified Max. Step down so that it is
not exceeded.
The Equal step down option

is available only for Profile and
Pocket operations.
Actual
Step down
356
6. 2.5D Milling
Depth cutting type
This section enables you to define the direction of Z-levels machining

and the connection between passes.
When the One way option is chosen, the cutting passes are oriented
in the same direction and connection between them is performed
through the Operation Clearance level. At the end of each pass the
tool performs a retreat movement to the Operation Clearance level,
a horizontal movement at rapid feed to the start point of the next pass
and then descends to the Z-level of the next pass. The same cutting
direction (climb or conventional) is kept along the whole tool path.
When the Zigzag option is chosen, the tool path is performed in

a zigzag manner, with the tool path direction changing from one pass
to the next. The passes located at two successive Z-levels are connected
directly from the end of one pass to the beginning of the next pass.
The Zigzag option cannot be used together with the Clear offset technology.
Complete Z-level/Sort by chains
These options enable you to define the order of Z-levels milling in the machining of several profiles
in one operation.
These check boxes are not available when the Zigzag option is chosen for
Depth cutting typeand when the Helical or Define option is chosen for
Depth type.
The Sort by chains check box is available only when the Complete Z-level
check box is selected and the Clear offset option is used with the One way
option.
When the Rough and Finish strategies are used together in the same Profile
operation, the Complete Z-Level check box is not available.
357
Rough machining
When the Complete Z-Level check

box is selected and the Clear offset
strategy is not used, SolidCAM
enables you to generate the following
tool path: machining of all chains
at a specific Z-level is performed;
1
when machining of this level is 2
3
completed, the tool moves down to 5 4
the next level, and so forth. 7 6
8
9
10
11
12

box is not selected and the Clear
offset strategy is not used, the
machining is performed by chains:
the tool completes the machining of
a specific Z-level for a specific chain
1
and then moves to the next Z-level 7
2
of the same chain. When machining 3 8
of all the Z-levels of a specific chain 4 9
is completed, the tool moves to the 5
10
next chain. 11
6
12

box is selected and the Clear offset
strategy is used with the Zigzag
option, SolidCAM enables you to
generate the following tool path:
the first chain at the upper cutting 1
level is machined in a zigzag cutting
2
pass, and then the next chain at the 3
same level is machined in a zigzag

4
movement. When all the chains of 5
the cutting level are machined, the 6

tool moves to the next cutting level,
and so forth.
358
6. 2.5D Milling
When the Complete Z-Level check box is selected and the Clear offset strategy is used
with the One way option, the Sort by chains check box is available. The tool path order
depends on the state of this check box.
• When the Sort by chains check box is not selected, SolidCAM enables you
to generate the following tool path: the first chain of the first cutting level is
machined in several equidistant profiles generated by the Clear offset strategy.
When the machining of the chain is finished at the current cutting level, the
next chain at the same cutting level is machined. When all the chains of this
cutting level are machined, the tool descends to the next cutting level, and so
forth.
3
2
1
6
9 5
8 4
7
15 12
14 11
13 10
18
17
16
• When the Sort by chains check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to
generate the following tool path: the first chain of the first cutting level is
machined in several equidistant profiles generated by the Clear offset strategy.
When the machining of the chain is finished at the current cutting level,
SolidCAM performs the machining of the same chain at the next cutting level.
When the chain is completely machined at all cutting levels, the next chain is
machined in the similar manner.
3
2
1
12
4 11
5 10
6
9 15
8 14
7 13
18
17
16
359
When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected and the Clear offset strategy is
used with the Zigzag option, SolidCAM enables you to generate the following tool
path: the first chain of the first cutting level is machined in a zigzag cutting pass, then
the tool moves down to the next cutting level. When machining of the current chain is
completed at all cutting levels, the next chain is machined in the similar manner.
4
2
5
3
When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected and the Clear offset strategy is
used with the One way option, SolidCAM enables you to generate the following tool
path: the first clear offset cut (farthest from the geometry chain) is machined at the
upper cutting level for the first chain. Then the tool descends to the next cutting
level and performs the first clear offset cut, and so forth. When the clear offset cut is
finished at all Z-levels, the machining of the successive clear offset cuts (closer to the
geometry chain) starts from the upper cutting level. When machining of all clear offset
cuts is finished for the current chain, the next chain is machined in the similar manner.
7
4
1
16
8 13
5 10
2
9 17
6 14
3 11
18
15
12
360
6. 2.5D Milling
Finish machining
When the Finish check box is selected, the Complete Z-level option is available if the Clear offset
strategy is not used.
When the Complete Z-Level check box is selected, the finishing is performed by Z-levels: machining
of all chains at a specific Z-level is performed; when machining of this level is completed, the tool
moves down to the next level, and so forth.
1
2
3
5 4
7 6
8
9
10
11
12
When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected, the finishing is performed by chains: the tool
completes machining of a specific Z-level for a specific chain and then moves to the next Z-level
of the same chain. When machining of all the Z-levels of a specific chain is completed, the tool
moves to the next chain.
1
7
2
3 8
4 9
10
5
11
6
12
361
6.1.3 Link page
This page enables you to define the parameters of tool approach and retreat relative to the machined
profile.
Ramping
This section determines how the tool approaches the start point of the contour. Choose one of the
following descent types from the list:
• Rapid generates a rapid descent (G0) from the Clearance level to the approach plane. Use
this option when you know that there is no material in the descent path.
• Feed causes the tool to move rapidly to the Upper level minus the Safety distance. Then
the tool descends to the approach plane with the given Z Feed rate. Use this option when
you know that there is material in the descent path.
• Diagonal can be activated only if the Step down is equal to the Profile depth. It causes
the tool to move rapidly from the Clearance level to the Upper level plus the Safety
distance. Then the tool diagonally descends to the start of the profile geometry at the
normal feed rate. The angle of the diagonal is automatically generated depending on the
type of approach you choose.
Pre-drilling geometry generation
When the operation is defined and saved, SolidCAM automatically generates the pre-drilling
geometry. This geometry contains the points into which the ramping is performed.
362
6. 2.5D Milling
The pre-drilling geometry can be generated only in the following cases:

• The Normal/Arc/Tangent/Point strategy is used for the Lead in (when the None option is
used, the pre-drilling geometry is not generated);
• The Clear offset option is not used;
• The One way option is used for Depth cutting type;
• The Helical mode is not used for Depth type;
• The Wall draft angle option is not used;
• The Rest Material/Chamfer options are not used;
• The Plunging option is not used.
During the generation of the pre-drilling geometry, SolidCAM automatically collects the ramping
points of the roughing tool path for all of the chains. For each chain, SolidCAM collects all the
ramping points where the vertical penetration into the material is performed. These points are
located in the start point of the Lead in movement. Generally, for an open chain, SolidCAM has to
generate only one ramping point.
Ramping
position
Lead in
363
In some cases, during the tool path generation for closed chains, the chain is machined in a number
of closed cutting passes. In such cases, SolidCAM generates more than one ramping position for one
chain, and the number of positions depends on a number of cutting passes. For each cutting pass,
one point is generated at the location where the vertical penetration into the material is performed.
Lead in
Ramping
Lead in position
The ramping positions are collected only for the rough cutting passes; the finish cutting passes are
ignored.
The name of the generated geometry is composed of the name of the initial Profile operation
with the Drill_For_ prefix: Drill_For_ProfileName, where the ProfileName is the name of the initial
Profile operation. For example, for the Profile operation F_contour_T1, the pre-drilling geometry
Drill_For_F_contour_T1 will be generated.
The pre-drilling geometry appears under the Geometry header

in SolidCAM Manager. This geometry is available for Drilling
operations only. The pre-drilling geometry cannot be chosen in
3D Drilling operations.
364
6. 2.5D Milling
Adjacent passes connection
This option enables you to define the connection method for

adjacent cutting passes generated using the Clear offset method with
the Zigzag option.
The following options are available to define the passes connection:
• Linear
With this option, the tool movement from one cutting pass to the next is performed
as a straight line connecting the end point of the first pass with the start point of the
next pass.
• Rounded
With this option, the tool movement from one cutting pass to the next is performed
as an arc tangential to the adjacent cuttings passes. The arc connects the end point of
the first pass to the start point of the next pass.
365
Lead in/Lead out
These options enable you to control the way the tool approaches the
profile and retreats away.
• None
The tool approaches the milling level and retreats away

exactly adjacent to the start point of the profile.
• Normal
The tool approaches the profile and retreats away from/

to a point normal to the profile. The length of the normal
can be set in the Value field.
Lead in
value
• Arc
The tool approaches the profile and retreats away with

a tangential arc. The arc radius can be set in the Value
field.
The Data button is displayed and enables you to define

additional parameters in the Arc Lead in Data/Arc Lead
out Data dialog box.
Lead in
value
Arc angle
This parameter defines the angle of the

Lead in arc segment. The default angle
value is 90°; in this case, SolidCAM Angle Angle
Distance
generates a Lead in path of quarter arc.
Lead in from Lead in from
Center Distance
366
6. 2.5D Milling
Lead in from
With the Arc Lead in option, the tool moves normal to the lead in arc at the arc start
point. The following options are available:
• Distance
The tool starts milling at the specified distance from the arc start point.
• Center
The tool starts milling at the lead in arc center.
Center of circle
When this check box is not selected, the tool rapidly moves from the Clearance level
to the Safety distance, enters the material in the center of the defined approach arc
and performs the arc movement to the geometry start point at the first cutting level.
When this check box is selected, the tool rapidly moves from the Clearance level to the
Safety distance, enters the material in the center of the profile geometry and performs
a linear movement to the geometry start point at the first cutting level.
Approach movement
Tool path
Center of circle check box Center of circle check box

is not selected is selected
The retreat is performed in the same manner.
• Tangent
The tool approaches the profile and retreats away on

a line tangent to the profile. The length of the tangent
line can be set in the Value field.
Normal
Lead in
value
367
• Point
The tool approaches the profile and retreats away from/to a user-defined position.
From this position the tool performs a linear movement to the start point of the
profile. When you choose this option, the Pick button is activated and you can select
a position on the CAD model.
Same as Lead in
When this check box is selected, the strategy and parameters defined for Lead in are used for Lead
out.
When the Zigzag option is used, the lead in/out movements for all the cuts are
calculated according to the direction of the first cutting pass, irrespective of the
direction of the other cutting passes. During the tool path linking, SolidCAM
connects the cuts that contain lead in and lead out movements in a zigzag manner
and changes the direction of all even cuts to the opposite. Therefore only for odd
cuts, the Lead in strategy is used for approaching and the Lead out strategy is used
for retreating. For even cuts, the Lead in strategy is used for retreating and the
Lead out strategy is used for approaching.
Movements defined by Lead in strategy
Movements defined by Lead out strategy
368
6. 2.5D Milling
Keep tool down
This option enables you to reduce the unnecessary tool movements

through the Clearance level.
When the Keep tool down check box is not selected, after the machining of the specific Z-level, the
tool retracts up to the Operation Clearance level. At this level the tool horizontally moves to the
start position of the next cut and then descends to the next Z-level.
Clearance level
When the Keep tool down check box is selected, after the machining of the specific Z-level, the
tool retracts up to the height equal to the Safety distance from the machined cut, then horizontally
moves to the start position of the next cut at this level and descends to the next Z-level.
Safety
distance
369
370
6. 2.5D Milling
6.2 Face Milling Operation
This operation enables you to machine large flat surfaces with face mill tools.
6.2.1 Geometry page
This page enables you to define the machining geometry for the operation.
The geometry for Face Milling operations is defined using the Face Milling Geometry dialog box.
371
Name
This edit box enables you to define the geometry name.
Base Geometry
This section enables you to choose the method of the Face Milling
geometry definition.
• Model
This option generates a rectangle located at the XY-plane

and surrounding the Target model and selects it for the
Face Milling geometry. The rectangle chain is displayed in
the Chain List section.
Face Milling geometry
• Faces
This option enables you to Face Milling geometry

define the Face Milling geometry
by face selection. The Define
button and related combo-box
enable you either to define a new
faces geometry with the Select
Faces dialog box or to choose
an already defined geometry
from the list. When the model
faces are selected, SolidCAM
generates a number of chains
surrounding the selected faces.
These chains are displayed in the Selected faces
Chain List section.
372
6. 2.5D Milling
• Profile
This option enables you to define the Face Milling geometry by selecting a chain. The
Define button and related combo-box enable you either to define a new profile geometry
with the Geometry Edit dialog box or to choose an already defined geometry from the
list. The defined chains are displayed in the Chain List section.
Face Milling geometry
Chain List
This section displays all the chains chosen for the Face Milling geometry.
Each chain entry in the list contains a check box. By clearing this check box, you can exclude the
corresponding chain from the defined geometry.
The right-click menu is available on the chain entries in the list.

• The Check All command selects all of the chain check
boxes; all the geometry chains will participate in the
current geometry.
• The Uncheck All command removes the selection from

all of the chain check boxes; all the geometry chains will
be excluded from the current geometry.
When the selection is removed from all of the chains in the list, the button
that confirms the Face Milling Geometry dialog box is disabled.
• The Invert Check Status command enables you to invert the selection status for all
the chain entries; all the selected check boxes will be unselected and vice versa, all the
unselected check boxes will be selected.
373
The Merge button enables you to merge all the Face Milling geometry chains into a single chain.
The Separate button enables you to divide a merged chain into its initial separate chains.
Separate chains Merged chain
Modify Offset
This section enables you to offset the chain

currently selected in the Chain List section.
The Apply to all button enables you to apply
the specified offset value to all the chains.
This page enables you to define the

technological parameters of Face Milling.
374
6. 2.5D Milling
The following technologies are available:
Hatch technology
The machining is performed in a linear pattern.
The Overlap/Min. Overlap section enables you define the tool

overlapping between two successive passes. This section is
available only for Hatch and Contour strategies.
Equal step over
This option enables you to generate the hatch tool path spaced evenly with the
automatically calculated Overlap value, which is nearest to the specified Min. Overlap
value but not smaller than this value.
When this check box is not selected, the distance between the last pass and the one
before it can be smaller than that between all of the other passes.
Overlap Overlap
When this check box is selected, the evenly spaced hatch tool path is generated. The
overlap between two successive passes is not smaller than the specified Min. Overlap
value.
This option is available only for the Hatch

strategy.
Overlap Overlap
375
The Data button displays the Hatch Data dialog box that enables you to define the parameters of
hatching.
Hatch angle
The following options to define the angle of hatching are available:

• Automatic optional angle
SolidCAM automatically calculates the optimal angle of hatching to expedite the

machining. The tool path always follows the length of the face no matter what
angle the machined surface is facing.
376
6. 2.5D Milling
You can change the angle by entering a different value in the Delta from optimal
box.
Delta angle
Optimal direction
• User-defined angle
This option enables you to determine the angle of the tool path.
Angle
X
Keep cutting direction
This option enables you to control the cutting direction when moving around model
contours.
• Yes: the length of the tool path is not optimized.
• No: a shorter, optimized tool path is generated by reversing some tool movements.
The milling direction may change between climb and conventional milling.
377
Cutting direction
• One way
This option enables you to create the tool path with only
one-directional movements.
One way
• Zigzag
This option enables you to create the tool path with bi-
directional movements.
Extension Zigzag
During face milling, the tool path is extended over the edges of the machined face.
The Extension section enables you to define the extension both along the tool path
(the Along section) and across the tool path (the Across section). The extension can
be defined either by percentage of the tool diameter (the % of tool diameter option) or
by value (the Value option).
Extension across
the tool path
Extension along
the tool path
Corner
• None
The tool path is formed with sharp corners between one

direction and the next.
• Fillet
This option connects each direction with a given radius allowing

for a smoother transition between path directions.
378
6. 2.5D Milling
Contour technology
The machining is performed in a number of equidistant contours.

The Data button displays the Contour Parameters dialog box.
Start from
• Inside
This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting

from the middle of the pocket and cutting towards the
outside border of the pocket.
• Outside
This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting

from the outside border of the pocket and cutting
towards the middle of the pocket.
Corner
• None

379
• Fillet
This option connects each direction with a given radius

allowing for a smoother transition between path directions.
The Min. corner radius parameter enables you to define the

minimal value of the corner radius.
If the given radius is too large for a specific corner, it produces the
largest possible radius at that point.
There are times were the fillet option might leave some material. This
is particularly true if the given radius is large.
• Loop
This option ensures that the connecting points on the

path are cleaned using a smooth transition. The tool path
forms a loop in the corner, preventing an abrupt change
of direction.
• Sharp
This option ensures that using a short and simple movement

cleans the connecting points on the path. Although this
produces a sharp movement by the tool, the path itself is
slightly shorter than that in the smooth corner option. This
can help cut down on machining time.
This option is not recommended for high-

speed cutting.
Direction
This option enables you to choose

climb or conventional milling for
the roughing operation.
Climb Milling Conventional Milling
380
6. 2.5D Milling
Arc approximation
This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Contour roughing
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path can
be connected using an arc or a circle. If arc or circle connection within the specified
arc approximation tolerance can be made, you receive arc and circle interpolation
commands G2 and G3 in the generated GCode.
This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode files. Most CNC-
controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single tool
path points or splines. Arc approximation increases actual feed rates on older CNC-
machines and the machines work smoother.
The Tolerance value defines the tolerance SolidCAM uses to position tool path points
on arcs or circles.
Adjacent tool paths connection
This option enables you to choose the method with which the tool moves from one
tool path to the next.
• Linear
The tool moves in a normal approach from one tool path to

the next.
• Rounded
The tool moves in an arc path from one tool path to the next.
The size of the arc is half the distance between tool paths.
Extension
The Contour tool path can also be

extended over the machined face edges.
The Extension section enables you to
define the uniform extension of the
tool path. The extension can be defined Extension
either by percentage of the tool diameter
(the % of tool diameter option) or by value
(the Value option).
381
One pass technology
SolidCAM performs the face milling in one pass. The direction and
the location of the pass are calculated automatically according to
the face geometry, in order to generate an optimal tool movement
with the tool covering the whole geometry.
The Data button displays the One pass data dialog box that enables
you to define the machining parameters.
The Extension section enables you to define

the tool path extension over the face edges. The
extension can be defined either by percentage of
the tool diameter (the % of tool diameter option) Extension
or by value (the Value option).
Offsets
This section enables you to define the offset that remains on the face floor after the roughing
operation (Floor offset).
The Finish check box enables you to remove the remaining offset with the last cut (if the check box
is selected) or leave the offset unmachined for further operations (if the check box is not selected).
Depth cutting type
This option enables you to connect cutting passes by vertical zigzag movements. When a cutting
pass is machined, the tool moves down to the next cutting level and machines it in the opposite
direction. When the machining of all cutting levels is finished for a specific pass, the tool moves to
the next cutting pass and machines it in the same manner.
This option is available only for the Hatch and One Pass strategies.
382
6. 2.5D Milling
The behavior of these options depends on the state of the Cutting direction option defined in the
Hatch Data dialog box.
When the Zigzag option is chosen for Cutting

direction and the One way option is chosen for Depth
cutting type, the tool performs the machining of a
cutting pass at a specific Z-level and then moves to
the beginning of the next cutting pass located at the
successive Z-level and continues the machining in the
same direction. The movement to the next cutting
pass is performed via the Clearance level.
When the Zigzag option is chosen for Cutting

direction and the Zigzag option is chosen for Depth
cutting type, the tool performs the machining of
a cutting pass at a specific Z-level, then moves directly
to the next Z-level and then continues to machine the
next cutting pass in the reversed direction.
5
When the One way option is chosen for Cutting 4 10
direction and the One way option is chosen for Depth 3
9
cutting type, the tool machines a cutting pass located 2 8
at a specific Z-level and then rapidly moves via the 1
7
Clearance level to the beginning of the next cutting 6
pass at the same Z-level. When the Z-level is machined
in such manner, the tool starts the machining of the
next Z-level. In this case, SolidCAM preserves the
cutting direction (either climb or conventional) for all
of the cutting passes.
5
When the One way option is chosen for Cutting 4
direction and the Zigzag option is chosen for Depth 3

2
cutting type, the tool performs the machining of
1
all cutting passes at a specific Z-level in the same
direction, and then directly moves down to machine
the passes at the next Z-level in the opposite direction. 6
7
8
9
10
383
Reverse tool path
The Reverse check box enables you to reverse direction of the tool path. When this check box is
selected, the hatch tool path is performed in the opposite direction.
Initial tool path Reversed tool path
This option is available only for the Hatch and One Pass strategies.
Sort cut order
The Complete Z-level option enables you to define the order of the machining Z-levels, in case
more than one face is machined.
For more information, see topic 6.4.3.
384
6. 2.5D Milling
6.2.3 Link page
This page enables you to define the parameters of tool approach and retreat relative to the machined
geometry.
Ramping
This field controls the way the tool plunges into the material inside the pocket.
Lead in
This field controls the movement of the tool when it enters the pocket on the finishing cut.
Lead out
This field controls the movement of the tool when it leaves the pocket on the finishing cut.
Keep tool down
This option enables you to reduce the unnecessary tool movements through the Clearance level.
385
386
6. 2.5D Milling
6.3 Contour 3D Operation
The Contour 3D operation enables you to utilize the power of the 3D

Engraving technology (see topic 7.2) for the 3D contour machining. In
this operation, SolidCAM enables you to prevent the gouging between
the tool and the 3D contour.

technological parameters of the
machining.
Modify
The Tool side option enables you to

define the tool position relative to Left Right Center
the geometry.
values set in the Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.
set in Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry. The compensation cannot
be used with this option.
When the Tool side is set to Right or Left, all chains defined for the Contour
3D operation geometry must start at the same height.
387
The Geometry button enables you to modify a geometry shared by several operations separately for
each operation.
When the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
Tool reference
This option enables you to define the point on the tool which is in contact with the machined 3D
contour.
• Tip
With this option, the tool tip is in contact with the 3D

contour; SolidCAM prevents the gouging between the
tool and the 3D contour. Note that the tool axis always
crosses the geometry.
• Center
With this option, the tool center is in contact with the

3D contour. In this case, SolidCAM does not check the
gouging between the tool and the contour.
388
6. 2.5D Milling
Technology
When the Tip option is chosen for the Tool reference definition, this section enables you to define
the technological parameters of the operation.
Type
This option enables you to perform the semi-finish and/or finish machining of the
3D contour.
• Semi-finish
The machining of the 3D contour is performed in several steps along the Z-axis.
The vertical distance between two steps is defined by the Step down parameter.
• Finish
The 3D contour is machined to its final dimensions in one step down.

• Both
This option is used to machine the 3D contour first with a semi-finish cut and
then with a finish cut.
Step down
This value defines the vertical distance between two successive steps during the Semi-
finish machining of the 3D contour.
• From Upper level
SolidCAM performs a number of horizontal semi-finish passes at each down

step, from the Upper level up to the defined Contour depth.
Upper level
3D Contour geometry
Contour depth
389
• From surface
SolidCAM performs a number of 3D semi-finish passes at each step down, from

the chosen 3D contour to the defined Contour depth.
3D Contour geometry
Contour depth
The Technology section is not available when the Center option is chosen for the Tool reference
definition.
Offsets
SolidCAM enables you to specify the machining allowances that can be removed either by profile
finishing in the same operation or in another operation.
Rough
This section enables you to perform the profile rough machining.
Finish
This section enables you to perform the profile finishing.
Clear offset
This section enables you to define the parameters of the Clear offset machining for the roughing
and finishing passes.
390
6. 2.5D Milling
Chamfer
This option enables you to machine chamfers with a Center drill tool.
This button is available only when the Right or Left option is chosen for the Tool side definition.
6.3.2 Link page

parameters of tool approach and retreat
relative to the machined contour.
Lead in/Lead out
These options enable you to control the way

the tool approaches and retreats from the
contour.
When the Right or Left option is chosen for

the Tool side definition, the following Lead
in/out options are available:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
• Point
When the Center option is chosen for the Tool side definition, the following Lead in/out options
are available:
• None
• Arc
• Tangent
For more information about Lead in/out options, see topic 6.1.3.
391
392
6. 2.5D Milling
6.4 Pocket Operation
In pocket milling, you have to remove material from the interior of a closed geometry. SolidCAM
offers two types of pocketing:
1. When a profile geometry consists of one or more

profiles and none of them are enclosed or intersect
with one another, each is milled as a separate pocket
without islands.
2. When a profile geometry consists of several

profiles, any profile that is enclosed or intersecting
with another profile is treated as an island. You can
define an unlimited number of islands within a
single pocket.
When you click Add Operation, Pocket, the Pocket Operation dialog box is displayed.
393
6.4.1 Geometry page
The geometry definition is performed using the Geometry Edit dialog box.
Only closed contours are acceptable for the definition of geometry. When
you confirm an open chain definition in the Geometry Edit dialog box with
the button, the Close Chain dialog box is displayed.
When you confirm this dialog box with the OK button, the chain is closed
with a line that connects the start and the end points of the chain. The Mark
line as open edge check box enables you to mark the connecting line as
open edge to perform open pocket machining.
When you click on the Cancel button, SolidCAM returns to the geometry
definition and enables you to close the chain manually by the model element
selection.
394
6. 2.5D Milling
6.4.2 Levels page
This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements and the operation are
executed.
Step down
Step down
SolidCAM uses the constant-Z passes for the
Pocket generation. The Step down parameter Upper level
enables you to define the distance between each
two successive Z-levels. Enter the tool’s cutting
depth. Pocket depth
Equal step down
Selecting this check box enables you to keep an equal distance between all Z-levels.
When this check box is selected, the Max. Step down parameter appears instead of the Step down
parameter.
395
This page enables you to define the technological parameters of the Pocket machining.
Pocket machining technology
Pocket machining
Hatch
technologies
Contour
Hatch+Finish
Plunging pattern
Choose the pocket machining technology from the list.
• Hatch mills the pocket in a linear pattern.
• Contour machines the pocket in a round pattern.
• Hatch+Finish mills the pocket in a linear pattern and cleans

up the profile on each cutting depth.
• Plunging pattern: the tool moves up and down in a drilling

motion, travelling inside the pocket.
Click on the Data button to define additional parameters.
396
6. 2.5D Milling
Hatch technology
This technology enables you to machine the pocket in a linear pattern.
This option is used in Pocket, Pocket Recognition and 3D Milling operations

for Roughing (see topic 7.1.3) and Constant Z finishing (see topic 7.1.13).
This technology creates a linear raster tool path up to the pocket contour.
Click on the Data button. The Hatch Data dialog box is displayed.
397
Hatch angle
The following options to define the angle of hatching are available:

• Automatic optional angle
SolidCAM automatically calculates the optimal angle

of hatching to expedite the machining. The tool path
always follows the length of the pocket no matter what
angle the pocket is facing.
You can change the angle by entering a different value

in the Delta from optimal box.
• User-defined angle
This option enables you to determine the angle of the

tool path.
Keep cutting direction
This option enables you to control the cutting direction when moving around model
contours.
• Yes
The length of the tool path is not optimized.

• No
SolidCAM generates a shorter, optimized tool path by reversing some tool

movements. The milling direction may change between climb and conventional
milling.
398
6. 2.5D Milling
Cutting direction
• One way
This option enables you to create the tool path with only one-
One way
• Zigzag
This option enables you to create the tool path with bi-
Zigzag
Corner
• None

• Fillet
This option connects each direction with a given radius

allowing for a smoother transition between path directions.
Exit Material
This option controls the tool movements between the

working areas.
• When this check box is not selected, the tool moves

from one working area to the next through the full
material around the island to get to the next working
area as shown above.
• When this check box is selected, the tool exits from the
material and travels rapidly above the material to the
next working area as shown above. The Lead in path is
the Lead in you defined.
This option is used in the Hatch and Contour

strategies in Pocket, Pocket Recognition and
3D Milling operations.
399
Contour technology
In this technology, the tool moves on offsets parallel to the pocket

contour.
Click on the Data button. The Contour Parameters dialog box is

displayed.
This option is used in the Pocket, Face Milling, Pocket Recognition and 3D
Milling operationsfor Roughing and Constant Z finishing.
Constant Z
Pocket Milling Face Milling 3D Roughing
Finishing
Exit material
This option controls the tool movements between the working areas.
Connect islands
This option enables you to keep the same cutting direction

(conventional or climb milling) throughout the entire tool
path where possible. This is particularly important in high-
speed cutting.
400
6. 2.5D Milling
Start from
• Inside
This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting from the middle of the
pocket and cutting towards the outside border of the pocket.
• Outside
This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting from the outside border of
the pocket and cutting towards the middle of the pocket.
Corner
• None

• Fillet
This option connects each direction with a given radius allowing

for a smoother transition between path directions.
The Min. corner radius parameter enables you to define the
minimal value of the corner radius.
If the given radius is too large for a specific corner,

it produces the largest possible radius at that point.
Some material can be left if the given radius is large.
• Loop
This option ensures that the connecting points on the path are
cleaned using a smooth transition. The tool path forms a loop
in the corner, preventing an abrupt change of direction.
401
• Sharp
This option ensures that using a short and simple movement

cleans the connecting points on the path. Although this
produces a sharp movement by the tool, the path itself is
slightly shorter than that in the Loop option. This can help
reduce the machining time.
This option is not recommended for high-speed

cutting.
Direction
This option enables you to choose climb or conventional milling for the roughing
operation.
Climb Milling Conventional Milling
Arc approximation
This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Contour roughing
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path can
be connected using an arc or a circle. If arc or circle connection within the specified
arc approximation tolerance can be made, you receive arc and circle interpolation
commands G2 and G3 in the generated GCode.
controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single tool
path points or splines. Arc approximation increases actual feed rates on older CNC-
machines and the machines work smoother.
on arcs or circles.
402
6. 2.5D Milling
Adjacent passes connection
This option enables you to choose the method with which the tool moves within the
pocket from one pass to the next.
• Linear
The tool moves in a normal approach from one pass to

the next.
• Rounded
The tool moves in an arc path from one pass to the next.
The size of the arc is half the distance between passes.
Hatch+Finish technology
SolidCAM first machines the pocket on the actual step

down with the Hatch technology and then makes a final
path around the pocket contour.
Click on the Data button. The Hatch Data dialog box is

displayed.
Hatching
Final profiling
403
Plunging pattern technology
Plunging is a technology of removing material from a given

pocket using a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the
tool moves up and down as in a drilling motion, travelling along
the path type you choose.
Click on the Data button. The Plunging dialog box is displayed.
Drill cycle type
SolidCAM enables you to choose preferable drilling

cycles for the plunging operation.
1. Click on the Drill cycle type button and choose the cycle type you want in
the Drill cycle dialog box.
2. Click on the Data button and specify the parameters in the Drill options
dialog box.
For more information on the Drilling cycles, see topic 6.6.3.
Clean condition
This value determines the maximum percentage of material

that will be removed based on the diameter of the tool.
Minimal clean condition
This value determines the minimum percentage of material

that will be removed based on the diameter of the tool.
404
6. 2.5D Milling
Feeds
The plunging feeds can be determined by the percentage of the tool and the diameter
of the tool being used.
• Full/Center
If the full diameter of the tool is cutting, the

feed and spin defined in the appropriate field
are used.
In the second field, you can determine a specific

working diameter of the tool. If the working
diameter from the center of the tool is greater
than this value but smaller than the full diameter,
the feed and spin rate that was entered in the
appropriate field are used.
• Overlap (%)
If none of the above conditions have been met, the feed and spin are determined
by the overlap of the tool.
Open pocket machining
This section is enabled only when the pocket geometry contains open edges.
Extension
During the open pocket machining, Open edge

the tool path is extended beyond the
open edges.
The Extension section enables you

to define the overlapping between
the tool and the open edges; the
overlapping can be defined as
a percentage of the tool diameter
(the % of tool diameter option) or as
a value (the Value option). Extension
405
Use profile strategy
The Use profile strategy option enables you to perform

the open pocket machining in a Profile manner. The tool
path at a specific Z-level consists of several equidistant
profiles starting from outside the model at the distance
defined by the Extension parameter. The tool moves on
offsets parallel to the pocket geometry.
The following options enable you to define the tool path

direction and linking.
When the One way option is chosen, the tool finishes

one profile pass, then rapidly moves (G0) to the safety
distance and then to the start of the next cutting pass.
The cutting direction (either climb or conventional) is
preserved for each cutting pass.
When the Zigzag option is chosen, the tool finishes

one profile pass and then moves directly to the next
pass. The machining is performed without leaving the
material, thus constantly switching between climb and
conventional milling.
Approach from outside
This option enables the tool to approach from

outside of the material in the open pocket
areas, if possible. Such approach enables you
to decrease the tool loading when plunging
into the material. This option enables you to
perform the approach movement from the
automatically calculated point outside of the
material. The tool moves to the required depth
outside of the material and then plunges into
the material.
406
6. 2.5D Milling
Descend in Rapid to cut level
This option enables you to avoid vertical non-machining movements outside of the
material performed with the working feed by direct rapid movement down to the
cutting level.
When this check box is selected, the tool descends from the Clearance level outside
of the material directly to the cutting level (defined with the Step down parameter)
using the Rapid feed. Then the horizontal movement into the material is started with
the working feed.
Upper level
Rapid movement
Cutting level
When this check box is not selected, the tool descends from the Clearance level down
to the Safety distance with the Rapid feed. From the Safety distance, the tool descends
down to the cutting level (defined with the Step down parameter) with the defined feed
and starts the horizontal cutting movements into the material with the working feed.
Upper level
Rapid movement
Safety distance
Feed movement
Cutting level
The Descend in Rapid to cut level check box is available only when the
Approach from outside check box is selected.
407
Complete Z-level
This option enables you to define the order of Z-levels machining when several pockets
are machined in a single Pocket operation.
1 5
When the Complete Z-level check box is 2 6
not selected, SolidCAM machines all the 3 7
Z-levels of the first pocket and then starts 4 8
the machining of the next pocket.
When the Complete Z-level check box is 1 2

selected, the machining is performed by 3 4
the Z-levels; SolidCAM removes material 5 6
at a specific Z-level in all pockets and then 7 8
moves to the next Z-level.
Overlap
Enter the Overlap of adjacent tool paths in the milling of the pocket.
0.5D 0.2D
Overlap 0.5D Overlap 0.2D
Equal step over
This option enables you to generate the hatch tool path

spaced evenly with the automatically calculated Overlap
value, which is nearest to the specified Min. Overlap value
but not smaller than this value.
When this check box is not selected, the distance between

the last pass and the one before it can be smaller than
that between all of the other passes.
Overlap Overlap
408
6. 2.5D Milling
When this check box is selected, the evenly spaced hatch tool path is generated. The overlap between
two successive passes is not smaller than the specified Min. Overlap value.
Overlap Overlap
This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without

changing the geometry.
For more information on this option, see topic 6.1.2.
Offsets
To perform the rough machining of the pocket, you have to specify the
offsets on the pocket geometry that will be removed with the finishing
cut.
• Wall offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket wall after the roughing cut.
• Island offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket islands after the roughing cut.
• Floor offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket floor after the roughing cut.
409
Finish
This section enables you to perform the finish machining of the

pocket.
The Wall check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
walls. Only walls and islands are finished on the contour. The pocket
depth is reduced by the specified floor offset.
The Floor check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
floor. The finish cut is executed to remove the floor offset. The
specified wall and island offset remain on the pocket contour.
Wall finish
This section field contains two options to control the material removal on the last
finishing cut.
• On offset
The finish path is executed at an offset equal to

the sum of the tool radius and the finish offset
from the tool path of the last roughing cut. The
result is a uniform cutting depth (side step) on Offset
the last cut, since in the pocket corners the tool Offset
is not drawn into the material.
Offset
• On geometry
The last cutting pass is executed exactly on the

pocket geometry. R
R
Offset
Offset
410
6. 2.5D Milling
Depth
This section enables you to choose how the wall finishing will be performed: at the
whole depth or in a number of steps at each step down.
Finish passes
• Total depth

wall finishing is performed in a
single cut at the whole depth.
• Each step down Finish pass

wall finishing is performed in
a number of successive cuts at
each step down.
The options of the Depth section are available only when the wall
finishing is performed in the operation.
When the Wall draft angle option is used in the operation, the Depth
options are disabled and the wall finishing is performed in a number of
successive cuts at each step down.
Compensation
When the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options
G4x ofthe CNC-controller are used in the GCode.
411
• The Rest material option enables you to define parameters to

remove the rest material left unmachined after the previous
operations.
• The Chamfer option enables you to machine chamfers with

the Center drill tool.
Rest material
When a large tool is used around the Rest Material areas

profile in Pocket machining, the tool
Pocket
leaves material in the areas that it cannot geometry
enter.
The rest material option enables you

to remove the material from this area Island
without defining a new geometry. geometry
The Rest Material dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, you have to define the following parameters:

• Previous tool diameter – the diameter of the
tool used in the previous operation.
• Previous wall offset – the wall offset used in
the previous operation.
• Extension – the overlap distance that you

would like to start and end from the previous Extension Rest Material
larger end mill.
412
6. 2.5D Milling
Milling type
When the Separate areas strategy is chosen, SolidCAM generates a profile or

pocket tool path to clean areas that the previous tool could not mill. The Around
profile strategy generates a closed profile to mill the rest material.
• Separate areas – SolidCAM machines only areas not machined with the previous
tool.
• Around Profile – SolidCAM machines the whole profile.
In Pocket operations with the

Separate areas machining strategy,
SolidCAM can generate two types of
tool paths, depending on the volume
of the rest material and on the
previous and present tool diameters:
Pocket-style tool paths Profile-style tool paths
SolidCAM generates a pocket or a profile tool path in each area of the rest material.
413
Pocket-style tool path areas can be open or closed depending on the approach
possibilities.
Closed pocket-style Open pocket-style
tool path area tool path area
Profile-style
tool path area
Open pocket-style tool path area
The approach to the open pockets can be performed from the machined space in
contrast to the closed pockets where the approach from the outside is unavailable.
The strategy for the tool approach to closed pocket areas is defined in the Ramping
section (see topic 6.4.4) in the Pocket Operation dialog box.
SolidCAM automatically determines the optimal point for the approach to the open
pocket areas.
Approach point
Open pocket-style
tool path area
When the Rest Material option is chosen in the Pocket

Operation dialog box, the Lead in option provides you
with the following strategies used for the approach to
Profile-style tool path areas:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
For more information on the Lead in strategies, see topic 6.4.4.
414
6. 2.5D Milling
The check boxes selected in the Pocket and Profile boxes

determine which of these tool paths are cut:
• Island – only tool paths that touch the pocket islands are
cut.
• Island + Wall – tool paths that touch both the pocket wall
and islands are cut.
• Wall – only tool paths that touch the pocket wall are cut.
• Each tool down – machining is performed in a number of
successive cuts at each step down.
Chamfer
This option enables you to use a drill tool to add

a chamfer to the edge of a part.
In the Tool page of the Pocket Operation dialog box,

click on the Select button. The Part Tool Table dialog
box is displayed. Choose a drill tool for the chamfering.
In the Levels page of the Pocket Operation dialog box,

enter the size of the chamfer edge in the Pocket depth
field.
415
In the Technology page of the Pocket
Operation dialog box, choose Chamfer from
the Rest Material\Chamfer list and click on
the Data button.
In the Chamfer dialog box, enter the

following parameters:
• Feed – the feed rate you would like the

tool to travel.
• Cutting diameter – the starting cutting diameter of the tool.
Cutting Profile depth

diameter (Chamfer length)
If you choose to chamfer a part that has a sharp corner, it is important

that the cutting diameter is equal to that of the last tool used in that
geometry so that the chamfer is equal all around.
∅6
∅6
416
6. 2.5D Milling
6.4.4 Link page

parameters of tool approach and retreat
relative to the machined pocket.
Ramping
This field controls the way the tool

plunges into the material inside the
pocket. Choose the Ramping mode and
set the corresponding parameters.
• None
The tool enters the material

vertically at the start point
chosen automatically by the
SolidCAM pocket algorithm.
• Vertical
The tool enters the material vertically at a user-defined

position. From this position, the tool moves to the pocket
start point, calculated by the pocket algorithm. The Data
button displays the Vertical ramping dialog box that
enables you to define the position for the vertical ramping.
Chains
This section displays the list of all geometry chains defined

for the operation. All the chain entries are displayed under the
Chains header. You can select chain entries in the list.
417
When the Chains header is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool paths and default
ramping positions for all of the chains.
Default
ramping position
When a specific chain is selected, SolidCAM displays the

tool path and the default ramping position automatically
calculated for this chain. You can change this position
by picking a point on the model or by entering the new
position coordinates into the X, Y, Z dialog box.
To facilitate the definition, SolidCAM displays only the first Z-level of the tool path in
the XY-plane of current Coordinate System. The automatically defined start position
of the tool path is marked with a cyan dot in a circle of the tool diameter size. This
circle is connected by two parallel lines with a second circle of the same diameter; the
center of the second circle is linked to the cursor position. When the cursor moves
over the model, the circle also moves causing the updating of the connecting lines. This
schematic image simplifies the choice of the vertical ramping position by displaying
the lines parallel to the cutting pass between the ramping position and the tool path
start position. In this mode, you can pick the ramping position on the model.
Automatically calculated
Tool diameter circle
tool path start position
Cursor
position
418
6. 2.5D Milling
When the position is picked, it is marked on the model with a cyan dot. The coordinates
of the picked point are displayed in the X, Y, Z dialog box. The start position of the tool
path is marked on the model with a yellow dot.
When the ramping position is defined, the tool vertically descends into the material
at the specified ramping position until it reaches the first cutting level; then it moves
horizontally to the start position of the tool path and performs machining of the
pocket.
Tool path start position Ramping position
When the ramping position for a chain is defined manually by model picking, the color
of the chain entry in the list is changed to blue.
Ramping position
When a single chain is selected in the list, the Set default

button enables you to replace the currently defined ramping
position for the selected chain by the default ramping
position located at the tool path start position. When the
Chains header is selected, the Set default button enables
you to remove the ramping positions for all the chains and
re-assign for them the default ramping positions.
The Auto next button provides you with the selection

mode that enables you to define the ramping positions for
all of the chains one by one. When a chain is selected and
the Auto next button is clicked, SolidCAM enables you to
define the ramping position for the current chain. When
the ramping position is defined by picking on the model,
SolidCAM automatically switches to the next chain in the
list, and so on.
419
• Angle
The tool moves to the pocket start point at a specified

ramp angle.
The Data button displays the Angle ramping dialog box

that enables you to define the ramping position and the
related parameters.
Angle ramping parameters
The Angle edit box enables you to define the ramping angle.
Chains
This section displays the list of all geometry chains defined for the operation. All the
chain entries are displayed under the Chains header. You can select chain entries in the
list.
ramping positions automatically calculated for all of the chains.
When a chain entry is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and the default
ramping position automatically calculated for this chain; this position can be changed.
The ramping position is selected in the same manner as for Vertical ramping.
420
6. 2.5D Milling
When the ramping position is defined, the tool moves to the pocket start point at
a specified ramp angle. The inclined movement starts at the Safety distance level
and continues to the start position of the tool path. If the inclination angle of the
movement is equal to or smaller than the specified Angle value, the ramping movement
is performed in one pass. If the inclination angle is greater than the specified Angle
value, the ramping is performed in several zigzag passes. When the tool reaches the
first cutting level at the tool path start position, the pocket machining is performed.
Distance
Safety distance
Previous cutting level
Tool path start position Step down

Angle
Cutting level
Ramping position
The Set default button enables you to replace the currently defined ramping position
for the selected chain by the default ramping position located at the tool path start
position.
The Auto next button provides you with the selection mode that enables you to define
the ramping positions for all of the chains one by one.
SolidCAM does not check the ramping movement against the pocket
contour. Check the tool path simulation to make sure that the tool does not
gouge the pocket walls or islands.
• Helical
The tool enters the material in a spiral movement according

to the defined step down, angle and radius.
421
The Data button displays the Helical ramping dialog box
related parameters.
Helical ramping parameters
The Tool step down parameter defines the distance between

each two adjacent turns of the tool helical movement.
The Angle parameter defines the ramping angle.
The Radius parameter defines the radius of the descending

helix.
Center cutting
If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the Center

cutting check box. In the Angle field, enter the descent angle
that you would like the tool to follow. In the Radius field,
enter the radius of the tool path helix.
The working order is as follows:
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the
Upper level to the material in a circular motion until the
step down is reached using the user-defined radius.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material at the step
down depth.
• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance
level.
• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Z safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the Helical Lead in to the next working depth.
• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.
If the tool does not have center cutting capabilities, do not select the Center cutting
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the depth of the step down of the tool.
The result of this action is the same as with a center cutting tool except for the
following differences:
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the Upper level to the material in
a circular motion up to the Tool Step down.
• At this point, the tool clears a circular path. Then it descends to the next Tool step
down.
422
6. 2.5D Milling
• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part step down depth.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that step
down depth.
level.
step down depth and repeat the Helical Lead in to the next working depth.
Chains
list.
When the Chains header is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and default
ramping positions for all of the chains. The circles represent the default helical ramping
movement defined for each chain.
When a chain entry is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and the default ramping
position for this chain. This position is automatically defined at the start position of
the tool path segment relevant for the current chain. You can change this position by
picking a point on the model or by entering the new position coordinates into the X, Y,
Z dialog box. The schematic circle facilitates the definition of the position.
of the picked point are displayed in the X, Y, Z dialog box. The start position of the
tool path is marked on the model with a yellow dot. The circle of the tool path color
represents the helical movement of the tool plunging.
423
When the ramping position is defined, the tool descends into the material at the specified
ramping position with helical movements according to the defined parameters. When
it reaches the level of the first cutting pass, it moves to the start position of the tool
path and performs machining of the pocket.
Ramping position
position.
• Linear
The Linear ramping follows the same rules as the Helical

ramping. The difference is that the descent is performed in
a linear zigzag manner rather than in a circular one.
The Data button displays the Linear ramping dialog box

related parameters.
Linear ramping parameters
The Tool step down parameter defines the distance between

each two adjacent turns of the tool helical movement.
The Angle parameter defines the ramping angle.
The Length parameter defines the length of the linear

descending motion.
424
6. 2.5D Milling
Center cutting
If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the Center cutting check box. In the
Linear dialog box, enter the length of the linear tool path that you would like the tool
to travel.
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the Upper Level to the material
in a zigzag motion based on the user defined angle and length until the step down
is reached.
• When the tool reaches the down depth step, it machines all the material on that step
down depth.
level.
step down depth and repeat the Linear Lead in to the next working depth.
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the required depth of the step down.
The result of this action is the same as that of the center cutting tool except for the
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the Upper Level to the material
in a zigzag motion up to the Tool Step down.
• At this point the tool clears a straight linear path. Then it descends to the next Tool
Step down.
• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part step down depth.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that step
down depth.
level.
step down depth and repeat the Linear ramping to the next working depth.
425
Chains
list.
ramping positions for all of the chains.
When a chain entry is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and the default ramping
position for this chain. This position is automatically defined at the start position of
the tool path segment relevant for the current chain. You can change this position
by picking a point on the model or by entering the new position coordinates into the
X, Y, Z dialog box. The schematic circle facilitates the definition of the position.
of the picked point are displayed in the X, Y, Z dialog box. The start position of the
tool path is marked on the model with a yellow dot. The line drawn through the picked
ramping position represents the linear movement of the tool plunging. Another line
drawn from the ramping position to the start position represent the tool horizontal
movement at the first cutting level.
When the ramping position is defined, the tool descends into the material at the
specified ramping position. The ramping movement is performed in a linear manner.
When the tool reaches the first cutting level, it horizontally moves to the start position
of the tool path and starts the pocket machining.
426
6. 2.5D Milling
Ramping position
position.
Lead in
In pocket machining, the Lead in option is used for horizontal approach of the tool to the geometry
in the machining of the part walls.
This option is available when the Wall check box is selected in the Finish
section of the Technology page.
• None
The tool leads in to the milling level exactly adjacent to the start point of the geometry.
• Normal
The tool leads in to the geometry from a point normal to

the geometry. The length of the normal can be set in the
Value field.
Lead in
value
• Arc
The tool leads in to the profile with a tangential arc. The

arc radius can be set in the Value field.
Lead in
value
427
The Data button enables you to define additional
parameters in the Arc Lead In Data dialog box.
Arc angle
This parameter defines the angle of the retreat arc

segment. The default angle value is 90°; in this case
SolidCAM generates an approach path of quarter arc.
Lead in from
With the Arc Lead in option, the tool moves normal to the retreat arc at the arc
start point.
• Distance
The tool starts at the specified distance from the arc start point.
• Center
The tool starts at the approach arc center.
Angle Angle
Distance
Lead in from Center Lead in from Distance
• Tangent
The tool leads in on a line tangent to the profile. The

length of the tangent can be set in the Value field.
Normal
Lead in
value
428
6. 2.5D Milling
Lead out
This field controls the movement of the tool when it exits from the pocket contour on the finishing
cut.
• None
From the last point of the contour, the tool exits vertically in rapid move.
This option causes the tool to exit while in contact with the pocket wall,
which might cause gouging and result in visible marks on the workpiece.
• Normal
With a movement normal to the pocket contour, the tool

retreats from the last point of the profile. The length of
the normal must be specified using the Distance value.
Then the tool rapidly travels vertically to the Clearance
level.
Lead out
value
• Arc
With a circular motion tangent to the last entity of the

pocket contour, the tool retreats from the profile. The
radius of the arc must be specified using the Distance
value. Then the tool rapidly travels vertically to the
Clearance level.
Lead out
value
429
The Data button is displayed. Click on the button to display
the Arc Lead Out Data dialog box.
Arc angle
This parameter defines the angle of the lead out arc

segment. The default angle value is 90°; in this case,
SolidCAM generates a lead out path of quarter arc.
Lead out from
With the Arc Lead out option, the tool moves normal to the lead out arc at the arc
start point. The following options are available:
• Distance
The tool starts from the specified distance from the arc start point.
• Center
The tool starts from the lead out arc center.
Angle Angle
Distance
Lead out from Center Lead out from Distance
• Tangent
The tool retreats from the pocket wall in a movement

tangent to the last profile entity. The length of the tangent
must be entered in the Distance field.
Normal
Lead out
value
SolidCAM does not check the Lead out movements against the pocket
contour. Check the tool path simulation to make sure that the tool does not
gouge the pocket walls or islands.
430
6. 2.5D Milling
Same as Lead in
When this check box is selected, the strategy and parameters defined for Lead in are used for Lead
out.
Keep tool down
This option enables you to reduce the unnecessary tool movements through the Clearance level.
431
432
6. 2.5D Milling
6.5 Pocket Recognition Operation
This operation enables you to recognize the pocket

features on the solid model and perform the machining
of these features.
6.5.1 Geometry page
This page enables you to define the machining geometry for the
operation.
Defining the geometry
The automatically recognized geometry consists of planar faces and

loops of through pocket features. The definition of the geometry is
performed in the Select Faces dialog box.
The major steps of the Pocket Recognition geometry selection are:

• Choose the model configuration used for the recognition;
• Set the selection filter options for Through Pocket and Circular
Pocket;
• Set the selection mode;

• Perform the pocket recognition and generate the faces tree;
• Choose the faces you want to include in the operation
geometry.
433
Select Faces dialog box
This dialog box enables you to define the parameters of the pocket feature recognition
geometry.
• Name
This option enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM offers
you the Default Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.
• Configurations
This section enables you to select the SolidWorks model configuration to be used
for the geometry definition.
• Selection mode
This section enables you to set the mode of the geometry selection. The following
selection modes are available:
Solid Body
This mode enables you to perform automatic recognition of the pocket

features on the picked solid body. All planar faces are recognized with the
surface normal vector oriented parallel to the Z-axis of the current CoordSys.
The planar faces that cannot be machined with the current CoordSys position
(undercuts) cannot be selected (the selection is rejected). All the through
pocket areas are recognized according to the Through pocket option.
Selected faces
Undercut face
(selection rejected)
434
6. 2.5D Milling
Face
This mode enables you to pick single planar faces. When a face is picked,
SolidCAM checks the parallel relation between the surface normal vector
of the picked face and the positive direction of the Z-axis of the current
CoordSys. If they are not parallel, the face is not selected. The undercut
faces that cannot be machined with the current CoordSys position are also
not selected. The selection is working in the toggling mode: the first click
on a face selects it, the next click on the selected face removes the selection.
Through Pocket Chain
This mode enables you to select the through pockets by picking one of the
edges of the lower loop of the pocket area. When the edge is picked, the
complete geometry of the through pocket is automatically selected. The
lower loop is highlighted on the model. The selection is working in the
toggling mode: the first click on an edge selects the loop, the next click on an
edge of the already selected loop removes the selection.
• Through Pocket
When this check box is selected with the Selection mode set to Solid body, the
recognition of through pocket features is also performed.
Through pockets
Upper loop
Only the through pocket features where the
upper loop is similar to the lower loop are
recognized. The through pocket features
that cannot be machined with the current
CoordSys position cannot be selected.
Lower loop
435
• Circular Pocket diameter filter
When this check box is selected with the Selection mode set to Solid body, circular
pocket features can be selected according to their diameter. All circular pocket
features with the diameter greater than the specified Min. Diameter value will be
selected. Using this option, you can avoid the machining of the drill features that
are supposed to be machined in other operations (Drilling, Drill recognition, etc.).
The Min. Diameter parameter defines the minimum diameter of the pocket
features. You may enter the value in the edit box or pick a cylindrical surface or
a circular edge in the solid model when the cursor is placed in the Min. Diameter
edit box.
When the Apply filter check box is not selected, all recognized circular pocket
areas suitable for the current Coordinate System will be selected.
• Model Appearance
The Transparency option enables you to display the selected solid bodies in the
transparent mode.
• List of recognized elements
This section displays the list of all recognized model

elements included in the geometry for the operation.
Each model element is accompanied by its Z-level
value enclosed in parentheses. When an element is
selected in the list, it is highlighted on the solid model.
The right-click menu is available on the list items. The Unselect command enables
you to remove the current item from the selected geometry. The Unselect All
command enables you to remove the selection from all items in the list.
436
6. 2.5D Milling
When the Select Faces dialog box is confirmed, SolidCAM automatically generates
a number of pocket contours to perform the optimal machining of the selected faces
and through pockets.
In the part shown below, the contours are generated from

the selected planar faces.
The machining is performed in the following sequence:

first, the upper face is machined; then the pocket is
machined up to the height of the central pad. From this
height, the pocket with island is machined up to the final
pocket depth.
Modifying the geometry
After the geometry is defined, it can be shared between a number of Pocket Recognition operations.
In each operation, SolidCAM enables you to perform a specific geometry modification. The
modification is relevant only for the current operation and does not affect other operations based
on this geometry.
The Modify button displays the Geometry Modify dialog box that
enables you to define the parameters of the geometry modification.
Geometry Modify dialog box

• Through pocket delt
This section enables you to modify the depth of the

through pockets with the specified Delta value. When
a positive value is applied, the through pockets will
be deeper by the specified value.
• Machine floor fillets
This option enables you to control the machining of

fillets between the floor and the walls of the pocket
features.
437
When this option is activated, SolidCAM
generates a multi-level pocket geometry
evenly distributed along the Z-axis. The
machining of this geometry performs
the rough machining of the fillets.
The Number of Steps button displays the

Fillet Step Number dialog box. This dialog
box
enables you to control the parameters of the
multi-level geometry generation and provides
you with the information about the Maximum
Fillet Radius found in the geometry.
This dialog box enables you to specify the range

of the fillet radii and assign a number of steps
to each such range. SolidCAM generates a
defined number of evenly distributed Z-levels.
At each level, the closed contour is automatically
generated.
• Transparency
This section enables you to apply the transparency for the solid bodies used for
the geometry definition.
• Preview
This button enables you to display the modified geometry on the solid model.
The Resume button enables you to return from the preview state to the dialog
box.
• List of geometry elements
This list displays the geometry elements included in the current geometry. Each
element in the list is accompanied by the following information in parentheses:
Z-level at which the element is located, radius of the adjacent fillet and diameter
of circular pockets. The check box near each geometry element enables you to
exclude the current element from the geometry of the operation. When the check
box is selected, the element is machined in the current operation.
438
6. 2.5D Milling
A right-click menu is available on the elements of the list. This menu enables you
to perform the following actions:
Check all
This command enables you to check all

the elements of the list.
Uncheck all
This command enables you to uncheck

all the elements of the list.
Invert check states
With this command the state of the check boxes of all the elements will
be reversed.
6.5.2 Levels page

This page enables you to define the machining levels of the operation: Start level, Clearance level,
Safety distance, Upper level, and Step down (see topic 5.2.8).
The Pocket depth is automatically recognized on the solid model, for each
pocket feature separately.
439
Pocket machining technology
Choose the pocket machining technology from the list.
• Contour machines the pocket in a round pattern.
• Hatch mills the pocket in a linear pattern.
• Hatch+Finish mills the pocket in a linear pattern and cleans up the profile on each cutting
depth.
For more information about rough machining strategies, see topic 6.4.3.
Click on the Data button to define additional parameters.
440
6. 2.5D Milling
Open pockets machining
This section is enabled only when the pocket geometry contains open edges.
Extension
During the open pocket machining, the Open edge

tool path is extended beyond the open
edges.
The Extension section enables you to

define the overlapping between the tool
and the open edges; the overlapping can
be defined as a percentage of the tool
diameter (the % of tool diameter option)
or as a value (the Value option). Extension
Use profile strategy
The Use profile strategy option enables you

to perform open pocket machining in a Profile
manner. The tool path at a specific Z-level
consists of several equidistant profiles starting
from outside the model at the distance defined
by the Extension parameter. The tool moves on
offsets parallel to the pocket geometry.
For more information on this option, see topic

6.4.3.
Approach from outside

areas, if possible. Such approach enables you
to decrease the tool loading when plunging
into the material. This option enables you to
perform the approach movement from the
automatically calculated point outside of the
material. The tool moves to the required depth
outside of the material and then plunges into
the material.
441
Descend to cutting level with Rapid
This option enables you to avoid vertical non-machining movements outside of the
material performed with the working feed by direct rapid movement down to the
cutting level.
Final cut
When this check box is selected, only the finish path for the floor area of the pockets
is generated, rough machining is not performed. Since the Floor offset parameter is
disabled, machining is performed only at the specified pocket depth.
Complete Z-level
This option enables you to define the order of the machining Z-levels.
Overlap
Enter the Overlap of adjacent tool paths in the milling of the pocket.
0.5D 0.2D
• The Rest material option enables you to define parameters to remove the rest material
left unmachined after the previous operations.
• The Chamfer option enables you to machine chamfers with the Center drill tool.
For more information on these options, see topic 6.4.3.
442
6. 2.5D Milling
Offsets
To perform the rough machining of the pocket, you have to specify

the offsets on the pocket geometry that will be removed with the
finishing cut.
• Wall offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket wall after the roughing cut.
• Island offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket islands after the roughing cut.
• Floor offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket floor after the roughing cut.
Finish
This section enables you to perform the finish machining of the

pocket.
The Wall check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
walls. Only wall and islands are finished on the contour. The pocket
depth is reduced by the specified floor offset.
The Floor check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
floor. The finish cut is executed to remove the floor offset. The
specified wall and island offset remain on the pocket contour.
Compensation
If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the CNC-
controller are used in the GCode.
This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without

changing the geometry.
443
6.5.4 Link page
Ramping
This field controls the way the tool plunges into the material inside the pocket.
For more information about Ramping modes and the corresponding parameters, see topic 6.4.4.
Lead in
In pocket machining, the Lead in option is used for horizontal approach of the tool to the geometry
in the machining of the part walls.
This option is available when the Wall check box is selected in the Finish
section of the Technology page.
Lead out
This field controls the movement of the tool when it exits from the pocket contour on the finishing
cut.
444
6. 2.5D Milling
6.6 Drilling Operation
This operation enables you to perform drills and other canned drill cycles.
SolidCAM supports the canned drill cycles provided by your particular
CNC-machine such as threading, peck, ream, boring, etc. If your CNC-
machine has no canned drill cycles of its own, they can be defined using
the General Pre- and Post-processor program (GPPTool).
When you click Add Operation, Drilling, the Drilling Operation dialog box
is displayed.
6.6.1 Tool page
445
Center drill
In addition to the standard tool parameters presented on the Tool page, SolidCAM enables you to
label a tool as a center drill. This option is used for automatic sorting. In automatic sorting, tools
labeled as center drills can be automatically moved to the top of the operation list.
When a Tap tool is chosen for the operation, the Tapping drill cycle type is automatically chosen.
The Drill cycle type button is unavailable. You cannot change the cycle type until the Tap tool is
changed to a tool of a different type.
If the Tapping cycle is not supported by the current MAC file, the Tap tool cannot be chosen for
the operation. The following error message is displayed when you click on the Select button in the
Part Tool Table dialog box.
When you change the MAC file for the CAM-Part that contains tapping operations with a MAC
file that does not support tapping, SolidCAM marks all the tapping operations with the asterisk
sign (the PCode is removed). When you try to calculate such operations, the following message is
displayed:
446
6. 2.5D Milling
6.6.2 Levels page
This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements and the operation are
executed.
Drill depth
This parameter defines the final depth of the drilled hole.
Drill
depth
447
Depth type
This option enables you to deepen the drilled hole in order to obtain a given diameter at the
specified drill depth.
Drill Drill
Drill
depth depth
depth
Diameter
value
Cutter tip Full diameter Diameter value
• Cutter tip
The drill tip reaches the defined Drill depth.

• Full diameter
The drill reaches the defined Drill depth with the full diameter.
• Diameter value
The drill reaches the defined Drill depth with the drill cone diameter specified by the
Diameter value parameter.
The Diameter value can vary from 0 all the way up to the drill tool diameter.
A value greater than the drill tool diameter is automatically decreased to the
drill tool diameter.

technological parameters of drilling.
448
6. 2.5D Milling
Sequence of drill positions
This section enables you to define the sequence of the drill positions, manage its direction, etc.
You can change the order of positions in the sequence by dragging and dropping them in the list
section of the Drill Geometry Selection dialog box (see topic 4.2.3).
Default
Drilling of holes is performed according to the order in which the points were picked
during the geometry definition.
Line
This option enables you to define the direction of the sequenced drill positions
machining.
You have to define the direction by selecting two points on your model. The drill
positions are arranged along the Direction line.
1. Click on the Pick line button.
2. The Pick first point dialog box is displayed. Enter the coordinate values
and confirm with the Enter button or pick a position using the SolidWorks
selection options.
3. The Pick second point dialog box is displayed. Define the end point of
the direction line in the same manner.
4. Click on the Show sorted button to preview the sorted positions.
449
Advanced sorting
This option enables you to sort the drill positions for machining of linear and circular
drill patterns.
The button displays the Advanced Sort dialog box.

• Linear sorting
The Linear tab contains the sorting methods

appropriate for machining of linear drill
patterns.
Linear pattern
According to the linear sorting methods

described above, the machining is performed
either by rows of drill positions with the same
Y-coordinate or by columns of drill positions
with the same X-coordinate. The Tolerance
parameter enables you to define the tolerance
that is used to determine if a drill position
belongs to the current row/column or to
a different row/column.
If the machining is performed by rows, SolidCAM determines the first drill

position for each row (the start position of the first row is the start position
of the whole pattern). For each next drill position, SolidCAM determines the
Y-coordinate and compares it with the Y-coordinate of the first drill position
of the current row. If the linear deviation is within the specified tolerance limit,
SolidCAM considers this position to belong to the current row. If the deviation
exceeds the tolerance value, the drill position is rejected from the current row;
later this position will be checked again for belonging to next rows.
In the similar manner, when the machining is performed by columns, the specified
Tolerance value is used to determine whether a specific drill position belongs to
the current column. In this case, the deviation of X-coordinates between the first
drill position in the column and the current drill position is compared with the
tolerance value.
450
6. 2.5D Milling
Linear sorting methods
The following methods are available for advanced linear sorting:
SolidCAM determines the position with the

minimal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same Y-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
increasing X-coordinates.
When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next Y-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next row from the position with the minimal X-coordinate to the position with the
maximal X-coordinate (increasing order) and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the rows is performed in the same direction of increasing X-coordinates.
The ordering of rows is performed in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

increasing X-coordinates.
next row from the position with the maximal X-coordinate to the position with the
minimal X-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
two successive rows is performed in the opposite order: each odd row is machined in
the direction of increasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of decreasing X-coordinates.
The rows are machined in the direction of the increasing Y-coordinates.
451
of the drills with the same X-coordinate; the
increasing Y-coordinates.
When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next X-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position with the
maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the columns is performed in the same direction of increasing Y-coordinates.
The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position with the
minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order: each odd column is
machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined
in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.
The columns are ordered in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.
452
6. 2.5D Milling

minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined
SolidCAM determines the position with

the minimal X-coordinate and the maximal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same Y-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.
the previous Y-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next row from the position with the maximal X-coordinate to the position with the
the direction of increasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of decreasing X-coordinates.
The rows are machined in the direction of the decreasing Y-coordinates.
453
same X-coordinate; the machining is performed
minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the columns is performed in the same direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.
The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position with the
maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
machined in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined
in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.
454
6. 2.5D Milling

the maximal X-coordinate and the minimal
in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.
When the last position of the current Y-coordinate

is machined, SolidCAM passes to the next Y-coordinate (in the increasing order) and
continues the machining of the next row from the position with maximal X-coordinate
to the position with the minimal X-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such
manner, the machining of the rows is performed in the same direction of decreasing
X-coordinates.
The ordering of rows is performed in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.
next row from the position with the minimal X-coordinate to the position with the
maximal X-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the direction of decreasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of increasing X-coordinates.
The rows are machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.
455
the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position with
the maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
of the columns is performed in the same direction of increasing Y-coordinates.
The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate

is machined, SolidCAM passes to the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing
order) and continues the machining of the next column from the position with the
maximal Y-coordinate to the position with the minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing
order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of two successive columns is
performed in the opposite order: each odd column is machined in the direction of
increasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined in the direction of decreasing
Y-coordinates.
The columns are ordered in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.
456
6. 2.5D Milling

maximal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
decreasing X-coordinates.
the next row from the position with the maximal X-coordinate to the position with the
the rows is performed in the same direction of decreasing X-coordinates.
The ordering of rows is performed in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

the start position of the drill sequence. From this
position, SolidCAM continues the machining
decreasing X-coordinates.
the next row from the position with the minimal X-coordinate to the position with the
maximal X-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the direction of decreasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of increasing X-coordinates.
The rows are machined in the direction of the decreasing Y-coordinates.
457
decreasing Y-coordinates.
the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position with
the minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order) and so on. In such manner, the machining
of the columns is performed in the same direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.
The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

decreasing Y-coordinates.
When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes
to the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining
of the next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position
with the maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the
machining of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order; each odd
column is machined in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates, each even column is
machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.
The columns are ordered in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.
458
6. 2.5D Milling
Circular sorting
The Circular tab contains the sorting methods

appropriate for machining of circular drill
patterns.
For the ordering of drill positions by all of

the circular sorting methods, SolidCAM uses
the center point around which the circular
pattern is defined. For each drill position of
the chosen geometry, SolidCAM determines
the radial vector of the drill position from the
center point. For each such vector, SolidCAM
determines its length (radius) and the angle
between the vector and the X-axis at the
center point; these parameters are used for
further sorting.
Circular pattern
This section contains the following parameters:

• Start angle
This parameter enables you to define the angle at which the start position will
be chosen. This angle is defined according to the positive direction of the
X-axis at the pattern center. The default value of the parameter is 0°.
Radius
Angle
The Pick button enables you to define the

Start angle by picking a point on the model.
The Pick angle point dialog box enables you to
pick the position on the model and displays the
coordinates of the picked position.
459
When the position is picked and the dialog box is confirmed, SolidCAM
determines the direction vector from the pattern center towards the picked
position. SolidCAM automatically calculates the angle between the direction
vector and the X-axis at the pattern center and displays the angle value in the
Start angle edit box.
• Tolerance
During the circular sorting, SolidCAM groups the drill positions into groups
of those located at the same radius or into groups of those located at the
same angle.
The Tolerance value determines if a drill position belongs to the same radius
group or not. For each group of drill positions located at the same radius,
SolidCAM determines the start position; each additional drill position to
be included into this group must be located at the radius that is within the
tolerance from the radius of the start position.
For each group of drill positions located at the same angle, SolidCAM
determines the start position; each additional drill position to be included into
this group must be located at the angle that is within the angular tolerance
(calculated automatically according to the specified tolerance) from the angle
of the start position.
Change sort center
By default, the pattern center is automatically

defined at the origin of the Coordinate System
used in the current operation. The Change sort
center button enables you to change the pattern
center location by picking on the model. The
Pick center point dialog box enables you to pick
the center position and displays the coordinates
of the picked point.
460
6. 2.5D Milling
Circular sorting methods
The following methods are available for advanced circular sorting:
For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally
close to the specified Start angle value. This
position is accepted as the start position. From
this position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of all the drill positions located at the same radius;
the machining is performed in the clockwise
direction.
When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next smaller radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the same clockwise direction.

minimal radius located at the angle maximally
direction.
moves to the closest drill position located at the next greater radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the same clockwise direction.
461
direction.
machining is performed in the counterclockwise direction. The next, smaller radius
circle (a number of drills located at the same radius) is machined again in the clockwise
direction. In such manner, the machining of odd circles is performed in the clockwise
direction, the machining of even circles is performed in the counterclockwise direction.

direction.
machining is performed in the counterclockwise direction. The next, greater radius
circle is machined again in the clockwise direction. In such manner, the machining of
odd circles is performed in the clockwise direction, the machining of even circles is
performed in the counterclockwise direction.
462
6. 2.5D Milling

maximal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the
drill positions located at the same radius; the
machining is performed in the counterclockwise
direction.
machining is performed in the same counterclockwise direction.

minimal radius located at the angle maximally close
direction.
machining is performed in the same counterclockwise direction.
463
maximal radius located at the angle maximally close
direction.
When all the drills located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM moves to the
closest drill position located at the next smaller radius. At this radius, the machining is
performed in the clockwise direction. The next smaller radius is machined again in the
counterclockwise direction. In such manner, the machining of odd circles is performed
in the counterclockwise direction; the machining of even circles is performed in the
clockwise direction.

direction.
When all the drills located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM moves to the
closest drill position located at the next greater radius. At this radius, the machining is
performed in the clockwise direction. The next greater radius is machined again in the
counterclockwise direction. In such manner, the machining of odd circles is performed
in the counterclockwise direction; the machining of even circles is performed in the
clockwise direction.
464
6. 2.5D Milling

of all the drill positions with the same angle
(according to the Angle tolerance value) starting
from the start position towards the position
located at the smallest radius (towards the pattern
center).
When the drill position located at the smallest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves
in the clockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same smallest radius
but at a different angle. From this drill position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of the drill positions located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance
value) towards the drill position located at the greatest radius (from the pattern center
outwards). From this position, the tool moves in the clockwise direction to the next
drill position located at the same greatest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.
In other words, SolidCAM groups all the drill positions into radial rays, each ray
containing a drill position located at the same angle. Each such ray is machined in the
opposite direction; the first ray is machined towards the pattern center. The rays are
ordered in the clockwise direction.
For each drill instance of the chosen geometry,

drill positions with the same angle (according to
the Angle tolerance value) starting from the start
position towards the drill position with greatest
radius (from the pattern center outwards).
465
When the drill position with the greatest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves in the
clockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same greatest radius but at
a different angle. From this drill position, SolidCAM performs the machining of the
drill position located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance value) towards
the drill position located at the smallest radius (towards the pattern center). From this
position, the tool moves in the clockwise direction to the next drill position located at
the same smallest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.
containing the drill position located at the same angle. Each such ray is machined in
the opposite direction; the first ray is machined from the pattern center outwards. The
rays are ordered in the clockwise direction.

of all the drill positions located with the same
angle (according to the Angle tolerance value)
starting from the start position towards the
smallest radius (towards the pattern center).
When the drill position with the smallest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves in the
counterclockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same smallest radius
of drill positions located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance value)
towards the drill position located at the greatest radius (from the pattern center
outwards). From this position, the tool moves in the counterclockwise direction to
the next drill position located at the same greatest radius, but at a different angle, and
so on.
the opposite direction; the first ray is machined towards the pattern center. The rays
are ordered in the counterclockwise direction.
466
6. 2.5D Milling

of all the drill positions located with the same
angle (according to the Angle tolerance value)
starting from the start position towards the drill
position with the greatest radius (from the pattern
center outwards).
When the drill position with the greatest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves in the
counterclockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same greatest radius
of drill positions located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance value)
towards the drill position located at the smallest radius (towards the pattern center).
From this position, the tool moves in the counterclockwise direction to the next drill
position located at the same smallest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.
the opposite direction; the first ray is machined from the pattern center outwards. The
rays are ordered in the counterclockwise direction.
467
Direction
Consider the defined line as the X-direction. SolidCAM groups together all the drill
positions with the same X-coordinate. The order of machining of such groups is
defined by the following options:
• One way
Each group of drill positions is machined in the ascending order of Y-coordinates,

i.e. after the last drill position of the group (maximal Y-coordinate), the tool moves
to the first drill position (minimal Y-coordinate) of the next group.
Line
Line
• Zigzag
Each odd group of drill positions is machined in the ascending order of

Y-coordinates, i.e. after the last drill position of the group (maximal Y-coordinate),
the tool moves to the last drill position (maximal Y-coordinate) of the next group.
The machining of the group is continued till the first drill position (minimal
Y-coordinate) is reached, and then the tool moves to the first drill position (minimal
Y-coordinate) of the next group.
Line
Line
468
6. 2.5D Milling
Distance
This option minimizes the length of

the necessary tool movement. The
first drill is performed at the first
point defined in the drill geometry.
Any other drill is executed at the
nearest position, i.e. at the shortest
distance to the previous drill position.
Reverse drilling sequence
SolidCAM enables you to reverse the sequence 1 5

3
of drilling positions in Drilling operations.
This functionality enables you to optimize the 6
rapid movements during the machining and
4
increase the machining speed. 2
Original sequence
The Reverse check box enables you to reverse
the sequence of drilling positions as shown. 6 4 2
When the same sequence of drilling positions 1

3
is used in several drilling operations (e.g. 5
center drilling, drilling and threading) the
Reversed sequence
sequence reversing enables you to reduce
rapid movements between the operations.
This option is available only when the drill_proc parameter is set to N

in the MAC file.
Show sorted
This button displays the sorted sequence of drill positions on the solid model.
469
Drill cycle type
Click on the Drill cycle type button. The Drill canned cycles
supported by the post-processor of the current CNC-controller are
displayed. Click on one of the icons to select the canned cycle you
want to use in this operation.
SolidCAM Drilling
cycles
Drilling
F_Drill
Peck
Tapping
Boring
R_Boring
F_Boring
Drill canned cycles must be defined in the *.mac and *.gpp post-processor of the
currently active CNC-controller in your CAM-Part. Contact customer support to
learn more about customizing your post-processor.
Drilling
The drill travels in one single motion to the specified depth and retracts.
F_Drill
The drill travels in one single motion to the specified depth, pauses for
a specified amount of time and then retracts.
• Delay
In the Value column, enter the amount of time (in seconds)

you want the tool to pause at the depth point of the hole.
470
6. 2.5D Milling
Peck
The drill travels in steps to the specified depth. At each depth step the tool rapidly retracts to the
safety distance. Then the tool rapidly returns to the point where it must continue drilling. These
movements are repeated until the final depth is reached.
When you click on the Data button, the Drill Options dialog box is displayed.
• Delay

you want the tool to pause at the depth point of the hole.
• Step down
In the Value column, enter the depth that you want the
tool to reach at each step.
Tapping
The tap travels in one single motion to the specified depth and then retracts reversing its spin
direction.
Boring
The boring tool travels in one single motion to the specified depth, stop its spin motion and retracts
rapidly.
R_Boring
The boring tool travels in one single motion to the specified depth, stops its spin motion, pauses
for a specified amount of time and retracts rapidly.
• Delay

you want the tool to pause at the depth of the hole.
471
F_Boring
The boring tool travels in one single motion to the specified depth and
retracts at the same feed rate, at which it entered.
• Delay

you want the tool to pause at the depth of the hole.
The drill options are very closely related to the post-processor of the CNC-
controller you are using and may function differently in each case. Please
contact your local dealer or SolidCAM support for information on your
particular post-processor.
472
6. 2.5D Milling
6.7 Drill Recognition Operation
The Drill Recognition operation performs powerful

drill feature recognition and automatic Drill geometry
creation using SolidCAM AFRM module functionality.
This operation enables you to handle separate sets of
Milling levels for each drill position. The initial values
of the Milling levels sets are automatically recognized
from the model; they can be edited by the user.
6.7.1 Geometry page
The geometry for the Drill Recognition operation is defined using the AFRM functionality and is
automatically recognized on the Target model, therefore the Target model must be defined in the
CAM-Part before you define the operation. The hole recognition is performed in the direction
parallel to the Z-axis of the Coordinate System chosen for the operation.
The definition of the geometry is performed in the HR Drill Geometry Selection dialog box.
The major steps of the HR Drill Geometry selection:

• Choose the model configuration used for the recognition;
• Set the selection filter options (Hole type, Hole diameter, Hole Upper level and Hole
Height);
• Perform the holes recognition and generate the recognized holes tree;
• Choose the holes you want to include in the operation geometry;
• Preview the machining sequence.
473
HR Drill Geometry Selection dialog box
This dialog box enables you to define the geometry and manage the
parameters of the drill recognition.
Name
This option enables you to define the name of the geometry.

SolidCAM offers you the Default Geometry name (see topic
12.9) that can be edited.
Hole type
This section sets the recognition filter of hole features

according to their type.
The Through check box enables you to recognize the through
hole features.
The Blind check box enables you to recognize the blind hole
features.
When none of these check boxes is selected, hole

recognition cannot be performed, and the Find
Holes button is disabled.
Hole diameter (d)
When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered

according to the diameter of the hole. With this filter, only the
hole features with the Hole diameter value within the specified
range are recognized.
The From and To values enable you to define the Diameter range by entering the values
or by picking on the solid model. When the cursor is placed in the From/To edit box, you
can specify the diameter value by picking a specific cylindrical surface or a circular edge
on the solid model. When a cylindrical surface or a circular edge is picked, its diameter
is calculated and inserted into the corresponding edit box replacing the previous value.
The edit box becomes pink. When you remove the automatically determined value, the
edit box becomes white.
The Thread only check box enables you to recognize only the hole features with
threads. The thread recognition is performed according to the SolidCAM Settings.
When this check box is selected, the From and To values define the range of the Thread
diameter values. The From and To values can be defined by picking a cylindrical surface,
cosmetic thread or circular edge on the solid model.
474
6. 2.5D Milling
Hole Upper level (u)
When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered according to the Upper
level. With this filter, only the hole features with the Upper level value within the
specified range are recognized.
The From and To values enable you to define the Upper level range by entering the
values or by picking on the solid model. When the cursor is placed in the From/To
edit box, you can specify the Upper level value by picking on the solid model. When
a model point is picked, the Z-value of the picked position is calculated and inserted
into the corresponding edit box replacing the previous value. The edit box becomes
pink. When you remove the automatically determined value, the edit box becomes
white.
Hole height (h)
When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered according to the Hole
height. With this filter, only the hole features with the Hole height value within the
specified range are recognized.
The From and To values enable you to define the Hole height range by entering the
values or by picking on the solid model. When the cursor is placed in the From/To
edit box, you can specify the Hole height value by picking on the solid model. When
a model point is picked, the Z-value of the picked position is calculated and inserted
into the corresponding edit box replacing the previous value. The edit box becomes
pink. When you remove the automatically determined value, the edit box becomes
white.
Color
When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered according to the color of
the hole faces. The Define button enables you to choose the color for filtering.
The standard Color dialog box is displayed. This dialog box
enables you to choose the color from the basic palette or to
define a new one.
The Pick from model button enables you to define the color
by picking the faces of the hole features.
475
When the color is defined using either of
the two buttons, SolidCAM determines its
RGB components and displays them in the
Red/Green/Blue edit boxes. The chosen
color is accepted, and when you click on
the Find Holes button, SolidCAM adds all
holes with the specified color properties
into the geometry.
In case of hole features consisting of several segments with different colors, the holes
recognition is performed according to the color of the hole top segment regardless of
the color properties of the lower segments.
Note that when the process of holes recognition takes place for the
first time, the holes database is created containing all the colors of the
hole features. If you change the colors after the holes recognition, these
changes will not take effect unless you perform holes recognition again.
If the color parameter is chosen by picking the color of a model entity,
this color parameter becomes associative with the solid model. If the
color is defined by choosing from the Windows palette, there is no
associativity.
Options
• Auto
This button enables you to perform the holes recognition automatically in

accordance with the specified filtering criteria.
• Manual
This button enables you to define the geometry for Drill Recognition operations by
picking the specific hole features directly on the solid model. When this option is
chosen, the filtering capabilities are disabled.
In the Manual mode, a hole feature can be selected by picking its face or edge. When
a face/edge is picked, SolidCAM checks in the HR database to which hole feature
the selected entity belongs and adds the determined hole feature to the Holes Tree
list.
The Auto and Manual modes can be combined, but note that if you
use the Auto mode after the Manual mode, the selections made in the
Manual mode will be cleared.
476
6. 2.5D Milling
• Find Holes
This button performs the holes recognition and filtering of the recognized holes
according to the criteria described above. The hole features matching the specified
filter criteria will be displayed in the Holes Tree list.
Actually, the holes recognition is not performed each time when you
click on the Find Holes button. When the holes recognition is performed
the first time for a specific Z-axis direction, the recognized holes data is
stored in the database and can be used for further geometry definition.
When you click on the Find Holes button, SolidCAM retrieves the
data from the database according to the filter settings and checks the
synchronization between the data and the solid model. If the data in
the database is not synchronized, a new holes recognition process is
performed and filtering is reapplied.
• Preview
This button displays the current drill geometry based on selected items in the Holes
Tree list and the initial machining sequence.
Click on the Resume button to return to the geometry definition.
Holes Tree
In the Holes Tree list, the hole features are classified into Shapes and Groups. A Shape
contains all the hole features with the same topology; within a Shape, the Groups
include all the hole features with the same dimensions.
The check box near each item in the Holes Tree list enables you to select this item and
include it in the current drill geometry. When a Group or a Shape is selected, all the
hole features belonging to them are selected. The selected items are highlighted on the
model.
The right-click menu is available on the items in the list.
• The Remove command enables you to remove

the selected hole features from the list.
• The Remove All command enables you to remove

all the hole features from the list.
• The Show hole command displays the Hole

Picture and Hole Parameters dialog boxes.
477
The Hole Picture dialog box provides you with
a schematic image of the selected hole feature.
The Hole Parameters dialog box displays parameters

of the selected hole feature. This dialog box displays
the common hole feature data and the specific
parameters of the hole feature segments.
Synchronization
Synchronization in case of model change
When you define the geometry using the filters and then change it manually, these
changes are taken into account during the synchronization.
After the synchronization, SolidCAM includes in the geometry the previously selected
holes (automatically and manually) and the new holes added in the process of model
change (if there are any) that meet the criteria of the filtering initially used for drill
recognition.
SolidCAM does not include in the geometry the holes that were removed manually
and those whose diameter has been changed such that they do not match the filtering
parameters.
Example:
The geometry has been defined by filtering the holes according to the diameter. The
following changes were then made:
• One of the recognized holes is removed manually from the list;

• A hole with a different diameter is selected manually;
• A new hole that meets the filtering criteria is added to the model.
After the synchronization, the geometry contains the holes chosen by filtering except
for the removed one, the hole that was selected manually and the newly added hole.
478
6. 2.5D Milling
Synchronization in case of Coordinate System change
When the Coordinate System used for the geometry definition is changed, SolidCAM
tries to recalculate all the hole features included in the geometry according to the
updated Coordinate System position and orientation.
When the axis of a hole included in the geometry is not parallel to the Z-axis of the
updated Coordinate System, this hole is excluded from the geometry. If all holes are
excluded from the geometry, SolidCAM marks this geometry with an exclamation sign;
such geometry requires manual editing and redefinition.
When the parallel relation between hole axis and Z-axis of the Coordinate System
is preserved after the CoordSys update, SolidCAM recalculates the hole center
coordinates according to the updated origin.
6.7.2 Levels page
This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements are executed. The Start
level, Clearance level and Safety distance parameters are common for all drill features; the depth-
related parameters (Upper level, Drill depth, and Delta depth) are defined for each drill feature
separately. This functionality enables you to perform the machining of several identical drills with
different depths and located at different levels in a single operation.
The Depth edit button enables you to define the depth-related parameters for the chosen drill
features using the Depth Edit dialog box.
479
Depth Edit dialog box
This dialog box enables you to control over the parameters of the drill
recognition and choose the necessary hole features to be included in the
geometry for the Drill Recognition operation. The hole recognition is
performed on the Target model in the direction parallel to the Z-axis of
the Coordinate System chosen for the operation.
Holes Tree
This section displays the list of all drill instances chosen for
the geometry. All the drill instances in the list are structured
in Groups. Each group has the same Upper level, Drill
depth, Delta depth and Depth type. Each group in the list
is accompanied by the following information enclosed in
parentheses: Upper level, Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth
type. Each drill instance in the list is accompanied by the
X- and Y-coordinates of the drilling position.
The initial values of the Drill depth and Upper level parameters
are recognized on the Target model. The default value of Delta
depth is 0. The Cutter tip option is used by default for all the
Depth type definitions.
When one or a group of the drill instances is highlighted in the

list, the relevant parameters are displayed in the Upper level,
Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth type sections. The selected
groups and drill instances are highlighted on the solid model.
Each drill instance in the list has a corresponding check

box that can be selected to include the drill instance in
the geometry.
The right-click menu is available on each item in the

list.
• Restore Data from Model
This command enables you to restore and assign to selected item (a group
or a single drill instance) the Upper level and Drill depth recognized on the
Target model. The Delta depth value is restored to 0. The Depth type option
is restored to Cutter tip. When the Restore Data from Model command is
applied, SolidCAM checks the Holes tree items and reorganizes them into
groups according to the changed parameters.
480
6. 2.5D Milling
• Restore Data from Model to All
This command restores the Upper level, Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth
type data for all the drill instances in the list. When the Restore Data from
Model to All command is applied, SolidCAM checks the Holes tree items and
reorganizes them into groups according to the changed parameters.
• Select All/Unselect All
These commands enable you to select/clear the check boxes for all the drill
instances in the list.
Diameter (D)
This section enables you to set the diameter value and apply it to a single hole, a group
or all holes.
Upper level (u)
This section enables you to set the value of the Upper level and apply it to a single hole,
a group or all holes.
The edit box displays the Upper level value of the selected item (a group or a hole). The
edit box enables you to enter the value or pick the value directly from the model (when
the cursor is placed in the edit box). SolidCAM enables you to pick planar faces parallel
to the XY-plane of the Coordinate System, model vertices and sketch points. When
a model is picked, the Z-value of the picked position is displayed in the edit box. The
edit box has pink background, which means that the parameter is defined associatively
to the solid model. When the edit box value is typed in, it is not associative to the
model; in this case the edit box has white background.
The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Upper level value to the selected list
item (a group or a hole). When a new Upper level value is applied, SolidCAM checks
the Holes tree items and reorganizes them into groups according to the changed
parameters. SolidCAM checks all the groups to find a group with identical Upper level,
Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth type parameters. If such group is found, SolidCAM
adds the updated drill to this group. In case of absence of a suitable group, a new
group is created; the updated drill instance is added to this group. The Apply button is
not available until you change the value in the edit box.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Upper level value to all drill
instances.
481
Drill depth (d)
This section enables you to define the value of the drilling depth and apply it to a single
hole, a group or all holes.
The edit box displays the Drill depth value of the selected item (a group or a hole). The
edit box enables you enter the value or pick the value directly from the model (when
the cursor is placed in the edit box). SolidCAM enables you to pick drill faces or edges.
SolidCAM determines the depth of the picked drill according to the defined Upper
level and displays the value in the edit box. The edit box has pink background, which
means that the parameter is defined associatively to the solid model. When the edit box
value is typed in, it is not associative to the model; in this case the edit box has white
background.
The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Drill depth value to the selected list
item (a group or a hole). When a new Drill depth value is applied, SolidCAM checks
parameters. SolidCAM checks all groups to find a group with identical Upper level,
group is created; the updated drill instance is added to this group.
The Apply button is not available until you change the value in the edit box.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Drill depth value to all drill instances.
Delta depth (dd)
This section enables you to set the Delta depth value and apply it to a single hole,
a group or all holes.
The edit box displays the Delta depth value of the selected item (a group or a hole).
The default value is 0.
The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Delta depth value to the selected list
item (a group or a hole). When a new Delta depth value is applied, SolidCAM checks
parameters. SolidCAM checks all groups to find a group with identical Upper level,
group is created; the updated drill instance is added to this group.
The Apply button is not available until you change the value in the edit box.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Delta depth value to all the drill
instances.
482
6. 2.5D Milling
Depth type
This section enables you to define the Depth type for a single hole, a group or all holes.
You can define the diameter on the conical part of the drilling tool that will reach the
specified drilling depth during the machining. You can also deepen a drilled hole in
order to obtain a given diameter at the specified drill depth.
• Cutter tip
The drill tip reaches the defined drilling depth.

• Full diameter
The drill reaches the defined drilling depth with the full diameter.
• Diameter value
The drill reaches the defined drilling depth with the drill cone diameter specified
by the Diameter value parameter.
When this option is chosen for chamfer machining, SolidCAM determines the
diameter of the upper cylindrical segment of the drill instance and compares
it with the tool diameter. If the determined diameter is smaller than the tool
diameter, the determined diameter is accepted as the default for the Diameter
value. If the determined diameter is greater than or equal to the tool diameter, the
tool diameter value is accepted as the default for the Diameter value parameter.
The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Depth type to the selected list item
(a group or a hole). When a new Depth type is applied, SolidCAM checks the Holes
tree items and reorganizes them into groups according to the changed parameters.
SolidCAM checks all groups to find a group with identical Upper level, Drill depth,
Delta depth and Depth type parameters. If such group is found, SolidCAM adds the
updated drill to this group.
In case of absence of a suitable group, a new group is created; the updated drill
instance is added to this group.
The Apply button is not available until you change the current Depth type option.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Depth type option to all the drill
instances.
483
Drill cycle type
Click on the Drill cycle type button. The drill canned cycles supported by the post-processor of the
current CNC-controller are displayed. Click on one of the icons to select the canned cycle you want
to use in this operation.
484
6. 2.5D Milling
Minimize hole cycle
This option enables you to shorten the GCode file by grouping similar drilling
positions under the same GCode cycle – the holes that have the same Upper level and
Depth data are grouped under a common single GCode cycle.
When this check box is not selected, a separate GCode cycle is generated for each
drilling position of the machined geometry.
Example:
(DR-DRILL-R7-T3 - DRILL-HR)
(-------------------------)
X35.85 Y35.85 Z10.
G98 G81 Z-96. R2. F33
G80
G0 X509.85
X509.85 Y35.85 Z10.
G98 G81 Z-96. R2. F33
G80
G0 X35.85 Y459.85
X35.85 Y459.85 Z10.
G98 G81 Z-96. R2. F33
G80
G0 X509.85
509.85 Y459.85 Z10.
G98 G81 Z-96. R2. F33
G80
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM groups the drilling positions with the
same Upper level and Depth under the common GCode cycle.
Example:
(DR-DRILL-R7-T3 - DRILL-HR)
(-------------------------)
X35.85 Y35.85 Z10.
G98 G81 Z-96. R2. F33
X509.85
X35.85 Y459.85
X509.85
G80
485
486
6. 2.5D Milling
6.8 Thread Milling Operation
The Thread Milling operation enables you to generate a helical

tool path for the machining of internal and external threads with
thread mills.
Most current CNC-controllers have a standard feature called

helical interpolation. This feature is used to make a circular move
in two axes and a linear move in a third axis. In thread milling, this
feature is used to form a circular motion in X and Y and a linear
motion in the Z-axis.
The X and Y circular motion forms the

diameter to be thread-milled. The Z-axis
linear motion forms the actual pitch (or lead)
of the thread.
The Thread Milling Operation dialog box

enables you to define the parameters of
thread milling.
6.8.1 Tool page
This page enables you to choose the tool for the operation from the Part Tool Table. This section
also displays the major parameters of the chosen tool: Tool type, Number, Diameter, Pitch, Number
of threads, and the chosen Standard table.
Only tools of the Thread

Mill/Thread Taper type can
be chosen for the operation.
487
6.8.2 Levels page
Depth definition
This section enables you to define the depth of the thread by Value or by Number of threads.
The generated helical tool path is affected by the following tool parameters: Pitch and Number of
threads.
Additional depth
This option enables you to deepen the threading by a certain value.
In the Deeper field, enter the additional depth value required.
Start from beginning
When you have added a certain depth to be thread-milled, there is in some cases a need
to start the cutting of the thread from the beginning. This is possible with the Start
from beginning check box.
For example, you thread-milled one drill hole out of 10 identical holes to a certain
depth. Then you found that the threading is not deep enough, and added a certain
additional depth. Then you thread-milled the hole again (without starting from the
beginning, because there is no point in cutting the thread again where it is already
cut) and made sure that the depth is now satisfactory. To thread-mill the rest of the
holes, you need to start cutting from the very beginning, because these holes were not
previously machined, as the first hole.
488
6. 2.5D Milling
Sequence of thread positions
This section enables you to define the sequence of the thread positions, manage its direction, etc.
• Default
The threads are performed according to the order in which the center points were
picked during the geometry definition.
• Line
This option enables you to define the direction of the sequenced thread positions
machining.
• Distance
This option minimizes the length of the necessary tool movement. The first thread is
performed at the first point defined in the geometry. Subsequent threads are executed
according to the nearest position, i.e. at the shortest distance to the previous thread
position.
• Advanced sorting
This option enables you to sort the drill positions for machining of linear and circular
drill patterns.
Show sorted
489
Compensation
If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the CNC-
controller are used in the GCode.
Thread data
This section enables you to define the geometry parameters of the

thread.
Type
This section enables you to choose the Internal or External

type of machining. The Major thread diameter parameter
enables you to define the largest diameter of the machined
thread.
Internal External
Major thread diameter Major thread diameter
Direction Left hand Right hand
This section enables you to

choose either Left hand or Right
hand direction of the machined
thread.
Cut from
Top to bottom Bottom to top
This section enables you to

define the direction of thread
machining. The thread can be
machined either from Top to
bottom or from Bottom to top.
490
6. 2.5D Milling
Multi-Passes
• Rough
This section defines the parameters of Step over

the rough machining of the thread. It Clear offset
generates several concentric helical passes
that start at the Clear offset distance from
the thread and finish up to the thread, thus
cutting the thread profile in a number of
constant Step over steps.
The Step over value defines the offset

between two successive concentric helical
profiles.
The Thread offset value defines the

distance that remains after the last step
over up to the finish pass.
• Finish
This section enables you to perform the thread finishing.
The Number of passes parameter enables you to define the number of finish paths
generated to achieve the best surface quality.
Start Angle
This parameter defines the start angle of the thread

relative to the X-axis direction. Start angle
491
6.8.4 Link page
Lead in/out arc
Arc radius
This box defines the radius of the arc with which the tool enters and exits the material.
This option is available only for external threading.
Flat approach/Flat retreat
The tool enters and exits the material (depending on the direction set in the Cut from
section) at the height of the lower plane of the thread hole.
492
6. 2.5D Milling
6.9 Slot Operation
This operation generates a tool path along the centerline to

the right or to the left of one or more profiles. Two types of
slots can be defined: the Slot with constant depth operation
machines the slot in several steps until the final depth is
reached. In Slot with variable depth, the depth profile is also
defined by a 2D section. The slot can be pre-machined using
rough and semi-finish cycles. The finish cut produces a tool
path according to the specified scallop height on the floor
of the slot. With available parameters for the right and left
extension and the side step, you can mill a slot wider than the
tool diameter.
When you click Add Operation, Slot, the Slot Operation dialog box is displayed.
493
Depth type
There are two methods to define the depth of the slot.
Choose the depth type (Constant or Section) and click on the Data button to enter additional
parameters.
SolidCAM Slot
depth types
Constant Section
Constant depth type
This option produces a slot

with a uniform depth. The
Constant Depth Data dialog box
is displayed.
494
6. 2.5D Milling
Tool side
Specify the side of the slot profile at which you want to mill.
The tool side is always relative to the direction of the slot
chain geometry.
• Right: the tool cuts on the right side of the profile geometry at the distance
defined as the value of Profile offset.
• Left: the tool cuts on the left side of the profile geometry at the distance defined
by the value of Profile offset.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry (the cutter radius
compensation G4x cannot be used with this option).
When the Zigzag option is

used, the Tool side combo-box
defines the tool location for the
first cut. For each successive
cutting pass, the tool position
is changed relative to the
geometry direction.
Profile offset remains at the left or right side of

the profile after machining.
If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x
of the CNC-controller are used in the GCode.
Depth cutting type
• The One way option enables you to create the tool path with only one-directional
movements.
• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path with bi-directional movements.
Zigzag One way
495
Slot extension
This option enables you to extend the end of the slot without additional geometric
construction and without editing the slot geometry. The Distance parameter controls
the slot extension.
This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without changing the
geometry.
For more information on this subject, see topic 6.1.2.
Slot levels
This section enables you to define the levels of slot machining.

• Depth
This value defines the depth of the slot relative to the Upper level. Click on the
Depth button to pick the Z-level from the 3D model.
• Delta depth
This value defines the offset for the cutting depth that can be changed with its
associativity preserved. This parameter is always relative to the Depth defined for
the operation.
If the Delta depth value is positive, a blue arrow is

displayed near its field indicating a positive offset value
(in the positive direction of the Z-axis).
If the Delta depth value is negative, a red arrow is

displayed near its field indicating a negative offset value
(in the negative direction of the Z-axis).
• Step down
Enter the cutting depth for two successive cuts.
496
6. 2.5D Milling
Complete Z-level
This option enables you to define the order of Z-levels milling in the machining of
several slots in one operation.
When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected, the machining is performed as
follows: the first chain of the slot geometry is machined at all Z-levels, then the next
chain is machined accordingly.
1
2
3
5 4
7 6
8
9
10
11
12
When the Complete Z-Level check box is selected, all chains of the slot geometry are
machined at a specific Z-level, then the next Z-level is machined accordingly.
1
7
2
3 8
4 9
10
5
11
6
12
This check box is not available when the Zigzag option is chosen for Depth
cutting type.
497
Section depth type
When you click on the Data button,

the Section Slot Data dialog box is
displayed.
Section geometry name
The section specifies the depth

profile for this slot operation.
As the geometry for this 2.5D
operation is designed using
2D profiles and sections,
a reference point is required
to indicate the position of the
Upper level.
Reference point (Upper Level)
Section
(Depth profile)
Slot Geometry
Section data
• Scallop
This value determines the quality of the resulting surface on the floor of the
slot. The smaller the value, the smoother is the surface.
• Descent Angle
The tool plunges into the material with the given ramp angle. The default
value of 90 degrees causes a normal approach into the material. The tool
enters the material at an angle to the first slot profile. If the tool path length
required to perform the ramp angle is longer than the slot profile, SolidCAM
generates a zigzag movement to plunge into the material.
Rough, Semi-finish and Finish cycles
• Rough cycle
If you check this option, the rough operation clears the slot before the
semi-finish operation is performed.
498
6. 2.5D Milling
Enter the Step down between two successive cuts during roughing.
Define the offset that remains on the slot walls and floor after the roughing
cut in the Rough/Semi-finish offset field.
• Finish cycle
Check this option if you intend to semi-finish and/or finish the slot. Choose
the cycles you want to perform from the list.
• Semi-finish: the slot is machined at the offset specified in the Rough/
Semi-finish offset field.
• Finish: the slot is machined to its final dimensions and specified surface
scallop.
• Both: the slot is machined first with a semi-finish and then a finishing
cut.
Offset for Rough/Semi-finish
This value specifies the offset that remains on the slot after the rough and semi-finish
operations. This offset is removed in the last finish cut.
Technology
• Tool side
Specify the side of the slot profile at which you want to mill. The tool side is always
relative to the direction of the slot‘s chain geometry.
• Right: the tool machines on the right side of the slot geometry. The cut leaves
material on the profile equal to the specified Offset on profile value.
• Left: the tool machines on the left side of the slot geometry. The cut leaves
material on the profile equal to the specified Offset on profile value.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on
the profile geometry.
When the Zigzag option is

used, the Tool side combo-box
defines the tool location for the
first cut. For each successive
cutting pass, the tool position is
changed relative to the geometry
direction.
499
With additional parameters for the right and left extension, the Center option enables
you to machine slots that are wider than the tool diameter. The given side step value is
used to cut from the right to the left side. Note that the side definition is always relative
to the direction of the slot profile. Check the direction of the profile by clicking on
the Show button in the Section Geometry name area of the Slot Operation dialog box.
• Right extension: enter the distance by which the slot is extended to the right side
(relative to profile direction).
• Left extension: enter the distance by which the slot is extended to the left side
(relative to profile direction).
• Side step: enter the tool’s side step in successive tool paths.
Cutting direction
• The One way option enables you to create the tool path with only one-directional
movements.
• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path with bi-directional movements.
Zigzag One way
500
6. 2.5D Milling
6.9.2 Pre-drilling geometry generation
When the operation is defined and saved, SolidCAM automatically generates the pre-drilling
geometry. The pre-drilling geometry is generated only for Slot operations with Constant depth type
and when the One way option is used for Depth cutting type.
During the pre-drilling geometry generation, SolidCAM automatically collects the ramping points
of the tool path for all of the chains. For each chain, SolidCAM collects all the ramping points
where the vertical penetration into the material is performed. These points are located in the start
point of the Lead in movement. Similar to Profile operation, SolidCAM generates one ramping
position for each open chain. For closed chains, several ramping positions can be generated for each
chain depending on the chain geometry. The ramping positions are located in the beginning of the
cutting passes where the vertical penetration into the material is performed.
The name of the generated geometry is composed of the name of the

initial Slot operation with the Drill_For_ prefix: Drill_For_SlotName,
where the SlotName is the name of the initial Slot operation. For
example, for the Slot operation S_contour_T1, the pre-drilling
geometry Drill_For_S_contour_T1 will be generated.
The pre-drilling geometry appears under the Geometry header in

SolidCAM Manager. This geometry is available for Drilling operations
only. The pre-drilling geometry cannot be chosen in 3D Drilling
operations.
For more information on pre-drilling geometry generation, see topic 6.1.3.
501
502
6. 2.5D Milling
6.10 T-Slot Operation
This operation enables you to machine slots in vertical walls with a slot mill tool.
When you click Add Operation, T-Slot, the T-Slot Operation dialog box is displayed.
503
6.10.1 Tool page
Tool data definition
The Data button displays the Operation Tool Data dialog box. This dialog box displays the tool
material, feed and speed parameters and the diameter and length offset numbers used in the current
operation.
The Second offset number parameter defines the register number of the upper cutting face offset,
in the offset table of the CNC-machine. This option enables SolidCAM to automatically take into
account the minor size differences between the defined tool and the one actually used for cutting
the workpiece, if there are any. You may choose not to use this option by clearing the check box.
504
6. 2.5D Milling
Tool side
This option enables you to define the tool position relative to the geometry.
Left Right Center
values set in Modify offset.
set in Modify offset.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry (the compensation cannot
be used with this option).
When the Zigzag option is used, the Tool side combo-box defines the tool
location for the first cut. For each successive cutting pass, the tool position
is changed relative to the geometry direction.
505
Geometry
This button enables you to modify a geometry shared by several operations separately for each
operation.
Compensation
If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
Offsets
To perform the rough machining of the slot, you have to specify various offsets on the slot geometry.
• Wall offset
This option defines the offset that will remain on the slot wall after roughing.
Wall offset
• Ceiling offset
This option defines the offset that will remain on Ceiling

the slot ceiling after roughing. offset
506
6. 2.5D Milling
• Floor offset
This option defines the offset that will remain on

the slot floor after roughing.
Floor
offset
Depth cutting type
When the One way option is chosen, the cutting passes are oriented in
the same direction and connection between them is performed through
the Operation Clearance level. At the end of each pass the tool performs
a retreat movement to the Operation Clearance level, a horizontal
movement at rapid feed to the start point of the next pass and then
descends to the Z-level of the next pass. The same cutting direction (climb
or conventional) is kept along the whole tool path.
When the Zigzag option is chosen, the tool path is performed in a zigzag
manner, with the tool path direction changing from one pass to the next.
The passes located at two successive Z-levels are connected directly from
the end of one pass to the beginning of the next pass.
The Zigzag option cannot be used together with

the Clear offset technology.
This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without changing the geometry.
507
Rough
This section enables you to perform the rough machining of the slot.
Clear offset
This option generates several concentric profiles with

constant depth that start at the defined clear offset distance
from the profile and finish at the geometry of the profile,
thus clearing the area around the profile.
Step over
Clear offset
Wall
offset
Modify offset
The Offset option defines the distance from the geometry at which the milling starts.
The Offset value must be equal to or greater than the Wall offset value. The tool starts
milling the profile at the distance defined by Clear offset and finishes at the distance
defined by Wall offset.
The Step over option defines the overlap of adjacent tool paths. It determines the
offset between two successive concentric profiles. Clear offset
tool path
• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path
for the Clear offset removal containing both climb and
conventional movements.
Profile
geometry
Clear offset
tool path
• The One way option enables you to create the tool
path for the Clear offset removal containing only climb
movements.
Profile
geometry
508
6. 2.5D Milling
Finish
This section enables you to perform the finishing of the slot. By

selecting the check boxes, you can choose the offsets (Ceiling, Wall and
Floor) you want to remove in the finish pass.
Number of passes
SolidCAM enables you to generate several finish passes

to achieve the best surface quality. You can define the
number of finish passes.
Extension/Overlap
This option enables you to extend the profile in the positive profile direction.
Cutting depth overlap
This parameter defines the overlap of each two adjacent tool paths, in both the rough
and finish machining of the slot.
Cutting depth
overlap Cutting depth
overlap
509
Cut from
This option enables you to define
the direction of machining. The
rough and finish machining of
the slot can be performed in the
following directions:
• Top to bottom
• Bottom to top
• Middle to bottom
• Middle to top
6.10.3 Link page
Ramping
This section determines how the tool approaches the start point of the contour.
For more information on Ramping options, see topic 6.1.3.
Lead in/Lead out
These options enable you to control the way the tool approaches and retreats from the profile.
For more information on Lead in/Lead out options, see topic 6.1.3.
510
6. 2.5D Milling
6.11 Translated Surface Operation
A translated surface is generated by moving a section

along a profile geometry. Limit geometries can be
projected on the translated surface. You can machine
the resulting translated surface inside, outside or
along the limit geometry.
When you click Add Operation, Translated Surface, the

Translated Surface Operation dialog box is displayed.
511
Section geometry name
A translated surface requires two geometries: the profile along Section Geometry
which the section is translated and the section geometry.
The geometries in this example result in the following translated

surface:
Profile
Geometry
For detailed explanation of section geometry definition, see topic 4.4.4.
Process type
The Translated Surface operation can be used to mill surfaces and also to engrave profiles, such as
text, on a translated surface.
Translated Surface
Process Type
Surface Engraving
To engrave a profile on a translated surface, use the Translated Surface

operation that you used to mill the surface as a template. Click Add
Operation, Translated Surface and select the original Translated Surface
operation from the Operation name list in the operation dialog box. All the
geometries and parameters of the original operation are copied.
Choose the Process type and click on the Data button to define additional parameters.
512
6. 2.5D Milling
Surface data for translated surfaces
When you click on the Data button, the

Translated Surface Data dialog box is
displayed.
• Offset on surface
This value causes the final milled

surface to be at an Offset from the
defined surface.
Offset
Section
• Scallop
This value determines how smooth

the resulting surface finish will be. The
smaller the value, the smoother is the
surface finish. The value is used for Scallop
both the finishing and the semi-finishing
operation.
• Overlap
This value defines the tool overlap for adjacent tool paths during roughing
operations. The value of 0.6 means that the tool will overlap 60% to the next
tool path. For the tool diameter of 10 mm, the resulting side step is 4 mm.
Additionally, this value defines the maximum side step used in finishing and semi-
finishing operations if the calculated scallop allows a wider side step.
• Z-Entry angle
The tool plunges into the material with the given ramp angle. The default value
of 90 degrees causes a normal approach into the material. The tool enters the
material at an angle to the first line or arc of the tool path. If the length required
to perform the ramp angle is longer than the first tool path movement, SolidCAM
• Connect type
Zigzag: the surface is milled with both conventional and climb tool movements.
One way: the surface is milled only in one direction. This option cannot be used
if you use Limits for the translated surface.
513
• Rough cycle
When this check box is selected, a roughing operation clears the surface area
before the semi-finishing operation is performed. Enter the Step down between
two successive cuts during roughing. Define the offset that remains on the surface
walls and floor after the roughing cut in the Rough/Semi-finish offset field.
• Finish cycle
Select this check box if you intend to semi-finish and/or finish the translated
surface. Choose the cycles you want to perform from the list.
Semi-finish: the geometry is machined at the offset specified in the Rough/Semi-
finish offset field.
Finish: the geometry is machined to its final dimensions and specified surface
scallop.
Both: the geometry is machined first with a semi-finishing cut and then a finishing
cut.
• Rough/Semi-finish offset
This value specifies the offset that remains on the surface after roughing and
semi-finishing operations. This offset is removed in the last finishing cut.
Engraving data for Translated Surface operation
When you click on the Data button, the Engraving Data dialog
box is displayed.
• Surface offset
This value causes the final milled surface to be at an

Offset from the defined surface.
Offset
Section
• Scallop
This value determines how smooth

the resulting surface finish will be. Use
smaller values for a smoother surface Scallop
finish. The value is used for both
finishing and semi-finishing operations.
514
6. 2.5D Milling
• Overlap
This value defines the tool overlap for adjacent tool paths during roughing
operations. The value of 0.6 means that the tool will overlap 60% to the next
tool path. For a tool diameter of 10 mm, the resulting a side step is 4 mm.
Additionally, this value defines the maximum side step used in semi-finishing and
finishing operations if the calculated scallop allows a wider side step.
• Descent angle
The tool plunges into the material with the given ramp angle. The default value
of 90 degrees causes a normal approach into the material. The tool enters the
material at an angle to the first line or arc of the tool path. If the length required
to perform the ramp angle is longer than the first tool path movement, SolidCAM
Tool side
This option determines on which side of the profile the section is machined. Use the Show surface
button to display the current tool position relative to the profile geometry.
The geometry direction set in the Reverse geometry field also affects the
tool side option.
• Right: the tool path is generated on the right side of the profile geometry.
• Left: the tool path is generated on the left side of the profile geometry.
The Geometry button displays the Modify Geometry dialog box that enables you to modify
a geometry shared by several operations separately for each operation (see topic 6.1.2).
Limits
A limit is a profile geometry that can be used to define additional 2D profiles on the surface and
to exclude areas on the surface from machining. If you would like to use a limit on your translated
surface, select the Limits check box and click on the Data button. To use the Engraving process
type, you must specify the Engraving geometry and additional parameters in the Engraving Profile
dialog box.
Translated Surface
Limit Type
Surface Engraving
515
Limit data for translated surface
When you click on the Data button, the Surface Limit dialog box is displayed.
The geometries in the example result in the following translated surface with limits:
• Limit geometry name
In this section, specify which contour, i.e. profile geometry you want to use as the
Limit. Note that the Limit geometry must be closed.
• Machining area
Outside Limit geometry: the area of the translated surface outside the limit is
machined.
Inside Limit geometry: only the area inside of

the limit geometries is machined.
Section Profile
Limit
Profile
516
6. 2.5D Milling
• Offset on Limit geometry
After machining, the CAM-Part has remaining material on the limit geometry equal
to this value.
• Finish on Limit
Select this check box if you intend to semi-finish and/or

finish the limits on the translated surface. Use the lists to
choose the cycles you want to perform.
Type
• The Finish option machines the limit to its final

dimensions in one step down.
• The Semi-finish option prepares the limits to an offset specified in the Offset
field with a cutting depth defined in the Step down field.
• The Both option machines the limit first with a semi-finish cut and then with
a finishing cut.
Side
If the Limit geometry is composed of one 1

or more chains, but neither is placed inside 2 3
another chain, the default option Both
should be used. SolidCAM will then use the
relevant finish side depending on whether
the Limit type is Outside or Inside.
In this example, the Limit geometry contains a chain inside another chain (Chain
#2 inside Chain #1) and a separate limit Chain #3.
• The External option finishes all

outside contours of the Limit chains,
leaving the inside hole unfinished.
Finish cuts
517
• The Internal option finishes only the
inside contour of the Limit chain, leaving
the outside Limit contours unfinished.
Finish cuts
• The Both option finishes all inside and

outside contours of the Limit chains.
Finish cuts
Cutting direction
This field defines the cutting direction on the last finish cut. It can be either
clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
Semi-finish offset
Enter the offset that will remain on the surface after the semi-finish operation.
This offset will be removed in a last cut, if a finish cut has been specified.
Semi-finish Step down
The step down defines the cutting depth of the tool on the Limit geometries
used for the semi-finishing operation.
518
6. 2.5D Milling
Engraving Limit for Translated Surface Operation
When you click on the Data button, the Engraving Profile

• Engraving depth
The depth of the engraved profile on the translated surface

must be entered in the Upper level field of the operation
dialog box. If you want to penetrate the translated surface
by 1.0, you have to enter the value of -1.0 into the Upper
level field.
In this example, a text was defined as the Engraving Limit

geometry and engraved on a translated surface.
• Engraving geometry
In this section you have to specify the contour, i.e. profile geometry, which you
want to engrave on the translated surface.
• Finish options
Type
This option enables you to semi-finish and/or finish the engraved profile on the
translated surface.
• The Semi-finish option machines the engraving profile to an offset specified

in the Offset field with cutting depths given in the Step down field.
• The Finish option machines the engraving profile to its final dimensions in
one step down.
• The Both option machines the limit first with a semi-finishing cut and then
with a finishing cut.
519
Side
The tool can cut on the left/right to the profile or on the engraving geometry.
• Right: the tool cuts on the right side of the profile geometry up to the
distance defined by the Offset value.
• Left: the tool cuts on the left side of the profile geometry at the distance
defined by the Offset value.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry.

Offset
You can specify the offset from the engraving geometry for a semi-finishing
operation on the left or right side of the geometry. This offset is removed with
the finishing cut, if you have defined one.
Step down
This value defines the successive Z-cutting depth during the semi-finishing
operation of the engraving profile.
Geometry on Section
This option enables you to locate the Start

section on the profile. Section Profile
Start point
Geometry
• Start: the profile geometry
Start
is located at the start of the point
Section
section and the machining is
performed from the start of End point
the section towards the end of
the section. End point
• End: the profile geometry End

is located at the end of the Profile
Geometry Start point Profile
section and the machining is
performed from the end of
the section towards the start
of the section.
End point
Section
520
6. 2.5D Milling
Constraint
This option enables you to control the tool movement at the start and end of the profile/section.
Leave this option unselected to use no constraints at all.
Both
P2 No
End
Profile P2
P3 P3
Section
Section
Section
P2 P2
P3
P3
Profile No
P2 P2
P3 Section Section
P3
Both End
521
6.11.2 Link page
Lead in/Lead out
You can control the way the tool leads in to/out from the geometry. Choose an option from the list
and enter the distance value for this option.
SolidCAM enables you to use the following Lead in/Lead out options:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
• Point
522
3D Milling 7
SolidCAM 3D Milling can be used for both prismatic parts and complex
3D models. For prismatic parts, SolidCAM analyzes the model and
automatically recognizes pockets and profiles to be machined using
Z-constant machining strategies.
For molds, electrodes and prototypes, SolidCAM offers powerful
3D machining, including advanced High Speed Machining strategies
and integrated rest material options. No matter how complex is the
model, SolidCAM provides the optimal approach and roughing strategy
with superior 3D finish machining for mold and die applications.
 3D Milling Operation
 Roughing strategies
 Semi-finishing & Finishing strategies
 3D Engraving Operation
 3D Drilling Operation
7.1 3D Milling Operation
You can perform 3-axis gouge-free machining on solid and surface

models. This operation offers a wide range of roughing, semi-finishing
and finishing strategies for free-form models. It can be used to
manufacture molds, dies, electrodes, prototypes and other 3D Models.
When you click Add Operation, 3D Milling, the 3D Milling Operation
7.1.1 Geometry page

Working area
SolidCAM enables you to limit the tool path with a specified working area. In case a Working area
is used, SolidCAM calculates the whole tool path and then removes the all tool path lines outside
the Working area.
In the Working area field, click on the Define button.
The Working Area dialog box is displayed.
Automatic
Working area
If you do not define a working area, a box

at an offset with the width of the tool
diameter is drawn around the current 3D
Model. SolidCAM applies the selected
milling strategy to the complete Automatic
Working area. Geometry
boundaries Tool
524
7. 3D Milling
The Working Area dialog box enables you to choose

the type of working area and set the related parameters.
The working area can be defined using one or a
combination of the following methods:
Working area Working area geometry
Angle limits
Selected faces
Rest material
The resulting working area boundary is generated as

a boolean combination of the following:
• User-defined planar geometry with an
offset;
• Selected drive surfaces;
• Selected check surfaces with an offset;
• Surface angle minimum and maximum limits.
The generated working area boundary is then used either for tool path generation (e.g. Circular
pocket, Constant Step over, etc.) or as a boundary to trim the tool path (Linear, Pencil milling, etc.).
Working area definition via Geometry
In this section, you have to specify the

working area geometry that defines the
machining boundaries for the operation.
If you have already defined working area
geometries for this CAM-Part, you can
choose the geometry from the Name list.
• The Show button displays the chosen

geometry in the SolidWorks window.
• The Define button enables you to

select a new working area geometry.
For more information on Geometry

selection, see topic 4.4.1.
525
Working area definition via Rest material
With the Cut only in rest material option, you

can limit the machining to the rest material.
Rest material is what has to be machined

after the previous operations in order to
reach the Target model. When the Cut
only the Rest material option is chosen
for the Working area definition, SolidCAM
calculates the Updated Stock model (USM)
after all the previous operations. SolidCAM
automatically compares the USM with the
target model and generates the rest material
areas.
The rest material left after semi-finishing

Working only in the rest material area
operations with a big tool
This option is available only if the target model is defined.
• Mach. Stock Name
This option enables you to use the previously generated USM for the rest material
calculation.
This field is available only when the Manual method of Updated Stock
model calculation is used.
526
7. 3D Milling
• Show 3D
This button displays the SolidVerify simulation with the USM and the Rest material
in comparison with the 3D Model geometry used in the operation.
Updated Stock Model calculation
SolidCAM offers two modes of Updated Stock model calculation: Automatic and
Manual. The mode can be specified for the CAM-Part with the Updated Stock
calculation page in the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.4). The same modes are
used for the SolidVerify USM calculation.
• Automatic mode
During the operation calculation process, SolidCAM runs the SolidVerify

simulation of all the previous operations in the invisible mode. The resulting USM
is saved in *.STFRM file in the CAM-Part folder. SolidCAM calculates the USM
according to the Updated Stock Accuracy Settings.
During the USM calculation process for the current operation, SolidCAM generates
intermediate USM files for the previous operations and saves them according to
the Updated Stock model method settings. The saved USM files can be used for
the Rest material calculation of additional operations. These intermediate USM
files are removed when the CAM-Part is closed.
If the USM file for some operation already exists, SolidCAM checks the compliance
between accuracy settings of the USM and Updated Stock Accuracy Settings
of the CAM-Part. If these settings concur, SolidCAM uses the existing USM,
otherwise the USM is recalculated in accordance with the CAM-Part Settings.
• Manual mode
In the Manual mode, SolidCAM enables you to save the USM manually after the
SolidVerify simulation and use it for the Working area definition with the Cut only
the Rest material option.
When the simulation of a separate operation or a number of operations is

performed in the SolidVerify mode, the Save Machined stock to file button enables
you to save the USM in the *.STF file. The name of the file is the same as the name
of the last simulated operation.
In the Machined Stock name box, you can choose any previously saved USM.
527
SolidCAM automatically deletes USM files for a specific operation when:
• the operation was deleted;
• the operation was changed and it caused the deletion of the operation
PCode;
• the operation sequence was changed;
• the accuracy parameters were changed;
• the working mode was switched from Manual to Automatic.
Updated Stock Model interchangeability
Updated Stock models generated for the SolidVerify simulation and for 3D Milling of
Rest material areas are interchangeable. This means that SolidCAM can use USM files
generated for the SolidVerify simulation instead of USM files for 3D Milling and vice
versa.
If the USM file for SolidVerify simulation is already generated for some operation,
it can be used also for Rest material if the Accuracy settings of the USM match the
Updated Stock Accuracy Settings of the CAM-Part.
Working area definition via Angle limits
This option enables you to define the

working area by surface inclination angle
range. Using this method, you can apply
various machining strategies to model
areas with different inclination. For
example, you can machine all shallow
areas with the Linear finishing strategy
and all steep areas with the Constant Z
strategy.
528
7. 3D Milling
Angle limit calculation
In each point where the tool contacts

the machining surface, SolidCAM
determines the normal vector at the
contact point, directed to the tool sphere
center (for ball-nosed tools); for end Normal vector
mills with rounded corners, the vector
is directed from the contact point to the Angle
Contact point
radius center. The angle of this vector
relative to the Z-axis is used for the angle
limits calculation.
The Angle limits section of the Working

Area dialog box enables you to define the
angle range.
• The Minimum angle value defines the lower limit of the angle range.
• The Maximum angle value defines the upper limit of the angle range.
A particular feature of the Angle limits method is related to

machining of model edges: it is impossible to determine a single
contact point between the edge and the tool surface. The tool rolls
over the edge, continuously keeping in contact until the angle of
the normal vector at the contact point is in the defined range.
The resulting tool path is rounded. Such tool path rounding causes
the breaking of the sharp corners. The machining time is also
increased.
The Trim rounding option

enables you to avoid
unnecessary tool path
rounding. When this check
box is selected, the tool
path gets trimmed at the
point where the tool axis
is coincident to the surface
boundary.
Rounded tool path Rounding trimmed
529
Working area definition via Face selection
You can define the area of the 3D Model

machining with two sets of model faces:
• Drive faces – the set of faces to be

milled. The tool path is generated only
for machining of these faces.
• Check faces – the set of faces to be
avoided during the generation of the tool
path.
Check faces
Drive faces
Other faces of the model are not considered during the tool path calculation.
Example: for the model shown above, SolidCAM generates the tool path only for
the shallow area. During the calculation, gouging of the check faces is avoided. The
remaining faces do not participate in the tool path calculation.
The above capability is available through the Work on selected faces area in the
Working area dialog box.
Drive faces
Specify the Face geometry for Drive faces. If you have already defined such
geometries for this CAM-Part, you can choose the geometry from the Name list.
• The Define button enables you to define a new Face geometry with the Select
Faces dialog box.
• The Show button displays the Face geometry on the SolidWorks model.
Check faces
Specify the Face geometry for Check faces. If you have already defined such
geometries for this CAM-Part, you can choose the geometry from the Name list.
• The Define button enables you to define a new Face geometry with the Select
Faces dialog box.
• The Show button displays the Face geometry on the SolidWorks model.
530
7. 3D Milling
SolidCAM enables you to specify the Offset for the check faces when machining is
performed on selected faces. Using this offset, SolidCAM enables you to perform the
machining at a safety distance from the check surfaces.
Offset
Check face
Check face
Drive face Drive face
Offset for check faces Offset for check faces

is not defined is defined
Select Faces dialog box for Drive faces
This dialog box enables you to select one or several faces of the SolidWorks model.
The selected face icons are displayed in the Faces section.
If you have selected a wrong face, click on it again

to undo your selection. You can also right-click on
the face name in the list (the face is highlighted) and
choose Unselect from the menu.
• Select Check faces
The CAD selection option enables you to select

faces with the SolidWorks tools.
531
• Faces
This section enables you to display and edit the normals of model surfaces
during the geometry selection.
The Show Direction for highlighted faces only check box enables you to display
the surface normals for the specific highlighted faces in the faces list.
The Show Direction for selected faces check box enables you to display the
directions of normals for all the faces in the list.
The right-click menu available on the items in the

Faces list enables you to reverse the direction of the
surface normals of the chosen faces (the Reverse
command) or of all the selected faces (the Reverse
all command).
532
7. 3D Milling
Select faces dialog box for Check faces
This dialog box enables you to select one or several check faces of the SolidWorks
model. The selected face icons are displayed in the Faces section.
If you have selected a wrong face, click on it again to undo your selection. You
can also right-click on the face name in the list (the face is highlighted) and choose
Unselect from the menu.
• Select Check faces
The CAD Selection option enables you to select faces with the SolidWorks tools.
The All faces adjacent to drive faces button automatically adds all the model
faces adjacent to the defined Drive faces to the selection list.
• Faces
This section enables you to display and edit the normals of model surfaces
during the geometry selection.
Tool on working area
This option controls the tool position relative to the

boundaries of the working area. Since the working area
geometry is always projected on a 2D plane, viewing the
model and working area in the top view shows exactly till
where the tool machines the model.
533
• Internal
The tool machines up to the boundary of the working area. The center point moves at
an offset equal to the tool radius.
Working Area Geometry
Tool
• External
The tool machines over the boundary of the working area by a distance equal to the
tool diameter.
Tool
• Center
The tool machines the working area until the tool center is positioned on the working
area.
Tool
534
7. 3D Milling
• Tangent
The Internal/External/Center methods Unmachined area

of the working area definition have
several limitations. In some cases, the
limitation of the tool path by planar
working area results in unmachined
areas or corners rounding. The
Tangent option enables you to avoid Tool on working area: Internal
these problems.
When this option is chosen,

SolidCAM generates the tool path
boundaries by projecting the planar Unmachined
working area on the 3D model. The area
tool path is limited in such a way that
the tool is tangent to the model faces Tool on working area: Center
at the boundary.
Tool path rounding
This option enables you to machine
the exact working area, taking into
account the 3D model geometry.
The tool is tangent
to the projection
of the working area
Tool on working area: External
onto the model faces
Tool on working area: Tangent
When the Tangent option is used, SolidCAM

automatically recognizes through holes and cuts inside
the working area and prevents the tool from entering
these areas.
535
Offset value (+/-)
This value enables you to specify the offset of

the tool center. A positive offset value enlarges
the working area; a negative value reduces the
-
+
working area to be machined.
-
+
• To stay away from a pocket’s wall, for example, you can use the Internal
option with a small negative offset value.
• To prevent the tool from plunging down a straight wall of a block, you
can use the Middle option with an offset smaller than the tool radius.
Also, with the same result, you can use the External option with a small
negative offset value.
Tool path trimming
When the tool path is generated by a projection strategy (Linear, Circular pocket, etc.),
SolidCAM projects the planar pattern on the model. When there is no model geometry
in the specific point of the pattern (e.g. holes in the model), the pattern is projected
onto the virtual infinite XY-plane located at the Operation Lower level.
Planar pattern
Operation
Upper level
Tool path
Operation
Lower level
The Tool path trimming options enable you to trim unnecessary movements at the
Operation Lower level and movements above the Operation Upper level.
536
7. 3D Milling
The resulting tool path is reconnected.
Not trimmed
tool path
Tool path trimmed

at Lower level
Tool path trimmed

at Lower level
and Upper Level
This page enables you to define the technological parameters of the machining.
The 3D Milling Operation interface offers all three machining types – Rough,
Semi-Finish and Finish Milling – in one dialog box. This enables you to
perform all machining operations in one operation. You need to add another
operation only if the tool, the milling levels or the working area is going to
change from one operation to another.
537
7.1.3 Roughing
Rough milling removes the bulk of material surrounding the 3D Model.

The material is removed on Z-levels controlled by the Operation Upper
level, Surface offset and Step down values. To remove large amounts
of material, large tools, small feeds and low tolerances are usually used.
Three strategies are available for rough machining of 3D Models.
SolidCAM Roughing
Hatch Contour
Plunging Pattern
Contour and Hatch strategies perform rough cuts on constant Z-levels that are automatically
calculated using the specified values of Lower level, Surface offset and Step down.
Plunging is a totally different concept of removing material from a given pocket, carried out with
a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves up and down as in a drilling motion,
travelling along the specified path type.
The strategy and technological parameters are defined in the Rough section of Technology page
of the 3D Milling Operation dialog box. Choose one of the strategies and specify the additional
parameters.
Overlap
Enter the Overlap of adjacent tool passes. The default value is 0.5 (50%).
0.5D 0.2D
538
7. 3D Milling
Equal step over
This option enables you to generate the hatch tool path spaced evenly with the automatically
calculated Overlap value, which is nearest to the specified Min. Overlap value but not smaller than
this value.
When this check box is not selected, the distance between the last pass and the one before it can be
smaller than that between all of the other passes.
Overlap Overlap
When this check box is selected, the evenly spaced hatch tool path is generated.
Overlap Overlap
The overlap between two successive passes is not smaller than the specified Min. Overlap value.
Step down
SolidCAM uses the constant Z pocketing for the roughing. The Step down parameter defines the
distance between each two successive Z-levels. Enter the tool’s cutting depth.
539
Clean flat
SolidCAM generates a set of Z-levels with equal step down. Sometimes

the model ledge with the specified offset falls between the Z-levels
defined by Step down and cannot be machined in the current operation.
Z-levels with the
equal Step down
Model with
the offset
Not machined
ledges between
Z-Levels
• None
When this option is chosen, the tool machines only at each step down distance.
Anything in between is not machined.
• Clean flat after roughing
When this option is chosen, the tool performs complete roughing at each step down
level and then returns to the flat areas between the step down levels.
• Clean flat during roughing
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM produces tool paths at the step down level. At
this point, the tool machines the flat area located between the step down levels. After
completing the flat area, it goes to the next step down.
Offsets
Surface offset is the minimum offset of material in the X-, Y- and Z-direction that remains on the
model contour. The value defines the closest distance the tool can get to the model. The rough
operation is performed at constant Z-levels.
In addition to the specified Surface offset, the roughed

model shows stairs of rest material with a height equal
to the Step down value. To obtain a uniform offset on
the model, a semi-finish operation should be executed.
Surface offset
Model surface
540
7. 3D Milling
In 3D Milling of prismatic parts, you often need to use different offset values for vertical and
horizontal areas. With the Wall offset value, you can define the XY-offset of any surface that is not
absolutely flat. To define the Z-offset to the absolute horizontal (flat) surfaces, use the Floor offset
parameter.
Floor
Wall offset
offset
Use the Wall and Flat offsets for 3D machining of prismatic parts. In
3D Milling of non-prismatic parts, it is best to use surface offset and not
Floor and Wall offsets. Set the Wall and Flat offsets to 0 and enter the
desired value of the Surface offset.
Z-Entry
This option enables you to control how the tool plunges into the material. Click on the Z-Entry
button to display the Z-Entry dialog box.
• None
The tool plunges into the material with a normal downward movement at the specified
Z-feed rate.
541
• Angle
When you choose the Angle type and enter the

Angle value, the tool enters the material with a ramp
movement. The ramp starts from the given safety
distance down to the model contour. If, due to the
model contour, the ramp cannot be created in a straight
line, the Z-Entry movement follows the contour.
When you work with small Z-Entry angles

such as two degrees, you can reduce
the length of the Z-Entry movement by
decreasing the Safety distance value. Make
sure, though, that the initial offset on the
raw material allows for changing the Safety
distance value.
• Helical
The tool enters the material in a spiral movement

according to the defined step down, angle and radius.
If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the

Center cutting check box. In the Angle field, enter the
Z-Entry angle that you would like the tool to follow.
In the Radius field, enter the radius of the tool path.
• The tool descends from the safety distance

above the Upper level to the material in a circular
motion until the step down is reached, using the
user-defined radius.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material at the
step down depth.
level.
• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the helical Z-Entry to the next working depth.
542
7. 3D Milling
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the depth of the step down of the tool.
The result of this action is the same as that of the center cutting tool except for the
• The tool descends from the Safety distance above the Upper level to the material
in a circular motion up to the Tool Step down.
• At this point, the tool clears the circular path. Then it descends to the next Tool
Step down.
• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part’s step down depth.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that
step down depth.
level.
step down depth and repeats the Helical Z-Entry to the next working depth.
• Linear
The Linear Z-Entry follows the same rules as the Helical.

The difference is that the Z-Entry is performed in a
linear zigzag fashion rather than in a circular one.
If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the

Center cutting check box. In the Linear dialog box,
enter the length of the linear tool path that you would
like the tool to travel.
• The tool descends from the Safety distance

above the Upper level to the material in a zigzag
motion based on the user defined angle and
length until the step down is reached.
543
step down depth.
level.
step down depth and repeats the Linear Z-Entry to the next working depth.
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the depth of the step down you want the
tool go to.
The result of this action is the same as with a center cutting tool except for the
• The tool descends from the Safety distance above the Upper level to the material
in a zigzag motion up to the Tool Step down.
• At this point the tool clears a straight linear path. Then it descends to the next
Tool Step down.
• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part’s step down depth.
step down depth.
level.
step down depth and repeats the Linear Z-Entry to the next working depth.
Return to Clearance level between Z-steps
This option enables you to control the height where the horizontal Clearance level
rapid movement is performed.
544
7. 3D Milling
When this check box is selected (default), SolidCAM performs horizontal rapid movements at the
Clearance level of the operation.
Clearance level
Safety
distance
When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM performs horizontal rapid movements at the Safety
distance from the last cut and checks for possible collisions. In areas where the rapid movements
at the Safety distance causes gouges, SolidCAM performs the horizontal rapid movements at the
Clearance level.
Drill points
SolidCAM enables you to perform the approach to

the material from the hole previously machined in
3D Drilling operation (see topic 7.3). The 3D Drilling
operation has to precede the 3D Milling operation in Drill point
SolidCAM Manager. SolidCAM enables you to choose
the geometry used for the 3D Drilling operation in
order to define the approach point.
Material to be
removed
Mode (Open Pocket machining)
SolidCAM locates open pocket areas and enables you to machine them with a specific strategy.
This strategy enables you to combine pocket and profile tool paths in order to provide the best
productivity in open pocket machining.
The Open Pocket machining option is available to use in 3D Milling

operation for Roughing and Constant Z Floor machining strategy (see
topic 7.1.13).
The Mode button displays the Open pocket mode dialog box.
545
There are two modes of open pocket machining:
• Pocket
Pockets
Closed areas at each step down are milled as
Pockets. SolidCAM analyzes the open areas to
be machined and decides whether the Pocket or
Profile mode is optimal to be used. When the
open areas are machined in a pocket manner, the
tool path is extended over the open edges.
• Profile
Profiles
Closed areas at each step down are milled as
Pockets.
Open areas at each step down are milled by several

equidistant Profiles from outside the model. The
tool moves in offsets parallel to the contour of
the section on the specified Z-levels. When this
option is chosen, you can define the Lead in
strategy (see topic 6.1.3) for the profiles.
The Profile mode is useful when you are milling a boss-type model (e.g.
Core of Mold).
Force open pockets as closed
This option enables you to process all open pockets as closed pockets. In this case, the
tool path is not extended over the pocket edges. In the areas where the pocket tool
path cannot be performed the machining is not performed.
Profile Lead in
In the Profile Lead in list, you can choose one of the following options:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
546
7. 3D Milling
Approach open pocket from outside

areas, if possible. Such approach enables you to
decrease the tool load when plunging into the
material.
This option enables you to perform the

approach movement from the automatically
calculated point outside of the material. The
tool approaches to the necessary depth outside
of the material and then plunges into the
material.
In closed areas, where outside approach is impossible, the tool plunges into
the material with a strategy defined in the Z-Entry field of the operation
dialog box.
Rest Material
With the 3D Roughing strategy, SolidCAM generates a number of sections parallel to the XY-plane
of the CAM-Part Coordinate System. These sections are generated with a Z-step defined either by
constant step down or by scallop. In each of these sections, the section profile geometry is used
to produce a pocket tool path. The Rest material feature enables SolidCAM to machine in each of
these sections only in areas the previous tool has not been able to machine.
When a large tool is used around the profile, it leaves material in corners that it cannot enter.
Rest Material areas
Working area
547
The Rest material option enables you to remove the material from this area without defining a new
geometry.
The Rest Material dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, you have to define the following

parameters:
• Previous tool diameter – the diameter of the

rough end mill used in the previous operation.
• Previous wall offset – the wall offset of the

previous operation.
• Extension – the overlap distance that you would

like to start and end from the previous larger end
mill.
Extension Rest Material
Milling type
If you choose Separate areas, SolidCAM generates a profile or pocket tool path to
clean areas that the previous tool could not mill. The Around profile strategy generates
a closed profile to mill the rest material.
Separate areas: SolidCAM machines only the

areas not machined with the previous tool.
Around Profile: SolidCAM machines the whole

profile.
548
7. 3D Milling
In 3D Milling and Pocket operations with the Separate areas machining strategy,
SolidCAM generates two types of tool paths, depending on the volume of the rest
material and on the previous and present tool diameters:
Pocket-style tool paths Profile-style tool paths
SolidCAM generates a pocket or a profile tool path in each area of the rest material.
Pocket-style tool path areas can be either open or closed depending on the approach
possibilities.
Closed pocket-style Open pocket-style
tool path area tool path area
Profile-style
tool path area
Open pocket-style tool path area
The approach to the open pockets can be performed from the machined space in
contrast to the closed pockets where the approach from the outside is unavailable.
549
The Z-Entry strategy defined in the 3D Milling Operation dialog box provides you with
the approach functionality for the closed pocket areas.
The following Z-Entry options can be chosen:

• None
• Angle
• Helical Approach point
• Linear
SolidCAM automatically determines the

optimal point for the approach to the open
pocket areas.
Open pocket-style
tool path area
Lead in/out
The Lead in and Lead out options define the approach/retreat strategy for the Profile-
style tool path areas. The following strategies are available:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
For more information on these options, see topic 6.1.3.
Pocket/Profile
The check boxes selected in the Pocket and Profile sections determine which of these
tool paths are cut:
• Island – only tool paths that touch the pocket islands

are cut.
• Island + Wall – tool paths that touch both the pocket

wall and islands are cut.
• Wall – only tool paths that touch the wall are cut.
550
7. 3D Milling
Compensation
When the Compensation dialog box is selected, tool radius compensation commands
are used (G41, G42 for Fanuc) in GCode output.
Open contour strategy
This option enables you to define the direction of the open contours machining.
• One way
The tool moves along an open contour at a specific

Z-level. At the end of the contour, the tool moves
with rapid feed (G0) to the Safety distance and
then starts machining the open contour at the
next Z-level. The tool will always use climb or
• Zigzag
The tool finishes an open contour at the specific

Z-level and then moves directly to the next Z-level
and so on. It mills forward and backward without
leaving the material, thus constantly switching
between climb and conventional milling.
Complete Z-level
Consider the CAM-Part with two cavities that must be machined with 3D Milling: either with
roughing strategies or with the Constant Z finishing strategy.
551
box is not selected, the machining is 1 5
performed in the following order: the 2 6
7
first cavity area is finished by a number 3
4 8
of cuts (1-4), then the second cavity is
machined (cuts 5-8).
When the Complete Z-Level check box is

selected, the machining is performed in
the following order: SolidCAM removes 1 2
3 4
material at a specific Z-level in both of 5 6
the cavities and then moves to the next 7 8
Z-level.
Vertical wall with fillets
This option enables special handling of vertical walls with

fillets between them in a prismatic part.
SolidCAM generates a smoother and more exact tool path. As

a result, the calculation time for the operation is reduced and
the GCode is shorter and uses G2/G3 arc movements for the
fillets.
This option is suitable for prismatic parts that conform to the

following conditions:
• The walls are vertical (perpendicular to the machining plane);
• There are no holes in the vertical walls.
This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corners of the tool path without changing the
geometry.
552
7. 3D Milling
7.1.4 Hatch roughing
The model is roughed in a linear pattern. Hatch

roughing creates a linear raster tool path up to the
model contour.
Click on the Data button. The Hatch Data dialog box

is displayed.
For more information on the Hatch parameters, see

topic 6.4.3.
7.1.5 Contour roughing
This strategy enables you to produce Constant Z

pockets on different Z-levels. Within the pockets,
the tool moves on offsets parallel to the contour of
the section of the model on each step down.
Click on the Data button. The Contour parameters

For more information on the Contour parameters,

see topic 6.4.3.
7.1.6 Plunging pattern
Plunging is a totally different concept of removing material from a given

pocket with a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves
up and down as in a drilling motion, travelling along the path type you
choose.
Click on the Data button. The Plunging

For more information on the Plunging

parameters, see topic 6.4.3.
553
7.1.7 Semi-Finish/Finish
Finish machining generates the tool path directly on the surfaces and solids of your 3D Model
geometry. No offset can be specified and the model is machined to its final topology and dimensions.
You can apply a number of different machining strategies to finish your models. Each one of the
strategies offers parameters to adjust the strategy to your needs.
Semi-finish machining prepares the model for finishing. After semi-

finishing the model, a uniform offset remains on the material. This offset
is removed in the last finishing cut. In contrast to rough operations, in
conventional semi-finishing operations higher feed rates and narrower
tolerances are applied.
The same machining strategies in Finish machining can be applied for

Semi-finishing. They only differ in one additional parameter, Surface
offset, that controls the X,Y and Z offset that remains on the original
surface. Otherwise, all strategies are defined and used in the same way
as in finishing.
In the Semi-Finish area, choose a strategy from the list.
Plunging
SolidCAM enables you to use the special plunging strategies for semi-
finishing.
1. Click on the Plunging button.
2. Set the plunging parameters in the Plunging

dialog box.
For more information on the Plunging parameters, see topic 6.4.3.
Offsets
Surface offset – a minimum offset of material in the

X-, Y- and Z-direction remains on the model contour.
The value defines the closest distance the tool can get
to the model.
In addition to the specified Surface offset, the roughed Surface offset
model shows stairs of rest material with a height equal
to the down step value. In order to obtain a uniform Model surface
offset on the model, a semi-finish operation should
be executed.
554
7. 3D Milling
In 3D Milling of prismatic parts, you often need to use different offset values for vertical and
horizontal areas. With the Wall offset value, you can define the XY offset of any surface that is not
absolutely flat. To define the Z offset to the absolute horizontal (flat) surfaces, use the Floor offset
parameter.
Floor
Wall offset
offset
Use the Wall and Flat offsets available to set different offset values to the
floor and walls only in Constant Z machining.
If you use negative offsets, for example, for plunge EDM electrode milling,
the corner radius of the tool must be equal to or larger than the specified
offset value.
Data
This button enables you to customize parameters for a chosen strategy.
Z-Entry
This option enables you to control how the tool plunges into the material. Click on the Z-Entry
button to display the Z-Entry dialog box.
555
• None
When Z-Entry is set to None or the default

Angle value is 90 degrees, the tool plunges Z-Entry: None
into the material with a normal downward
movement at the specified Z-feed rate.
Tool path
• Angle along path
The tool plunges with a ramp movement. The

ramp starts from the given safety distance
down to the model contour on the current
Z-level. If, due to the model contour, the
ramp cannot be created in a straight line, the
approach movement follows the contour.
• Angle between paths
The tool plunges with a ramp movement.

The ramp movement for the first Z-level
starts from the given safety distance. The next
ramp movements are performed between the
Z-levels. If, due to the model contour, the
ramp cannot be created in a straight line, the
Z-Entry movement follows the contour.
This option is available only with

the Constant Z finish strategy.
• Arc
Z-Entry: Arc
The tool plunges with an arc movement (with
a specified radius) in the vertical plane.
Tool path
This option is not available with

the Constant Z Finish strategy.
556
7. 3D Milling
Tool path arrangement
SolidCAM provides you with improved arrangement of the tool path generated by the projection
strategies (Linear, Circular pocket, etc.) to minimize the number of jumps between the tool path
segments.
Consider the tool path generated by the Linear strategy. SolidCAM generates the planar pattern and
projects it on the model.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
The resulting tool path is trimmed by the working area; as a result some of the tool path lines are
divided into a number of segments.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
At the next stage, SolidCAM connects the tool path lines into several continuous chains (in this
example – three chains), in such a way as to minimize the jumps between them.
1 3
557
The Stay on surface within gap of options enable you to control the tool path connection.
With the Along path parameter, you can define the connection method for the segments of the tool
path line.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
In the illustration above, several tool path lines (#2 – #6) are divided into two segments, i.e. they
have a gap.
Gap
When connecting the tool path, SolidCAM compares
the gap length with the Along path value. When the gap
length is greater than the Along path value, SolidCAM
connects the current segment with the closest
segment of the next tool path line. The resulting tool
path is performed in a number of continuous chains
connected by the necessary jumps. This method is
preferable for large gaps.
558
7. 3D Milling
When the gap length is smaller than the Along path value, Gap
the segments of the tool path line are connected with the
cutting movements directly on the surface. The resulting
tool path is continuous and free of jumps. This method
is preferable for small gaps.
The Between paths value determines the way the tool

path lines and separate tool path chains are linked. When
the distance between tool path chains is smaller than the
specified value, the tool paths are connected with the
cutting movements directly on the surface.
Link movement
When the distance between tool path is greater than

the specified Between paths value, the tool paths are
connected with rapid movements via the Operation
Clearance level.
Link movement
When the distance between tool path lines is greater

than the Between paths value, the tool path lines are also
connected with rapid movements.
559
7.1.8 Semi-Finish/Finish strategies
SolidCAM 3D Finishing
strategies
Linear
Offset cutting
Spiral
Circular pocket
Constant Step over
Constant Z
Pencil Milling
7.1.9 Linear Finish strategy
In linear cutting, the lines of a linear pattern are generated on a

2D plane above the model. The linear pattern is then projected on
the 3D Model. During this projection, the Z-position of the tool is
calculated to avoid gouging of the material.
The Linear Finish dialog box displays the parameters of the Linear
finishing.
560
7. 3D Milling
Direction type
These options control the direction of the tool on each line of the linear pattern that has been
projected on the model. Different materials and cutters require specific cutting conditions,
e.g. some tools give better surface finish when cutting only downward; in other applications you
need to use other settings to achieve optimum results.
• Zigzag
The tool finishes one line of the linear pattern and then directly moves to the next line,
and so on. It mills forward and backward without leaving the material, thus constantly
switching between climb and conventional milling.
Connection radius: you can connect lines of the linear tool path with a radius. If the
Radius value is 0, SolidCAM connects the linear tool path with straight lines.
Connection with radius Connection without radius
• One way
The tool finishes one line of the

linear pattern. At the end of the
line, the tool rapidly moves (G0)
to the safety distance and then
to the start of the next cut line.
The tool always uses climb or
561
• One way - Upward
The tool always cuts from the lowest

point of the tool path line to the
highest point. From the highest point
of the cut, the tool moves rapidly to
the start point of the next cut.
• One way - Downward
The tool always cuts from the highest

point of the tool path line to the
lowest point. From the lowest point
of the cut, the tool moves rapidly to
the start point of the next cut.
Define direction angle by
• Value
Enter the angle value that defines the orientation of the tool path. The value
of 0 generates the tool path lines in the direction of the positive X-axis.
• Line
The Define button is available and you can define a line that determines the orientation
of the tool path. The direction vector is defined by picking two points that define the
start point and the end point of the direction line. The angle of the selected line is the
output to the angle field.
Technology
• Step over
In linear finishing, SolidCAM generates a line pattern on a 2D plane above the model
and then projects it on the 3D model. The Step over value determines the constant
distance between all lines of the linear pattern created on the 2D plane before it is
projected.
562
7. 3D Milling
• Scallop
This option enables you to control the distance between the tool path lines by the
cusp height you want to achieve on the finished model. SolidCAM adjusts the distance
between the single lines of the 2D pattern (before projection on the model) to the
topology of the model to match the specified scallop height.
Maximum step over
On flat areas, bull nose tool can achieve a small scallop with a rather large step over.
You can use this value if you want to limit the chip load on the tool or the cutting
forces that a large step over could cause.
• Arc approximation
You can create G2/G3 GCode output from Linear finish operations. SolidCAM checks
whether successive points of the calculated tool path can be connected using an arc or
circle. If an arc or circle connection within the specified arc approximation tolerance
can be made, you will receive arc and G2 and G3 circle interpolation commands in the
generated GCode. This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode
files. Most CNC-controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than
on single tool path points or splines. Arc approximation will increase actual feed rates
on older CNC-machines and the machine will work smoother.
on arcs or circles
Cross finish
• None
Linear machining is performed only in the direction you have specified and no cross
finish is executed.
Linear finish tool path
• Normal
After finishing the model in the first

specified direction, another linear
finish is performed at an angle of
90° to the first cutting direction.
The complete area that has been
machined in the first cut linear Normal cross finish
operation is machined again. tool path
563
• Smart
Linear finish
The areas that have not been finished within
tool path
the given scallop during the first linear finish
operation at an angle of 90° to the first cut
are machined again. The values of Maximum
step over and Minimum step over affect the
calculation. If the scallop can be achieved
using step over larger than the minimum step
over, no cross finish is necessary – some other
constellation could result in all the working
area to be re-machined. Smart cross-finish tool path
Minimum step over
This value can be used to avoid tool paths that are too narrow. You can, for example, enter a scallop
of 0.02. For some areas SolidCAM would calculate a distance between two lines with 0.01 or less
(at very steep walls). To reduce machining time and to avoid long GCode files, you can limit the
minimum step over of the tool to 0.05.
7.1.10 Offset Cutting Finish strategy
Offset cutting is a form of 3D profile milling that can be used Offset Geometry
to mill specific areas of the model. This strategy offers two
possible alternatives of profile selection: Tool path
If you select one Profile, you must specify the clear offset
distance. On the right side of the profile, relative to the chain
direction, the machining will be performed until the specified
clear offset distance has been reached. In this example,
the Offset Profile has been machined normal to the profile
geometry.
Offset Geometry
When you define two Offset profiles, both profile geometries
are connected and the tool path is projected on the 3D Model.
Tool path
When you click on the Data button, the Offset Finish dialog
box is displayed.
564
7. 3D Milling
Offset geometry
In this section, specify which profile geometry you want

to use for the offset finish.
Cutting area
• Clear offset
This value determines the offset distance

from the profile that will be machined in
the right direction of the geometry. This
field is active if you use an offset geometry
that consists of only one profile. In case the
geometry has two profiles, this field will be
inactive, as the profiles will be automatically
connected.
• Step over
In offset finish, SolidCAM generates the offset pattern on a 2D plane above the model
and then projects it on the 3D Model. The step over value determines the constant
distance between all lines of the offset pattern created on the 2D plane before it will
be projected.
• Tool side
This option enables you to define the working side of the

geometry.
Geometry orientation
Left side machining Right side machining
565
Cutting direction
• Cross Finish
Select this check box if you want to

perform a Cross finish on the offset
area. After finishing the model in the
first specified direction, i.e. parallel
or normal to the profile geometry,
the other possible option will also be
applied.
• First cutting direction
If you have selected the Cross finish check box, both cutting directions will be applied
to the offset area. Select the direction you want to use first. When no cross finish is
used, only the selected option will be performed.
Parallel to geometry
SolidCAM will generate a pattern with offset lines parallel to the offset
profile geometry. This pattern will then be projected on the model.
Normal to geometry
SolidCAM will generate a pattern with offset lines normal (90 degrees) to
the offset profile geometry. This pattern will then be projected on the model.
Tool path connections
• Direction type: Zigzag
The tool finishes one line of the offset pattern and then moves directly to the next line
and so on. It mills forward and backward without leaving the material – thus constantly
switching between climb and conventional milling.
• Direction type: One way
The tool finishes one line of the linear pattern. At the end of the line, the tool rapidly
moves (G0) to the safety distance and then to the start of the next cut line. The tool
will always use climb or conventional milling.
566
7. 3D Milling
• Connection type
This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool
passes.
Stairs
When this option is chosen, the tool moves in two

steps between two adjacent tool passes. If the next
pass is lower than the present pass, the tool first moves
away from the surface in the XY-direction and then
downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher than the
present pass, the tool first moves upwards in Z and then
approaches the surface in the XY-direction.
Smooth
Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on

the surface of the model. The line connecting the two
adjacent tool passes is projected on the model. When
you use this option, the tool does not leave material
when moving to the start point of the next pass.
7.1.11 Spiral finish strategy
Five different types of spiral tool path movements can be selected for this finishing strategy. The
spiral tool path pattern is first generated in 2D and then is projected on the 3D Model. During this
projection, the Z-position of the tool is calculated so as to prevent gouging of the model.
When you click on the Data button, the Spiral Finish

Path type
By combining the options in the Path type and Profile

type fields, you can generate five different types of
tool path spirals. For each of the combinations you
can set additional parameters in the Angle and Radius
sections that affect the spiral.
567
Path type: Linear
Additional parameters:
• Start Angle
• End Angle
• Delta Angle
Path type: Spiral
• Profile type: Arcs
• Start Angle
• End Angle
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius
• Profile type: Lines
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius
568
7. 3D Milling
Path type: Square
• Profile type: Arcs
• Start Angle
• End Angle
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius
• Profile type: Lines
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius
569
Cutting direction
The spiral is machined in the clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The direction
also affects the machined angle area. Machining always starts at the angle given in Start angle up to
the End angle in the cutting direction.
Angle
You can limit the angle area that will be machined by setting values for the Start and End angle. The
direction of the positive X-axis is entered with a value of 0 degrees. Machining will always start
from the given start angle and will move in the cutting direction towards the end angle.
The Delta angle is used to specify the angle steps of the tool path spiral in the Path type: Linear
option.
Radius
You can set values for the Start and End radius of the tool path spiral.
The Delta radius specifies the offset distance to the next circle or spiral circumference of the tool
path spiral.
Pick center of tool path spiral
This button enables you to define the center of the tool path spiral that will be projected on the
model. If you do not choose any center, the system uses the current Coordinate system origin as
the center of the spiral.
Enter the X,Y,Z coordinates of the center

point into the Pick center point of tool path
spiral dialog box or define a point by picking
and confirm by clicking on the button.

The tool finishes one line of the spiral pattern and

then moves directly to the next tool path line and so
on. It mills forward and backward without leaving
the material, thus constantly switching between climb
milling and conventional milling.
570
7. 3D Milling
The tool moves finishes one line of the linear pattern. At

the end of the line, the tool rapidly moves (G0) to the safety
distance and then to the start of the next cut line. The tool
• Connection type
passes.
Stairs
The tool moves in two steps between two adjacent

tool passes. If the next pass is lower than the present
pass, the tool first moves away from the surface in
the XY-direction and then downwards in Z. In case
the next pass is higher than the present pass, the tool
first moves upwards in Z and then approaches the
surface in the XY-direction.
Smooth
Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on

the surface of the model. The line connecting the
two adjacent tool passes is projected on the model.
When you use the Smooth option, the tool does not
leave material when moving to the start point of the
next pass.
7.1.12 Circular Pocket finish strategy
This strategy uses the selected Working area to create

a 2D pocket line pattern on a plane above the model. The
line pattern is then projected on the 3D Model. During
this projection, the Z-position of the tool is calculated to
avoid gouging of the material.
The shape of the Working area and the values for the
Tool position in the Working area dialog box of this
operation directly affect the tool path.
571
The Circular Pocket Finish dialog box displays the
parameters of the Circular Pocket Finish strategy.
Cutting direction
The pocket can be machined in Conventional or Climb

direction.
Start from
The machining can be started from Outside or Inside the pocket.
The combination of both fields, Cutting direction and Start from,

will result in climb or conventional milling. Select CCW/Outside or
CW/Inside to perform climb milling; any other combination will result in
conventional milling of the model.
Connection type
This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool passes.
• Stairs
The tool moves in two steps between two adjacent tool passes. If
the next pass is lower than the present pass, the tool first moves
away from the surface in the XY-direction and then downwards
in Z. In case the next pass is higher than the present pass, the
tool first moves upwards in Z and then approaches the surface
in the XY-direction.
• Smooth
Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on the surface
of the model. The line connecting the two adjacent tool passes
is projected on the model. When you use the Smooth option,
the tool does not leave material when moving to the start point
of the next pass.
572
7. 3D Milling
Step over
In pocket finishing, SolidCAM generates the pocket line pattern on a 2D plane above the model and
then projects it on the 3D Model. The step over value determines the constant distance between the
lines of the pocket created on the 2D plane before it will be projected on the model.
7.1.13 Constant Z Finish Strategy
This strategy produces very high quality finish especially

on steep surfaces and minimizes full 3-axis movements
that slow down older machines and controllers. The
Scallop option adjusts the necessary Z-down steps to
the surface flow and results in shorter machining times.
The Constant Z Finish dialog box displays the parameters

of this strategy.
573
Constant Z wall machining
Select the check box to machine all areas of the model

that are not parallel to the XY-plane, i.e. are not planar.
The step down can be controlled by two options:
Constant step down
Starting from the Upper level, SolidCAM

will use the specified step down to
calculate each successive Z-level. A value
of 20 for the Upper level and a constant
step down of 1.5 will produce a tool
path on the model contour at Z20, Z18.5,
Z17, Z15.5, etc. until the Lower level is
reached.
Variable step down
SolidCAM will automatically calculate the necessary steps down to produce the
specified scallop (cusp height) on the model surface. On steep areas, the step down
will naturally be larger than on more level areas.
• Scallop
The Scallop value determines

the cusp height of the resulting
surface finish. The smaller the
value, the smoother the surface
Scallop
finish will be.
• Maximum step down
On vertical walls of the model, SolidCAM could apply large steps down as
this would theoretically result in the scallop value of 0. To avoid large cutting
depth and tool load, you can limit the maximum step between two successive
Z-levels.
• Minimum step down
On nearly level areas, the necessary down step to achieve the specified
scallop could be very small. You can set a minimum down step value that will
override the smaller down step generated by the scallop calculation.
574
7. 3D Milling
Start machining (Define start by angle)

• Value
Enter the angle that defines the start position of the tool path. The value of 0 will
generate the tool path start point on the intersection of the contour and the positive
X-axis.
• Line
When you choose this option, the Define button is activated and you can define a line
that determines the orientation of the tool path. The direction vector is defined by
picking two points that define the start point and end point of the direction line. The
angle of the selected line will be output to the angle field.
Arc approximation
This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Constant Z
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path
can be connected using an arc or circle. If an arc or circle connection within the
specified arc approximation tolerance can be made, you will receive arc and G2 and G3
circle interpolation commands in the generated GCode.
This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode files. Most
CNC-controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single
tool path points or splines. Arc approximation will increase actual feed rates on older
CNC-machines and the machine will work smoother.
on arcs or circles.
The arc approximation value should be smaller than the specified value
for the surface offset. A warning message will be displayed if a larger
value could cause gouging of the model.
Lead in/Lead out
You can control the way the tool leads in and leads out from the profile. Select an
option from the list and enter the distance value for this option.
575
The following Lead in/Lead out strategies are available:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
• Point
For more information on the Lead in/Lead out options, see topic 6.1.3.
Compensation
This option enables SolidCAM to use the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
CNC-controller in the GCode output.
Clean contours of flat areas
In prismatic solid parts, if there is a ledge at a depth that falls between down steps
or a wall at the edge of a flat bottom of Constant Z machining, SolidCAM can still
recognize this ledge or wall and machine it as if in a Profile operation (between the
machining of the previous and next Z-steps).
Connection type
passes.
• Stairs
The tool moves in two steps between two

adjacent tool passes. If the next pass is lower
than the present pass, the tool first moves away
from the surface in the XY-direction and then
downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher
than the present pass, the tool first moves
upwards in Z and then approaches the surface
• Tangential
Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves

away from the contour in a tangent movement.
It continues in a 3D arc/spiral movement to the
next Z-level and then approaches the contour
in another tangent movement.
576
7. 3D Milling
The Tangential tool path connection smooths lead in/out moves and is
especially useful for High Speed Machining. You can avoid “witness marks”
on the model that can be caused from a Z approach movement on the
model surface.
The Approach radius parameter defines the radius of the 3D arc that is used to create
the tangential move between two successive Z-levels. The value is the maximum radius
used as SolidCAM will automatically reduce the radius if the model topology will not
leave enough space to approach with the specified radius. This could happen in narrow
cavities of the model when a large tool is being used.
Cutting direction (Cut from)

• Top to bottom
The machining starts on the Upper level and continue downward in the -Z direction
until the Lower level is reached. The tool finishes one line of the linear pattern, moves
directly to the next line and so on. It mills forward and backward without leaving the
material, thus constantly changing between climb milling and conventional milling.
• Bottom to top
The machining starts from the Lower level and continue towards the Upper level.
Milling type
• Climb
The tool cuts on the left side of the model contour. Unless the selected Open contour
strategy is set to Zigzag, contours are always machined in the climb milling direction.
• Conventional
The tool will cut on the right side of the model contour. On outside contours, this will
generate a tool path in clockwise direction.
Open contour strategy
This field controls the milling direction on contours that cannot be closed because the
model or a specified working area does not enable SolidCAM to continue the tool path
in a closed loop.
577
• One way
The tool will retreat to the Clearance level and move to the start point of the next tool
path, always keeping the cutting direction specified in the Milling type.
• Zigzag
This option enables the tool to change the cutting direction when it encounters open
contours on the model. The milling direction on open contours will change between
climb and conventional milling until the open contour has been finished. With the
Zigzag option, rapid moves from Z-level to Z-level will be greatly reduced.
Constant Z flat floor machining
Select the check box to activate this option.

SolidCAM recognizes planar areas on 3D Models.
For flat planar areas of the model, working areas
will be automatically created that can be machined
using a hatch or contour style pocket.
Flat floor machining greatly reduces programming

time of 3D models with 2.5D features like pockets
and profiles on different Z-levels.
Scallop
Enter the scallop (cusp height) of

the finished surface you want to
achieve. SolidCAM will automatically
calculate the side step of the tool.
Maximum step over
If you use a flat tool or a bull nose cutter, the step over will be as large as the flat area of
the tool, e.g. for a tool diameter 6 with a corner radius of 1, the step over on flat areas
would be 4. To limit the cutting width of the tool, enter the maximum step over value.
578
7. 3D Milling
Minimum cut area
This parameter defines the size of the minimum area that will be machined.
Machining style
SolidCAM enables you to choose two styles of the floor machining during
Constant Z finishing:
• Contour style
Select this option if you want to machine the flat floor areas on your model
as a contour style pocket. The pocket tool path will travel at parallel offsets
to the outside contour of the flat area.
1. Choose the Contour strategy.
2. Click on the Data button to define the Contour parameters.
For more information on the Contour machining, see topic 6.4.3.

• Hatch style
The tool mills the flat area in a linear pattern.
1. Choose the Hatch strategy.
2. Click on the Data button to define the Hatch parameters.
For more information on the Hatch machining, see topic 6.4.3.
With the Mode button, SolidCAM locates open pocket areas and enables you to
machine them with a specific strategy. This strategy enables you to combine pocket and
profile tool paths in order to provide the best productivity in open pocket machining.
For more information on the Open Pocket machining, see topic 6.4.3.
Arc approximation
This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Constant Z
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path
can be connected using an arc or circle. If an arc or circle connection within the
specified arc approximation tolerance can be made, you will receive arc and G2 and G3
circle interpolation commands in the generated GCode.
579
controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single tool path
points or splines. Arc approximation will increase actual feed rates on older CNC-
machines and the machine will work smoother.
Complete Z-Level
Vertical wall with fillets
This option enables special handling of vertical walls with fillets between them in a prismatic part.
7.1.14 Constant Step over strategy
The 3D Projection Machining strategies generate a 2D tool path mesh, with a constant Step over
in the plane parallel to the XY-plane of the current Coordinate System. This 2D tool path mesh
is then projected on the 3D Model to get the 3D tool path. This method provides good results
for prismatic parts machining but has a significant disadvantage for machining of curved surfaces
because it does not take into account the surface curvature.
Tool path with the constant Tool path with the constant
Step over in the XY-plane Step over along the surface
generated by the Constant
Step over strategy
580
7. 3D Milling
Constant Step over gives an excellent surface

finish because the step over is constant along all
surfaces irrespective of whether they are steep
walls or shallow areas.
SolidCAM provides four types of the Constant

strategy:
Step over
• Profile with offset

• Pocket
• Profile with limit
• Ruled surface
• Pocket-auto boundaries
The appropriate geometry has to be defined for all

of these options.
Profile with offset
The tool mills from the geometry you have chosen to the
Clear offset distance. Specify the Step over distance.
Note that both Step over and

Clear offset are measured along the
surface.
The Tool side option defines the position of Step over

the tool relative to the geometry or, in other Geometry
words, the side of the geometry where the tool
Clear offset
path will be applied.
Tool path
581
Pocket
The tool mills within the geometry until it has

machined the entire pocket. The geometry used
with this option must consist of several closed
chains, similar to the geometry for a regular Pocket
operation.
SolidCAM defines a number of offsets to the

geometry with the specified Step over (measured
along the surface). If there is an island, the tool
will mill evenly from the outside chain toward
the island and from the island toward the outside
chain. The two paths will join in the middle
between the two chains. The shape of the tool
path is determined by both the outside geometry
and the island geometry.
Pocket geometry
Tool path
SolidCAM enables you to define the cutting direction:
• The Start from option enables you to start machining either from Outside or Inside the
pocket.
• The Direction option enables you to choose Conventional or Climb milling.
582
7. 3D Milling
Profile with limit
This option enables you to create the tool path

between two chains that can be open. The tool
mills from the first chain toward the second chain
copying the shape of the first chain along the
surface being machined with specified Step over.
Note that Step over is

measured along the surface.
Chain #1
Step over
Tool path
Chain #2
Ruled surface
This option enables you to create the tool path

between two chains that can be open. The tool
mills from the first geometry towards the second
geometry while morphing from the shape of
the first geometry to the shape of the second
geometry, with specified Step over.
Tool path Second chain
First chain
583
Pocket-auto boundaries
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM

automatically determines the pockets within the
limits of the defined working area.

The tool mills one line of the offset

pattern and then moves directly
to the next line and so on. It mills
forward and backward without
leaving the material, thus constantly
switching between climb and
The tool mills one line of the linear pattern. At the end of the line, the tool rapidly
moves (G0) to the safety distance and then to the start of the next cut line. The tool
• Connection type
passes.
Stairs
The tool moves in two steps between two adjacent tool passes. If the next pass
is lower than the present pass, the tool first moves away from the surface in the
XY-direction and then downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher than the
present pass, the tool first moves upwards in Z and then approaches the surface
Smooth
Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on the surface of the model.
The line connecting the two adjacent tool passes is projected on the model.
When you use the Smooth option, the tool does not leave material when moving
to the start point of the next pass.
584
7. 3D Milling
Extend to edge
When this check box is not selected, the tool path is generated
from the position where the tool center is aligned with the
end point of the face; this could leave an unmachined area.
When this check box is selected, the tool path is extended till
the tool is tangent to the face, at the start point of the face.
The Extend to Edge option

is turned off
Unmachined
area
The Extend to Edge option

is turned on
7.1.15 Pencil milling
To clean out corners for semi-finishing operations, the

typical method in the past was to pick two surfaces that
form a corner and drive a tool along their intersection.
This method worked well enough for small or simple
parts or for complicated parts if there was plenty
of time for programming. But because of the time
required to manually pick and cut all of the corners
for different sized tools, this step has been foregone
in many cases, creating a dangerous condition for high
speed machining.
Pencil milling uses an algorithm that finds all of the

corners of a part and automatically drives a tool along
those corners.
585
This kind of functionality is particularly important for high speed
machining because of the desire to maintain a relatively constant chip
removal rate. Without Pencil milling, when finishing these parts with walls
and floors, the tool would be removing a considerably larger volume of
material when it reaches the corners. With Pencil milling, the corners are
already relieved, causing less tool deflection and noise when cutting the
corner. This is true whether machining in a downhill or uphill fashion.
Since Pencil milling can clean out stock in corners, where the stock will
typically be the heaviest, Pencil milling is often performed before various
3D finishing methods are run. The machine operator or NC programmer
will typically reduce the feed rate of a pencil cut operation due to the
increased material removal rate. It is recommended to use Pencil milling
as a strategy for semi-finish.
The Pencil milling dialog box enables you to define the parameters of the Pencil milling strategy.
Bitangency angle
The Bitangency angle is the complement to 180° of the corner angle. SolidCAM will machine all
corners that have a corner angle smaller than 180° – Bitangency angle.
Bitangency angle
Direction mode
• Standard
The tool mills the center line of

Pencil milling from its start to its
end in one movement.
586
7. 3D Milling
• Upward
The tool will always mill from the lowest point of the center line of Pencil milling to
the highest point. As the result the center line of pencil milling is divided into several
segments with the tool moving rapidly from the end of one segment to the start of
the next segment.
Segment #1 Segment #2
• Downward
The tool will always mill from the highest point of the center line of Pencil milling
to the lowest point. As a result the center line of pencil milling is divided into several
segments with the tool moving rapidly from the end of one segment to the start of
the next segment.
Segment #1 Segment #2
587
Offset
SolidCAM machines at an offset from the center

line of Pencil milling. The following data has to be
defined: Tool path
• Step over defines the step over to the Center line

both sides from the center line of Pencil
milling.
• Number of passes defines the number of

offset passes.
Start from
• Inside
SolidCAM machines the center line of Pencil milling and then the offset passes at each
side.
Center line 3
2
1
4
5
• Outside
SolidCAM machines the offset passes from each side at the center line and then the
center line of Pencil milling.
Center line 1
2
5
4
3
588
7. 3D Milling
7.1.16 Tolerance page
The precision tolerances defined on this page will directly affect the surface quality of your model.
3D Milling Tolerance
Facet tolerance Tool path tolerance
Tool curvature
Surface curvature
Side step
Facet tolerance
This tolerance controls the maximum deviation of the

mathematical representation from the original solids
and surfaces of your model.
The 3D Model geometry is triangulated and the
resulting facets are saved in the <model_name>.fct file
in the CAM-Part folder. The triangulation is performed
on the 3D Model geometry when you use it for the
first time in a 3D Milling operation. If you use a 3D
geometry in another operation, SolidCAM checks the
tolerance of the existing *.fct file of this geometry. It
does not perform another triangulation as long as the
*.fct file is created with the same surface tolerance.
589
Tool path tolerance
SolidCAM generates the tool path in two steps:
1. SolidCAM generates a mathematical representation of the surfaces and solids of the

3D Model geometry within the given surface tolerance. The information about this
triangulation process is stored in an internal *.fct file that is similar to an *.stl file.
2. SolidCAM calculates the tool path using the parameters specified for the
tool and the milling strategy to calculate the single steps of the tool on the
mathematical model created in the first step. The result of this calculation, the *.pj
PCode file, later serves as input to the generation of the actual GCode file. During this
calculation, SolidCAM uses the Tool path tolerance that affects the number of single
steps in the tool path (accuracy of the tool path).
The tool path tolerance can be defined by the following criteria:
Tool curvature
The accuracy of the tool path depends on the Tool diameter and the specified tolerance
value.
Surface curvature
The accuracy of the tool path depends on the surface curvature and the specified
tolerance value.
Side step
This tolerance enables you to control the size of a single step that will be constant
during the whole tool path.
Small tolerance values result in more GCode steps in the GCode file, but the
resulting surface is closer to the mathematical model.
590
7. 3D Milling
7.2 3D Engraving Operation
You can mill text or any other profile on a 3D geometry. The

profile will be projected on the surface, engraving the contour at
a specified depth.
When you click Add Operation, 3D Engraving, the 3D Engraving

Operation dialog box is displayed.
Engraving geometry name
In this section, you have to specify the contour, i.e. profile geometry that you want to engrave on
the 3D model surface.
For more information on Profile geometry, see topic 4.4.1.
591
Fill area
The area within the closed engraving geometry can be machined

using the following strategies:
Hatch
angle
Hatch
SolidCAM fills the engraving geometry with a linear

raster tool path, according to the specified Step over Step over
and Hatch angle.
Engraving
geometry
Contour
Step over
The tool moves on offsets parallel to the pocket
contour with the specified Step over.
The contours are machined in the clockwise (CW) or

counterclockwise (CCW) direction.
The Wall offset parameter enables you to specify the offset from the
engraving geometry. SolidCAM generates the contour equidistant Engraving
to the engraving geometry at the specified offset. The engraving is geometry
performed inside this contour.
Engraving technology
Type
This option enables you to semi-finish and/or finish the engraved profile on the
translated surface.
• The Semi-finish option enables you to prepare the engraving profile to an offset
specified in the Offset field with cutting depths defined in the Step down section.
• The Finish option enables you to machine the engraving profile to its final
dimensions in one step down.
• The Both option is used to machine the limit first with a semi-finishing cut and
then with a finishing cut.
592
7. 3D Milling
Side
The tool can cut to the left of the profile, to the right of the profile, or directly on the
engraving geometry.
• Right: the tool cuts to the right of the profile geometry up to a distance defined
with the Offset value.
• Left: the tool cuts to the left of the profile geometry up to a distance defined with
the Offset value.
• Center: the center of the tool moves directly on the profile geometry.
Offset
You can specify the offset from the engraving geometry for a Semi-finishing operation
to the left or to the right of the geometry. This offset will be removed with the finishing
cut, if you have defined one.
Step down
This value defines the successive Z-cutting depth during the Semi-finishing operation
of the engraving profile.
• From Upper level
Roughing passes are performed at each down step, from the Upper Level to the
virtual surface located at an offset from the actual surface. This offset is defined
with the Engraving depth value.
Upper level
Actual surface
Surface with offset defined

as Engraving depth
593
• From surface
Roughing passes are performed at each down step, only from an actual surface to
a virtual surface defined with the Engraving depth value.
Geometry
Actual surface
Surface with offset

defined as
Engraving depth
7.2.2 Tolerance page
3D Milling Tolerance
The tolerance settings affect the surface
quality of the Engraving operation.
Facet tolerance Tool path tolerance
For a detailed explanation of tolerance
settings, see topic 7.1.16.
Tool curvature
Surface curvature
Side step
594
7. 3D Milling
7.3 3D Drilling Operation
This operation enables you to perform drills and other canned drill
cycles. In contrast to Drilling operation (see topic 6.6), 3D Drilling
operation enables you to take into account the solid model geometry.
SolidCAM enables you to use holes, machined by this operation, for
the Z-Entry during 3D Milling (Roughing) (for more information on
the Z-Entry strategies, see topic 7.1.3). Similar to Drilling operation,
3D Drilling operation supports the canned drill cycles provided by your
particular CNC-machine such as threading, peck, ream, boring etc.
When you click Add Operation, 3D Drilling, the 3D Drilling Operation

7.3.1 Geometry page
Geometry
In this section, specify the drill positions, i.e. the drilling geometry you want to use.
For more information on the drilling geometry definition, see topic 4.2.1.
3D Model Geometry name
SolidCAM enables you to define the 3D model geometry. The 3D model geometry is used for the
drilling depth definition.
For more information on the 3D model geometry definition, see topic 4.3.1.
595
7.3.2 Tool page
Center drill
In addition to the standard tool options described on the Tool page, SolidCAM enables you to label
a tool as a center drill. This option is used for automatic sorting. In automatic sorting, tools that are
labeled as center drills can be automatically moved to the top of the operation list.
When a Tap tool is chosen for the operation, the Tapping Drill cycle type is automatically chosen.
The Drill cycle type button is unavailable. You cannot change the cycle type until the Tap tool is
changed to a tool of a different type.
If the Tapping cycle is not supported by the current MAC file, the Tap tool cannot be chosen for
the operation. The following error message is displayed when you click on the Select button in the
Part Tool Table dialog box.
When you change a MAC file for the CAM-Part which contains tapping operations for a MAC
file which does not support tapping, SolidCAM marks all the tapping operations with the asterisk
sign (the PCode is removed). When you try to calculate such operations, the following message is
displayed.
596
7. 3D Milling
7.3.3 Levels page
Rest material
Offset from model Offset from

model
SolidCAM enables you to define the depth of the 3D drilling
by the Offset from model value. This value can be either
positive or negative. With the negative value SolidCAM
enables the tool to go deeper into the solid model.
Solid model
597
Reverse drilling sequence
SolidCAM enables you to reverse the sequence of drilling positions in 3D Drilling

operations. This functionality enables you to optimize the rapid movements during the
machining and increase the machining speed.
The Reverse button reverses the sequence of 1 3 5

drilling positions as shown.
6
When the same sequence of drilling positions 2 4

is used by several drilling operations (e.g. Original sequence
center drilling, drilling and threading) the
sequence reversing enables you to reduce
6 2
rapid movements between the operations. 4
1
5 3
The Reverse option is enabled only
when the drill_proc parameter Reversed sequence
is set to N in the MAC file.
Show sorted
Drill cycle type
Click on the Drill cycle type button. The Drill canned cycles
supported by the post-processor of the current CNC-controller are
displayed. Click on one of the icons to select the canned cycle you
want to use in this operation.
For more information on Drill cycles, see topic 6.6.3.
598
Machining
Processes 8
A Machining Process is comprised of a series of operations that are
tied together through user-defined parameters. You can automate
repetitive tasks in CNC-Programming with the Machining Process
feature.
In subsequent identical or similar situations, Machining Processes can
be used directly or adapted to a new situation by giving values to their
parameters.
 Machining Processes Table

 Defining a new Machining Process
 Operation Templates
 Default Sets
 Parameters & Expressions
 Using Machining Processes
8.1 Introduction & Basic concepts
SolidCAM enables you to automate repetitive tasks in CNC-Programming using the Machining
Process feature. Machining Process (MP) is the structure of fully parameterized Operation
Templates. In subsequent identical or similar situations, machining process templates can be either
used directly or adapted to a new situation by giving values to their parameters.
Machining
Process
Operation Templates Parameters
8.1.1 Operation templates

An Operation template is a parametric template of a single operation that is used within the
Machining Process. There can be one or several operation templates in a Machining Process.
For example, to create a threaded countersink hole, we need three operations using the common
geometry:
• Centering
At this stage, preliminary

centering is made for the
hole and the chamfer.
• Drilling
At this stage, the hole is

drilled.
600
• Threading
At this stage, the threading

is performed.
8.1.2 Parameters & Expressions
Parameters can be given a constant value or an D_chamfer
expression. D_thread
In the above example, the following parameters are

required:
H_thread
• The tap size (D_thread); H_drill
• The tap depth (H_thread);
• The drill depth (H_drill);
• The chamfer diameter (D_chamfer).

D_chamfer H_center
α D_chamfer/2
H_center =
tan(α/2)
In the above example, you can define the following expression for centering depth:
With a group of such operation templates, parameters and expressions, you can define the universal
Machining Process.
601
8.1.3 Default sets
A Default set is a combination of parameters and expressions used for operation template
customization. You can define a number of the default sets by attaching different specific values or
expressions to parameters. You can use default sets to adapt machining processes to specific tasks.
In the above example, you can create default sets for each tap size (e.g. M6, M8, etc.).
Default Set Parameters
Operation Templates
Machining
Process
8.1.4 Machining Process Table
SolidCAM enables you to include your Machining

Machining
Processes into the Machining Process Table. Process
1
Machining
Process
2 Machining
Processes
Machining Table
Process
3
Machining
Process
N
602
8.2 Creating Machining Processes
Three basic stages are required to create a Machining Process.
Creating Machining Creating Machining Defining Machining

Process Table Process Process components
New Machining Machining Machining

Process Table Process Table Process Define
Manager Manager
SolidCAM enables you to use three major interface tools for these tasks:
• New Machining Process Table – in this dialog box, you can define a new MP Table.
SolidCAM also enables you to manage existing MP Tables.
For more information on this subject, see topic 8.3.
• Machining Process Table Manager enables you to create and manage a single Machining
Process in the Table.
• Machining Process Define Manager enables you to define components of a single

Machining Process: Operation Templates, Default sets, Parameters and Expressions.
603
8.3 Defining Machining Process Table
The first stage of the Machining Process creation is the definition of the Machining Process Table.

Machining Process header and choose
the Milling type of the MP table from
the New submenu.
The New Machining Process Table

2. Enter a name for the Machining Process Table in the Table name field.
3. Click on the Add MAC file button to define the MAC file for your Machining
Process Table. Since not all machines support all of the options in SolidCAM,
you must also give the MAC file that you will be using. This will assure that
only the options that are supported by your machine will be used.
4. Confirm the Machining Process Table creation with the OK button.
8.3.1 Adding MAC file(s)
The Add MAC file(s) dialog box enables you to choose a MAC file or
a set of similar MAC files for your Machining Process. The MAC file
contains options oriented to the specific CNC-machine. This file enables
you to adapt your Machining Processes for your CNC-machines.
• Adding MAC file
1. Click on the Add button to choose the suitable

MAC file from the list.
604
2. In the dialog box displayed, pick the MAC file

you wish to work with and click OK.
The Add MAC file(s) dialog box is displayed again

with the chosen MAC file.
• Adding similar MAC files
This option adds to the list any MAC file similar to the one
you have originally picked. The criterion of the similarity
is the coincidence of the MAC file options required for
Machining Processes.
Please contact SolidCAM customer support for

further details.
605
8.4 Machining Process Table Manager
With the Machining Process Table Manager,

SolidCAM enables you to control single Machining
Processes in the Machining Process Table.
The Machining Process Table Manager dialog box
contains the following fields:
• Machining Process list
This field contains the list of all

Machining Processes from the
current table. 
Double-click on the Machining
Process name in the list to edit the
MP in the Machining Process Define
Manager (see topic 8.6).
Right-click on the Machining Process name in the list to open the menu of Managing
Machining Processes (see topic 8.5).
During the Machining Process definition SolidCAM enables you to divide the
Machining Processes in the MP Table into groups. Each group name has to be started
with the “==” symbols. All the Machining Processes following the group name (till the
next group name) are included into the group.
In the Add Machining Processes menu (see topic 8.8), each such group is displayed as
a separate submenu.
• MP Picture
This option enables you to attach a picture to your MP.
Click on the Browse MP Pictures button and choose

a bitmap file (*.bmp) in the browser window.
• Type
For easier identification and classification of Machining Processes, you can define and
use your own MP types.
• Description
In this field, you can enter a text describing the Machining Processes.
606
8.4.1 Managing Machining Process Tables
The Machining Process Tables menu contains the following options:

• Current
This option enables you to load the current MP Table in the

Machining Process Table Manager (see topic 8.4).
• New
With this option, you can create a new MP Table. SolidCAM

enables you to create four types of MP Tables: Milling,
Turning, Turn-Mill, and Wire Cut.
• Open
This option enables you to load an MP Table via the standard

Windows browser.
1. Right-click on the Machining Process header

and choose Open from the submenu to load
the Machining Process Table. The browser
window is displayed.
2. Choose a Machining Process Table file (*.mpt).
607
The Machining Process Table is loaded and the Machining Process Table
Manager is displayed.
• Close
This option enables you to close the current Machining Process.
• Copy
This option enables you to copy the

MP Table.
The Copy Machining Process Table
1. In the left field of the

dialog box, choose an
MP Table.
2. Click on the button

to move the MP Table in
the copy-container field.
You can use the button to remove MP Tables.
3. Choose the copy location in the right field.
4. Click on the Copy button to confirm the operation.
5. Click on the Exit button to close the dialog box.
• Delete
Choose this option to delete the MP Table via the standard Windows browser.
608
• Recent MP Tables
This option displays a list of the last MP Tables you loaded in SolidCAM. You can open
the file by clicking on the file you want to open.
• Group Types
This option enables you to create your own MP Group Type.

• Expressions
This option enables you to create and manage your own list of expressions that will be
available in each MP you design.
8.4.2 Machining Process Group Types
For easier identification and classification of Machining Processes,

you can define and use your own Machining Process Group Types.
Defining Group Types
1. Right-click on the Machining Process header

in the SolidCAM Manager and choose Group
Types from the menu.
The MP Group Types Manager is loaded.
• To add a new group type, click on the Add button and type the name.
• To remove an existing Group Type from the list, select the item and click on the Delete
button.
609
• To edit the Group Type name, click on the icon in the name field and choose
Edit - View.
The Edit dialog box is displayed. Change the MP Group Type name and confirm it with
the OK button.
• You can use the F2 hotkey to open the Edit dialog box.
• By double-clicking on the Group Type name in the list, you can edit the
name in the list directly without opening the Edit dialog box.
Using Group Types
The Machining Process Table Manager enables you to assign the Group Type to the Machining
Process by choosing it from the list.
610
8.5 Managing Machining Processes
Right-click on the Machining Process name in the list to

open the menu of Machining Process managing options.
• Add
This option enables you to add a new
Machining Process to Machining Process
Table.
• Edit
This option enables you to edit the components
of the Machining Process in the Machining
Process Define Manager (see topic 8.6).
• Copy
This option creates a copy of the current Machining Process.
• Rename
This option enables you to rename the current Machining Process.
• Delete
This option enables you to remove the current Machining Process from the Machining
Process Table.
• Import
This option enables you to insert Machining Processes from another MP Table into
the current MP Table.
You can insert Machining Processes from MP Tables defined with

similar MAC files.
1. Right-click on the Machining Process

name and choose Import from the
menu.
2. Choose the MP Table you want from the
browser. The MP Export Table Manager
is displayed.
3. Choose the Machining Process from the
Manager and confirm with the Export
button.
611
8.6 Machining Process Define Manager
8.6.1 Operation Templates page

On this page, you can work with the set of Operation Templates in the same
way as you work with conventional SolidCAM operations via SolidCAM
Manager.
8.6.2 Defining operation templates

The operation template dialog box contains the same fields you can find in the SolidCAM operation
dialog box.
You can now fill the fields of the operation template in the same way as if you define a conventional
operation. Note that some fields in the operation templates are marked with the button. These
fields are parametric. In these fields, you can enter the following data:
• Variable
• Expression
• Value
If a variable you entered does not

exist, SolidCAM adds it to the
Used Parameters Table (see topic
8.6.6).
To edit this parametric field, you can use

the parametric field menu by clicking on
the button.
612
If you entered incorrect data in the parametric field (unacceptable type of variable, error in
expression, etc.), SolidCAM marks this parametric field with the button.
In the operation template, the definition of the Geometry and the Tool is
mandatory.
8.6.3 Managing operation templates
An Operation Template is a parametrically defined single SolidCAM operation. In addition

to numerical values for the definition of technological parameters, you can use variables and
expressions in the operation templates.
The following options enable you to manage your operation templates:
• Add
The process of the operation template creation is the same as creating operations via
SolidCAM Manager.
1. Right-click on the Operations field

in the Operation Templates tab.
2. Choose an Operation Template type

from the menu.
The corresponding operation template dialog

box is displayed.
• Edit
This option enables you to edit the operation template.
The corresponding operation template dialog box is

displayed.
613
• Delete
This option enables you to delete the operation template.
• Change Tool
This option enables you to change the tool used in the specific Operation Template.
The Part Tool Table dialog box (see topic 3.6) is displayed.
• Suppress/Unsuppress
SolidCAM enables you to suppress and unsuppress operation templates in the

Machining Process.
The rules for suppressing and unsuppressing of the

operation templates are the same as for operations.
The suppressed/unsuppressed status of an operation
template is the property of the operation template per
default set, i.e. the same operation template can have
a different status in different default sets. SolidCAM
inserts suppressed operation templates from the
Machining Process into the CAM-Part as suppressed
operations.
614
8.6.4 Parametric field menu
The parametric field menu enables you to choose parameters and

expressions easily and effectively.
When you click on the button, the menu is displayed.

• User-defined parameters
This option displays a list of existing user-defined

parameters.
Choose the variable name from the list.
You can open this list with the F5 hotkey

when the cursor is placed in the parametric
field.
• Part parameters
This option displays a list of existing part parameters.
Choose the variable name from this list.

field.
• Expressions
This option displays the list of defined expressions.

field.
615
• Functions
This option displays the list of standard SolidCAM functions

(for more information on this subject, see topic 8.6.8).
You can open this list with the F8 hotkey when

the cursor is placed in the parametric field.
• Edit-View
This option displays the Edit dialog box.
In this dialog box, you can see and edit

the full parameter name or expression
string.
1. You can open this list with the F2 hotkey when the cursor is placed in the
parametric field.
2. In this dialog box, you can also use the operational menu by clicking on
the button.
8.6.5 Default Sets page

On this page you can work with the set of Default Sets created in the actual Machining Process.
There are four options to manage Default Sets:

• Set as Current
This command enables you to activate the selected Default Set.

• Rename
This command enables you to rename the selected Default

Set.
• Copy
This command enables you to copy the selected Default Set.

• Delete
This command enables you to remove the selected Default

Set.
616
You can create a number of Default Sets and assign the

Parameters
specific combination of values and expressions to the
parameters in each of them. The Default Sets enable you
to adapt the Machining Process to specific tasks.
1. Create a new Default Set with the Copy Default Set

option. Default Set
2. Activate the created Default Set with the Default Set
Current option.
3. Change parameters definition via Parameter Tables.
8.6.6 Parameters & Expressions Tables
There are two areas in the Machining Process Define Manager that enable you to manage your
parameters and expressions:
Used Parameters Table
This area shows the table of parameters that were used in the operation templates with the actual
Default Set.
617
This table contains the following columns:
• Parameter – this column shows the parameter name. You can change the name of the
parameter. In this case the name will be updated in all operation templates that use this
parameter.
• Expression – this column shows the parameter definition as an expression or a value.

To edit this parametric field, use the parametric field menu available by clicking on
the button.
• Result value – this column shows the result value returned by the parameter.
• G – this column shows the status of the parameter. If the status

is Global, the G letter is shown. In this case the expression of
this value will be the same in all Default Sets.
By right-clicking on this field, you can change the status of the
parameter.
• R/O – this column shows the access status of the parameter. If

the status is Read-only, the R/O letters are shown. In this case
the parameter definition cannot be changed during Machining
process insertion.
By right-clicking on this field, you can change the read-only status of the parameter.
• Description – this column shows your own text description of the parameter. To edit the
field, use the context menu available by clicking on the button.
Unused Parameters Table
This area shows the table of parameters that were not used in the operation templates with the
actual Default Set.
This table contains the following columns:
• Parameter – this column shows
the parameter name. In this field
you can change the name of the
parameter. In this case the name
will be updated in all operation
templates that use this parameter.
• Expression – this column shows the parameter definition as either expressions or values.
To edit this parametric field, you can use the operational menu available by clicking on
the button.
• Result value – this column shows the result value returned by the parameter.
618
8.6.7 Add new parameter
This field enables you to add a new parameter.
1. Choose the new parameter type from the list.
2. Type the parameter name.
3. Click the Add button to enter the parameter to the table.
The Delete button enables you to delete the selected parameter item
from the Unused Parameters table.
8.6.8 Variables and expressions
SolidCAM enables you to use variables and expressions in your operation templates.
Part Parameters
SolidCAM enables you to use a set of the standard built-in variables. All these variables get their
values from the SolidCAM CAM-Part when you insert the Machining Process.
• clearance_plane – the Z-value of the Clearance Level.
• safety – the Z-value of the Safety Distance.
• tool_start_plane – the Z-value of the Tool Start Level.
• work_upper_plane – the Z-value of the CAM-Part Upper Level.
• work_lower_plane – the Z-value of the CAM-Part Lower Level.
• zero_plane – the Z-value of the Zero Level.
User-defined parameters
You can define your own variables and use it in operation templates definition.
SolidCAM supports the following types of variables:
Profile Geometry variables are available for Profile operation templates.
Slot Geometry variables are available for Slot operation templates.
619
Limit Geometry variables are available for the Working Area definition in 3D Milling
operation templates.
3D Model Geometry variables are available for 3D Milling operation templates.
Section Geometry variables are available for Section geometry in Slot operation
templates.
Drill Geometry variables are available for Drilling operation templates.
Pocket Geometry variables are available for Pocket operation templates.

Z
Z-Value variables enable you to store the Z-coordinates. The value of
a variable of this
type can be defined by picking on the solid model; the Z-coordinate of the picked
position is used as the variable value.
Distance Value variables enable you to store the distance. The distance can be defined
by picking two positions on the solid model.
String variables are used to store strings of symbols.
Float variables are used to store positive and negative floating point numbers.
Integer variables are used to store positive and negative whole numbers.
Tool Number variables are used to store the positive whole numbers used for the tool
number definition.
Diameter variables enable you to store the diameters. The diameter value can be defined
by picking a circular edge on the model.
Enter the names for variables according to the following rules:
• Use a letter as the first character;
• Only capital and lowercase English letters, numbers and the underscore
symbol (_) are acceptable;
• Names cannot exceed 255 characters in length.
620
Expressions
SolidCAM enables you to use expressions for parameters definition.
You can use the following symbols in expressions:
• Addition (+)
• Subtraction (-)
• Division (/)
When multiplication and division occur together in an expression, each operation is evaluated as
it occurs from left to right. When addition and subtraction occur together in an expression, each
operation is evaluated in the order of appearance from left to right. Parentheses can be used to
override the order of precedence and force some parts of an expression to be evaluated before
others. Operations within parentheses are always performed before those outside. Within the
parentheses, however, operator precedence is maintained.
SolidCAM enables you to use the set of the standard mathematical functions such as sine, cosine,
etc. in your formulas.
Example:
For the H_center variable in the following formula

D_chamfer/2
H_center =
tan(α/2)
you can write the following expression:

H_center=(D_chamfer/2)/(tan(Alpha/2))
621
SolidCAM standard functions
sqrt()
Returns a value specifying the square root of a number.

sin()
Returns a value specifying the sine of an angle.

cos()
Returns a value specifying the cosine of an angle.

tan()
Returns a value specifying the tangent of an angle.

abs()
Returns a value of the same type that is passed to it specifying the absolute value of
a number.
The absolute value of a number is its unsigned magnitude. For example,

and abs(1) both return 1.
abs(-1)
acos()
Returns a value specifying the arccosine of a number.

asin()
Returns a value specifying the arcsine of a number.

atan()
Returns a value specifying the arctangent of a number.

atan2(,)
dist(X,Y)
Returns a value specifying the arctangent of quotient first and
second arguments. (X,Y)
dist(,) and ang(,)

ang(X,Y)
Returns polar coordinates: distance and angle (in radians) of
the point defined in Cartesian coordinates.
0
622
pow(,)
Returns a value of the first argument raised to the power of the second argument.
For example: pow(2,3) returns 8.
log10()
Returns a value specifying the base-10 logarithms of a number.

ln()
Returns a value specifying the natural logarithm of a number.

sum3( , , )
Returns the sum value of three arguments.

int()
Returns the integer portion of a number.

rad()
Converts degrees to radians.

deg()
Converts radians to degrees.
623
8.6.9 Parametric tool definition
SolidCAM enables you to define the tool number as a variable, similar to the other tool data that can
be defined parametrically in the operation templates. The expression for the tool number variable
can vary in the different Default sets. The tool number variable is assigned its value during the
insertion of a MP into the CAM-Part.
By default, this option is disabled when you define the tool for an operation template in a MP. To
enable it and define the tool number parametrically, right-click on the tool name in the Tool list area
of the Part Tool table and choose Used in Current or Part Table.
The Tool number field becomes available for parametric definition. All other tool parameters are
disabled.
624
You can switch back to the method where the Tool number is assigned automatically by right-
clicking on the tool name in the list and choosing Used in MP.
When you insert the MP into the CAM-Part, you have to assign values for the tool parameters
that were defined as variables in the MP. If the tool was defined with the Used in Current or Part
Table option, SolidCAM automatically checks the existence of the tool with the specified number
in the Part Tool Table and Current Tool Table; if a tool with this number is not found, the number
is not acceptable.
The parametric menu available for the tool
number variables contains three options:
• Choose tool from current table
This option displays the Current

Tool Library from which you can
choose a tool for the MP insertion.
When you have selected a tool, its
tool number from the Current Tool
Table appears in the Expression
field of the relevant variable. This
option is available only when the
Current Tool Library is defined.
• Tool select from part
This option displays the Part Tool Table from which you can choose a tool for the MP
insertion. When you have selected a tool, its number from the Part Tool Table appears
in the Expression field of the relevant variable.
• Edit – View
This option displays the Edit dialog box in which you can enter the expression manually.
625
8.7 Using the Machining Processes
You can use the defined Machining Process by inserting it into a CAM-Part. During the insertion,
SolidCAM transforms each operation template into a single operation.
The main interface tool that enables you to insert a Machining Process into a CAM-Part is the
Machining Process Insert Manager.
Machining
Process Insert
Manager
Insertion
Machining CAM-Part
Process
Operation
Operations
Templates
626
8.8 Inserting the Machining Process
Before inserting the Machining Process into your CAM-Part, do the following:
1. Load the CAM-Part in which you want to use the technology defined in the
Machining Process.
2. Load the Machining Process Table.
All Machining Processes from the current Machining

Process Table can be inserted into the CAM-Part
directly using the Add Machining Process menu.
The Machining Processes in the

menu are classified according to pre-
defined groups (see topic 8.4).
If the MP contains operation
templates with operation options
incompatible with the operation
options of the current MAC file,
the operation is marked with the
exclamation mark. Such MP can be
inserted into the current CAM-Part,
but operation options will not be
inserted.
When the MP contains a Drilling

operation template with drill options
incompatible with the drill options
of current MAC file, this MP is
marked with the ! icon.
The Add Machining Process command is not available in the following cases:
• When there is no current Machining Process Table;
• When the current Machining Process Table is incompatible with the MAC
file used in the current CAM-Part.
627
When the Machining process is chosen,
the Machining Process Insert Manager is
displayed.
The From MP Table command enables you to
choose the Machining Process to insert from
the Machining Process Table Manager dialog
box.
The Machining Process Table Manager is displayed.

Choose a Machining Process from the list. Click on the
Pick button. The Machining Process Insert Manager is
displayed.
While the Insert Manager is loading, SolidCAM receives
necessary information from the CAM-Part. Then
SolidCAM receives expressions for other parameters
from the current Default Set and calculates them.
To prepare the Machining Process for insertion, do the
following:
1. On the Default Sets page, choose the required Default Set.

2. With the Parameters Table, fill all the blank expression fields. You can also
change all expressions that do not have Read-Only status.
3. When the Machining Process is defined, click on the Insert button to insert
the Machining Process into the current CAM-Part.
4. SolidCAM chooses tools for the Machining Process.
628
5. The operations are inserted into the CAM-Part.
• To undo the last insertion, use the Undo button.
• The Simulate button enables you to simulate operations of the

current CAM-Part.
8.8.1 Choosing the tool
SolidCAM automatically performs the tool search during the machining process insertion. The tool
search is performed according to the Used in Current or Part Table/Used in MP property of the tool
used in the operation template.
When the Used in Current or Part Table option is used for the tool definition, the tool search is
performed according to the tool number only. The tool search is first performed in the Part Tool
Table. If the tool is found, it is used. If the tool with the defined number is not found in the Part
Tool Table, SolidCAM performs an additional search in the Current Tool Table. If the tool with the
defined tool number is found in the Current Tool Table, it is copied into the Part Tool Table (with
the same number) and used.
When the Used in MP option is used for the tool definition, the tool search is performed according
to the tool parameters. The tool parameters used for the tool search are defined in the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box (see topic 12.22). The tool search is first performed in the Part Tool Table. If
the tool is found, it is used. If the tool is not found in the Part Tool Table, SolidCAM performs an
additional search in the Current Tool Table. If the tool is found in the Current Tool Table, it is copied
into the Part Tool Table and used. If the tool is not found in the Current Tool Table, a new tool with
the defined parameters is created in the Part Tool Table. SolidCAM automatically chooses the first
available tool number for the newly created tool.
629
8.9 Machining Process Insert Manager
8.9.1 Operation Templates Page
This page displays the list of operation templates that were inserted
into the CAM-Part.
• By clicking on the (+) sign near each operation template, you

can see the list of parameters used in the selected operation
template.
630
• To see the operation template parameters and settings, right-click on the operation
template name in the list and choose the Show command from the list. The operation
template dialog box will be displayed.
In this dialog box you cannot edit the operation template definition. To edit
the operation template, go to the Machining Process Define Manager (see
topic 8.6).
In the operation template dialog box, all parametric fields are marked with
the button. Click on this button to see the parametric field menu. The
Edit-View option is available in this menu. This option opens the parameter
edit dialog box.
This dialog box enables you to see and edit the full parameter name or
expression string.
8.9.2 Default Sets Page
Double-click on the Default Set name to make it current. The

Parameters and values from the selected Default set will be shown in
the Parameters Table.
631
8.9.3 Parameters Table
There are three columns in this table:
• Parameter – shows the parameter

name.
• Expression – shows the parameter
definition. In this field you have
to define missed expressions for
parameters. You can also edit all
expressions that do not have the
Read-Only status.
• Result value – shows the result value

returned by the parameter.
With the Show read only check box, you can allow or forbid showing parameters
marked Read-Only.
The Show descriptions check box enables you to show the parameter
description instead of the parameter name in the Parameter column.
8.9.4 Operation Points

This field contains buttons to define specific points of the operation.
8.9.5 Parameters definition
Click on the button to display menus for each parametric field.
Parametric field menu for Geometries

• Geom Select
This option displays a list of geometries of a suitable type

that is defined in the CAM-Part.
Choose the variable name from the list.
You can also open this list with the F5 hotkey when
you are in the parametric field.
632
• Geom Define
This option enables you to define a geometry from the current model.
You can also open this list with the F6 hotkey when you are in the parametric
field.
• Geom Show
The current 3D model, drill or chain geometry will be

displayed in the SolidWorks window.
To exit from this mode, use the button in the Show

Geometry dialog box.
You can also open this list with the F7 hotkey when you are in the parametric
field.
• Edit-View
This option displays the parameter edit dialog box.
This dialog box enables you to see and edit the full parameter name or expression
string.
1. You can also open this list with the F2 hotkey when you are in the
parametric field.
2. In this dialog box, you can also use the operational menu by clicking on
the button.
633
Parameters of Z-value and Distance types
For parameters of these types, SolidCAM enables you to define values by picking them from the
active CAD model.
• To define the Z-value, choose the Pick Z-value (F5) item from the parametric menu.
The Pick Z-Value dialog box will be displayed. Pick the point on
the model and click on the OK button to confirm the selection.
• To define the Distance, choose the Pick Distance (F5) item from the parametric menu.
1. In the SolidWorks window, pick the first point.
2. Confirm the selection with the OK button in the

Distance: Pick first point dialog box.
3. Pick the second point and confirm it in the same

way.
The Distance value will be calculated.
Other Parameters
For parameters of other types, the parametric field menu contains only one item: Edit-View (F2).
Choose it to edit the parameter definition in the Edit window.
634
Automatic Feature Recognition
and Machining (AFRM) 9
The SolidCAM Automatic Holes Feature Recognition and Machining
(AFRM) module enables you to automatically recognize holes in the
Solid model and generate the tool path for machining.
 Hole Feature recognition

 Preparing to machining
 Feature Sets definition
 Technology
 Technology Database
9.1 Introduction and Basic Concepts
The SolidCAM Automatic Holes Feature Recognition and Machining (AFRM) module enables you to
automatically recognize holes in the Solid model and generate the tool path for machining.
At the first stage of the AFRM process, Solid model
SolidCAM recognizes all Hole Features (see
topic 9.5) from the solid model and classifies
them. SolidCAM analyzes the manufacturability
of the recognized features and converts the
Hole Features into Machinable Hole Features
SolidCAM Automatic
(see topic 9.6.4) by making the necessary Feature Recognition
changes of the Hole Feature components. and Machining
SolidCAM distributes Machinable Hole
Features to Feature Sets (see topic 9.7) related Tool path
to the previously defined Coordinate Systems
(see topic 9.7.3). For each Feature Set,
SolidCAM searches for a suitable technology
in the Technology Database (TDB) (see topic
9.10) and for tools in the Part Tool Table (see
topic 3.6). The appropriate technology will be
converted to SolidCAM Operations.
Solid model
Holes Recognition
Hole Features
Conversion to
Machinable Features
Machinable Hole
Features
Coordinate Systems Distribution to
Feature Sets
Technology
Database Feature Sets
Feature-based
machining
Part Tool
Table
Operations
CAM-Part
636
9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining
All the holes recognized by SolidCAM can be classified as Simple Hole Features or Compound Hole
Features.
A Simple Hole Feature is a cut in the solid body generated by the figure of revolution. The diameter
of a Simple Hole can be constant or changing. A Simple Hole can be Blind or Through.
Blind Simple Hole Feature Through Simple Hole Feature
A Compound Hole Feature is also generated by the cut of the figure of

revolution. The diameter of the Compound Hole Feature is constant
or decreasing at the start of the hole and increasing at the end of the
hole. The Compound Hole Feature can be only through.
SolidCAM recognizes Disconnected Hole Features containing

a number of ”broken” holes consisting of coaxial and coradial
segments divided by the model elements.
SolidCAM recognizes the holes with the undercuts.
Blind Hole Feature with undercut
Compound Hole Feature with undercut Through Hole Feature with undercut
637
9.2 Preparation to Holes Recognition
You have to prepare the CAM-Part before you start the Holes recognition. The preparation includes
the definition of Coordinate Systems and Target model.
9.2.1 Definition of Coordinate Systems
You have to define a number of Coordinate Systems (see topic 2.2) corresponding to the setup
positions of the part on the CNC-machine. The number of Coordinate Systems has to be enough
to machine the part from all directions that you need.
9.2.2 Target model
The Target model (see topic 2.4.2) has to be defined. SolidCAM uses the Target model for the
AFRM.
When the CAM-Part is defined and prepared, you can start the Holes Recognition process.
638
9.3 Start Holes Recognition
To start the holes recognition process, right-click on the Operations header in SolidCAM Manager
and choose Holes Recognition + Technology from the menu.
The Holes Recognition is started. SolidCAM parses the solid model in order to gather the
information about all holes. When the recognition process is finished, SolidCAM displays the Holes
Recognition Manager.
639
9.4 Holes Recognition User Interface
9.4.1 Holes Recognition Manager
When the AFRM module is activated, the Holes Recognition Manager is displayed. The SolidCAM
Holes Recognition Manager is shown in the SolidWorks FeatureManager area.
The SolidCAM HR Manager consists of the following pages that can be controlled with the
HR Manager Toolbar.
Hole Features page
Machinable Features page Operations page
Feature Sets page Technology page
This toolbar enables you to switch between the pages of the HR Manager.
640
• Hole Features page (see topic 9.5.11) displays all the

Hole Features page Hole Features recognized in the solid model.
• Machinable Hole Features page (see topic 9.6.6)

Machinable Hole
displays all Machinable Hole Features converted from
Features page
the Hole Features.
• Feature Sets page (see topic 9.7.4) displays all the

Feature Sets page Feature Sets.
• Technology page (see topic 9.8.3) displays all the

Technology page Technological solutions offered by SolidCAM for the
machining of the current Feature Set.
Operations page • Operations page (see topic 9.9) displays operations

generated by SolidCAM.
9.4.2 Holes Recognition Toolbar
When the AFRM is started, the Holes Recognition toolbar is displayed.
Technology Database Show Tool Table

Settings Show Errors
Show Picture Show Data
• Technology Database
This button enables you to display the Technology Database Manager (see topic 9.10).
• Settings
This button enables you to display the Holes Recognition Settings dialog box (see
topic 9.11).
641
• Show Picture
This button enables you to display the schematic picture of the selected item.
• Show Data
This button enables you to display the Parameters dialog box that displays the
parameters of the selected item.
• Show Errors
This button enables you to display the Errors dialog box that shows the errors that
occurred during the AFRM process.
• Show Tool Table
This button enables you to display the Part Tool Table.
642
9.5 Hole Feature Model
SolidCAM analyzes the Solid model in order to recognize all the Hole features. A Hole Feature
recognized by SolidCAM consists of a number of Hole Feature segments. Each Hole Feature
Segment is composed of one or more faces. The Type of Hole Segment depends on the Face
Surface Type.
Hole Feature segment composed from several Hole Feature segment composed from one
faces face
Types of Hole Segments:

• Cylindrical
• Cone
• Chamfer
• Planar
• Torus
• Sphere
SolidCAM recognizes holes with thread created by SolidWorks Hole Wizard. The thread is an
optional property of the Cylindrical Hole Feature segment.
SolidCAM determines the total Depth, Z Direction

Hole Upper Plane and Direction of each Hole Upper Plane
Hole Feature.
Solid Model
Origin
SolidCAM determines the geometry
parameters of each Hole Feature segment.
The Upper plane of the Hole Feature is

Depth
the upper Z-level of the hole determined
in compliance with the SolidWorks Part
origin.
643
9.5.1 Cylindrical Hole Feature segment
This segment is formed by a cylindrical face.

• Diameter (D1)
Height (H1)
• Height (H1)
SolidCAM recognizes holes with thread created by Diameter (D1)

SolidWorks Hole Wizard.
The thread is an optional property of the Cylindrical Hole Feature segment. The Cylindrical
segment that has a thread is marked with a specific Thread flag.
SolidCAM determines a number of parameters of the thread hole:

• Segment diameter Hole Feature Upper level
• Segment height Thread Upper Level

=
• Thread diameter Thread Segment Upper Level
Thread Diameter
depth
• Thread depth
• Thread pitch Thread

Height Segment
• Thread Upper level Height
• Thread depth
Segment Diameter
9.5.2 Cone Hole Feature segment
This segment is formed by a cone face. Angle (A1)

Diameter (D1)
• Diameter (D1),
• Height (H1),
• Angle (A1)
Height (H1)
644
9.5.3 Chamfer Hole Feature segment
This segment is formed by a truncated conical face. Angle (A1)
• Upper diameter (D1), Upper

Diameter (D1)
Height
• Lower diameter (D2),
(H1)
• Height (H1),
• Angle (A1)
Lower
Diameter (D2)
9.5.4 Planar Hole Feature segment
This segment is formed by a planar face. A segment of this type has no parameters.
9.5.5 Torus Hole Feature segment

Upper
• Upper Diameter (D1) Diameter (D1)
Height
(H1)
• Lower Diameter (D2)
• Height (H1) Radius

(R1)
• Radius (R1)
Lower
There are two parameters describing the location of Diameter (D2)
the center of the generatrix circle:
Radius (R1)
Height of the center (HC)
Diameter of the center (DC)
• HC - Height of the center relative to the

bottom of the torus.
Torus
• DC - Diameter of the center. segments
645
9.5.6 Sphere Hole Feature segment
This segment is formed by a spherical face. The Upper Diameter (D1) Height
center of the sphere is situated on the hole axis. (H1)
• Upper Diameter (D1)

Radius
• Lower Diameter (D2) (R1)
• Height (H1)
• Radius (R1) Lower

Diameter (D2)
The Sphere segment can be either Open or
Closed. A Closed Sphere segment has zero
Lower Diameter (D2).
Open Sphere
When the Lower Diameter (D2) is greater than zero – (D2>0)
the Sphere will be Open.
Closed Sphere
(D2<0)
9.5.7 Compound Holes processing
SolidCAM splits the Compound Hole into two Simple Hole Features: one above the splitter line and
one below the splitter line. This enables you to machine the Compound Hole Feature from both
sides using two Coordinate Systems.
Splitter Splitter
646
9.5.8 Disconnected Holes processing
Sometimes solid models contain a number

of ”broken” holes consisting of coaxial and
coradial segments divided by the model elements.
Previously these segments were recognized and
machined as separate Hole Features. The AFRM
module enables you to automatically connect these
segments into one single Connected Hole Feature
(see topic 9.11.1).
9.5.9 Reaming recognition
The AFRM module enables you to automatically recognize Planar segment Upper Cylinder
holes in solid models and perform their precise machining by
reaming technology.
If during the Hole Feature recognition SolidCAM finds
a combination of Cylinder-Planar-Cylinder Hole Feature
segments, and the difference between the diameters of the
Upper Cylinder and Lower Cylinder is smaller than 0.2 mm, Lower Cylinder
SolidCAM recognizes Upper Cylinder and Planar segments as
precise hole suitable for applying the reaming technology.
The Reaming Diameter and Reaming Height parameters are determined as shown below.
Reaming Upper Level

Reaming Depth
Reaming diameter
Reaming Height
9.5.10 Hole Feature Shapes and Groups
The SolidCAM AFRM module classifies the Hole Features into Hole Feature Shapes and Hole
Feature Groups.
The Hole Features with the same type and sequence of segments will be included into one Hole
Feature Shape.
647
For each Hole Feature Shape, the Hole Features are grouped in Shape
Hole Feature Groups; each Group includes the Hole Features with
Group #1
the same values for the segment parameters.
Hole #1
Hole #2
9.5.11 Hole Features page ...
Hole #N
Group #2
Hole #1
Hole #2
...
Hole #N
...
Group #N
The Hole Features page displays the list of all Hole Features recognized
in the solid model. The Hole Features are classified into Shapes and
Groups. You can highlight the Hole Features, Groups and Shapes in
the graphic view by selecting the items in the list.
You can repeat the Holes recognition process with the Recognize
command.
SolidCAM enables you to display the Hole Picture dialog box with the
Show Picture button located on the Holes Recognition toolbar. This
dialog box shows the schematic picture of the selected Shape, Group
or Hole Feature.
SolidCAM enables you to display the Hole Feature Parameters dialog

box with the Show Data button located on the Holes Recognition
toolbar.
648
The Holes parameters page displays the global hole

parameters:
• Depth
• Upper Plane
• Direction
Other pages display the geometry and color parameters

of each Hole Feature segment. When the specific
segment page is selected in the Hole Feature Parameters
dialog box, the corresponding segment is highlighted in
the Hole Picture.
The parameters values displayed

in the Hole Feature Parameters
dialog box cannot be changed. In
order to change them, you have to
edit the solid model and perform
the Holes Recognition again.
Managing Hole Features
SolidCAM enables you to manage the Hole Features, Shapes and Groups with the right-click menu.
Shape or Group menu
The right-click menu for Shape and Group includes the following items:
• Split/Unsplit
This option enables you to split/unsplit all

Compound Holes in the selected Shape or
Group.
This option is available only if the

Shape or Group contains only
Compound Holes.
• Change direction to opposite
This option changes the direction of all Hole features in the specified Shape or
Group.
649
• Connect
This option enables you to connect appropriate broken segments into one single
Connected Hole Feature (see topic 9.11.1).
• Disconnect
This option enables you to divide a Connected Hole Feature into separate segments
(see topic 9.11.1).
• Divide/Join hole segment
This option enables you to machine cylindrical through holes with depth significantly
greater than a normal cutting length of a tool. Such holes are divided into two
halves so that they can be approached by the tool from both sides and machined
with an overlap of 10% from the entire hole depth.
Overlap
Divided holes can be joined.
Hole Feature menu
The right-click menu for Hole Features includes the following items:
• Split/Unsplit
This option enables you to split/unsplit the

selected Compound Hole.
This option is available only for

Compound Holes.
650
• Change direction to opposite
This option changes the direction of the selected Hole Feature.

• Connect
This option enables you to connect appropriate “broken” segments into one single
Connected Hole Feature (see topic 9.11.1).
• Disconnect
This option enables you to disconnect a Connected Hole Feature into separate
segments (see topic 9.11.1).
• Divide/Join hole segment
This option enables you to machine cylindrical through holes with depth significantly
greater than a normal cutting length of a tool. Such holes are divided into two
halves so that they can be approached by the tool from both sides and machined
with an overlap of 10% from the entire hole depth.
Divided holes can be joined.
• Go to Opposite
This option enables you to jump in the list to the opposite part of the Split
Compound Hole.
This option is available only for Split Compound Holes.
Hole Features filter
The filter capabilities enable you to display in the list

only those Hole Features that correspond to a certain
criterion.
• Direction filter
This filter enables you to display Hole Features

with a specified direction only.
• Upper level filter
This filter enables you to display Hole Features with a specified Upper Level only.
The Upper Level filter is active only for the specified direction.
651
• Hole type filter
This filter enables you to display Hole Features of a specified type: either Blind or
Through.
• Compound hole only
This option enables you to display only the compound holes.

• Split hole only
This option enables you to display only the split holes.

• Hole with undercut only
This option enables you to display only the Hole Features with undercut.
• Connected holes only
This option enables you to show/hide the Connected Hole Features (see topic 9.11.1).
• Divided holes only
This option enables you to display only the divided holes.
652
9.6 Preparing Hole Features for machining
There are following stages of preparing Hole Features for machining:

• Undercut processing
• Segments Union
• Creating Machinable Hole Features
9.6.1 Undercut processing
SolidCAM recognizes undercuts in the Hole Feature model.

The SolidCAM AFRM Module analyzes Hole
Feature segments in order to find an undercut. An
Undercut Diameter (DU)
undercut is detected when the diameter increases
Undercut
during one topology segment. The Undercut Height (HU)
consists of a number of segments and finishes Undercut
when the current diameter is equal to the undercut
initial diameter.
SolidCAM determines the Undercut Height (HU) as the sum of the height of all topology segments
of the undercut.
SolidCAM classifies undercuts depending on the last Hole Feature segment included in undercut.
The classification is as follows:
• Undercut – None
In this case the finish diameter of the last segment of

the undercut is equal to the Undercut diameter.
• Undercut – Planar
In this case Undercut finishes with the Planar Hole

Feature segment (see topic 9.5.4).
• Undercut – Cone
In this case Undercut finishes with the Cone Hole

653
• Undercut – Chamfer
In this case Undercut finishes with the Chamfer Hole

• Undercut – Torus
In this case Undercut finishes with the Torus Hole

Feature segment (seetopic 9.5.5).
• Undercut – Sphere
In this case Undercut finishes with the Sphere Hole

9.6.2 Undercut substitution
SolidCAM handles undercuts by substituting the undercut with a cylindrical segment depending
on the undercut type. The cylinder diameter is equal to the Undercut diameter (DU). When a part of
the lower undercut segment is smaller than the Undercut diameter, SolidCAM substitutes this part
with a cone, chamfer, torus or sphere segment.
Undercut substitution schemes:

DU Diameter (D1)
• Undercut – None segment substitution
HU Height (H1)
D1=DU
H1=HU
DU Diameter (D1)
• Undercut – Planar segment substitution
HU Height (H1)
D1=DU
H1=HU
654
• Undercut – Cone segment substitution

DU Diameter (D1)
Height (H1)
HU
Height (H2)
Angle (A1) Angle (A1)
D1=DU
H1=HU-H2
H2=DU/(2*tg(A1/2))
• Undercut – Chamfer segment substitution

DU Diameter (D1)
HU Height (H1)
Height (H2)
Lower
Diameter (D2) Lower Diameter (D2)
Angle (A1) Angle (A1)
D1=DU
H1=HU-H2
H2=(DU-D2)/(2*tg(A1/2))
655
• Undercut – Torus segment substitution
DU Diameter (D1)
Height (H1)
HU
HT
Lower
Lower Diameter (D2) Diameter (D2) Height (H2)
R R
D1=DU
DT UPPER H1=HU-H2
DU H= R2-((DU-DCENTER)/2)2
DCENTER H2=HC-H
H
R
R
HC
H2
R
• Undercut – Sphere segment substitution.

DU Diameter (D1)
Height (H1)
HU
HS
Height (H2)
R D1=DU R
H1=HU-H2
H2= R- R2-D2/4
656
9.6.3 Segments Union
SolidCAM enables you to unite identical adjacent Hole Feature segments.
There are the following cases for union:

• Planar + Planar
Planar 1 United Planar
Planar 2
• Cylinder + Cylinder
The diameter of the resulting cylinder will be the same as the diameter of the original
cylinders. The Height will be the sum of the original cylinder heights.
Cylinder 1 United Cylinder
Cylinder 2
• Chamfer + Cone
The Diameter of the resulting cone will be the same as the Diameter of the original
upper chamfer. The Angle of the resulting segment is equal to the Angle of the original
cones. The Height will be the sum of the original cone heights.
Chamfer United Cone
Cone
657
• Chamfer + Chamfer
Chamfer 1 United Chamfer
Chamfer 2
The Upper Diameter of the resulting chamfer segment will be the same as the Upper
Diameter of the original upper chamfer. The Angle of the resulting segment is equal
to the Angle of the original chamfers. The Lower Diameter of the resulting chamfer
segment will be the same as the Lower Diameter of the original lower chamfer. The
Height will be the sum of the original chamfer heights.
• Torus + Torus
Torus 1 United Torus
Torus 2
The Upper Diameter of the resulting torus segment will be the same as the Upper
Diameter of the original upper torus. The Radius of the resulting segment is equal to
the Radius of the original torus. The Lower Diameter of the resulting torus segment
will be the same as the Lower Diameter of the original lower torus. The Height will be
the sum of the original torus heights.
• Sphere + Sphere
Sphere 1 United Sphere
Sphere 2
The Upper Diameter of the resulting sphere segment will be the same as the Upper
Diameter of the original upper sphere. The Radius of the resulting segment is equal
to the Radius of the original spheres. The Lower Diameter of the resulting sphere
segment will be the same as the Lower Diameter of the original lower sphere. The
Height will be the sum of the original sphere heights.
658
9.6.4 Machinable Hole Features
SolidCAM converts Hole Features into the Machinable Hole Features in order to prepare them
for machining. The Machinable Hole Feature consists of one or more Machinable Hole Feature
segments that can be machined in one operation with the same tool.
Types of Machinable Hole Feature segments
The following types of the Machinable Hole Feature segments exist:
• Drill
• Chamfer
• Flat Cylinder
• Flat Chamfer
• Thread
• Reaming
Parameters of Machinable Hole Feature segments
SolidCAM calculates the values of various parameters for the Machinable Hole Feature segments.
These parameters are called HR variables. They will be used later for the technology definition.
659
Each Machinable Hole Feature segment has the following geometric and visual parameters:
• hr_segm_upper_plane
This parameter is the distance from the Solid Model Origin to the upper level of the
Machinable Hole Feature segment (Segment Upper plane).
• hr_segm_depth
This parameter is the distance from the Hole Upper Plane to the lower point of the
Machinable Hole Feature segment.
• hr_segm_height
This parameter is the Height of the segment; the distance from the Segment Upper
plane to the lower point of the Machinable Hole Feature segment.
Origin
hr_segm_upper_plane
Hole Upper Plane
Segment Upper Plane

hr_segm_depth
hr_segm_height
• hr_segm_color
This parameter defines the variable that can participate in the conditions defined in the
Technology Database in order to choose the necessary technological solution. During
the conversion of Hole Feature segments into Machinable Hole Feature segments, the
RGB color of holes is converted into a number of the Float type and assigned to this
variable.
In addition to the general parameters, SolidCAM determines the following parameters for each type
of Machinable Hole Feature segment:
660
Drill
hr_segm_diameter • hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_height
• hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_height
hr_segm_angle
Chamfer
hr_segm_angle • hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_lower_diameter
hr_segm_height
hr_segm_lower_diameter
661
Flat Cylinder
hr_segm_diameter • hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_blind
• hr_prev_segm_diameter
hr_segm_height
hr_segm_blind = true
hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_height
hr_prev_segm_diameter
hr_segm_blind = false
662
Flat Chamfer
hr_segm_angle • hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_height
• hr_segm_lower_diameter
hr_segm_height
• hr_segm_blind
• hr_prev_segm_diameter
hr_segm_blind = true
hr_segm_diameter
hr_prev_segm_diameter
hr_segm_blind = false
Thread
• Thread Upper level

hr_segm_upper_plane (hr_segm_ upper_plane)
• Thread Diameter (hr_segm

hr_segm_diameter
diameter)
hr_segm_depth • Thread Height (hr_segm_

height)
hr_segm_height
• Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth)
• Pitch (hr_thread_pitch)
663
Reaming
hr_segm_upper_plane • Reaming Upper level

(hr_segm_ upper_plane)
hr_segm_diameter • Reaming Diameter
(hr_segm diameter)
hr_segm_depth
• Reaming Height
hr_segm_height (hr_segm_height)
• Reaming Depth
(hr_segm_depth)
For the Machinable Hole Feature segments containing cylinder (Drill and Flat Cylinder), the Hole
Upper Plane is coincident with the Segment Upper Plane. Therefore, the hr_segm_height is
equal to the hr_segm_depth.
Origin
hr_segm_upper_plane
Segment Upper Plane = Hole Upper Plane
hr_segm_height = hr_segm_depth
664
9.6.5 Machinable Hole Feature conversion
SolidCAM converts Hole Feature segments into Machinable Hole Features according to the
following rules:
General Conversion Rules
1. All possible combinations with Upper segment – Cylinder are converted into
the one Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment.
Exception: When a pair consists of Cylinder and Planar segments

are converted into Flat Cylinder segment.
Upper + Lower Hole Feature Machinable Hole Feature segment

Segments
Cylinder + None Drill
 Cylinder + Chamfer Drill
Cylinder + Cone Drill
665
Cylinder + Torus (open Sphere) Drill
Cylinder + Sphere Drill
2. Cone and Closed Sphere segments are converted into a Drill Machinable
Hole Feature segment.
Hole Feature segment Machinable Hole Feature segment
Cone Drill
Closed Sphere Drill
666
3. All possible combinations with Lower segment – Planar are converted into
one Machinable Hole Feature segment.
Upper + Lower Hole Feature Machinable Hole Feature
Segments segment
Cylinder + Planar Flat Cylinder
Chamfer + Planar Flat Chamfer
Torus/Open Sphere + Planar  Flat Chamfer
4. Single segments like Torus, Chamfer and Open Sphere are converted into
Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segments.
Hole Feature segment Machinable Hole Feature
segment
Chamfer Chamfer
Torus Chamfer
Open Sphere Chamfer
667
Conversion to Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment
SolidCAM determines the following dimensions of the upper and lower Hole Feature segments
of the pair. In the scheme below, the segments are represented as two cylinders surrounding the
segments.
Hole Upper Plane
Upper Plane
D
Depth Upper
Segment HU
Lower
Segment HL
The scheme of the Drill segment generation is the following:
• The vertex of the cone is located on the same depth (hr_segm_height) as the lower
point of the lower segment of the initial Hole Feature.
• The diameter of the Cylinder (hr_segm_diameter) is the same as the diameter of the
Hole Feature Segment.
• The resulting Machinable Hole Feature segment is extended upward till the Hole Upper
Plane.
• The Cone angle (hr_segm_angle) is Hole Upper Plane
118°.
In some cases, according to hr_segm_height

the General conversion rules
described earlier, the upper
segment is absent. In this
case the upper segment will
be None and the segment
Height will be 0. hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_angle
668
Exception: In case of translation of a through Cylindrical Hole

Feature segment into a Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment, the
hr_segm_height parameter of the Drill will be the following:
Hole Upper Plane
H hr_segm_height
hr_segm_angle
D hr_segm_diameter
Conversion to Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment
SolidCAM determines the following dimensions of the Hole Upper Plane

upper and lower Hole Feature segments of the pair. In
the scheme below, the segments are represented as two
cylinders surrounding the segments. Upper Plane
D
If the lower Hole feature segment

is Planar, the HL is 0. Depth Upper
Segment H
U
The scheme of Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature H
generation is the following: Lower

Segment HL
• The planar face is located on the same depth
(hr_segm_diameter) as the lower point of
the lower segment of the initial Hole Feature.
Hole Upper Plane
• The diameter of the Cylinder (hr_segm_height) is the
same as the diameter of the Hole Feature Segment.
• The resulting segment is extended upward till the Hole hr_segm_height

Upper Plane.
hr_segm_diameter
669
Conversion to Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment
According to the General conversion rules explained earlier, the Hole Upper Plane
scheme of input data for the conversion will be the following.

Upper Plane
The major parameters of the converted Chamfer Machinable Hole Depth DU
Feature segment will be the same as in the original Hole Feature
segment: Lower
Segment H
• The Upper diameter (hr_segm_diameter) of the

D
Chamfer segment will be equal to the Upper diameter L
of the initial Hole Feature segment.
• The Lower diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) of the Chamfer segment will be

equal to the Lower diameter of the initial Hole Feature segment.
• The Height (hr_segm_height) of the Chamfer segment will be equal to the Height of
the initial Hole Feature segment.
• The converted Chamfer segment is situated at the same depth as the original Hole
Feature segment.
• The Chamfer Angle (hr_segm_angle) will be calculated automatically.

Hole Upper Plane
hr_segm_upper_plane
hr_segm_depth hr_segm_diameter
Lower
Segment hr_segm_height
Conversion to Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment
According to the General conversion rules explained earlier, the Hole Upper Plane
scheme of the input data for the conversion will be the following.
Upper Plane
Depth DU
Lower
Segment H
DL
670
The major parameters of the converted Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment will be the
same as in the original Hole Feature segment:
Hole Upper Plane
hr_segm_upper_plane
hr_segm_depth hr_segm_diameter
Lower
Segment hr_segm_height
• The Upper diameter (hr_segm_diameter) of the Chamfer segment will be equal to

the Upper diameter of the initial Hole Feature segment.
• The Lower diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) of the Chamfer segment will be

equal to the Lower diameter of the initial Hole Feature segment.
• The Height (hr_segm_height) of the Chamfer segment will be equal to the Height of
the initial Hole Feature segment.
• The converted Chamfer segment is situated at the same depth as the original Hole
Feature segment.
• The Chamfer Angle (hr_segm_angle) will be calculated automatically.
Conversion to Thread Machinable Hole Feature segment
At the first stage, SolidCAM converts the Cylindrical Hole Feature segment into Drill/Flat Cylinder
segment according to SolidCAM conversion rules. After that, the separate Thread MHF segment
is created with the following parameters:
• hr_segm_diameter = Thread Diameter
• hr_segm_height = Thread Height
• hr_thread_pitch = Thread Pitch
• hr_segm_upper_plane = Thread Upper level
• hr_segm_depth = Thread Depth
671
Thread Upper level hr_segm_upper_plane
hr_segm_diameter
Thread Depth hr_segm_depth
Thread Height hr_segm_height
Thread Diameter
Conversion to Reaming Machinable Hole Feature segment

During conversion process, SolidCAM creates Reaming segments from suitable combinations of
Cylinder and Planar Hole Feature segments (see topic 9.5.9). A Reaming segment is created with
the following parameters:
• hr_segm_diameter = Reaming Diameter
• hr_segm_height = Reaming Height
• hr_segm_upper_plane = Reaming Upper level
• hr_segm_depth = Reaming Depth
• hr_prev_segm_diameter = Drill diameter

Reaming Upper level hr_segm_upper_plane
hr_segm_diameter
Reaming Depth hr_segm_depth
Reaming Height hr_segm_height
Drill Diameter
Reaming Diameter
672
9.6.6 Machinable Hole Features page
The Machinable Hole Features page is divided into two parts. The upper
part displays the list of Machinable Hole Features, classified into Shapes
and Groups. When an item is selected in the Machinable Hole Features
list, the lower part of the page displays the segments of the selected item.
When the Hole Features were changed, SolidCAM enables you to rebuild
the Machinable Features. The Rebuild operation is available either for all
Machinable Hole Features or for the selected Machinable Hole Feature
(Shape, Group).
SolidCAM enables you to display the Hole Picture dialog box with the
Show Picture button located on the Holes Recognition toolbar. This
dialog box schematically shows the segments of the selected Machinable
Hole feature.
Managing Machinable Hole Feature Segments
The lower part of the Machinable Hole Features page displays the list of
the segments for the selected Machinable Hole Feature. The Machinable
Hole Feature segments are situated in the list with specific order from the
lower segment to upper. The Thread MHF Segment is the last segment.
SolidCAM enables you to manage the Machinable Features segments with
the right-click menu.
The following operations are available:

• Change type
The Change type option enables you to change the type of

the Machinable Feature Segment. The M-Feature segment
type dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box enables you
to change the type of the Machinable Hole Feature segment.
673
• Reset
SolidCAM enables you to change the dimensions of the Machinable Hole Feature
segment. The Reset option enables you to reset the selected changed Machinable Hole
Feature segment to its initial dimensions calculated by SolidCAM.
• Insert Before/Insert After
This option enables you to insert a new Machinable Hole Feature segment before or
after the selected segment. The M-Feature segment type dialog box will be displayed in
order to choose the type of the segment.
• Insert Thread
This command adds a user-defined Thread segment. This command is available only
for Drill and Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segments.
• Insert Reaming
This command adds a user-defined Reaming segment. This command is available only
for Drill and Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segments.
• Delete
This option enables you to delete a selected Machinable Hole Feature segment.
Only the segments added by the user can be deleted. The segments
automatically built by SolidCAM cannot be deleted, except for the Thread
segment.
Modifying Machinable Hole Feature segments
SolidCAM enables you to display the Machinable Hole Feature Parameters dialog box using the
Show Data button located on the Holes Recognition toolbar.
This dialog box displays the parameters of the selected

Machinable Hole feature or the selected Machinable Hole
Feature segment.
The Holes parameters page is displayed when the

Machinable Hole Feature is selected. This page displays
the following parameters of the Machinable Hole feature:
674
• Depth Origin X
• Upper Plane
CoordSys
• Origin X /Origin Y
Upper Plane
• Direction
Origin Y
CoordSys
Depth
The Depth, Upper Plane, Origin X/Y and Direction parameters cannot be
changed.
When a segment is selected, the Machinable Hole Feature Parameters dialog box displays the
specific parameters of the selected segment.
SolidCAM enables you to assign a new value (User value) to parameters of the Machinable Hole
Feature segments.
When the new value is assigned to the parameter, SolidCAM modifies the segment according to the
specific rules.
Modifying Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_height
hr_segm_angle
675
Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)
When the Diameter changes, the Height (hr_segm_height)

and Angle (hr_segm_angle) remain unchanged. The height
of the conical and cylindrical faces will be changed. The Cone
corner will be fixed.
Changing Angle (hr_segm_angle)
When the Angle changes, the Height (hr_segm_height) and

Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) remains unchanged. The height of
the conical and cylindrical faces will be changed. The Cone corner will
be fixed.
Changing Height (hr_segm_height)
When the Height changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

remains unchanged. The Height of the Conical face will be the same;
the height of the cylindrical face will be changed. So, the Height will be
changed. The Upper plane will be fixed.
Changing Upper Plane
When the Upper Plane changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

will remain unchanged. The Height of the Conical face will be the
same; the height of the cylindrical face will be changed. So, the Height
(hr_segm_height) will be changed. The Cone corner will be fixed.
676
Modifying Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_height
Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)  

will remain unchanged. The Upper plane will be fixed.
Changing Height (hr_segm_height)  
When the Height changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) will

remain unchanged. The Upper plane will be fixed.
Changing Upper Plane  
When the Upper plane changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

will remain unchanged. The lower edge of the cylinder will be fixed.
The Height (hr_segm_height) will be changed.
677
Modifying Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment
hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_height
Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) or

Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter)
When the Diameter or Lower Diameter changes; the

Angle (hr_segm_angle) parameter will remain
unchanged. It means that the second diameter will
also be changed. The Height (hr_segm_height) and
Upper plane will be the same.
Changing Angle (hr_segm_angle)
Changing the Angle causes the Diameter

(hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Lower
Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) will be
fixed. The Height and Upper Plane will stay the same.
Changing the Height (hr_segm_height) causes

the Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter)
to change. The Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)
will be fixed. The Upper Plane and Angle
(hr_segm_angle) will be unchanged.
Changing the Upper Plane causes the Diameter

(hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Angle
(hr_segm_angle) will be unchanged. The Lower
fixed. So, Height (hr_segm_height) will be changed.
678
Modifying Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_height
Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) or

Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter)  
When the Diameter or Lower Diameter changes; the

Angle (hr_segm_angle) parameter will remain
unchanged. It means that the second diameter will
also be changed. The Height (hr_segm_height)
and Upper plane will be the same.
Changing Angle (hr_segm_angle)  
Changing the Angle causes the Diameter

(hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Lower
fixed. The Height and Upper Plane will stay the same.
Changing the Height (hr_segm_height) causes the

Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) to
change. The Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) will be
fixed. The Upper Plane and Angle (hr_segm_angle)
will be unchanged.

Changing the Upper Plane causes the Diameter
(hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Angle
(hr_segm_angle) will be unchanged. The Lower
Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) will be fixed.
So, Height (hr_segm_height) will be changed.
679
Modifying Thread Machinable Hole Feature segment
hr_segm_upper_plane
hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_depth
hr_segm_height

remains unchanged.
Changing Thread Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level)
Changing the Thread Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level)

causes the Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The
Thread Height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.
Changing Thread Height (hr_segm_height)
Changing the Thread Height (hr_segm_height) causes the

Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Thread Upper
level (hr_segm_upper_level) is unchanged.
Changing Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth)
Changing the Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth) causes the Thread

Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level) to change. The Thread
height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.
680
Modifying Reaming Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_upper_plane
hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_depth
hr_segm_height
Changing Reaming Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level)
Changing the Reaming Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level) causes

the Reaming Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Reaming
Height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.
Changing Reaming Height (hr_segm_height)
Changing the Reaming Height (hr_segm_height) causes the

Reaming Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Reaming Upper
level (hr_segm_upper_level) is unchanged.
Changing Reaming Height (hr_segm_height)
Changing the Reaming Depth (hr_segm_depth) causes the Reaming

Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level) to change. The Reaming
height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.
The Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) parameter can be changed

without any limitations.
The Drill diameter (hr_prev_segm_diameter) parameter cannot
be changed for the Reaming segment; to change the value you have to
edit the Drill/Flat Cylinder segment on which the Reaming is performed.
681
9.7 Feature Sets
Feature Set is a number of Machinable Hole Features that will be machined Feature Set
within the same setup using one Coordinate System. Once used in a Feature
Set, the CoordSys cannot be used in another Feature Set.
CoordSys
9.7.1 Creating Feature Sets
SolidCAM automatically creates a number of Feature Sets CAM-Part

according to the Coordinate Systems defined in the current
CAM-Part. Feature Set
CoordSys #1
Feature Set
CoordSys #2
Feature Set
CoordSys #3
...
Feature Set
CoordSys #N
9.7.2 Assigning Hole Features to Feature Sets
SolidCAM automatically distributes Hole Features to the Feature Sets.

Recognized
Holes Bank
Holes
Recognized Holes Recognized Holes Recognized Holes
Incompatible Incompatible Incompatible
Holes Holes Holes
Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility
Checker Checker Checker
Axis Axis Axis
type Compatible Holes type Compatible Holes type Compatible Holes
Feature Set #1 Feature Set #2 Feature Set #N
Machine CoordSys #1 Machine CoordSys #2 Machine CoordSys #N
CAM-Part
682
SolidCAM checks the compatibility of the Machinable Hole Features with the Feature Sets and
assigns Holes to the Feature Sets. The compatibility checker examines each Machinable Hole Feature
according to the CoordSys (owned by the specific Feature Set) and the Axis type of the Feature Set.
Axis type enables you to limit the number of the axes used for the machining of the Machinable
Hole Features in Feature Set; the Axis number can be the same or smaller than Axis number of the
CAM-Part. The Machinable Hole Features included in the Feature Set will be machined according
to this Axis number, not considering the Axis number of the CAM-Part.
Each Machinable Hole Feature can be assigned to a specific Feature Set if one of the following
conditions is kept:
• The direction of the Machinable Hole Feature is parallel to the Z-axis of the Coordinate
System;
• It is possible to define a CoordSys position (according to the Axis Type) under the
Machine Coordinate System with the Z-axis parallel to the direction of the Machinable
Hole Feature.
The order of the assignment depends on the Machine CoordSys Number; the Feature Set with the
smaller Machine CoordSys number will be filled with Machinable Hole Features first. Thus, if the
Machinable Hole Feature is compatible to a number of Feature Sets, the Machinable Hole Feature
will be assigned to the Feature Set using the Machine CoordSys with the lowest number.
The Machinable Hole Features that were not assigned are stored in the bank of the Recognized
Hole Features.
9.7.3 Automatic CoordSys Positions definition

SolidCAM automatically defines CoordSys Positions related to the Machine CoordSys suitable
to machine Machinable Hole Features of a specific Feature Set. The CoordSys Position is created
according to the following data:
• The Machine CoordSys used in the Feature Set;

• The Axis type of the Feature Set;
• The Direction of the Machinable Hole Feature.
Feature Set Hole Feature
Axis type Machine CoordSys Direction
CoordSys Position
683
The Z-axis of the defined CoordSys Position is coincident with the Machinable Hole Feature
direction. The direction of the X- and Y-axis is defined according to the Machine CoordSys and
Axis Type.
When the Machinable Hole Feature is accepted by the Compatibility Checker, SolidCAM compares
the direction of the Machinable Hole Feature with the Z-axis of the existing CoordSys Positions
related to the Machine CoordSys of the Feature Set. If the direction and Z-axis of the CoordSys
Position are parallel, the Hole Feature will be assigned to the CoordSys Position. If a suitable
position is not found, SolidCAM defines a new one.
SolidCAM enables you to automatically locate the origin of the created CoordSys position in
dependence of the Hole Recognition Settings. The origin of the CoordSys position can be placed
in the following locations:
• The CoordSys position is placed in the position of Machine CoordSys #1.
• The CoordSys position can be placed in the corner of the model box.
SolidCAM calculates the box surrounding the model Z

Y
(model box) in the coordinate system of the first
Machine CoordSys.
X
The CoordSys Position will be located in the corner
of the model box with the following coordinates
(XMIN, YMIN, ZMAX).
684
9.7.4 Feature Sets page
The Feature Sets page enables you to define and edit Feature Sets of the
current CAM-Part and also to assign Hole Features to the Feature Sets.
The Feature Sets page is divided into three areas.
Feature Sets area
Compatible Holes area
Incompatible Holes area
The upper area displays the tree of the Feature Sets with their Hole Features.
The middle area displays Compatible Hole Features – the Holes that can be assigned to the current
Feature Set.
The lower area displays Incompatible Hole Features – the Holes that cannot be assigned to the
current Feature Set.
9.7.5 Compatible/Incompatible Hole features
All the holes that are not distributed to the Feature Sets
Holes Bank
are located in the Holes Bank. In the Holes Bank holes
are divided into two groups, depending on the current
Feature Set.
Compatible Incompatible
Holes Holes
685
The Feature Sets Page displays both the Compatible and Incompatible Hole Features for the
Current Feature Set.
The check box located near each item in the

Compatible Hole Features tree enables you to
select the item to move to the current Feature Compatible Holes area
Set. The selected Compatible Features can
be moved to the Current Feature Set by the
Move to Current Set command available in
Incompatible Holes area
the right-click menu in the Compatible Holes
area.
9.7.6 Operating Feature Sets
SolidCAM enables you to manage your Feature sets using the right-click menu. The following
commands are available:
Set as Current
This option enables you to set a specific Feature Set as

current. All other operations will be performed with the
current Feature Set. The content of the Compatible Features
and Incompatible Features areas will be changed according
to the current Feature Set.
Add
This option enables you to add a new Feature Set.

The Add Feature Set dialog box will be displayed.
This dialog box enables you to set the Axis type of

the Feature Set and assign the Machine CoordSys
to the Feature Set. SolidCAM enables you to
define the Axis type of the Feature Set.
686
Edit
This option displays the Edit Feature Set dialog

box.
This dialog box enables you to edit the name

and Axis type of the Feature Set and change the
Machine CoordSys assigned to the Feature Set.
Remove All
This option enables you to remove all Machinable

Hole Features from the Feature Set. All the
Machinable Features will be moved to the Holes
bank.
Delete
This option enables you to delete the Feature Set. All the Machinable Features will be
moved to the Holes bank.
9.7.7 Defining the CoordSys Position origin location for the Feature Set
SolidCAM enables you to define the default location of the

CoordSys Position origin with the right-click menu on the
Machine CoordSys of the specified Feature Set.
The Place CoordSys origin at dialog box is displayed.
687
Corner of Model Box
The CoordSys position can be placed in the corner of the model box.
CoordSys #1
The CoordSys position is placed in the position of Machine CoordSys #1.
688
9.8 Technology
For the each segment of the Machinable Hole Feature, SolidCAM chooses:
• A suitable technological solution from the Machinable

Hole Feature
Technology Database (TDB) (see topic
Segment
9.10).
Part Tool Table
• A tool from the Part Tool Table (see topic
Technological
3.6) or defines a new tool.
Solution
Technology Database
Operations
9.8.1 Choosing a Technological Solution

SolidCAM stores all Technological Solutions in the Technology Database. All the Technological
solutions are classified according to the type of Machinable Hole Feature segments.
Technology Database
Drill Machinable Technological Solutions

Feature Segment
Technological Solutions
Flat Cylinder Machinable
Feature Segment
Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment
Flat Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment
Thread Machinable
Feature Segment
Reaming Machinable
Feature Segment
689
For each type of Machinable Hole Feature segment, there is a number of technological solutions
(each technological solution can belong to only one type of Machinable Hole Feature segment).
A Technological solution can be either a user-defined Machining Process or a built-in Algorithm.
Technological Solution
Technological Solutions Algorithm
• The user-defined Machining process contains Operation templates with parametric

technology data and parametric data of the tools. It can be defined and edited by the
user.
• A built-in Algorithm is hard-coded in SolidCAM; it generates a number of Machining

Processes. Parameters of the algorithm can be edited.
Technological solutions use the dimensions of the Machinable Hole Feature Segments.
SolidCAM automatically chooses the suitable Technological solutions for the machining of the
specified Machinable Hole Feature segment from the TDB. The choice of the Technological solution
is defined by the set of conditions. A Condition is a logical expression; its result can be either true
or false. When the condition is true, the current technological solution can be used to machine the
Machinable Hole Feature segment. SolidCAM checks the conditions of the technological solutions
in sequence; the first solution with a true condition will be chosen.
9.8.2 Choosing the tool
When a Technological Solution is chosen from the TDB, SolidCAM chooses the suitable Tool from
the Part Tool Table. The method of choosing the tools depends on the type of the operation where
the tool is used. SolidCAM differentiates between the following types of operations:
• Drilling Operation
• Milling Operation
• Center Drilling Operation
• Chamfer Drilling Operation
• Center-Chamfer Drilling Operation
• Thread Milling Operation
• Reaming Operation
690
Choosing the tool for the Drilling Operation
SolidCAM searches for the tool according to the pre-defined tool type, diameter and angle. These
parameters are specified in the operation template of the specific Technological Solution. SolidCAM
searches for the suitable tool in the Part Tool Table. If the search fails, SolidCAM performs an
additional search with the same criteria in the Current Tool Library. If the tool is not found,
SolidCAM defines a new tool according to the data of the operation template.
Tool Type
Tool Diameter
Tool Angle
Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?
Yes No
Does the Current Tool Library
Define a new tool
Tool
Choosing the tool for the Milling Operation
SolidCAM searches for the tool according to the

pre-defined tool type and corner radius. The search
is performed in the Part Tool Table in the diameter
range from 0 till the product of Hole diameter and
Constant. Constant is equal to 0.9. The tool with
the maximum diameter will be chosen. If the tool
Hole Diameter
was not found in the Part Tool Table, the search will
be performed again in the Current Tool Library. Tool Diameter Range
0 < Tool Diameter < Hole Diameter + Constant
691
In case of absence of a suitable tool, an error message is displayed and the tool has to be defined
manually for the milling operation.
Tool Type
Corner Radius
Tool Diameter Range

Yes No
Error
Tool
Choosing the tool for the Center Drilling Operation
SolidCAM searches for the tool in compliance

Hole Diameter
with the pre-defined tool type and angle. The
search is performed in the Part Tool Table in the
diameter range from the value of the sum of the
Hole diameter and Constant endlessly. Constant is
equal to 1. The tool with the maximum diameter
will be chosen. If the tool with such diameter was
not found, SolidCAM chooses the tool of any
diameter with a pre-defined tool type and angle. Tool Diameter Range
If the suitable tool does not exist in the Part Tool
Hole Diameter + Constant < Tool Diameter
Table, the search will be continued in the Current
Tool Library.
692
In case of absence of a suitable tool, an error message is displayed and a tool for the center drilling
operation will have to be defined manually.
Tool Type
Tool Angle
Tool Diameter Range

Yes Does the Current Tool Library No

Error
Tool
Choosing the tool for the Chamfer Drilling Operation
SolidCAM searches for the tool in Hole Diameter

compliance with the pre-defined tool
type and angle. The search is performed
in the Part Tool Table in the diameter
range from the value of sum of the Hole
diameter and Constant till the difference
between the next segment diameter and
Next Segment Diameter
Constant. The Constant is equal to 1.
If the suitable tool does not exist in Tool Diameter Range
the Part Tool Table, the search will be Hole Diameter + Next Segment Diameter -
< Tool Diameter <
continued in the Current Tool Library. + Constant - Constant
693
In case of absence of a suitable tool, SolidCAM defines a new tool with the pre-defined tool type,
angle and minimum possible diameter (Hole diameter + Constant).
Tool Type
Tool Angle
Tool Diameter Range


Define a new tool:

tool diameter = hole diameter + constant
Tool
Choosing the tool for the Center Chamfer Drilling Operation
SolidCAM searches for the tool in compliance with the pre- Hole Diameter
defined tool type and angle. The search is performed in the
Part Tool Table in the diameter range from the value of sum of
hole diameter and Constant endlessly. The Constant is equal to
1. The tool with the maximum diameter will be chosen. If the
tool with such diameter is not found, SolidCAM chooses the
tool of any diameter with a pre-defined tool type and angle. If
the suitable tool does not exist in the Part Tool Table, the search
will be continued in the Current Tool Library.
Tool Diameter Range
Hole Diameter +
< Tool Diameter
+ Constant
694
In case of absence of a suitable tool, an error message is displayed and the tool has to be defined
manually for the operation.
Tool Type
Tool Angle
Tool Diameter Range


Error
Tool
Choosing the tool for the Thread Milling Operation
SolidCAM uses operation tools of Tap type for the Thread Milling Operation.
SolidCAM searches the suitable tool for the operation according to the following criteria:
• The tool must be of Tap type.
• The Thread diameter of the tool must be equal to the Thread diameter defined in the
Technological solution (hr_segm_diameter).
• The Pitch of the tool must be equal to the Pitch defined in the Technological solution
(hr_segm_pitch).
695
These parameters are specified in the Operation template of the specific Technological Solution.
SolidCAM searches for the suitable tool in the Part Tool Table. If the search fails, SolidCAM
performs an additional search with the same criteria in the Current Tool Library. If the tool is not
found, SolidCAM defines a new tool according to the data of the Operation Template.
Tool Type
Thread Diameter
Pitch

Yes No
Define a new tool
Tool
Choosing the tool for the Reaming Operation
SolidCAM uses tools of Reamer tool type for the Reaming Operation.
SolidCAM searches the suitable tool for the operation according to the following criteria:
• The tool must be of Reamer tool type.
• The Reamer Diameter of the tool must be equal to the Reaming diameter defined in the
Technological solution (hr_segm_diameter).
696
The search is performed in the Part Tool Table and Current tool library. If a suitable tool is not
found, SolidCAM automatically defines in the Part Tool Table a new tool according to the tool
definition in the Technological Solution.
Tool Type
Reaming Diameter

Yes No
Define a new tool
Tool
9.8.3 Technology Page
The Technology page is divided into two parts.
The upper part displays the tree of all Machinable Hole Features of the Current Feature Set. The
Machinable Hole Features are structured by Technologies and Groups.
• Technology – the set of Machinable Hole Features machined by the same Technological
solutions.
• Group – the set of Machinable Hole Features within the Technology with the same
dimensions.
697
The lower part of the Technology page displays technological solution and
tools chosen for the machining of the specified Machinable Hole Feature.
Activate the Hole Picture dialog box with the Show Picture button located
in the Holes Recognition toolbar to display the schematic picture illustrating
the result of applying the Technological Solution.
SolidCAM enables you to display the Technology Hole Parameters dialog

box with the Show Data button located in the Holes Recognition toolbar.
This dialog box enables you to edit the parameters of the specified technological solution. SolidCAM
enables you to edit only parameters that were not marked as Read only in the Technology Database.
9.8.4 Managing Technology
The following operations are available in the upper part of the Technology page with the right-click
menu.
• Rebuild
This command rebuilds the technology for the selected

item. The technological solutions will be chosen again
from the Technology database.
• Find Tool
This command enables you to perform the tool search again for the selected item.
698
This command is useful in the following cases:
• When the suitable tool was not found in the Part Tool Table and was
not defined by SolidCAM.
• The Part Tool Table was updated.
Managing technological solutions
The lower part of the Technology page displays a set of technological solutions necessary for
machining of selected Machinable Hole Features.
• Change
This option enables you to change the technological

solution. The Machining process list dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box enables you to choose the
necessary solution from the list of available solutions for
the chosen type of Machinable Hole Feature segment.
• Find tool
This command enables you to automatically find a suitable tool in the Part Tool Table
for the selected technological solution.
This command is useful in the following cases:
• When the suitable tool was not found in the Part Tool Table and was
not defined by SolidCAM.
• When the Part Tool Table was updated.
SolidCAM enables you to change the tool for the technological

solution with the Change Tool option. The option is available with
the right-click menu on the Tool item.
699
The Part Tool Table dialog box is displayed so that you can select a new tool.
The Show command is available in the right-click menu on the

operations of the Technological Solution. This command displays the
operation dialog box with the parameters of the specified operation.
700
9.9 Generating Operations
When the Technology is defined, SolidCAM displays the generated

operations in the Operations page. These operations are also available
in SolidCAM Manager.
The Edit command is available for the Operations in the right-click

menu.
This command enables you to display the operation dialog box.
701
9.10 Technology Database
The SolidCAM Technology Database (TDB) stores all the Technological solutions available for the
machining of the Machinable Hole Feature segments. The Technological solutions in TDB are
classified according to types of Machinable Features Hole Feature segments. For each type of
Machinable Hole Feature segment, there is a number of connected technological solutions (each
technological solution can belong to only one type of Machinable Hole Feature segment).
Technology Database
Drill Machinable Technological Solutions

Feature Segment
Flat Cylinder Machinable
Feature Segment
Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment
Flat Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment
Thread Machinable
Feature Segment
Reaming Machinable
Feature Segment
702
9.10.1 Global and Local Technology databases
When SolidCAM is installed, the Global Technology Database is also installed in the system
folder of SolidCAM. SolidCAM enables you to customize the Global TDB by adding and editing
Technological solutions.
When SolidCAM starts the AFRM process, the Global TDB will be copied into the CAM-Part
folder. This copy is called the Local TDB. During the AFRM process, SolidCAM receives data only
from the Local TDB. The Local TDB can be modified by the user for specific tasks in the context
of the specific CAM-Part.
The Global TDB can be replaced with the Local TDB.
SolidCAM enables you to load the Global TDB with the Technology Database command from the
SolidCAM menu.
The Technology Database Manager dialog box is displayed containing the Global TDB.
The Global Technology Database is unavailable when the Holes Recognition

process is working. In this case only the Local TDB can be edited.
The Local Technology Database can be loaded only when the Holes
Recognition process is working. The Local TDB can be loaded by clicking
on the related icon from the Holes Recognition toolbar.
The Technology Database Manager dialog box is displayed containing the

Local TDB.
703
9.10.2 Technology Database interface
The Technology Database dialog box enables you to manage the Technology Database.
Current configuration
Conditions area
Variables area
Segments/Configurations pages
9.10.3 Configurations page
SolidCAM enables you to use configurations in order to create multiple variations of a technology
database suitable for different tasks. By default, two basics configurations are implemented in
SolidCAM: System Configuration and User Configuration.
The System Configuration cannot be changed. It contains the set of

technological solutions supplied by SolidCAM.
The User configuration supplied by SolidCAM is a copy of the System

configuration. All the content of the technology database can be edited
within this configuration. SolidCAM enables you to create a number
of user configurations. Technological solutions will be the same in all
User Configurations. The sequence of the Technological solutions,
conditions and expressions of user-defined variables can be different
within different User Configurations.
704
The Configurations page of the TDB Manager enables you to manage the Global and Local TDB
configurations.
The following commands are available in the right-click menu.
Set as Current
This option enables you to make the specified configuration current. All the further operation will
be performed for the Current Configuration.
Rename
This option enables you to change the name of the specified User Configuration.
The System Configuration cannot be renamed.
Copy
This option enables you to create a copy of the specified User Configuration.
The System Configuration cannot be copied.
Delete
This option enables you to remove the specified User Configuration.
The System Configuration, Current Configuration and last User

Configuration cannot be deleted.
9.10.4 Current Configuration

The Current Configuration combo box displays the name of the current
configuration and enables you to switch quickly between configurations
in TDB.
When the Configurations page is displayed, the Current Configuration

combo box is disabled; it only shows the name of the current configuration.
705
9.10.5 Segments page
The page displays all the technological solutions classified by the
Machinable Hole Feature segment type.
SolidCAM enables you to perform the following operations with the
technological solutions of the User Configuration.
Edit
This option enables you to edit the definition

of the specified technological solution. The
Machining Process Define Manager dialog
box is displayed.
Add
This option enables you to define a new

technological solution within the specified
Machinable Hole Feature segment. The
Machining Process Define Manager dialog
box is displayed (see topic 8.6).
Delete
This option enables you to remove the specified technological solution from the TDB.
Copy
This option enables you to create a copy of the specified technological solution.
Rename
This option enables you to rename the specified technological solution.
All the operations above are available only for technological solutions of the
User Configuration.
706
For the technological solutions of the System Configuration, the

following options are available:
View
This option enables you to display the

specified technological solution in Machining
Process View Manager. The displayed
Solution cannot be edited.
Copy To User Configurations
This option enables you to copy the

specified technological solution to the
User Configurations. Since all the User
Configurations use the same technological
solutions, the copied technological solution
can be used in all User Configurations.
9.10.6 Conditions
SolidCAM enables you to define the following set of conditions. If these conditions are true, the
technological solution is chosen.
A Condition is a complex logical expression; its result can be either true or false. When the condition
is true, the current technological solution can be used. SolidCAM checks the conditions of the
technological solutions in a defined sequence; the first solution with a true condition will be chosen.
A Condition consists of condition lines combined by the logical operators AND and OR. A Condition
line is a comparison of two expressions. The following comparison operators are acceptable in
condition lines:
• > (greater than);
• < (smaller than);
• = (equal);  
• <= (smaller than or equal);  
• >= (greater than or equal).
707
The expressions used in condition lines can include constants, user-defined variables and functions,
HR-variables and functions.
Parametric menu
For each Expression column, the parametric menu is available.


parameters. These parameters can be used only for
a Condition definition but cannot be used for the
Technological solution definition.

• Holes Recognition parameters
This option displays a list of existing Holes Recognition

parameters.

708
• Holes Recognition functions

functions.
• Expressions
This option displays the list of defined expressions.
SolidCAM enables you to use expressions for parameters

definition.
You can use the following symbols in expressions:

• Addition (+)
• Subtraction (-)
• Division (/)
When multiplication and division occur together in an expression, each operation is

evaluated as it occurs from left to right. When addition and subtraction occur together
in an expression, each operation is evaluated in order of appearance from left to right.
Parentheses can be used to override the order of precedence and force some parts of
an expression to be evaluated before others. Operations within parentheses are always
performed before those outside. Within parentheses, however, operator precedence is
maintained.
You can open this list with the F7 hotkey when the cursor is placed in the
parametric field.
709
• Functions
This option displays a list of existing Standard Functions.

• Edit-View
This option displays the parameter edit dialog box.
Here you can see and edit the full parameter name or expression string.
parametric field.
9.10.7 Variables
The Variables area displays the list of variables and their expressions used in the Conditions area.
710
Variables menu
The parametric menu available in the Expression

column enables you to assign a value to each
variable in the list.

parameters. These parameters can be used only for
variables definition but cannot be used for technological
solution definition.

• Holes Recognition parameters

parameters.

• Holes Recognition functions

functions.
711
• Color definition
This option enables you to assign the color value to the variable
using the Select Color dialog box.
The colored button enables you to choose the color from the Color
dialog box.
The Pick face button enables you to define the color by picking the model face. The
color of the picked face will be captured and displayed in the dialog box. The Float
value of the color and its RGB values are displayed in the corresponding edit boxes.
When the dialog box is confirmed with the OK button, the Float color value is assigned
to the variable.
parametric field.
• Functions
This option displays a list of existing standard functions.

• Edit-View
This option displays the parameter edit dialog box in which you can see and edit the
full parameter name or expression string.
You can open this list with the

F2 hotkey when the cursor is
placed in the parametric field.
712
Variables filter (Show variables used in)
The following buttons enable you to filter the variables used for the Condition definition.
• Database
This option enables you to display all the variables used in the TDB.
• Technological segment
This option enables you to display all the variables used in the technological solutions
of the current technological segment.
• Technological solution
This option enables you to display all the variables used in for the current technological
solution.
9.10.8 Defining a new technological solution

SolidCAM enables you to add a new technological solution to the User
Configurations. Choose the Add option from the right-click menu of
the Segments page in the TDB Manager.
A new technological dolution is added. Choose the Edit command in
the right-click menu. The Machining Process Define Manager dialog
box is displayed.
Machining Process Define Manager enables you to define a Machining Process as a technological
solution. SolidCAM enables you to define parametric operation templates and use CAM-Part
parameters, HR variables, expressions, standard functions for the parameters definition.
713
Tool definition
SolidCAM enables you to define tools for operation templates. The tools have to be defined
according to the tool search algorithms (see topic 9.8.2).
For drilling operations, SolidCAM enables the parametric definition of the tool. The expression for
the tool parameters have to be defined. When the technological solution is applied, expressions are
calculated and parameters used for the tool definition receive their values. The tool with defined
parameters is chosen according to the specific algorithm.
For milling and chamfering operations, SolidCAM enables the parametric definition of the tool,
but expressions for the tool parameters are unnecessary. SolidCAM chooses the tool according to
the built-in algorithm. When the tool is chosen, the parameters receive values offered by the tool
search algorithm.
9.10.9 Holes Recognition Functions
hr_clear_offset(,,,)
This function enables you to calculate the clear offset that have to be removed in
Milling operation.
This function receives the following parameters:
• Diameter
• Next_diameter
• Tool_diameter
• Overlap (%)
diameter
tool_diameter
delta/2
next_diameter
714
The logic of this function is the following:

diameter
next_diameter
tool_diameter
overlap
delta=diameter/next_diameter
No Yes
delta>tool_diameter
side_step=overlap*tool_diameter/100 clear_offset=(delta-tool_diameter)/2
No Yes
delta>side_step
clear_offset=0 clear_offset=delta-side_step
clear_offset
hr_equal_down_step(,)
This function enables you to calculate equal down steps in order to machine the
specified depth. The function receives the following values:
• wish_down_step
• hole_depth
The function returns the value of the equal down_step
down step closest to the wish_down_step

parameter.
hole_depth
715
9.11 Holes Recognition Settings
SolidCAM enables you to define the System

and Part settings of Holes Recognition using
the Holes Recognition settings dialog box.
The Holes Recognition settings dialog box

structure has two tabs:
• System settings are stored in the

registry and affect all CAM-Parts.
• Part settings are applied only to
the current CAM-Part.
9.11.1 System settings

The system settings are stored in the registry and affect all the CAM-Parts.
Topology
General
This page enables you to define the location of the Coordinate System.
Place CoordSys at:
This option enables you to set

the default location for the
CoordSys position created by
the AFRM at the stage of the
Feature Sets definition.
• Corner of Model Box
The CoordSys position

is automatically placed
at the corner of the box
surrounding the model.
• CoordSys #1
The CoordSys position is automatically placed at the position of Machine

CoordSys #1.
716
Connection
This page enables you to define parameters of the Hole Features connection.
Connection Holes
This option enables you to turn on/off

the connection of the Hole Features.
• Axis Tolerance
This parameter enables you to define

the tolerance of the concentricity
for the Hole Features that can be
connected.
• Use Max Distance between Holes
When this option is turned on, SolidCAM enables

you to specify the maximal distance between hole
features that can be connected.
If the distance between the holes exceeds the
Distance
specified value, holes will not be connected.
Thread
This page enables you to define the way how the threads
are recognized.
• By using HoleWizard information
The information from HoleWizard

to determine threads and their
parameters. When the By Cosmetic
thread check box is selected,
SolidCAM recognizes holes where
thread is created by HoleWizard as
a Cosmetic thread feature. When
the By Hole specification and
Hole shape check box is selected,
SolidCAM recognizes holes using the
information from the HoleWizard
and analyzing the hole shape.
• By Hole shape
SolidCAM analyzes the hole shape in order to recognize threads in holes.
717
Technology
General
• Add Center Drill
This option enables SolidCAM to automatically perform the center drilling. The center
drilling will be inserted before the machining of the first Machinable Hole Feature
segment that will be machined with the drilling technology.
• Calculate operations in Holes Recognition
This option enables you to postpone the calculation of the operations during insert
them from the AFRM. Not calculated operations can be calculated later together with
other CAM-Part operations.
When this check box is selected (default), SolidCAM calculates the operations inserted
by AFRM.
Colors
This page enables you to define the colors that will be used in the HR Manager for the
items changed or inserted by the user.
718
9.11.2 Part settings
Topology settings: Cutting angle
The Cutting angle parameter defines the minimal value of the arc angle. If the angle of the section
of the Hole Feature is smaller than the defined value, SolidCAM does not recognize it as a hole.
Cutting angle
719
720
Simulation 10
You can use the simulation to check and view the generated tool path
after you have defined and calculated your machining operations.
If you have made mistakes defining the operations or used unsuitable
milling strategies, the simulation can help you avoid problems you
would otherwise experience during the actual production running.
 HostCAD Simulation mode

 2D Simulation mode
 3D Simulation mode
 VerifyPlus Simulation mode
 SolidVerify Simulation mode
 RapidVerify Simulation mode
 Rest Material Simulation mode
10.1 Introduction
The SolidCAM simulation option enables you to check and view the generated tool path after
you have defined and calculated your machining operations. The simulation can help you avoid
problems such as mistakes in the definition of the operations or selection of an unsuitable milling
strategy you would otherwise experience during the actual production running.
To simulate an operation, right-click on its name in SolidCAM

Manager. The operation menu will be displayed. Click on the
Simulate option.
You can simulate a group of selected

operations. Select the operations with
the Ctrl key, right-click on them and
choose the Simulation option from the
menu.
To simulate all operations, right-click
on the Operations header in SolidCAM
Manager and choose the Simulation
option from the menu.
The Simulation control panel is
displayed.
10.1.1 Simulation control panel
Show data
Select this check box to display tool path information such as coordinates of the current point,
time, feed in the Simulation Data dialog box.
722
10. Simulation
• The X, Y, and Z fields display the position of the tool relative to the
CoordSys at every step of the simulation.
• Feed displays the current feed rate.
• Time shows the elapsed machining time of the simulated operations

(theoretical value based on feed and distance covered).
Show tool
Select the Show tool check box to toggle on/off the graphic simulation of the tool.
The Show tool frequency field describes with what frequency SolidCAM must show the tool
position.
Stop on Next
This option displays the Stop on Next dialog box where you can define the
specific point to stop the simulation process.
• Tool change – this option stops the simulation every time when
the tool changes.
• Feed change – this option stops the simulation every time when
the feed changes.
• Rapid motion – this option stops the simulation every time when
the rapid motion is performed.
• Z change – this option stops the simulation at every change of the Z coordinate of the
tool.
• Tool Steps – this option stops the simulation every defined number of tool steps.
• End of procedure – this option stops the simulation at the end of the procedure.
Clear
This button clears the simulated tool path and the tool images from the screen.
Colors
Click on the Colors button to change the display color of the simulated
tool path. The Simulation Colors dialog box is displayed.
723
1. To change the tool color, click on the colored box next to the tool number.
2. The standard color dialog box of Windows will be displayed.
3. Select the new tool path color for this tool number.
You can use the Reset to Default button to apply the default tool
colors defined in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
Simulation speed
The slider controls the Simulation speed.
10.1.2 Simulation modes

SolidCAM offers the following simulation modes:
• 2D Simulation
• Host CAD
• Rest Material
• VerifyPlus
• 3D Simulation
• RapidVerify
• SolidVerify
10.1.3 Simulation controls

The Simulation controls are used to manage the simulation.
Turbo mode. The simulation is performed in the computer memory without showing on
the screen. The image is shown when the simulation is completed or when you click on
the Pause button.
Plays the simulation in continuous mode.
Pauses the simulation when it is performed in continuous play mode.

Single Step mode (simulate the next tool movement by clicking on the symbol or by
using the space bar of your keyboard).
Operation step mode. Simulation is shown separately operation by operation.
Exit. This button enables you to exit from the simulation module.
724
10. Simulation
10.2 2D simulation mode
This simulation mode enables you to display the tool

path in the projection view. This feature is useful in
prismatic parts machining.
10.2.1 Simulation toolbar
Toolbar buttons enable you to zoom and pan the

simulation picture.
Erase on Z change
This option automatically clears the image after every Z change of the tool.
Projection
This option enables you to display the simulation on a Top view projection of
the CAD model. When you choose this option, the Projection dialog box is
displayed.
725
Define
This option enables you to define entities of the CAD model that are taken
into account in the Top view projection. When you choose this option, the
Select Projection for Simulation dialog box is displayed.
• Select edges
The Select option enables you to select the edges of the CAD
model by the Box, Pick or All edges options.
The Unselect option enables you to unselect the previously
selected edges.
• Selection Filter
This option enables you to select edges on a specific range of Z-levels. You can either
pick the Z-levels on the model with the cursor placed in the From/To edit box or enter
the values manually in the dialog box.
• Select edges by
Box – this option enables you to select/unselect edges by enclosing them with a box.
Pick – this option enables you to select/unselect the edges one by one.
All edges – this option automatically selects/unselects all the edges.
• Finish
This option enables you to build the chain after you pick the edges.
• Cancel
This option enables you to exit this dialog box.
Delete
This option enables you to delete what you had previously defined.
Show on model
This option enables you to see the geometry that was selected in the CAD model.
Show
This option enables you to see the model on the simulation screen.
726
10. Simulation
10.3 Host CAD simulation mode
This simulation mode enables you to display the tool path directly on the model in the SolidWorks
window. Since all the View options of SolidWorks are active during the simulation, you can see the
tool path from different perspectives and zoom in on a certain area of the model.
727
10.4 3D simulation mode
This simulation mode enables you to display the tool path on

the 3D model using all the graphic acceleration functionality of
OpenGL. The target model must be defined to use this simulation
mode. For more information on the Target model, see topic 2.4.2.

Toolbar buttons enable you to control the simulation in this mode.
The following buttons are available in this toolbar:
• This button returns the model to its original position and orientation.
• These buttons are used for model scaling, panning and rotating.
• This button toggles on/off the tool visualization during the simulation.
• These buttons toggle on/off the visualization of the target model and tool
path during the simulation.
• This button enables you to remove the simulated tool path from the screen.
• These buttons enable you to show

the dynamic section of the model. The section slider is
displayed in the graphic area. By moving this slider you
can control the section.
• These buttons enable

you to show the model in the projection views (Left,
Right, Top, etc.)
• These buttons switch the simulation to

4/1 view mode.
728
10. Simulation
• This button enables you to show

the Zoom Window box with the enlarged
image of the model and tool path fragment
centered on the mouse position. You
can control the zoom factor in the Zoom
Window box.
10.4.2 Simulation menu
Options
Clear tool path
This option enables you to remove the simulated tool path

from the screen.
Show/Hide Tool path
This option enables you to toggle on/off the tool path visualization during the simulation.
Copy to clipboard
This option enables you to copy the simulation image into the Windows clipboard for
future reference.
Settings
Visual properties
The Visual Properties dialog box

enables you to edit the visual
properties of the 3D simulation mode.
• The Target Model section enables you to choose the color of the Target model
and set its transparency.
• The Tool section enables you to choose the color of the tool and set its
transparency.
• The Background section enables you to choose the background color.
• The Tool path section contains the Smooth (Wide) lines option that enables
you to perform smoothing of the tool path lines (anti-aliasing).
729
10.5 SolidVerify simulation mode
This mode enables machining simulation on the solid Solid tool

model. The solid stock model (defined by material
boundaries) is used in this mode. During the machining Solid stock model
simulation process, SolidCAM subtracts the tool

movements (using solid Boolean operations) from the solid
model of the stock. The remaining machined stock is a
solid model that can be dynamically zoomed or rotated.
Single color/Color by tool

• Single color
This option enables you to use a single color for all

tools during the simulation process.
• Color by tool
Use this option to define a specific color for each tool.

Click on the Color by tool button to set the colors. The
Simulation Colors dialog box will be displayed.
1. To change the tool color, click on the colored box next to the tool
number.
You can use the Reset to Default button to apply the default
tool colors, as defined in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
730
10. Simulation
The toolbar below enables you to control the simulation in this mode.
Available buttons:
Fit to window
This button fits the CAM-Part to the entire screen.

Fit by box
The area you want to view in the simulation screen is defined by a box.
Move
This button moves the CAM-Part to any point on the screen.

Rotate
When you click on this button, the model can be rotated.

Zoom
When you click on this button, the image on the screen can be zoomed in/out.
Selection mode
The Selection mode enables you to select the solid bodies in the graphic area.
The selected body will be highlighted. The right-click menu is available for each
selected solid body.
For more information on the Selection mode, see topic 10.5.3.
Measurement
The Measurement function enables you to measure distances directly on

the solid bodies in the SolidVerify window. This enables checking the linear
dimensions of the part during simulation.
For more information on the Measurement, see topic 10.5.4.
Light control
This button enables you to use the left button of the mouse to change the light
source on the solid model in the Simulation mode.
To change the light source, click in the graphic area and drag the cursor around
within the bounds of the view.
731
Region of interest
These buttons enable partial display of the simulated workpiece to focus on

certain areas that can be specified.
The button displays the Region of interest dialog box that enables you to
set the boundaries of the area you need to watch closely.
In the Box section, you can specify the coordinates of the upper and the lower
planes of the boundary box that limits your region of interest.
Selecting the Show Region of Interest boundaries check box displays the edges
of the box that limits your region of interest.
The button disables the partial display mode.
732
10. Simulation
View buttons
These buttons enable you to show the model in the projection views
(Left, Right, Top etc.).
Render mode
This button displays a shaded view of the model.
Hybrid mode
This button displays a transparent view of the model.
Wire mode
This button displays the CAM-Part and tool movements in the
wireframe mode.
Hidden line mode

This button displays the CAM-Part and the tool movements in the
hidden-line wireframe mode.
733
Redraw
This button redraws the view.

Show/Hide Machined Stock
This button toggles the display of the machined stock model.

Show/Hide Target
This button toggles the display of the target model.

Show/Hide Rest Material
This button toggles the display of rest material on the machined stock
model.
Split Rest Material
This option displays the Show/Hide Split solids dialog box.
This dialog box enables you to switch between split pieces of rest material
during the simulation.
734
10. Simulation
Show/Hide Gouges
This button toggles the display of gouges on the target model.
Split Gouges
This dialog box enables you to switch between split solids during the
simulation and to remove the pieces of material that have been cut away
during the machining.
735
Compare target and machined stock
This option enables you to compare the machined stock model and target
model and assign different colors to different rest material areas, depending
on the value of the difference between the machined stock model and the
target model.
1. Set the difference values and colors in the Target and

Machined Stock Compare Options dialog box.
2. Click Execute to show the comparison.
3. Click OK to exit.
Show/Hide Tool
This button toggles the display of the tool during simulation.

Show/Hide Holder
This button toggles the display of the tool holder during simulation.
Show/Hide Fixture
This button toggles the display of the fixture during simulation.
For more information on the Fixtures definition, see topic 5.6.

Split/Unsplit Machined Stock
This dialog box enables you to switch between split stock solids during the
simulation.
736
10. Simulation
Activate/Deactivate initialization of machined stock
This button enables you to calculate and use the Updated Stock model for
the simulation of the chosen operations.
When this option is not chosen, SolidCAM performs the simulation of

chosen operations on the Stock model.
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM performs the simulation of chosen

operations on the Updated Stock model.
For more information on the Updated Stock model, see topic 10.5.5.
Save Mach. stock to file
This field enables you to save the current model of the material removal
in the STL format.
This field is available only when the Manual method of the
Updated stock calculation is chosen.

Load the simulation model
This field enables you to load the previously saved model of the material
removal. The simulation will be performed on the loaded model.
This field is available only when the Manual method of the
Updated stock calculation is chosen.
10.5.3 Selection mode
The Selection mode enables you to select solid bodies in the SolidVerify simulation window.
The selected body is highlighted. Right-clicking on the selected solid body provides the following
commands:
View
This submenu enables you to choose

the view operation commands (Fit,
Move, Rotate etc.). These commands
are also available in the SolidVerify
toolbar (see topic 10.5.2).
737
Properties
This option displays the Properties dialog box.

This dialog box enables you to edit the visual
properties of the selected solid body.
• Color
This button enables you to choose the

color of the selected solid body.
• Transparency
This slider enables you to adjust the transparency level of the selected solid
body.
• Show Edges (Hybrid mode)
This option enables you to display in the Hybrid mode all the edges of the
selected solid body. The Edge Color option defines the color of the edges.
• Volume
This option displays the volume of the selected solid body.
10.5.4 Measurement
The Measurement function enables you to measure distances directly

on the solid bodies in the SolidVerify window. This enables checking the
linear dimensions of the part during simulation.
The Measure dialog box enables you to pick the pair of points directly
on the simulation model. The coordinates of the selected points and the
distance between them will be displayed in the Measure dialog box.
10.5.5 Updated Stock model
SolidCAM calculates the Updated Stock model (USM) according to the SolidVerify Accuracy
Settings (see
topic 10.5.6).
Two modes are available for the USM calculation: Automatic and Manual. The mode can be
specified for the CAM-Part in the SolidVerify tab of the Updated Stock calculation page in the Part
Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.4).
738
10. Simulation
• Automatic mode
In the Automatic mode, SolidCAM automatically calculates the USM for the
operations chosen for simulation.
To generate the USM for the chosen operation, SolidCAM runs the SolidVerify
simulation of all the previous operations in an invisible mode. The resulting USM is
saved in a *.stf file in the CAM-Part folder.
During the USM calculation process for the current operation, SolidCAM generates
intermediate USM files for the previous operations and saves them according to the
Updated Stock calculation settings. Saved USM files can be used in further SolidVerify
simulations.
If the USM file for some operation already exists, SolidCAM checks the compliance
between the accuracy settings of the USM and the SolidVerify Accuracy Settings of
the CAM-Part. If these settings concur, SolidCAM uses the existing USM, otherwise
the USM is recalculated in accordance with the CAM-Part settings.
The Delete Updated Stock files command in the Settings menu of the SolidVerify
simulation enables you to erase all the USM files of the current CAM-Part. This
command is unavailable in the Manual mode.
• Manual mode
In the Manual mode, SolidCAM enables you to manually save the USM after the
SolidVerify simulation and use it for additional simulations.
When the Manual mode is chosen, the Save Machined stock to file and Load
Machined stock from file buttons are available in the SolidVerify simulation toolbar
(see topic 10.5.2).
When the simulation for a separate operation or for a number of operations is

performed, the Save Machined stock to file button enables you to save the USM in the
*.stf file. The name of the file is the same as the name of the last simulated operation.
SolidCAM enables you to load the USM of previous operation (if it was saved) using
the Load Machined stock from file button and perform the simulation on it.
SolidCAM automatically deletes USM files for the specific operation when:
• the operation was deleted;
• the operation was changed and caused deletion of the operation PCode;
• the operation sequence was changed;
• the accuracy parameters were changed;
• the working mode was changed from Manual to Automatic.
739
Updated Stock Model interchangeability
Updated Stock models generated for the SolidVerify simulation and for 3D Milling of Rest
material areas are interchangeable. This means that SolidCAM can use USM files generated for the
SolidVerify simulation instead of USM files for 3D Milling and vice versa.
If the USM file for 3D Milling is already generated for some operation it can be used also for
SolidVerify simulation if the accuracy settings of the USM match the SolidVerify Accuracy Settings
of the CAM-Part.

This menu is common for SolidVerify,
SolidVerify for 3D and RapidVerify
simulation modes.
File
• Open
The Open machined stock from FCT option enables you to load the machined
stock model from the SolidCAM FCT file (*.fct).
The Open machined stock from STL option enables you to load the machined
stock model from the Stereolithography file (*.stl).
• Save
The Save machined stock to FCT option enables you to save the machined stock
model to the SolidCAM FCT file (*.fct).
The Save machined stock to STL option enables you to save the machined stock
model to the Stereolithography file (*.stl).
Options
• Compare target and machined stock
This option enables you to compare the stock model and target model and assign
different colors to different rest material areas, depending on their tolerance (see topic
2.4).
740
10. Simulation
• Machined Stock Measurements
This option displays the Machined Stock Measurements

dialog box where you can see the dimensions and the
volume of the Machined stock model.
This option is available only in the SolidVerify

simulation mode.
Settings
Visual properties
This option enables you to define colors and transparency for the simulation. The
Visual Properties dialog box will be displayed.
The Use CAD background color check box enables you to apply the simulation
background color provided by the CAD system.
The Use Gradient background check box enables you to apply the gradient
background to the graphics area. Specify colors for Top Background Color and Bottom
Background Color.
741
General
Move tool redraw interval
The Optimize redraw option enables you

to expedite the simulation by defining the
number of tool movements until the next
redraw of the display.
Clash detection
SolidCAM enables you to check the possible

collisions between different components
participating in the machining (tool, tool
holder, machined stock model and fixture)
during the simulation.
• Holders and Stock – this option

enables you to check the possible
collisions between the tool holder and
the machined stock model.
• Tool and Fixture – this option enables

you to check the possible collisions
between the tool and the fixture
model.
• Holders and Fixture – this option enables you to check the possible collisions
between the tool holder and the fixture.
Rest material and gouges filter
• Remove Rest material of volume less than: SolidCAM enables you to define the
tolerance of the Rest material visualization.
• Remove gouges of volume less than: SolidCAM enables you to define the
tolerance of the gouge areas visualization.
These options are available only in the SolidVerify simulation mode.
Target model
When the Load automatically check box is selected, the target model is loaded
automatically when the simulation starts. The target model loading is necessary
for the gouge and rest material calculation in these simulations.
742
10. Simulation
When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM does not load the target model
automatically. This feature enables you to increase the loading speed and the
simulation performance. The Load Target model button is displayed in the
simulation toolbar. This button enables you to load the target model.
OpenGL rendering
The functionality is implemented to improve the simulation performance with different

graphic adapters. The OpenGL rendering options enable you to switch between the
software/hardware OpenGL acceleration.
• Software – this option disables the OpenGL hardware capabilities and
enables graphics rendering using software only. For many graphic cards, this
results in slower performance. Select this option only if instructed to do
so by technical support. This option enables you to solve the visualisation
troubles if your graphic card does not support hardware acceleration, or
does not support it for the current combination of resolution, number of
colors, refresh rate, and so forth.
• Hardware – the hardware OpenGL provided by your graphics adapter is
used. The Use advanced hardware acceleration option enables you to use
hardware acceleration provided by your graphic adapter.
Stock splitting
During the machining, the tool cuts off the

material pieces. These pieces fall down from
the machining area. This option enables you
to automatically determine and remove such
material pieces.
This option is available only in the

SolidVerify simulation mode.
The Stock splitting options enable you to

control the process of automatic removal of
cut off pieces.
Do not check for Stock splitting
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM does not

check the simulation solid model for splits.
The cut off material pieces can be hidden or
removed manually using the Show/Hide Split solids
dialog box.
743
Automatically remove split solids
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM

automatically determines stock
splitting. When the split is determined,
SolidCAM compares two resulting
solids and automatically removes the
smaller one.
Manually select solids to remove
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM automatically determines stock splitting

and the following message is displayed:
• Show & Remove. The simulation is paused, and the Show/Hide Split solids
dialog box is displayed. This dialog box enables you to hide or remove the cut
off material pieces.
• Ignore. The simulation is continued till the next split is determined. When
the simulation is finished, the Show/Hide Split solids dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box enables you to hide or remove the cut off material pieces.
• Stop monitoring. The simulation is continued until the end without
monitoring of splits.
Accuracy
This option is available only in the SolidVerify simulation mode.

Tool facet tolerance
This option controls the precision of the tool for

the simulation. The value defines the precision of
the tool facets in millimeters or inches. Since this
is an absolute value, the facet tolerance for small
and large tools is the same. During the simulation,
SolidCAM produces the Boolean subtraction of
the tool from the CAM-Part.
The tolerance influences the quality of the simulation. The quality of the simulation is
the same for large and small tools. The speed of the simulation depends on the tool.
The simulation of larger tools is slower.
744
10. Simulation
Tool facet type
As well as changing the tolerance used for faceting, the application controls the
manner in which the faceted tool representation approximates the tool by forcing
the representation to be bigger or smaller than the actual tool. For example, if you
want to know whether the tool gouged the target part, then it would be preferable for
SolidVerify to have a tool representation that was guaranteed to lie outside the bounds
of the actual tool.
• Internal – the tool representation lies within the actual tool. The vertices of the
tool representation lie on the surface of the actual tool and the facets lie within
the actual tool.
• External – the actual tool lies within the tool representation. The vertices lie at
distances up to the faceting tolerance from the surface of the actual tool.
• Mixed – this is a combination of Internal and External. The vertices lie outside
the actual tool but parts of the facets may lie inside it. This mode is the default
and should be used unless there is a specific reason for using one of the other
modes as it generates fewer facets and is therefore faster.
5 Axis
The Linear interpolation option enables you to perform the linear interpolation of
5-axis tool movement. The Max. Interpolation Angle value defines the angular tolerance
for the interpolation.
Delete Updated Stock files
This option enables you to delete all the Updated Stock model files of the current
CAM-Part (see topic 10.5.5).
This option is unavailable in the Manual mode.
Tools
• Self-intersections
Many problems occur in simulations if the used solids (Machined Stock model, Target
model or Fixture) are not topologically valid. In particular, in these simulation modes
you are likely to encounter problems with solids that contain self-intersections – pairs
of overlapping polygons or individual polygons with crossing edges.
745
Self-intersections can be encountered in the following cases:
• The model (Stock, Target or Fixture) is based on a SolidWorks assembly or

sub-assembly containing a number of components.
• The model (Stock, Target or Fixture) is based on a SolidWorks part

containing a number of disjointed solid bodies.
• The model (Stock, Target or Fixture) is based on a SolidWorks part with

corrupted geometry (gaps, self-intersections etc.).
Such self-intersection problems can be solved by SolidWorks tools.
746
10. Simulation
10.6 SolidVerify for 3D simulation mode
This simulation mode is used for visualization of 3D

Milling operations.
SolidVerify for 3D creates a very accurate model of the

machined stock by storing the analytical deﬁnitions of all
surfaces that are created during machining. SolidVerify for
3D has been built to enable fast processing of parts with
complex 3D geometry (e.g die/mold) and long tool paths.
The difference between SolidVerify for 3D and the regular SolidVerify is as follows: SolidVerify
works with facet representation of the model and tool; the facet model of the stock model is
created, and the facet model of the tool is subtracted from it for each tool movement. On the other
hand, SolidVerify for 3D works with analytical geometry in order to represent the updated stock.
All the calculations are performed for analytical geometry, the resulting surface mesh is generated
and rendered in order to visualize the cutting process. Since SolidVerify for 3D uses more precise
analytical data, the visualization result is more accurate, especially in close zoom.
Increasing simulation speed and rendering performance
The simulation speed and rendering performance depend on the size of the model in the simulation
view. To increase the performance, it is recommended to zoom out the model before the simulation
and hide the tool and holder. When the simulation reaches a specific area that you want to check in
depth, you can zoom in to this area and perform a high quality rendering of the simulation model.
747
The Simulation control panel is similar to that of the SolidVerify

simulation mode (see topic 10.5.1).
10.6.2 Rendering of the simulation model
Rendering of the simulation model is performed in two modes:
Facet rendering
In this mode, a draft quality rendering of the model is performed.

This mode is used in the process of view manipulations (zooming,
panning and rotating).
The settings of this mode can be controlled in the Facet

rendering section of the View Settings dialog box. This
dialog box is available by clicking on the View Settings
item in the Settings menu.
The Facet rendering section contains the slider that enables you to control the quality and speed of
the rendering, moving from faster draft quality to slower but higher quality.
748
10. Simulation
Pixel rendering
In this mode, a high quality pixel-based rendering of the model is performed.
When you start the simulation by clicking on the Play button, the system calculates the model
rendering and the simulation starts to run. Each time you perform view manipulations on the
model (e.g. zoom or rotate), the simulation stops and the model display changes to draft quality.
When you release the mouse button, the system recalculates the pixel-based model rendering, and
the simulation resumes.
749
When the simulation is paused by user request, clicking on the High quality button in the Rendering
progress toolbar located in the graphic area of
the simulation window generates a high quality pixel-
based model rendering; the rendering process can be interrupted either by pressing ESC button, or
by manipulating the model (zoom, pan and rotate).
The settings of the Pixel rendering mode can be controlled in the View Settings dialog box.
In this section, you can define the direction of rendering: it can be performed from top to bottom
of the screen or from the screen center outwards. The Multi-stage rendering check box enables you
to display model rendering in stages, from draft quality to high quality.
For information on the Simulation toolbar, see topic 10.5.2.
For information on the Simulation menu, see topic 10.5.6.
750
10. Simulation
10.7 Rest Material simulation mode
This simulation mode enables you to display the model with the rest material before and after each
operation. It also displays existing gouge areas so that it can be prevented in the real machining.
To use this simulation mode, the Stock and Target models must be defined. For more information
about the Stock and Target Models, see topic 2.4.
The Rest Material simulation is performed by SolidVerify (see topic 10.5).
751
10.8 RapidVerify simulation mode
The RapidVerify simulation mode enables you to quickly simulate 3-axis tool path containing a great
amount of tool movements. The major application of this mode is verification of the tool path
generated by 3D Milling (see сhapter 7) or SolidCAM HSM operations (see SolidCAM HSM Module
User Guide).
RapidVerify provides high performance because it uses a simplified

representation, as opposed to the solid representation used by
SolidVerify (see topic 10.5). The limitation of this simulation
mode is that the machined part cannot have any concavities in the
Z-direction – in other words, for any X, Y point on the machined
part there is only one Z-value. Therefore, multi-sided 4- and 5-axis
machining cannot be simulated using RapidVerify. The shaped
tools are also not supported; only end mills, bull-nosed, ball-nosed
and taper tools can be used in the operations that are simulated
with RapidVerify.
10.8.1 RapidVerify control panel
The RapidVerify data structure is based on a grid of material height values. The resolution of this
grid can be modified by the Grid Resolution slider. Greater resolution will improve verification
accuracy but at the expense of slower graphical update and increased memory usage.
Using the Speed-up Animation option, SolidCAM enables you to increase the simulation speed by
simplifying the intermediate simulation images. When this option is turned on, SolidCAM merges
a specified number of facets into a single one; the Facet Merging parameter enables you to define
the number of neighbouring facets that are merged together. The simplified model is displayed
during the simulation, resulting in accelerated rendering and refreshing. When the simulation is
paused or finished, the non-simplified machined stock is displayed. The simplified image is also
displayed during pan, zoom or rotate operations.
There are two possible scenarios for using the RapidVerify simulation mode:
1. For the fastest verification, use Turbo mode and click on the right mouse button
(or rotate/pan) to get intermediate updated stock; you do not need to use the Speed-Up
Animation option in this scenario.
2. For regular verification, set the Speed-up Animation option to a higher number for Facet
Merging; you will see a continuous verification on a not so clear model. Whenever you
stop the verification you will see an accurate model representation.
752
10. Simulation
10.8.2 Updated Stock Model
If you want to perform the RapidVerify simulation on a specific operation, starting from the
Updated Stock model (see topic 10.5.5) of the previous operations, you must make sure to perform
the SolidVerify simulation of the previous operations. Otherwise, RapidVerify will perform the
simulation on the original stock of the CAM-Part.
Single color/Color by tool

• Single color
This option enables you to use a single color for all

tools during the simulation process.
• Color by tool
Use this option to define a specific color for each tool.

Click on the Color by tool button to set the colors. The
Simulation Colors dialog box will be displayed.
1. To change the tool color, click on the colored box next to the tool
number.
You can use the Reset to Default button to apply the default
tool colors, as defined in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
753
For information on the Simulation toolbar, see topic 10.5.2
For information on the Simulation menu, see topic 10.5.6.
754
10. Simulation
10.9 Machine Simulation
This simulation mode enables you to perform the machining simulation and tool path verification
using the kinematics of the CNC-machine.
The user interface of the Machine simulation window is divided into the following areas:
Simulation menu Simulation toolbars
Machine view
Control windows and tabs
• Machine view
This area is the graphic area where you can see your CNC-machine and the machined
part. All the tool movements along the tool path and motions of the CNC-machine
components are displayed in this area.
• Simulation control
This area is divided into the following elements:

• Simulation menu;
• Simulation windows and tabs;
• Simulation toolbars.
755
The Windows-style menu located above the graphic area contains the following sets of simulation
control options:
File
This menu item contains the file managing commands:
• Load NC File
When you perform simulation in the Machine simulation mode, SolidCAM saves all
the simulation data in the Output.sim file located in the CAM-Part folder. The Load
NC file option enables you to load an existing NC file containing the simulation data.
• Create Presentation
This option enables you

to create a self-extracting
executable file containing the
current CNC-machine and NC
file. When you run the generated
executable file, it unpacks in
the system temporary folder
and displays the standalone
MachSimPresentation window.
756
10. Simulation
This window provides you with the CNC-

machine data, tool path and all the tools
to run and control the simulation and
verification of the tool path. Using this
file, the simulation can be displayed on
any computer even without SolidCAM
being installed.
When you choose this command, the

Save As dialog box is displayed. In this
dialog box, you have to enter the name
for the presentation file and specify its
location.
To add a title to your presentation, select the Set caption check box and enter the title
in the relevant text box.
To enable the possibility to run the presentation file on all Windows platforms, select
the Ensure support for all Windows platforms check box.
The Create Presentation option is also available by clicking on the button

in the Setting toolbar.
• Create Simulation Report
This option enables you to save

a simulation report file in the XML
format. When you choose this command,
the Save As dialog box is displayed. In
this dialog box, you have to enter the
name for the report file and specify its
location.
The generated report file contains the

information about the simulation running
time and the memory it requires, the
measurement units, collision checking,
the tools used, etc.
757
View
This menu item contains the commands responsible for the

display of the simulation model in the Machine view area.
Fullscreen
This command enables you to extend the
simulation window to the entire screen size.
Fit to screen
This command enables you to adjust the
simulation model size to the graphic area.
This option is also available as the button in the View toolbar.
Standard Views
This submenu contains commands that enable you to rotate the simulation model to
the appropriate standard view.
• Isometric: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the
isometric view.
• Top: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the top side
view.
• Front: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the front
side view.
• Right: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the right
side view.
• Bottom: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the
bottom side view.
• Left: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the left side
view.
• Back: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the back
side view.
These commands are also available as

buttons in the View toolbar.
758
10. Simulation
Show/Hide
This submenu contains commands that enable you to control the display of various
machine and model components in the Machine view area.
• Tool path: this button enables you to toggle the display of the tool path in
the graphic area of the simulation.
• Tool: this button enables you to toggle the display of the tool path in the
graphic area of the simulation.
• Workpiece: this button enables you to toggle the display of the workpiece in
the graphic area of the simulation.
• Stock: this button enables you to toggle the display of the stock model in
the process of machining.
When the stock is displayed, you

can perform solid verification of
the material cutting process in the
SolidVerify mode integrated into the
Machine simulation. The simulation
is performed by dynamic subtraction
of the tool solid model (using solid
Boolean operations) from the stock
solid model.
To perform solid verification on the stock model, select the Enable

verification check box in the Machine simulation page of
the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box.
• Initial Stock: this button enables you to toggle the display of the stock initial
state before the machining.
• Machine Housing: this button enables you to toggle the display of the
machine housing in the graphic area of the simulation.
These commands are also available as buttons in the Visibility toolbar.
759
Focus
This submenu contains commands that enable you to directly zoom and observe
simulation model elements in stationary position.
• Tool Focus: this button enables you to display the tool in a close view.
• Workpiece Focus: this button enables you to display the machined workpiece
in a close view.
• Machine Focus: this button enables you to display the entire machine model
in a close view.
These commands are also available as buttons in the Focus toolbar.
Simulation mode
This submenu contains the following modes:
• Toolpath mode: the tool path is displayed during the simulation.
• Material mode: the material removal is displayed during the simulation.
• Kinematic mode: the machine kinematics is displayed without the tool path
and material removal.
These modes are also available as buttons in the Simulation modes

toolbar.
760
10. Simulation
Toolpath rendering
This submenu contains commands that enable you to choose the mode of tool path
display.
• Tool center/Tool tip: these commands enable you to display the tool path
relative to the center or to the tip of the tool.
• Display All Operations/Display Current Operation: these commands

enable you to display the tool path for all of the part operations all at once or
only for the current one.
• Follow/Trace/Segment: these commands enable you to display the

already machined tool path (Follow), the one to be machined (Trace) or the
segments of the tool path which are currently being machined (Segment).
• Tool Vector/Toolpath points: these commands enable you to display the

vectors of the tool tilting relative to the machined surface (Tool Vector) and the
tool path by sequence of points (Toolpath points).
• Leads/Links: these commands enable you to toggle the display of the

tool approach and linking movements.
These modes are also available as buttons in the Toolpath rendering

toolbar.
Machine
This menu item contains the following commands:
• New Machine: this command enables you to

create a new machine definition.
• Open Machine File: this command enables you

to load a different existing machine.
• Edit Machine: this command enables you to edit

the current machine definition by right-clicking on
an element to add/erase tree elements or display the
machine properties.
761
• Save Machine: this command enables you to save the edited machine definition.
• Save Machine As: this command enables you to save the edited machine definition
under a different name and/or in a different folder.
These commands are also available as buttons in the Machine tab.
Control
This menu item contains commands that enable you to

control the progress of the simulation.
• Run: this command enables you to start

the simulation.
• Pause: this command enables you to pause

the simulation.
• Stop: this command enables you to stop

the simulation.
• Step Back/Step Forward: these

commands enable you to perform the
simulation in the step-by-step mode.
762
10. Simulation
• Previous Operation/Next Operation: these commands enable you to switch to the

previous/next operations.
• Fast Forward: this command enables you to perform the simulation in the system
memory and display the final result.
• Restart: this command enables you to start the simulation from the very beginning.
• Loop: this command enables you simulate the operations in a closed cycle.
• Speed Slider: this command enables you

to display the Simulation Speed dialog box.
This dialog box contains the slider to control
the simulation speed.
These commands are also available as buttons in the Control toolbar.
Settings
This menu item contains the commands that enable you to manage the simulation settings and to
adjust the simulation interface in accordance with your requirements.
Simulation Properties
This command displays the Simulation Properties dialog box that enables you to edit
the simulation settings.
763
This dialog box contains the following sets of parameters for managing the Machine
simulation settings:
Simulation Process
This tab contains options that affect the simulation when it is running.
The Stop conditions section enables you to stop the machining in the
following cases:
• On tool change: whenever the tool changes;
• On operation change: in a certain operation chosen from the list;
• Height relative to workpiece greater than ...: when the tool exceeds
a certain threshold above the workpiece.
The Notifications section enables you to turn on the display of notifications

in case of the following events reported:
• Machine Components Collision: collision between tool and machine
components;
• Material Collision: collision between tool and workpiece;
• Axis Limits Overrun: when one of the moving parts of the CNC-
machine exceeds a limit defined in the CNC-machine definition;
• Axis Value Mismatch: when wrong data is detected, e.g. wrong tool
dimensions.
764
10. Simulation
The Miscellaneous section contains the Enable geometry collision

checking when CutSim is used check box that activates the collision
checking on the geometry in the material removal mode.
The Simulation section contains the summary of the simulation data.
Graphics and Background
This tab contains options for setting the background color of the
simulation window, for display of Coordinate System and ruler, and the
slider to control the visualization speed.
Tool Path Backplot
This tab contains parameters of tool path visualization.
765
The Segment length option enables you to set the length of tool path
segments displayed when running the simulation in the Follow/Trace
modes.
The Axis vector length option enables you to set the length of the tool
tilting vector when running the simulation in the Tool Vector mode.
This length can be set as a value or as the radius of the tool used for the
operation. The colored rectangle on the right enables you to set the color
of the vectors visualization.
The Tool path points option enables you to set the size (in pixels) of the
tool path points when running the simulation in the Tool path points mode.
The colored rectangle on the right enables you to set the color of the
points visualization.
Hot Keys
This command displays the HotKey Settings

dialog box that enables you to define hot keys and
mouse settings for the simulation control.
Choose an appropriate operation in the Keys

settings or Mouse settings section and assign
the required combination of keyboard keys and
mouse buttons.
Toolbars
This submenu lists the simulation control toolbars

that can be displayed or hidden by clicking on each
item in this list. The Customize option enables you
to customize the toolbars and separate commands
that can be used during the simulation.
766
10. Simulation
Windows
This submenu lists the simulation windows

and tabs that enable you to define and control
the CNC-machine and other data used for the
simulation. These windows are displayed in
tab view to the right from the graphic area (the
Report, Machine and Analysis tabs and the
Move List window) or at the bottom of the main
SolidWorks window (the Progress bar and the
Axis Control window).
Layouts
This submenu lists the simulation window layout

options.
The Reset to default option resets the window

layout to default.
The All Windows option displays all windows and

tabs listed in the Windows submenu.
The No Windows option hides all windows and

tabs listed in the Windows submenu. Only the
graphic area is displayed.
The Save to file option enables you to save the current layout scheme as
a *.layout file in the machine definition folder.
The Load from file option enables you to load a previously saved layout file.
Application Look
This submenu enables you to adapt the machine

simulation interface to the color schemes of
commonly used applications such as MS Office,
Windows XP, etc.
767
Help
This menu item displays the information and help issues

regarding the Machine simulation feature.
10.9.2 Simulation windows

The simulation windows and tabs enable you to define and control the CNC-machine data and
other parameters used for the simulation. Each window or tab can be undocked from its default
location by clicking on its caption and dragging, and docked at your convenience around the
Machine view area.
Machine tab
Move list tab

Machine view
Progress bar
Axis Control
window
Machine
This tab displays the CNC-machine definition tree and enables you to
define the CNC-machine and manage the CNC-machine components
displayed in the graphic area.
The buttons in the tab toolbar enable you to manage existing machine
definitions and add new ones.
• New Machine: this button enables you to create a new

machine definition.
• Open Machine File: this button enables you to load a

different existing machine.
• Save Machine: this button enables you to save the edited

machine definition.
768
10. Simulation
• Save Machine As: this button enables you to save the edited machine definition
under a different name and/or in a different folder.
• Edit Machine: this button enables you to edit the current machine definition by right-
clicking on an element to add/erase tree elements or display the machine properties.
• Info: this button toggles the display of the information about the listed machine
components.
The CNC-machine definition tree displays all components of the

CNC-machine used for the machining of the current CAM-Part. The
tree displays all the structure of the CNC-machine and the relation
between all the CNC-machine components.
In the machine editing mode, SolidCAM enables you to manage the

CNC-machine components using the right-click menu available on
each component.
• Show/Hide
This option enables you to show/hide the chosen

component of the CNC-machine.
• Transparent/Opaque
This option enables you to control the transparency of

the chosen component of the CNC-machine.
• Copy/Cut/Delete
These options enable you to copy, cut or delete the

chosen component of the CNC-machine.
The table in the bottom part of the Machine tab enables you to
manage the visual properties of the chosen component.
Report
This tab lists the operations with tools used and all events that
happen during simulation. The items in the report are listed in a
tree format structure as operations followed by the tool number
and the tool definition. The following event types can be reported:
• Value underflows and overflows;
• Collision events.
769
Move list
This window displays the lines of the GCode as the operation is

running on; the active GCode line is highlighted.
SolidCAM enables you to display coordinates relative to the CAM-

Part coordinate system or to the CNC-machine origin, depending
on the Machine simulation settings (see topic 12.14).
The slider to the right enables you to navigate through the GCode.
The Collision and Out of limits icons

appear to the left of the GCode string in
case of an appropriate event.
Axis Control
This window enables you to control the tool location manually

using the axis sliders. It displays the current coordinates of the
CNC-machine. Each axis has a control slider that enables you to
perform manual movements within the specified limits.
The manual axis control cannot be used

when the simulation is in progress. Stop the
simulation to enable it.
Right-clicking on the coordinate sliders displays the Set Axis Values dialog box
that enables you to enter the values for the coordinates.
Progress
The Progress bar shows the advance of the simulation process. It consists of a slider that moves as
the simulation is running on and a colored stripe that represents different tools by different colors.
The colors of the tools are also displayed in the Report tab.
770
10. Simulation
Analysis
This tab contains color representation of various elements of the

simulation to facilitate the visualization. Choose an element from
the list to display its analysis in colors.
You can change the color for each item by double-clicking on the
corresponding rectangle and choose the desired color from the
displayed Windows-style Color dialog box.
Toolbar buttons
• Refresh: this button enables you to update the simulation when changes have been
made in the analysis settings.
• Add: this button enables you to add values into the table.
• Remove: this button enables you to remove selected values from the table.
• Adjust: this button enables you to set limitations for specific parameters to display
the tool path in different colors according to the defined settings.
• Auto adjust: when you click on this button, the system automatically sets the
parameter ranges for the defined settings.
Parameters
• Tool number
When you choose this element from the list, the

table below displays the tool path color scheme
according to the tools used in part operations. The
tools are numbered in the corresponding column and
represented by rectangles of different colors in the
leftmost column.
771
• Operation number

table below displays the tool path color scheme
according to the part operations. The operations
are numbered in the corresponding column and
represented by rectangles of different colors in
the leftmost column.
• Tool path sequence

tool path is represented in a gradient color scale
according to the progress of machining. This
scale enables you to easily identify the start point
and the end point of the machining, the cutting
method (e.g. Zigzag or One way), the cut order
(e.g. from outside to inside), and other machining
parameters.
772
10. Simulation
• B axis value scale/C axis value scale
When you choose this element from the list,

the tool path is represented in a gradient color
scale according to tilting angles of the machine
rotation axis. This scale enables you to identify the
rotation axis angle range used in the operation,
the rotation angle used for machining of specific
areas, and limit overruns that occur during the
simulation. The angle range values are displayed
in the corresponding columns of the table.
You can define a specific angle range to view the tool path in the corresponding colors.
Click on the Adjust button in the toolbar to the right from the options list. The
Adjust Angle Change dialog box is displayed. This dialog box enables you to enter
the minimal and maximal values for the angle range and return to default values, if
necessary.
Click on the Refresh button in order for the change to take effect.
773
• B axis reversal/C axis reversal
When you choose this element from the list, the tool
path is represented in colors according to change
of direction of the machine rotation axes. These
colors enable you to identify the areas where possible
contouring errors have negative influence on the
machining result (surface quality). Every time when
a rotation axis changes its direction, the tool path
segment changes its color.
• B axis value change/C axis value change
path is represented in a gradient color scale according
to change of tilting angles of the machine rotation
axis. This scale enables you to identify the rotation
speed range used in the operation, the rotation speed
used for machining of specific areas and determine
the areas where machine speed limits are reached.
You can define a specific angle range to view

the tool path in the corresponding colors by
click on the Adjust button and entering
the values into the Adjust angle scale dialog
box. Click on the Refresh button in order
for the change to take effect.
774
10. Simulation
• Linear axis reversal
path is represented in colors according to change
of direction of the machine linear axes. Every time
when a linear axis changes its direction, the tool path
segment changes its color.
You can define a threshold angle value for the axis reversal to view the tool path in
the corresponding colors by clicking on the Adjust button and entering the values
into the Linear axis reversal threshold angle dialog box.
Click on the Refresh button in order for the

change to take effect.
• Orientation change
to change of orientation of the machine rotation
axes. This scale enables you to identify the rotation
speed range used in the operation, the rotation speed
used for machining of specific areas and determine
the areas where machine speed limits are reached.
775
• Segment Length
path is represented in colors according to the length of
its segments. These colors enable you to identify the
areas where you have long linear motions, usually in
roughing tool path or where the segments become very
short, e.g. for finishing.
You can define a specific segment length range to

view the tool path in the corresponding colors. Click
on the Adjust button in the toolbar to the right
from the options list. The Adjust Segment Length
dialog box is displayed. This dialog box enables you to
enter the minimal and maximal values for the length
range and return to default values, if necessary.
• Collisions
path is represented in colors according to the collision
status.
• Segments with collisions are marked

with the red color;
• Collision-free segments are marked
with the green color;
• Segments that were not checked yet are
marked with the gray color.
776
10. Simulation
• Feed rate
path is represented in colors according to the feed rate.
• Segments with machining feed rate are marked with the blue color;
• Segments with rapid feed rate are marked with the yellow color.
• Height Change
path is represented in colors according to the tool
orientation relative to the tool path.
• Segments where the plunging is performed in the tool axis direction are
marked with the red color;
• Segments with the lag angle tool orientation are marked with the orange
color;
• Segments with the normal tool orientation are marked with the gray color;
• Segments with the lead angle tool orientation are marked with the light
green color;
• Segments where the tool retracts along the tool axis are marked with the
green color.
777
• Axis Pole
path is represented in a gradient color scale which
enables you to determine whether the two rotational
axes are collinear. The more the axes get collinear, the
tool path turns more red. This option is useful for
simulation of impeller parts machining.
You can define a specific tool axis angle range to view the tool path in the corresponding
colors. Click on the Adjust button in the toolbar to the right from the options
list. The Adjust Axis Pole dialog box is displayed. This dialog box enables you to enter
the minimal and maximal values for the angle range and return to default values, if
necessary.
• Tool Axis Change
to the change of tilting angle of rotational axes. This
scale enables you to identify the rotation speed range
used in the operation, the rotation speed used for
machining of specific areas and determine the areas
where machine speed limits are reached.
778
10. Simulation
10.9.3 Simulation toolbars
The simulation control provides you with a number of toolbars enabling you to control the
simulation process and the model visualization in the graphic area. The arrow near each toolbar
enables you to customize this toolbar by displaying or hiding certain buttons.
View
The buttons of this toolbar enable you to rotate the simulation model to the appropriate view
(Isometric, Right, Front, etc.).
These buttons are also available as commands in the Standard Views

submenu of the View menu (see topic 10.9.1).
Visibility
The buttons of this toolbar enable you to control the display of various machine and model
components in the graphic area.
These buttons are also available as commands in the Show/Hide submenu of

the View menu (see topic 10.9.1).
Simulation modes
This submenu contains the modes of simulation model display.
These buttons are also available as commands in the Simulation mode

submenu of the View menu (see topic 10.9.1).
779
Focus
The buttons of this toolbar enable you to directly zoom and observe elements such as tool,
workpiece and machine in stationary position.
These buttons are also available as commands in the Focus submenu of the
View menu (see topic 10.9.1).
Tool path rendering
The buttons of this toolbar enable you to choose the mode of tool path display.
These buttons are also available as commands in the Focus submenu of the
Viewmenu (see topic 10.9.1).
Control
The buttons of this toolbar enable you to control the progress of the simulation.
These buttons are also available as commands in the Control menu (see
topic 10.9.1).
Settings
The buttons of this toolbar enable you to manage the simulation settings and to adjust the simulation
interface in accordance with your requirements.
780
10. Simulation
• The Create Presentation button enables you to create a self-extracting executable file
containing the current CNC-machine and NC file (see topic 10.9.1).
• The Hot Keys button displays the HotKey Settings dialog box that enables you to define
hot keys and mouse settings for the simulation control (see topic 10.9.1).
• The Simulation Properties button displays the Simulation Properties dialog box that
enables you to edit the simulation settings (see topic 10.10.1).
10.9.4 CNC-machine definition parameters

SolidCAM enables you to define a number of CNC-machine parameters in the MAC file. These
parameters enable you to take into account peculiar properties of the CNC-machine. These
parameters are used on the different stages of the tool path calculations.
The following parameters must be defined in the MAC file:
CNC-machine kinematic type
The kinematic_type parameter enables you to define the type of kinematics of the CNC-
machine. The following types are supported by SolidCAM according to the rotational axes location
on the CNC-machine:
• Head-Head
In this type of CNC-machines, both rotational axes are mounted on the head of the
CNC-machine.
Rotation axes
Example:
kinematic_type = HEAD_HEAD
781
• Table-Table
In this type of CNC-machines, both rotational axes are mounted on the CNC-machine
table.
Rotation axes
Example:
kinematic_type = TABLE_TABLE_NEW
782
10. Simulation
• Head-Table
In this type of CNC-machines, one rotational axis is mounted on the head and the
other is located on the table of the CNC-machine.
Rotation axes
Example:
kinematic_type = HEAD_TABLE
When the kinematic_type parameter is not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM
uses the following default value:
kinematic_type = HEAD_HEAD
783
Spindle direction
The spindle_direction parameter enables you to define the Spindle direction

direction of the spindle axis of the CNC-machine. The direction is is the Z-axis
defined by a vector, e.g. when the spindle is parallel to the Z-axis,
the vector is (0,0,1).
Example:
spindle_direction = 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
When the spindle_direction parameter is not specified in the

MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default value:
Rotational axes direction
The rotate_axis_dir1 and rotate_axis_dir2 parameters enable you to define the

direction of the first and the second rotational axes, respectively.
Example:
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
rotate_axis_dir2 = 0.0000 -1.0000 0.0000
The direction of the rotational axes is defined according

to the tool movements around the axis. The right hand Rotation axis
rule is used for the direction definition (the fingers of
the right hand are curled in the positive tool rotation Rotation
direction, and the thumb indicates the positive direction direction
of the rotational axis). Correspondingly, when the
rotational axis is pointing away from the observer, the
positive tool rotation direction is clockwise; when the
rotational axis is pointing towards the observer, the
positive tool rotation direction is counterclockwise.
784
10. Simulation
If the rotation around the axis is performed by the spindle, the direction
of the rotational axis is defined as shown.
In some cases, the rotation around the axis is not performed by the
spindle. For example, in CNC-machines of the Table-Table type, the
rotation is performed by the rotary table and tilting is performed by the +
tilting table. In this case, the direction of the rotational axes is defined
according to the virtual spindle rotation around the axis as shown +
below. The negative rotation of the tilting table causes the positive tool -
tilting relative to the rotational axis.
+ Rotation axis
- +
-
+ +
Generally, the first rotational axis is the axis of rotation around the spindle direction.
E.g. when the spindle direction of the Table-Table machine is parallel to the Z-axis, the first rotational
axis has to be axis of the rotation around the Z-axis. The following parameters have to be defined:
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
The rotate_axis_dir1 parameter defines the positive direction of the rotational axis. The
direction is determined with the right hand rule according to the positive direction of the rotation
of the CNC-machine part performing the rotation. In this case, the positive direction of the rotary
table rotation is clockwise. Therefore, using the right hand rule, the axis direction is the negative
Z-direction (0, 0, -1).
785
The first and the second rotational axis depend on the CNC-machine kinematic type:
• Table-Table
In this case, the first rotational axis performing the rotation around the spindle axis is
mounted on the second rotational axis. The second rotational axis is mounted on the
CNC-machine table.
Spindle direction
Second rotation axis

First rotation axis
• Head-Table Spindle direction
In this case, the first rotational axis Second rotation axis

performing the rotation around
the spindle axis is mounted on the
table. The second rotational axis is
mounted on the head of the CNC- First rotation axis
machine.
786
10. Simulation
• Head-Head
In this case, the first rotational axis performing the rotation around the spindle axis
is mounted on the CNC-machine head. The second rotational axis is mounted on the
first rotational axis.
Spindle direction
First rotation axis Second rotation axis
When the rotate_axis_dir1 and rotate_axis_dir2 parameters are not

specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
rotate_axis_dir2 = 0.0000 -1.0000 0.0000
Rotational axes names
The first_rot_axis_name and second_rot_axis_name parameters enable you to define

the names of the rotational axes that will be used in the Machine simulation.
Example:
first_rot_axis_name = C
second_rot_axis_name = B
When the first_rot_axis_name and second_rot_axis_name parameters are not specified

in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:
787
GCode output in machine/part coordinates
The gcode_part_coordinate parameter enables you to choose either CAM-Part or CNC-

machine Coordinate System to be used for the GCode output. This parameter influences the
orientation of the Coordinate System axes when the part rotation is performed.
When the gcode_part_coordinate option is activated (the value is Y), the GCode is generated
using the CAM-Part Coordinate System. When the part is rotated, the CAM-Part Coordinate System
is rotated together with the part, therefore the coordinates of any point on the part are always the
same, regardless of the part rotation.
X1,Y1,Z1 X1,Y1,Z1
Z
Y Y
Z
X
X
When the gcode_part_coordinate option is not activated (the value is N), the GCode is
generated using the CNC-machine Coordinate System. This coordinate system is fixed and not
rotated with the part, therefore the coordinates of the part points are changed when the part is
rotated.
X1,Y1,Z1 X2,Y2,Z2
Z Y Z Y
X X
788
10. Simulation
Example:
gcode_part_coordinate = Y
When the gcode_part_coordinate parameter is not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses
the following default value:
gcode_part_coordinate = N
Base points of rotational axes
Using the rot_axis_base_pnt1 and rot_axis_base_pnt2 variables, SolidCAM enables

you to define the base points of the first and the second rotational axes. The base points define the
location of the rotational axes relative to the CNC-machine origin.
Example:
rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.0000 0.0000 -254.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 -10.0000
The first three numbers define the XYZ location of the base point for
Metric settings; the last three numbers define the XYZ location of the base
point for Inch settings. The Metric and Inch settings are separated by comma.
Generally, for Table-Table and Head-Table CNC-machines, the origin point is located in the
intersection of the first rotational axis and the top face of the table. In this case, the location of the
base point of the first rotational axis is (0,0,0).
Second rotation First rotation
axis axis
Second rotation
axis First rotation
Origin axis
Z
Y Origin
Z
X Y
Z-value of the
rot_axis_base_pnt2
parameter
789
The rot_axis_base_pnt2 defines the location of the base point of the second rotational axis.
For CNC-machines of the Head-Head type, the definition of the base points is different. For this
type of CNC-machines, the origin point is generally located on the bottom spindle face in the
intersection with the spindle axis. The distances for the base point of the second rotational axis
are measured from this origin point. The distance for the base point of the first rotational axis is
measured from the base point of the second rotational axis.
First rotation
axis
rot_axis_base_pnt2
defined relative
to the origin
rot_axis_base_pnt1
Second rotation First base defined relative to
axis point rot_axis_base_pnt2
Second base
point Y
Origin
X Origin
When the rot_axis_base_pnt1 and rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters are not specified in
the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:
rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Translation axis limits
The trans_axis_min_limit and trans_axis_max_limit parameters enable you to

define the limits of linear (translational) movements along the XYZ axes.
Example:
trans_axis_min_limit = -100000.0000 -200000.0000 -50000.0000
trans_axis_max_limit = 100000.0000 150000.0000 60000.0000
790
10. Simulation
The limits are defined relative to the origin point. Using these limits you can define a virtual 3D box
of the working area of the CNC-machine.
trans_axis_max_limit
Working area
Origin
trans_axis_min_limit
Z
Y
When the trans_axis_min_limit and trans_axis_max_limit parameters are not

specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:
trans_axis_min_limit = -100000.0000 -100000.0000 -100000.0000
791
Rotational axis limits
The rot_axis_min_limit0 and rot_axis_max_limit0 parameters enable you

to limit the rotation around the first rotational axis. The rot_axis_min_limit1 and
rot_axis_max_limit1 parameters enable you to limit the rotation around the second rotational
axis. The parameter value defines the limit rotation angle in degrees.
rot_axis_min_limit0
Second rotation
axis
rot_axis_max_limit0
rot_axis_min_limit1
rot_axis_max_limit1
First rotation
axis
Example:
rot_axis_min_limit0 = -210.0000
rot_axis_max_limit0 = 210.0000
When these parameters are not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default
values:
rot_axis_max_limit1 = -100000.0000
792
10. Simulation
Coordinate output parameters
These parameters have effect on the coordinate output in GCode, when the GCode is generated
using the CNC-Machine coordinate system (gcode_part_coordinate = Y).
Use H Length (use_tool_h_length)
This parameter enables you to consider the tool H Length value in the coordinate
output.
Example: use_tool_h_length = Y
When this option is not activated (the value is set to N), the
H Length is not considered for the coordinate output in the
GCode; in this case the tool path output is performed for
the tool tip.
When this option is activated (the value is set to Y), the

specified H Length value is considered for the coordinate
output in the GCode; in this case the coordinate output
is performed for the origin point, located on the bottom
spindle face, at the intersection with the spindle axis.
Tool tip
H Length
Origin
When the use_tool_h_length parameter is not specified in the MAC file,

SolidCAM uses the following default value:
use_tool_h_length = Y
793
Use shifting (use_part_shifting)
This parameter enables you to consider the shifting of the CAM-Part Coordinate
system, relative to the CNC-Machine Coordinate system, when generating the
coordinate output.
Example: use_part_shifting = Y
When this option is not activated (the value is set to N), the specified shifting is not
considered for the coordinate output in the GCode; the tool path output is performed
relative to the CAM-Part Coordinate System.
CAM-Part
Coordinate System
794
10. Simulation
When this option is activated (the value is set to Y), the shifting defined by the Center
of Rot. Origin based on Machine CoordSys parameter in the CoordSys Data dialog box
(see topic 2.2.7) is considered for the coordinate output in the GCode. The tool path
output is performed relative to the CNC-machine Coordinate System.
CNC-machine
Coordinate System
Z
Y
When the use_part_shifting parameter is not specified in the MAC file,

SolidCAM uses the following default value:
use_part_shifting = Y
795
Use base points of rotational axes
(use_rot_axis_base_point1, use_rot_axis_base_point2)
These parameters enable you to consider the base points of the rotational axes, when
generating the coordinate output.
Example: use_rot_axis_base_point1 = Y
use_rot_axis_base_point2 = Y
First base
point
Second base
point
Origin
Tool tip
When this option is not activated (the value is set to N), the base point coordinates are
not considered in the calculation. In this case the tool path output is performed either
for the tool tip (if the use_tool_h_length option is not activated) or for the origin
point located on the bottom spindle face, at the intersection with the spindle axis (if the
use_tool_h_length option is activated).
When the option is activated (the value is set to Y), the base point coordinates, defined
by the rot_axis_base_pnt1/rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters, are considered
during the tool path calculation. In this case the tool path output is performed
for the CNC-machine base points defined by the rot_axis_base_pnt1/
rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters.
When the use_rot_axis_base_pnt1/use_rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters

are not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default value:
796
10. Simulation
Machine simulation
The machine_simulation parameter enables you to define the name of the CNC-machine
model used for the Machine simulation.
Example:
machine_simulation = 5AxDMU50ev
The parameter value defines the folder where the appropriate model of the CNC-machine is stored.
This folder is located in the Directory for Machine simulation definitions defined in the Machine
simulation settings.
Consider that the Directory for Machine simulation definitions is the following:
C:\Program Files\SolidCAM2010\Tables\Metric\MachSim
In this case, the data of the CNC-machine 5AxDMU50ev mentioned in the example above is
located in the following folder:
C:\Program Files\SolidCAM2010\Tables\Metric\MachSim\5AxDMU50ev
Example of CNC-machine definition
The following example is the section of a CNC-machine definition file. This section defines
the parameters of the Okuma CNC-machine used for the Sim. 5-Axis machining and Machine
simulation.
;Sim Five axis
kinematic_type = TABLE_TABLE
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
rotate_axis_dir2 = 0.0000 -1.0000 0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.000 0.000 -15.398, 0.000 0.000 -6.000
rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.000 0.000 -100.353, 0.000 0.000 0.000
abs_machine_coord = N
machine_simulation = okuma12
797
10.9.5 CNC-machine model definition
The Machine simulation is performed on the model of a CNC-machine. This topic covers all the
stages of the CNC-machine model definition:
Preparing a CNC-machine model
Machine simulation requires a model of the CNC-machine in the STL format. Such model can be
either supplied by a CNC-machine vendor or prepared by yourself with a CAD system. When the
CAD model of the CNC-machine is prepared, it can be exported into a number of STL files, each
one representing a different component of the CNC-machine.
The image below shows a schematic model of a Table-Table CNC-machine built in SolidWorks.
Each STL file has to be created using an output coordinate system located at the CNC-machine
origin. If the coordinate system of your CNC-machine assembly is different, you have to define an
additional coordinate system with the proper location and axes orientation.
798
10. Simulation
In the case of the Table-Table machine shown above, you have to define a new coordinate system
located in the intersection of the top face of the table and the rotational axis (CNC-machine origin).
When the coordinate system is defined, move all the components into their initial state (the
components performing rotational axes movements have to be placed into their initial state at C=0,
B=0; the components performing translational axes movements have to be placed at X=0, Y=0,
Z=0).
799
After the coordinate system is defined and all the CNC-machine components are placed into their
initial state, the CNC-machine model has to be exported into the STL format.
Click File, Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
Choose the STL type for export of the model. Click on the Options button to define the additional
parameters of export.
The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box enables you to define a number of parameters affecting the STL export. See
SolidWorks Help for detailed explanation on these parameters.
Adjust the STL Resolution parameters according to your needs.
In the Output coordinate system list, choose the defined Coordinate system for the STL export.
800
10. Simulation
Select the Do not translate STL output data to positive space check box. This option ensures that
exported parts maintain their original position in global space, relative to the origin.
Confirm the Export Options dialog box with the OK button.
In the Save As dialog box, choose the location for the STL files and enter the name of the STL file
for the CNC-machine assembly. Confirm the export with the Save button. Several separate STL
files for all the CNC-machine assembly components are generated. All of these files will be used at
the further stages of the CNC-machine definition.
A CNC-machine model consists of a number of components. It is

recommended to try to define the CNC-machine with the minimum
number of STL files. To reduce the number of STL files, you can put several
components together in one sub-assembly that is exported into a single STL
file; the criterion for putting several components into one STL file is the
common movement of these components. When assembly components
always move together, they can be combined into a sub-assembly. For
example, the model of the spindle unit of a Table-Table CNC-machine
consists of a number of components that have a common movement;
according to the criterion above, all these spindle unit components can be
combined into a sub-assembly.
Such sub-assemblies can be exported separately into STL files using the
Save all components of an assembly in a single file option in the Export
Options dialog box. This option creates a single STL file with all the
components of a sub-assembly. Before the export of a sub-assembly, the
new coordinate system has to be defined in the sub-assembly in the location
of the CNC-machine origin.
801
Starting the CNC-machine definition
Load a CAM-Part and start the Machine simulation of one of the operations.
In the simulation menu, click Settings and choose Machine from the Windows submenu.
The Machine tab is displayed. This tab enables you to define a new
CNC-machine.
Click on the New Machine button. A new CNC-machine

definition is created.
In the XML folder located in the directory that is defined in the

Directory for Machine simulation definition section of Machine
simulation settings, create a new folder with the name of your
CNC-machine; this Machine definition folder is the location of all
files related to the CNC-machine definition.
The name of this folder has to be assigned to the

machine_simulation parameter in the MAC
file of the CNC-machine.
Click on the Save Machine As button to save the

empty machine definition. The Save As dialog box is
displayed.
The machine definition is saved as an XML file. Choose

the Machine definition folder and save the machine
definition file with the CNC-machine name (the name
assigned to the machine_simulation parameter in
the MAC file). Confirm the dialog box with the Save
button.
802
10. Simulation
Copy all the STL files generated from the CNC-machine model into the Machine definition folder.
At this stage, the initial CNC-machine definition is finished. Click

on the Edit Machine button to start the definition of the
CNC-machine components.
Defining the name of the CNC-machine
Select the root item of the CNC-machine definition

tree. In the bottom part of the Machine tab, the
element properties table appears.
In the Name field, enter the name of the CNC-

machine.
Understanding the structure of the CNC-machine
Before defining your CNC-machine

components, you have to analyze the machine
Moving
kinematics. Generally, all the components of the
components
CNC-machine can be classified into two
groups: non-moving components and moving
components. The first group includes the CNC-
machine base, controller, doors, etc. The moving
parts are the components of the transitional and
rotational axes and the spindle unit.
In case of Table-Table machines, the base is

a non-moving component.
Non-moving
component (base)
803
All the moving components can be classified according to the dependency of the movements.
For example, in the Table-Table CNC-machine the rotary table that provides the rotation around
the vertical axis (C-axis) is mounted on the tilting table. The tilting table that provides the rotation
around the X-axis (B-axis), is mounted on the saddle. The saddle performs the X-axis movements.
Movement of the saddle affects the location of the B-axis and C-axis (the tilting and rotary tables
are moved). Movement of the tilting table (rotation around B-axis) affects the orientation of the
C-axis (the rotary table is moved together with the tilting table), but does not affect the X-axis. The
rotary table movement (rotation around C-axis) does not affect the B-axis and X-axis orientation.
Saddle Tilting table
Rotary table
Hierarchically, we can describe the structure of the rotary table, tilting table and saddle using
“parents-children” relations. The saddle is the “parent” of the tilting table because the tilting table
(“child”) is mounted on the saddle. Similarly, the tilting table is the “parent” of the rotary table
because the rotary table is mounted on the tilting table.
Another separate set of the CNC-machine components provides the movements in the YZ-plane.
The sliding carriage provides movements along the Y-axis, and the spindle unit performs the Z-axis
movements. In this hierarchy the sliding carriage is a “parent” and the spindle unit is a “child”.
Sliding carriage
Spindle unit
804
10. Simulation
The structure of a Head-Table CNC-machine can be described by two separate sets of components.
The components of these sets are combined together according to the “parents-children” criterion.
The first set consists of the tilting head with the spindle unit (B-axis) mounted on the vertical saddle
(Z-axis). The vertical saddle is mounted on the horizontal saddle (X-axis).
Horizontal saddle
Vertical saddle
Tilting head
The second set consists of the rotary table (C-axis) mounted on the sliding carriage (Y-axis).
Rotary table
Sliding carriage
805
The table of a Head-Head CNC-machine is a non-moving component mounted on the base.
The moving parts are described by the following “parents-children” hierarchy. The tilting spindle
unit (B-axis) is mounted on the rotary head (C-axis). The rotary head is mounted on the saddle
performing movements in the YZ-plane. The saddle is mounted on the column (X-axis).
Column
Saddle
Table
Rotary head
Base
Tilting spindle unit
The CNC-machine has to be defined according to the “parents-children” relations between the
CNC-machine components; these relations determine the order of the components definition and
dependencies between them.
Defining the CNC-machine housing
At the first stage of the CNC-machine definition, you have to

define the non-moving components of the machine such as
housing.
In the Machine tab, right-click on the root item of the CNC-

machine definition tree and choose the Add Geometry command
from the list.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
806
10. Simulation
Choose the STL model of the housing located in the Machine definition folder.
The housing part is displayed in the graphic area, and the default housing component name is
displayed in the CNC-machine definition tree.
Select the component name in the tree to manage its properties

in the element properties table. In the ID field, enter the
following name: mh_Housing.
When the mh_ prefix appears in the ID of a CNC-machine component,

this component is considered as a housing part. The components defined
with this prefix can be hidden during the simulation using the Show/Hide
machine housing button. In this case, the ID value is set to mh_Housing.
807
The element properties table also enables you to control
over the visibility and the visual properties (color, transparency,
reflectivity) of the CNC-machine components. Choose the
appropriate settings for the housing component and click on the
Save Machine button to save the machine definition in the
previously created XML file.
All the additional non-moving components are defined in the

same manner. When this stage is finished, you have to start the
definition of the moving components of the CNC-machine.
Defining the translational axis
When all the non-moving components of the CNC-machine are defined, you have to define the
moving components. Moving components have to be defined according to their “parents-children”
dependencies. The order of the definition is the following: “parents” have to be defined before
the “children”. In case of Table-Table machines, the first component to be defined is the saddle
performing the Y-axis translational movements.
Right-click on the CNC-machine name in the definition tree

and choose Y Axis from the Add Transl. Axis submenu.
The Y axis item appears under the root item in the machine
definition tree.
In the element properties table, define the orientation of the axis by specifying a vector with three
coordinates.
808
10. Simulation
In this case, the defined translational axis is the Y-axis. Note that the direction is defined according
to the tool movements along the axis. The tool movement in the positive Y-axis direction causes the
saddle movement in the negative Y-direction.
Saddle movement
direction
Tool movement
direction
Z Y
X
Therefore, the direction must be defined with the following
values: 0.00000 -1.00000 0.00000. This vector defines the
direction of the CNC component movement when the tool
moves in the positive axis direction.
In the Direction section of the element properties table, set

Y to -1.
Now you need to define the limitation of the translational

movements along the axis. The saddle performs the Y-axis
movements within the range of the minimal and maximal
limit values. Set the Min Limit is -350 and Max Limit is 350.
The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values must be the same as those
defined in the Y-coordinate of the trans_axis_min_limit and the
trans_axis_max_limit parameters specified in the MAC file of the
CNC-machine.
809
When the translational axis parameters are defined, specify the
geometry of the part performing the translational movement along
the axis. In this case, this part is the saddle.
In the machine definition tree, right-click on the Y axis item and

choose Add Geometry from the menu.
In the same manner as described in the Defining the CNC-machine

housing section, choose the STL model of the necessary component
(saddle).
The saddle model is displayed in the graphic area.
810
10. Simulation
Rename the newly added component in the element properties

table.
Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab

to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the
axis.
Click on the Save Machine button to save the machine definition in the previously created
XML file.
Defining the rotational axis
Defining the tilting table
At this stage, you have to define the tilting table

providing the B-axis rotation.
In the machine definition tree, right-click on the

Y axis item and choose B Axis from the Add
Rot. Axis submenu.
The B item appears under the Y axis item in the

machine definition tree.
In the element properties table, define the Direction

and the Center point of the rotational axis. These
parameters determine the location and orientation of
the rotational axis.
811
The tilting axis performs the rotation around the X-axis. Note that the positive tool
movement around the rotational axis (positive direction of the B-axis) is performed by
the negative rotation of the tilting table.
-
+
+
Z Y
X
The positive direction of the rotational axis of the
tilting table is defined by the right hand rule. Therefore
the axis Direction parameters values must be the
following: -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000.
The axis direction has to be defined according to the

axis direction defined in the rotate_axis_dir2
parameter in the MAC file.
The Center point parameters define the location

of the axis relative to the CNC-machine origin.
This parameter has to be defined according to the
rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameter in the MAC file.
In this case, the tilting axis is located 30 mm below
the table. Therefore, the Center point values must be
defined as follows: 0.00000 0.00000 -30.00000.
Define the minimum and maximum rotation angle

limits. In the Limits section, set the Min Limit value to
-100° and the Max Limit value to 100°.
The defined Min Limit and Max Limit

values have to be the same as the
rot_axis_min_limit1 and the
rot_axis_max_limit1 values specified
in the MAC file of the CNC-machine.
At this stage, the rotational axis is defined.
812
10. Simulation
Define the geometry of the tilting table. In the CNC-

machine definition tree, right-click on the just defined
rotational axis item and choose the Add Geometry
The Elements properties dialog box is displayed.
In the same manner as described in the Defining the

CNC-machine housing section, choose the tilting table
model STL file.
The tilting table geometry is displayed in the graphic area.
Rename the newly added component in the element properties table.
Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to

check the translational movements of the
defined geometry along the axis.
Click on the Save Machine button to save the machine definition in the previously
created XML file.
813
Defining the rotary table
At this stage, you have to define the rotary table that provides the C-axis rotation.
In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click

on the B axis item and choose C Axis from the
Add Rot. Axis submenu.
The C axis item appears under the B axis item in

the machine definition tree.
In the element properties table, define the axis parameters.
The rotary axis performs the rotation around the

Z-axis. Note that the positive tool rotation around
the rotational axis (positive direction of the C-axis) is
performed by the negative rotation of the rotary table;
the positive direction of the rotational axis of the rotary
table is defined by the right hand rule. Therefore the
axis Direction parameters values must be the following:
0.00000 0.00000 -1.00000.
The axis direction has to be defined according to the axis direction defined in the
rotate_axis_dir1 parameter in the MAC file.
814
10. Simulation
The Center point parameters define the location of the axis

relative to the CNC-machine origin. This parameter has
to be defined according to the rot_axis_base_pnt1
parameter in the MAC file. The rotation B-axis passes
through the CNC-machine origin. Therefore, the Center
point has to be defined with the following values: 0.00000
0.00000 0.00000.
Define the minimum and maximum rotation angle limits.

In the Limits section, set the Min Limit value is -1000° and
the Max Limit value to 1000°.
The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have

to be the same as the rot_axis_min_limit0
and the rot_axis_max_limit0 values
specified in the MAC file of the CNC-machine.
At this stage, the rotational axis is defined.
Define the geometry of the rotary table. In the CNC-

machine definition tree, right-click on the just defined
C axis item and choose the Add Geometry command
from the menu.
In the same manner as explained in the Defining the

CNC-machine housing section, choose the rotary table
model STL file.
815
The rotary table geometry is displayed in the graphic area.
Rename the newly added component in the

element properties table.
Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab

to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.
Click on the Save Machine button to save the machine definition in the XML file.
Defining the translational axis
At this stage, you have to define the sliding carriage that performs the X-axis movements and the
spindle unit that moves along the Z-axis. These two components are joined into a separate set; the
movements of this set are independent from the movements of Y-, B- and C-axes.
Right-click on the root item in the CNC-machine definition tree and choose X from the
Add Transl. Axis submenu. Define the X-axis direction. Set the following limits for the axis: the Min
Limit value to -380 and the Max Limit value to 380.
The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have to be the same as those
defined in the X-coordinate of the trans_axis_min_limit and the
CNC-machine.
816
10. Simulation
Define the geometry for the X-axis. Choose the STL model of the sliding carriage.
Define the Z-axis. Note that the Z-axis is a “child” of the X-axis. Define the proper axis direction.
Set the following limits for the Z-axis: set the Min Limit value to 0 and the Max Limit value to 300.
The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have to be the same as those
defined in the Z-coordinate of the trans_axis_min_limit and the
CNC-machine.
Define the geometry for the Z-axis. Choose the STL model of the spindle unit.
Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.
817
At this stage, the definition of the CNC-machine components is finished. The related parameters
of the MAC file for this machine are listed below:
;Sim Five axis

kinematic_type = TABLE_TABLE_new
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
rotate_axis_dir2 = -1.0000 0.0000 0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.0000 0.0000 -30.0000, 0.0000 0.0000
-1.1811
abs_machine_coord = N
machine_simulation = table_table
use_machine_limits = Y
trans_axis_min_limit = -380.0000 -350.0000 0.0000
At the next stages, you have to define the default workpiece, stock and tool that will be used for
this machine. These defaults enable you to define the kinematic relationship between the CNC-
machine components and workpiece, stock and tool. During the simulation, these defaults will be
overwritten with the actual CAM-Part data.
818
10. Simulation
Defining the workpiece
At this stage, you have to define the default workpiece and its
kinematic relationship with the CNC-machine components.
The workpiece is located on the CNC-machine rotary table

(C-axis). In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on
the C-axis item and choose Workpiece Transform from the
Add Coord. Transform submenu. This command enables you
to define the kinematic relationship between the workpiece
and the CNC-machine components.
The workpiece_transform item appears in the machine

definition tree. This name is hard-coded in SolidCAM and
cannot be changed.
Now you have to define the default model of the workpiece.

Right-click on the just added workpiece_transform item in the
CNC-machine definition tree and choose Workpiece from the
Add Dynamic Element submenu.
The workpiece item appears in

the machine definition tree.
The workpiece geometry is related to the

werkstueck.stl file. In the process of the CNC-
machine definition this file does not exist. It will
be automatically created during the simulation.
Every time during the simulation this file will be
overwritten with the actual target model data.
Click on the Save Machine button to save the machine

definition in the XML file.
819
Defining the stock
At this stage, you have to define the default stock and its kinematic relationship with the CNC-
machine components.
Similar to the workpiece, the stock is located on the

CNC-machine rotary table (C-axis). All the coordinate
transformations are the same for the workpiece and the
stock. Therefore, you do not need to define a separate
coordinate transformation for the stock. Use the existing
transformation of the workpiece.
In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the

workpiece_transform coordinate transformation item and
choose Stock from the Add Dynamic Element submenu.
This command enables you to define the geometry of the
stock.
The Stock item is displayed in the machine definition tree.
The stock geometry with the built-in name Stock

is related to the stock.stl file. In the process of the
CNC-machine definition this file does not exist. It
will be automatically created during the simulation.
Every time during the simulation this file will be
overwritten with the actual stock model data.
820
10. Simulation
Defining the fixture
At this stage, you have to define the fixture and its kinematic relationship with the CNC-machine
components.
Since the fixture is clamping the workpiece on the CNC-

machine table and these components are always moving
together, all the coordinate transformations are the same for
workpiece and fixture. Therefore, you do not need to define
a separate coordinate transformation for the fixture. Use
the existing transformation of the workpiece. The fixture
definition should be added to the CNC-machine definition
tree under the workpiece_transform item.

workpiece_transform coordinate transformation item and
choose the Add Geometry command from the menu. This
command enables you to define the geometry of the fixture.
The Fixture item is displayed in the machine definition tree.
The fixture geometry with the built-in name Fixture

is related to the fixture.stl file. If you have no
fixture.stl file, you can create it by copying and
renaming any other *.stl file. In this case, the content
of the STL file is not important, because it will
be overwritten with the relevant data during the
simulation for every CAM-Part.
821
Defining the tool path
The tool path is located around the workpiece. When the

workpiece is rotated to a new orientation, the tool path
has to be rotated together with the workpiece. All the
coordinate transformations are the same for workpiece
and tool path. Therefore, you do not need to define
a separate coordinate transformation for the tool path.
Use the existing transformation of the workpiece.

workpiece_transform coordinate transformation item
and choose Toolpath from the Add Dynamic Element
submenu.
The Toolpath item is displayed in the machine definition

tree.
The tool path geometry with the built-in name

Toolpath is related to the toolpath.asc file. In the
process of the CNC-machine definition this file
does not exist. It will be automatically created during
the simulation. Every time during the simulation
this file will be overwritten with the actual tool path.
822
10. Simulation
Defining the tool
At this stage, you have to define the default tool and

its kinematic relationship with the CNC-machine
components.
The tool with holder is mounted on the CNC-machine

spindle unit (Z-axis). In the CNC-machine definition
tree, right-click on the Z axis item and choose Holder
Transform from the Add Coord. Transform submenu.
This command enables you to define the kinematic
relationship between the tool and the CNC-machine
components.
The holder_transform item is displayed in the CNC-

machine definition tree.
Now you have to define the default model of the tool.

Right-click on the just added item in the CNC-machine
definition tree and choose Tool from the Add Dynamic
Element submenu.
823
The Tool item is displayed in the machine definition tree.
The tool geometry with the built-in name

Tool is related to the tool.stl file. In the
process of the CNC-machine definition this
file does not exist. It will be automatically
created during the simulation. Every time
during the simulation this file will be
overwritten with the actual tool data.
Click on the Save Machine button to save the machine

definition in the XML file.
Collision control
This functionality enables you to detect and avoid possible

collisions between all components of the CNC-machine in the
process of machining.
The understanding of the CNC-machine

construction and kinematics is necessary for the
collision definition. In case of Table-Table CNC-
machines definition, the machine construction
precludes the collisions between the saddle part and
the tilting and rotary tables. The collisions between
the sliding carriage and saddle are also precluded
by the CNC-machine construction and kinematics.
There is no necessity to check the CNC-machine
components during their movements for such
collisions.
The collisions between spindle unit (with tool

holder and tool) and saddle (with mounted tilting
table and rotary table) are possible. Such collisions
have to be detected and avoided.
824
10. Simulation
In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the root item

and choose the Add CollCheck command from the menu.
The cc1 item is displayed in the machine definition tree, and a table
divided into two sections is displayed in the bottom part of the
Machine tab.
This table enables you to define two groups of CNC-machine components for which the collision
checking will be performed.
Click on the Add Object button and choose a component from the list to
be added into a group.
To remove a component from the group, select it and click on the Remove
Object button.
825
The tool and spindle unit components should be included in the first group. The saddle, tilting table,
rotary table and workpiece components should be included into the second group. The collision
checking will be performed between the components of the two groups.
Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the collision checking
definition. When a collision is detected, the contacting components are
highlighted.
826
10. Simulation
Defining the coordinate transformation
In some cases, the CNC-machine spindle is not aligned

in the positive Z-axis direction. For example, an angular
attachment enables you to transform the vertical spindle
rotation (around the Z-axis) into the horizontal rotation
(around the Y-axis). In this case, the Z-axis of the
spindle unit is not parallel to the default main spindle
direction.
In the illustration below, the default XYZ coordinates

describe the main spindle direction (coordinate system
of the CNC-machine). The X’Y’Z’ coordinate system
describes the angular attachment. These coordinate
systems have different axes orientations.
The coordinate transformation between the default

Y'- coordinate system and the spindle coordinate system has
Z'- X'+
to be performed in order to enable correct execution of
the tool path by the tool mounted in the spindle unit.
X'- Z'+
Y'+
To perform the necessary coordinate transformation,
Z+ you have to add a new coordinate transformation
Y- X+
(Coord. Transform) item into the CNC-machine
X-
definition tree. Hierarchically, this item has to be
Y+
Z- “parent” to the holder_transform item.
The ID of this coordinate transformation item is not important. Use the spindle_transform name
for the ID definition.
The element properties table contains a transformation matrix for

the spindle_transform item. Using this matrix, you can define the
transformation of the coordinate system. In other words, you can
define the orientation and location of a transformed coordinate
system relative (X’Y’Z’) to the coordinate system of the CNC-
machine (XYZ).
The columns of this matrix describe the axis orientation of the CNC-machine coordinate system
relative to the transformed coordinate system. The X column defines the direction of the X-axis;
the Y column defines that of the Y-axis, and the Z column defines that of the Z-axis. The Shift
column defines the offset of the transformed coordinate system origin relative to the CNC-machine
coordinate system origin.
827
The rows of the matrix define the orientation of the transformed coordinate system relative to the
CNC-machine coordinate system. The X row defines the direction of the X-axis, the Y row defines
that of the Y-axis, and the Z row defines that of the Z-axis.
By default, the diagonal of the transformation matrix is filled with 1 values.

This means that the initial coordinate system of the CNC-machine and the
transformed coordinate system are the same and coordinate transformation
is not performed. Such transformation matrixes were used for the
workpiece_transform and holder_transform definition.
In case a transformation is required, you have to fill the transformation matrix.
The transformed coordinate system for the angular attachment discussed before is obtained by the
90° rotation of the CNC-machine coordinate system around the X-axis.
Z+ Y'-
Y- X+ Z'- X'+
X- Y+ X'- Z'+
Z- Y'+
CNC machine Transformed

coordinate system coordinate system
The resulting transformation is as follows:

Z(Y'=-1)
X(X'=+1) X'(X=+1)
Z'(Y=+1)
Y(Z'=+1)
Y'(Z=-1)
CNC-machine Transformed
coordinate system coordinate system
Therefore the matrix has to be filled as shown below.
828
10. Simulation
XML file structure
This topic describes the XML file structure using the Table-Table CNC-machine definition example.
The XML-based definition of a CNC-machine consists of several commands (tags), each of them
describes the specific item of the CNC-machine definition tree.
Each tag is enclosed between the “<” and “>” signs.
Example:
<machine_definition>
Some XML constructions consist of opening and closing tags; the closing tag starts from the “/”
symbol.
Example:
CNC-machine definition tags
</machine_definition>
For some tags, opening and closing can be performed in the single tag.
Example:
<machine_data name=”Table_table” units=”metric” />
XML tags can contain a number of variables.
Example:
name=”Table_table”;
here name is the variable name and ”Table_table” is the value. The value must be enclosed in
quotation marks.
The automatically generated XML file is the following:
The order of the commands (tags) of the XML file is the same as the order of the CNC-machine
components in the CNC-machine definition tree.
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”iso-8859-1” ?>
This string is similar for each XML file; it describes the used version of XML format and encoding.
This tag starts the CNC-machine definition.
829
<machine_data name=”Table_table” units=”metric” />
This tag defines the name of the CNC-machine and the used units.
<axis id=”X” type=”translation” x=”1.00000000” y=”0.00000000”
z=”0.00000000” minvalue=”-380.000000” maxvalue=”380.000000”>
This tag starts the X-axis definition. The <axis> tag enables you to define the type of the axis
(translational/rotational), axis orientation and limits.
<geometry name=”Sliding carriage” geo=”table_table-x_axis-1.stl”
clrr=”0.00000000” clrg=”0.00000000” clrb=”1.00000000” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />
This tag defines the geometry of the part performing X-axis movements. The name variable defines
the geometry ID. The geo variable defines the STL file used for the geometry definition. The
clrr, clrg and clrb variables define the RGB components of the geometry color. The values of
these parameters have to be in the range from 0 to 1. The alpha variable defines the transparency
of the geometry. The reflectivity variable defines the reflectivity of the geometry.
<axis id=”Z” type=”translation” x=”0.00000000” y=”0.00000000”

z=”1.00000000” minvalue=”0.000000” maxvalue=”300.000000” >
<geometry name=”Spindle unit” geo=”table_table-z_axis-1.stl”
The Z-axis definition.

<transform id=”holder_transform” initialvalue=”1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000”>
This tag starts the tool transformation definition. The initialvalue variable defines the used
transformation matrix.
<geometry name=”tool” geo=”tool.stl” clrr=”0.00000000”
clrg=”1.00000000” clrb=”0.00000000” alpha=”0.0” reflectivity=”0.0”
objtype=”tool” holderr=”0.00000000” holderg=”1.00000000”
holderb=”1.00000000” />
This tag defines the geometry of the tool (with the tool holder). The clrr, clrg and clrb
variables define the RGB components of the tool color. The holderr, holderg and holderb
variables define the RGB components of the tool holder color.
</transform>
Closing tag for the tool transformation definition.
830
10. Simulation
</axis>
Closing tag for the Z-axis definition.

</axis>
Closing tag for the X-axis definition.

<axis id=”Y” type=”translation” x=”0.00000000” y=”-1.00000000”
z=”0.00000000” minvalue=”-350.000000” maxvalue=”350.000000”>
Start Y-axis definition.

<geometry name=”saddle” geo=”table_table-y_axis-1.stl”
Definition of the CNC-machine part performing Y-axis movements.

<axis id=”B” type=”rotation” x=”-1.00000000” y=”0.00000000”
z=”0.00000000” minvalue=”-100.000000” maxvalue=”100.000000”
rzx=”0.00000000” rzy=”0.00000000” rzz=”-30.00000000”>
Start B-axis definition. For rotational axes the rzx, rzy and rzz variables define the location of
the rotation base point.
<geometry name=”tilting table” geo=”table_table-b_axis-1.stl”
Definition of the CNC-machine part performing B-axis movements.

<axis id=”C” type=”rotation” x=”0.00000000” y=”0.00000000”
z=”-1.00000000” minvalue=”-1000.000000” maxvalue=”1000.000000”
rzx=”0.00000000” rzy=”0.00000000” rzz=”0.00000000”>
Start C-axis definition.

<geometry name=”Rotary table” geo=”table_table - table-1.stl”
Definition of the CNC-machine part performing C-axis movements.

<transform id=”workpiece_transform” initialvalue=”1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000”>
This tag starts the workpiece transformation definition. The initialvalue variable defines the
used transformation matrix.
831
<geometry name=”werkstueck” geo=”werkstueck.stl” clrr=”0.00000000”
objtype=”workpiece” />
Workpiece geometry definition.

<geometry name=”stock” geo=”stock.stl” clrr=”0.00000000”
objtype=”stock” />
Stock geometry definition.

<geometry name=”toolpath” geo=”toolpath.asc” clrr=”0.80000001”
objtype=”toolpath” />
Tool path definition.

</transform>
Closing tag for the workpiece transformation definition.

</axis>
Closing tag for the C-axis definition.

</axis>
Closing tag for the B-axis definition.

</axis>
Closing tag for the Y-axis definition.

<geometry name=”mh_Housing” geo=”table_table - base-1.stl”
Housing model definition.

<collcheck id=”cc1” group1=”Spindle unit,tool” dynamic1=”true”
dynamic2=”true” active=”true” group2=”Rotary table,saddle,tilting
table,werkstueck” />
Collision checking definition. The group1 and group2 variables enable you to define groups of
CNC-machine components.
</machine_definition>
Closing tag for the CNC-machine definition.
832
10. Simulation
10.10 External Simulation
The External Simulator feature enables you to perform simulation of operations in a separate
window, in parallel to continued working in SolidCAM.
This feature provides you with the following advantages:
• You can continue adding new operations while a SolidVerify simulation of the previous
operations is running in the background.
• Building updated stocks can be performed, which takes a considerable amount of time
in case of large and complex parts, while working with SolidCAM operations.
When the External Simulator window is displayed, all the operations

included in the simulation (and the related items such as geometries,
coordinate systems, and so forth) are marked by the lock icon in
SolidCAM Manager; this locking means that these operations cannot be
edited, deleted or recalculated. Also new operations cannot be inserted
between the locked operations. However, you can continue adding new
operations after the existing ones, while the simulation is running.
833
10.10.1 Show SolidCAM Manager
When this check box is selected, the Operations header of the SolidCAM Manager tree along with
the simulation control panel is displayed in the left portion of the External Simulator window.
When this check box is not selected, the External Simulator window displays only the graphic area
of the simulation, with the control buttons above it.
834
10. Simulation
10.10.2 Run as main process/Run as background process
Since simulation is a process that takes up a lot of system resources, you may need to
indicate the priority of the External simulator as a secondary task (while SolidCAM is
a main task).
When the Run as main process option is chosen, the External simulator uses system resources,
regardless of the other processes, on as-needed basis; SolidCAM might then run slower.
When the Run as background process option is chosen, SolidCAM has higher priority than the
External simulator in terms of using system resources; therefore you can continue working with the
CAM-Part while the simulation is running.
For information on the Simulation toolbar, see topic 10.5.2.
835
836
GCode 11
This command enables you to generate and display the GCode file for
the CAM-Part or for machining operations. The GCode file can then be
transferred to your CNC-machine using a floppy disk, via the DNC (RS
232) or Ethernet connection.
The format of the NC-program depends on the Controller you selected
in the Milling Part Data dialog box. The GCode output format can be
customized using the GPP interface or by changing the controller’s
*.mac and *.gpp files.
 Generating the GCode

This command enables you to generate and display the GCode file for the CAM-Part or for
machining operations. The GCode file can then be transferred to your CNC-machine using a floppy
disk, via the DNC (RS 232) or Ethernet connection.
The format of the GCode depends on the controller you selected in the Milling Part Data dialog
box. The GCode output format can be customized either by using the GPP interface or by changing
the controller’s *.mac and *.gpp files. Contact technical support for more information on post-
processor customization.
The GCode files location is determined on the GCode Generation page of the Part Settings dialog
838
11. GCode
11.1 Generate
This option generates all the GCode files for the CAM-Part. Then the file is displayed using the text
editor defined in the Editors page of the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
If any changes were made in the operation or in the *.mac or the *.gpp post-
processor files, you have to generate the GCode again.
GCode All
This command is available when you right-click on the Operations header. You will receive one
GCode file including the necessary tool changes, unless you have separated operations or operation
groups using split marks. The GCode file will be saved to the CAM-Part’s directory and will carry
the name: <part_name>.tap.
839
Generating GCode for a single operation or for a group of operations
1. Click on the operation you want to generate the GCode for or select a group
of operations using the mouse in combination with the Shift or Ctrl key. Then
right-click and choose Generate from the GCode menu.
2. The GCode File Name dialog box prompts you to enter a name for the *.tap
file.
840
11. GCode
11.2 List
This option enables you to display a list of the already generated GCode files for the current CAM-
Part or operation. The GCode (*.tap) file will be opened with the text editor defined in Editors
Settings. Use the editor to change, save or print the GCode file.
11.3 Copy
This option enables you to copy GCode files. When you choose this option, the list of the generated
GCode files for the current CAM-Part is displayed in the Copy GCode dialog box.
1. Choose the *.tap file you want to copy to another directory (for multiple
selections, use the Ctrl or the Shift key).
2. Transfer the list of files you want to copy to the middle field by clicking the
arrow.
3. Choose the drive and the directory you want to copy to.
4. Click on the Copy button in order to execute the command.
11.4 Print
This option enables you to print the GCode file.
841
842
SolidCAM
Settings 12
The SolidCAM Settings feature enables you to define a set of SolidCAM
defaults such as folders, units, tolerances, CNC-controllers, etc.
In the settings dialog box, you can change the path to related
applications, units, tolerances, default machines, editors, and color
settings for SolidCAM. The Settings register enables you to easily view
and edit the current program preferences and options.
 User Directories settings

 Units settings
 Simulation settings
 Synchronization settings
 Rest Material & SolidVerify settings
 Tool settings
12.1 Introduction
The SolidCAM Settings dialog box enables you

to change the path to related applications, units,
tolerances, default machines, editors, and color
settings for SolidCAM. This dialog box enables
you to easily view and edit the current program
preferences and options.
The following pages are available in the SolidCAM
• User directories
• Default CNC-Controller
• Units
• Synchronization
• Compressed CAM-Part
• Updated Stock & SolidVerify
• Tool settings
• Color settings
• Default Geometry Names
• Interoperational tool movements
• Auto-save
• Automatic CAM-Part definition
• Tool path simulation
• Machine simulation
• DNC settings
• Editors
• External Program
• Machining Process
• User interface
• CoordSys definition
• GCode generation
• Tool search settings
• Internal post-processor
• CAM Manager
• Template defaults
• Miscellaneous settings
• CAM Messages
844
12. Settings
Managing SolidCAM settings
SolidCAM enables you to save the SolidCAM settings as an external file and then load the saved
file into SolidCAM. Furthermore, SolidCAM enables you to reset the customized settings to their
default values.
• Saving the settings
The Save button enables you to save the SolidCAM settings in a file. When you
click on this button, the Save As dialog box is displayed.
The default location is the SolidCAM User directory displayed in the browser. The
default file name SolidCAM_Settings.screg is used.
When you click on the Save button in the dialog box, all the customized settings are
stored in the settings file.
845
• Loading the settings
The Load button enables you to

load the SolidCAM settings stored in
the previously saved file. When you click
on this button, the Open dialog box is
displayed.
The default location is the SolidCAM

User directory displayed in the browser.
All the settings files located in this or
other location are available to be chosen.
When a settings file is chosen and the

Open button is clicked, SolidCAM
displays the following message:
When the message is confirmed, SolidCAM loads the settings file. During the loading,
SolidCAM overwrites the parameters values with the values stored in the settings
file. When the loading is successfully completed, the SolidCAM Settings dialog box is
updated and displays the updated parameters values.
Load options
This section provides you with the choice of parameters to be loaded:
• When the SolidCAM Settings only option is chosen, only the parameters that
can be edited in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box are loaded.
• When the Entire SolidCAM environment option is chosen, the whole

branch of current SolidCAM version that can be edited in the Registry Editor
is loaded. This complete environment includes additional items not available
within SolidCAM Settings e.g. last used positions of some SolidCAM dialog
boxes.
846
12. Settings
• Resetting the settings to default values
When launched for the first time, SolidCAM creates a set of settings stored in the
SolidCAM branch of the Windows registry. These settings are available in the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box and can be customized. SolidCAM provides you with the possibility
to reset the customized SolidCAM Settings to their default values.
• The Reset Page button enables you to reset all the parameters of the
current settings page to their default values. When you click on this button,
a confirmation message is displayed:
When this message is confirmed, SolidCAM resets all the settings of the
current page.
• The Reset All button enables you to reset all the parameters of the
SolidCAM settings to their default values. A confirmation message is displayed:
When this message is confirmed, SolidCAM resets all the settings to their
default values.
847
12.2 User Directories settings
This page enables you to set the path to your post-processor files and to your user directory.
12.2.1 User Directory for SolidCAM Parts
The user directory defines the default folder in

which CAM-Parts and GCode files created with
SolidCAM are stored. Whenever you load a CAM-
Part, SolidCAM browses the user directory for
SolidCAM Part files (*.prt). All newly created CAM-
Part files are placed in the user directory by default.
1. Click on the Browse button. The

browser window is loaded.
2. Choose the required folder from
the browser.
12.2.2 User Directory for SolidCAM Tables
SolidCAM uses this folder to store Tool Tables and Machining processes.
The *.tab file in the SolidCAM Tool Table file contains detailed information about tools.
The *.mpt file is the Machining Process Table file. In addition to this file, SolidCAM creates the
Machining Process folder with a set of SolidCAM auxiliary files.
1. Click on the Browse button. The browser window is loaded.

2. Choose the required folder from the browser.
12.2.3 Excel file for Threading tables
This field displays the path to the location of the Threading table of standard pitch values.
848
12. Settings
12.3 Default CNC-controller settings
12.3.1 Post-processor files directory

GPP files with the extensions *.mac and *.gpp are
post-processor files used by SolidCAM.
The *.mac file contains information about the CNC-

machine, e.g. number of simultaneous axes, available
cycles, default tool positioning, etc.
The *.gpp file translates the calculated tool path into

GCode. The GCode format, cycle definitions, etc. of
your GCode file is controlled in this file.
You have to specify the path to the folder where

you keep the *.mac and *.gpp files you have received
from SolidCAM. The post-processors that come with
the evaluation or demo version are installed in the
SolidCAM program directory.
1. Click on the Browse button. The browser window will be loaded.
2. Choose the folder you want from the browser.
12.3.2 CNC-controllers
SolidCAM enables you to define the following default machine controllers:
• Milling CNC-Controller
• Turning CNC-Controller
• Milling&Turning CNC-Controller
• WireCut CNC-Controller
• Mill-Turn CNC-Controller
The chosen post-processor will be used as a default machine, which means it

will appear in the Milling Part Data dialog box as the controller for a new CAM-
Part. Naturally, you can change the controller for the CAM-Part with the list
field if you want to use another machine controller.
1. Click on the Browse button. A list of post-processors
available in your Post-processor files directory will be
displayed in the Machines list.
2. Double-click on the machine you want to use as default.
849
12.4 Units settings
This page enables you to define the unit system,

spline approximation, chain selection, rest material
calculation and fillet size for the last cut settings.
12.4.1 Metric/Inch
This option enables you to select the unit system.
SolidCAM saves the information about the units in
which the CAM-Part was defined in the CAM-Part
database.
The following rules apply to this new feature:
1. When defining a new CAM-Part, SolidCAM checks both the default Units settings and
the units of the SolidWorks model. If these units are different, SolidCAM converts the
units of the SolidWorks model according to the CAM Settings.
2. When opening an existing CAM-Part created with SolidCAM, SolidCAM sets the Units
settings according to those of the CAM-Part.
3. When opening an existing CAM-Part created with previous SolidCAM releases,

SolidCAM works according to the default Units settings and does not save the unit
information in the CAM-Part.
These rules enable SolidCAM to prevent inconsistency between SolidCAM Units settings,
CAM-Part Units and Units of the CAD model.
12.4.2 Approximation
Whenever you use a spline edge (NURBS) to select a chain geometry for profiles, working areas,
sections etc., the spline will be transformed to lines. The Spline approximation value defines the
tolerance that is used when the spline is transformed into lines.
Example:
When you import an IGES surface, the surface boundaries will usually be defined with spline
curves. If you mill the outside contour of the surface with a Profile operation, you have to select
the boundary as the profile geometry. You will receive straight edges and facets on the contour if
you do not adjust the spline approximation to your requirements. If you select a tighter tolerance,
the GCode file will show more points on the contour and produce a smoother edge.
This tolerance does not affect operations that work on 2D contours such as arcs, lines or circles.
850
12. Settings
12.4.3 Chain selection

The Automatic selection function for chain geometries uses certain tolerances to decide whether
two consequent elements are connected or independent. The behavior of this function depends on
the Gap between the entities.
Gap minimum and Gap maximum tolerance

Gap
The Auto select feature (see topic 4.5.7) can function in three different
ways:
• If the gap between the edges is smaller than the minimum

chain gap, the system automatically continues the chain
and closes the gap.
• If the gap is between the minimum and maximum values,
you are asked whether the gap should be closed. If you
answer Yes, the gap is automatically closed.
• If the gap is larger than the maximum value for a chain gap, the following message is
displayed:
These tolerances can be defined separately for each geometry in the Geometry
Editdialog box (see topic 4.5).
Constant-Z Tolerance
When you work in the Auto Constant Z mode, all connected entities on the same Z-level of the
current coordinate system will be selected. This tolerance defines the maximum deviation from the
Z plane where an element will still be recognized as being on the same Z-level.
The Gap and Constant Z tolerances you should use depend mainly on the size
of your geometries and the accuracy of your models or imported 2D/3D
files. The default setting can be used for most of the common models, but
when you work with very intricate CAM-Parts, for example, a large max.
gap tolerance can cause problems as you might close contours in places that
should normally be not connected. To avoid this, answer No to the message
“Do you want to close the gap?” and switch to single curve mode to make
sure you selected the correct elements.
851
12.4.4 Fillet size for last cut
This parameter defines the maximum allowed value of the radius for the external fillet.
For more information on the Fillet size for last cut option, see topic 6.1.2.
12.4.5 Tool Start and Clearance Levels

During each Coordinate System definition, SolidCAM automatically sets the Tool Start Level and
Clearance Level values.
The Tool start level defines the Z-level at which the tool will start.
The Clearance level is the Z-level to which the tool rapids when moving from
one operation to another (in case the tool did not change).
These parameters are defined relative to the Part Upper Level parameter according to the following
formulas:
Tool Start Level = Part Upper Level + Tool Start Level Delta;
Clearance Level = Part Upper Level + Clearance Level Delta;
where the Clearance Level Delta and Tool Start Level Delta are constant values defined in the
SolidCAM Settings.
The defined values of the Clearance Level Delta and Tool Star Level Delta will be used for the each
CoordSys defined by SolidCAM including CoordSys positions automatically defined by SolidCAM
AFRM module.
Default values:
Metric:
Tool Start Level Delta = 50; Clearance Level Delta = 10

Inch:
Tool Start Level Delta = 2; Clearance Level Delta = 0.4
SolidCAM have to use round numbers for Tool Start Level and Clearance Level values.
SolidCAM enables you to define the number of decimal units for rounding via the Rounding box
of the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
• The default value of Decimal places for Metric is 0.
• The default value of Decimal places for Inch is 3.
852
12. Settings
12.5 Synchronization settings
12.5.1 Synchronization of CAM geometry

with design model
Check synchronization always

The synchronization check is performed automatically
each time you click on the SolidCAM Manager tree.
• Ask before synchronization check

When this check box is selected, after
every change in the part or in the assembly
and rebuild, SolidCAM will prompt you
before checking the synchronization
of the geometries with the model or
sketches.
When this check box is not selected, the synchronization checking will be performed
without any message or question.
• Synchronize automatically
This option enables you to perform the synchronization of geometries automatically.
When this check box is selected, the synchronization check is performed and then all
the unsynchronized operations and geometries are automatically synchronized. When
the synchronization fails for certain operations or geometries, SolidCAM marks the
operations/geometries with an exclamation mark and deletes the operation tool path;
such operations are marked with asterisk.
This option is available only when the Check synchronization always check
box is selected.
• Calculate operations after the synchronization

This option enables you to perform the calculation of the synchronized operations
automatically. When this check box is selected, SolidCAM automatically calculates all
the synchronized operations. The operations marked with the exclamation mark are
not calculated.
This option is available only when the Automatically synchronize geometries

853
Check synchronization on user demand
In this case, SolidCAM will not check the synchronization automatically. The Check Synchronization
item in the Operation and Geometry menus is enabled and you can choose it to start the
synchronization.
12.5.2 Synchronization tolerance
These parameters define the value of the synchronization tolerance. During the synchronization
check, SolidCAM compares the SolidCAM geometry and the SolidWorks model. If the difference
between them is out of the specified tolerance (the SolidWorks model was updated); you have to
synchronize the geometry with the updated model.
• Wireframe Geometry
The value of the tolerance for the Wireframe geometry.
• 3D Model Geometry
The value of the tolerance for the 3D Model geometry.
12.5.3 Synchronization of design model with original model
Ask user to find original model if not located
Every time the CAM-Part is opened, SolidCAM automatically checks the correspondence of the
dates of the CAM-Part and the original SolidWorks design model. When the date of the original
SolidWorks model is later than the date of the CAM-Part creation, this means that the SolidWorks
original model has been updated. You can then replace the SolidWorks design model on which the
CAM-Part is based with the updated SolidWorks design model.
The Ask user to find original model if not located option defines the sequence of SolidCAM
operations in the case of the absence the original model. This option enables you to display the
browser window to find the original model if the model was not found in the location specified in
the CAM-Part.
12.5.4 Synchronization when design model configuration changes
This section enables you to define the synchronization settings if the configuration is changed. In
this case, the default Part Settings (see topic 2.10.2) of each newly defined CAM-Part are used for
synchronization.
854
12. Settings
12.6 Compressed CAM-Part settings
This page contains options related to working with

compressed CAM-Parts (see topic 2.11).
New CAM-Part
When the Create new CAM-Parts in compressed

modecheck box is selected, SolidCAM creates new
CAM-Parts in the compressed mode.
Close CAM-Part
When the Convert non-compressed CAM-Parts to

compressed mode check box is selected, each non-
compressed CAM-Part loaded into SolidCAM will be
converted to compressed mode.
SolidCAM Temporary folder
This field displays the current path for the SolidCAM Temporary folder and enables you to choose
a new one. Enter a new path or choose it with the Browse button. The SolidCAM Temporary folder
location cannot be changed when a CAM-Part is opened.
Only an existing folder can be defined, otherwise the following

You can create the folder by clicking on the Create button or define
a new location by clicking on the Browse button.
When opening, SolidCAM checks the existence of the temporary folder and possibility to save files
in it (via attributes). If the folder does not exist, SolidCAM displays the message shown above.
If the SolidCAM Temporary folder has attributes that enable file saving (read-only), SolidCAM will
remove these attributes.
If the default folder (C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local Setting\SolidCAM Temporary

files) does not exist, but is chosen in SolidCAM Settings, SolidCAM will create it automatically.
Compression factor
This option enables you to control the performance and ratio of compression for compressed
CAM-Parts. A higher setting results in slower compression but more compact compressed CAM-
Parts.
855
12.7 Tool Settings
12.7.1 Update Part Tool Table according to Machine Tool Table
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM

automatically updates the Part Tool Table with
tools from the Machine tool table defined in the
MAC-file, when the CNC-controller is changed
for the CAM-Part.
Only used tools numbers
This option enables you to update only those tools

that were used in operations. Tools that were not
used will be removed from the Part Tool Table.
Used tools that were not found in the Machine
Tool Table will be numbered with the next
sequential numbers.
Renumber tools from 1 when there is no

machine tool table
The option removes all unused tools from the Part Tool Table. The used tools will be renumbered
starting from number 1. If the Renumber tools from 1 when there is no Machine tool table option
is not active, SolidCAM removes all unused tools from the Part Tool Table. The used tools will not
be renumbered.
This option is available only if the Only used tools numbers option is
activated and only if the Machine Tool Table is not defined for the MAC of
the new CNC-controller.
12.7.2 Print in documentation – Only used tools
This option enables SolidCAM to include in the CAM-Part documentation only the tools from the
Part Tool Table used in operations.
856
12. Settings
12.7.3 Show in SolidCAM Manager
This option enables you to display the tool headers in SolidCAM Manager, whenever a new tool is
used. The Tool header is displayed before the operation where the new tool is used.
Diameter
This option displays the tool diameter.
Type
This option displays the tool type.
12.7.4 Import tools
The With tool number option enables you to import tools to the Part Tool Table with their tool
numbers. If this check box is not selected, SolidCAM will assign a first free number to the imported
tool.
12.7.5 Set Tool as Permanent when user changes the tool number
The Set Tool to be Permanent when user changes the tool number option enables SolidCAM to
automatically make tools Permanent when the Tool Number is changed.
857
12.8 Color settings
This page enables you to customize the colors

used in SolidCAM.
To change a color, click on the corresponding color

button. The standard Windows Color selection
dialog box will be displayed, enabling you to pick
the color you want.
Customizable display elements:
• CoordSys: displays the color of the current Coordinate System.
• Direction arrow: displays the color of arrows that indicate the direction of a chain
geometry.
• Point: displays the color of points during chain selection, e.g. the start point of an
element.
• Numbers: displays the color of numbers used to identify chain geometries.
• Section: displays the color of the section geometries.
• Clamp: displays the color of the clamp in SolidCAM Turning.
• Show tool: displays the color of the tool shown from the operation dialog box.
• Open edges: displays the color of the open edge geometry.
858
12. Settings
• Pick highlight: highlights selected elements, e.g. surfaces, solids, lines, etc.
• Show chain/3D model/Drill: displays the color of geometries when you use the Show
Geometry command.
• Chain Accept highlight: displays the color of chains that have been added to the currently
active geometry.
• General chain selection: highlights entities suggested as consequent elements of the

chain in auto select mode.
• Limit/Working area: displays the color of the Limit geometry and Working area geometry.
• Material boundaries: displays the color of the Material boundaries.
• Vertical Type Def. Depth: displays the color of numbers used to identify the depth of the
vertical type variable profile depth.
• Sloped Type Def. Depth: displays the color of numbers used to identify the depth of the
sloped type variable profile depth.
Load default color set
This option enables you to load the default colors of SolidCAM.
Host CAD background color
You can load a pre-defined set of colors for the customizable display elements. These colors have
been selected by SolidCAM for the standard background colors of the Host CAD systems used by
SolidCAM.
Choose the background color of the Host CAD from the list.
The Auto adjust option enables you to load the optimal colors for the
background of your Host CAD.
859
12.9 Default Geometry Names
SolidCAM enables you to define and use default

names for all geometry types.
When a new geometry is defined, the default name

is displayed in the geometry definition dialog. You
can either confirm it or change it. If the default
name is already used for a previously defined
geometry, SolidCAM offers you the default name
with the next sequential number.
860
12. Settings
12.10 Interoperational tool movements
This page contains options that enable you to

control the interoperational movements (see
topic 5.2.8).
These settings are used as

defaults for each new CAM-
Part. During the process of
a CAM-Part definition, the
settings can be customized
for the current CAM-Part
with the Interoperational tool
movements page of the Part
Settings dialog box (see topic
2.10.3).
Part Clearance level
All the interoperational movements are performed through the Part Clearance level.
Operation Start level
When two neighboring operations use the same Coordinate System, Tool and Tool offset, the
interoperational movement between them is performed through the Operation Start level of the
second operation.
SolidCAM enables you to change the settings even when a CAM-Part is opened.
When you switch to the Operation Start level mode, SolidCAM enables the Start level fields in all
the operations and defines the Start levels equal to the Part Clearance level of the related Coordinate
Systems. All the interoperational movements will be implemented through the appropriate Start
levels.
When you switch to the Part Clearance level mode, SolidCAM disables the Start level field in all the
operations. All the SolidCAM operations (except for Sim. 5-Axis operations) have to be recalculated.
After the recalculation, all the interoperational movements will be implemented through the Part
Clearance levels of the appropriate Coordinate Systems.
861
12.11 AutoSave settings
SolidCAM enables you to save your CAM-Part

automatically after a geometry is defined or edited.
862
12. Settings
12.12 Automatic CAM-Part definition
SolidCAM provides you with a number of features

aimed to automate the process of the CAM-Part
definition. Using these features enables you to
avoid a number of routine steps during the CAM-
Part definition and perform them automatically.
This page enables you to control the automatic

CAM-Part definition features.
These settings are used as default for each new CAM-Part. During the
process of a CAM-Part definition, the settings can be customized for the
current CAM-Part with the Automatic CAM-Part definition settings page of
the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.5).
12.12.1 Automatic Stock model definition

The Definition of Stock (as 3D box) option enables you to automatically define the 3D box stock
model during the CAM-Part definition. The stock model is based on all solid bodies and/or surfaces
of the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.
Define Stock by
This option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies and/or surfaces) from the
DesignModel to use.
Expand box at
This option gives you complete control over how much access stock material you have in each
direction of the stock material.
Add box to CAD model
This option enables you to add the stock model box to the CAD model.
863
12.12.2 Automatic Target model definition
The Definition of Target option enables you to automatically define the target model during the
CAM-Part definition. The target model is based on all the solid bodies and/or surfaces of the
DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.
Define Target by
This option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies and/or surfaces) from the
DesignModel.
12.12.3 Definition of Coordinate System
Single CoordSys
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to shorten the CoordSys definition by
avoiding the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the first CoordSys definition. This option is useful
when defining CAM-Parts that use only one Coordinate System.
When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM displays the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the
first CoordSys definition. The CoordSys Manager enables you to define an additional Coordinate
System. This option is useful when defining CAM-Parts that use several Coordinate Systems.
864
12. Settings
12.13 Tool path simulation settings
The Tool path simulation settings enable you to

customize the color of the tools used during the
Host CAD simulation mode.
For each tool number you can define a separate

color. The colors selected in this dialog box will be
used for tools of current and future parts.
To change a color, click on the colored rectangle

next to the tool number in the list. The standard
Windows Color selection dialog box will be
displayed, enabling you to pick the required color.
Load Default colors
Click on this button to load the default SolidCAM

color settings for simulation.
Default simulation option
SolidCAM enables you to define the default simulation mode.

• Use Host CAD Simulation as default
When this option is chosen, the Host CAD simulation

mode is used as default for each new simulation session.
When this option is chosen, the simulation starts in the

last used mode.
Default External simulation option
SolidCAM enables you to define the default simulation mode for the External simulation.
Auto build Target and Stock model for External simulation
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM automatically generates the Stock model and the Target
model for the External simulation.
865
12.14 Machine simulation settings
This page enables you to define the settings of

the Machine simulation mode (see topic 10.9).
12.14.1 Directory for Machine

simulation definition
This parameter defines the location of the
CNC-machines definition files used for the
Machine simulation. A number of CNC-
machine subfolders are located under this folder.
According to the settings of the MAC file, the
appropriate machine is chosen for the Machine
simulation.
12.14.2 Tool path coordinates

This section enables you to define the type of coordinates that will be displayed in the Move list tab
(see topic 10.9.2). The Part based coordinates option enables you to display the coordinates related
to the CAM-Part coordinate system (part coordinates). The Absolute machine axis values option
enables you to display coordinates related to the CNC-Machine origin (machine coordinates).
12.14.3 Background
Background color
This option enables you to choose the color for the Machine
simulation background. The Color dialog box enables you
to choose the appropriate color.
Background gradient
This option enables you to choose the colors for the

Machine simulation gradient background. The Color dialog
box enables you to choose the appropriate colors.
866
12. Settings
The following options are available for gradient background:

• Horizontal
• Vertical
• Diagonal descending
867
• Diagonal ascending
12.14.4 Enable collision control

This option enables you to detect and avoid possible collisions between all components of the
CNC-machine in the process of machining. When the Enable collision control check box is selected,
SolidCAM performs the collision checking according to the collision control parameters in the
CNC-machine definition. When the Enable collision control check box is not selected, SolidCAM
ignores the collision control parameters in the CNC-machine definition and does not perform the
collision control.
Collision check tolerance
This parameter enables you to specify the tolerance of the collision check. SolidCAM ignores all
the collisions with tolerance smaller than the specified value and alerts when the collision tolerance
is greater than the tolerance specified value.
Collision control between moves
Generally, SolidCAM performs the collision control in the generated tool path positions listed
in the GCode output. The Collision control between moves option enables you to perform the
collision control also between these positions.
12.14.5 Solid verification

SolidCAM enables you to perform the solid verification of the material cutting process in the
SolidVerify mode integrated into the Machine simulation. Using this functionality, you can display
the stock model and perform the simulation by dynamic subtraction of the tool solid model (using
solid Boolean operations) from the stock solid model.
When the Enable verification check box is selected, the solid verification is performed in the
Machine simulation mode.
868
12. Settings
12.14.6 Environment
The Enable machine definition editing check box enables you to edit the CNC-machine definition
in the Machine simulation environment.
12.15 DNC settings
This option enables you to define the path for the data transmitting software – the DNC program.
869
12.16 Editors settings
This page enables you to specify standard editors

for text files created by SolidCAM.
GCode Editing
When the Open generated GCode check box is

selected, SolidCAM opens the GCode file after its
generation.
Editor for GCode files (*.tap)
Specify the editor to view, open and print generated

GCode files.
Enter the path to a text editor or click

on the Browse button to select an
application on your system.
Select the Multi-document editor option if your editor supports multi-document mode.
Editor for CAM-Part Documentation (*.doc) files
The documentation for CAM Parts will be generated in text files with the *.doc extension. As the
default editor, the SolidCAM viewer.exe can view and print documentation files. You can, however,
specify any text editor or word processor that can read *.doc files as the standard editor for your
documentation.
Enter the path to a text editor or use the Browse button to select an application on
your system.
Cover page
This option enables you to define the path to the cover page used for the CAM-Part Documentation
(see topic 2.13).
870
12. Settings
12.17 External program settings
SolidCAM enables you to define a path to an

external program (Windows application or batch
file) that can be loaded from the SolidCAM menu.
During the launch, the external program will receive from SolidCAM the following parameters:
• Full path to the loaded CAM-Part.
• Name of the loaded CAM-Part.
For example, the batch file that was defined as External program contains
the following string: C:\EditNC\EditNC.exe %1\%2.TAP
The CAM-Part C:\SolidCAM2010\User\cavity.prt is loaded.
When you launch the external program, SolidCAM will transfer the name
and path of the CAM-Part to the batch file. Parameters of the batch file will
receive their values and the following command will be executed:
C:\EditNC\EditNC.exe C:\SolidCAM2010\User\cavity.TAP.
871
12.18 Machining Process settings
12.18.1 On MP insertion (for milling only)
Perform auto calculation

Select this check box in case you want the
operations to be calculated automatically after the
Machining Process is inserted into the CAM-Part.
If you select the Ask before calculation check
box, the message is displayed which enables you
to confirm the calculation; if this check box is
cleared, the calculation starts without prior notice.
12.18.2 Operation name in SolidCAM

Manager
The setting of this field defines how the operation
names appear in SolidCAM Manager when
a Machining Process Table is loaded and a
Machining Process is added to the CAM-Part.
When the Show group name check box is selected, the operation
names are preceded with the names of the operation groups and
default sets defined in Machining Process Table Manager.
When this check box is not selected, only the operation names appear
Prismatic part_20-6_finish_wall
Operation Default set Operation
group name name name
12.18.3 Update extra parameters on CNC-controller change
This option enables you to update the extra parameters defined for the operation when the CNC-
controller is changed. Select the Ask before update check box if you want the warning message to
be displayed before the update is started.
872
12. Settings
12.19 User interface settings
This page enables you to switch between two schemes of the SolidCAM operation interface.
While the first operation interface scheme is

represented by a single-page dialog box, the other
one is a dialog box divided into several pages, each
of them handling a specific set of parameters
(e.g. Geometry, Tool, Levels, Technology, and so
forth). The list on the left enables you to switch
between the parameters pages.
You may switch between the two interface

schemes by assigning and using a keyboard
shortcut. Press a required key or a combination
of keys you want to use as hotkeys for switching.
873
12.20 CoordSys settings
Create planar surface at Part Lower Level (Zero level)
This option defines the default state of the Create planar surface at Part Lower level option in the
CoordSys Data dialog box (see topic 2.2.7).
Facet tolerance for levels measuring
This option enables you to define the tolerance for faceting that will be used during the model box
generation in the process of CoordSys definition (see topic 2.2.2).
874
12. Settings
12.21 GCode Generation
This page enables you to define the defaults of the

GCode files location and other parameters. These
defaults are applied to every newly created CAM-
Part. If you want to modify these settings for each
Part separately, SolidCAM offers you a similar page
in the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.8).
The Save GCode files box offers three options to

define the parameters related to saving of GCode
files:
In the CAM-Part directory
SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the

CAM-Part directory. This option is used by default.
According to the MAC file
SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files according to the parameters defined in the MAC file.
In the GCode directory
SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the specified GCode folder location. When the
GCode generation is started, SolidCAM creates a new folder with the CAM-Part name in the
specified GCode directory and saves the GCode files there. If this folder already exists, SolidCAM
uses it for the GCode output.
This group box enables you to define the path for the GCode directory. You can enter the path or
click on the Browse button and choose the destination folder using the Browse For Folder dialog
box.
If you have entered the path to a non-

existing folder, the following message
is displayed after the confirmation of
the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
The Create button enables you to create the folder that will be used for
GCode directory in the specified location. The Browse button displays the
browser dialog box that enables you to choose another location that will be
used for the GCode directory.
875
If the new folder cannot be created, the following message is displayed:
If the chosen folder has the read-only attribute, the following message is
displayed after the confirmation of the Browse dialog box or the SolidCAM
By default, the GCode directory location is not defined. You have to specify it when you choose the
In the GCode directory option for the first time.
Create subfolders for split GCode files
When split marks are detected in SolidCAM Manager during the GCode generation for
the entire CAM-Part, SolidCAM creates a number of GCode segment files. Each such
GCode segment file is created for one or several operations enclosed by split marks.
These files are named with the CAM-Part name followed by the “-” sign and the order
number of split segment.
Split marks are ignored in case of GCode generation for several operations.
With the In the GCode directory option, SolidCAM creates separate CAM-Part GCode
folders in the specified folder location.
When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box is
selected, SolidCAM creates a separate folder for each GCode
segment file and saves the GCode segments files there. The
folder is created in the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the
specified GCode folder location. The name of the folder is the
same as the GCode segment file name.
When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box
is not selected, SolidCAM generates all the GCode segment
files directly into the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the
specified GCode folder location.
876
12. Settings
Create separate folders for each CAM-Part
When this check box is selected, SolidCAM creates a folder for each CAM-Part and
saves the GCode file there. Otherwise, the GCode files for all CAM-Parts are generated
into the GCode directory.
Additional control of GCode
When this check box is selected, you can alter the

GCode file name and location. When you click one of
the GCode generation commands, the Windows-style
Save GCode browser is displayed with the default
CAM-Part name and location that might be edited.
All the GCode files previously

generated for the current CAM-Part
remain in the specified folder.
When this check box is not selected, the GCode is

generated and automatically saved in the defined
location.
GCode generation for the entire CAM-Part
The Erase all previous GCode files check box enables you to choose whether the old GCode files
generated for this CAM-Part remain or are removed when a new one is generated.
This check box is not available if the Create a separate folder for Each CAM-Part
check box is not selected and when the Customize GCode file name check box is
selected.
GCode generation for separate operations
The Erase all previous GCode files check box enables you to choose whether the old GCode files
generated for separate operations remain or are removed when a new one is generated.
This check box is not available if the Create a separate folder for Each CAM-Part
check box is not selected and when the Customize GCode file name check box is
selected.
877
12.22 Tool search
The Tool search page enables you to define

the parameters that will be used as search
criteria when the tool search is performed by
tool parameters.
This page contains two sets of tool data for

Milling and Turning tool search. To define
the parameters you want to include in the
search, select the relevant check boxes. The
Select all and Clear all buttons enable you
to select or clear all the check boxes in each
section separately.
12.23 Internal Post-processor
This page enables you to define whether the

GCode will contain the @tool_path_info
output, which is a post-processor command
that includes information about the tool path.
You may choose for which types of machines
this output will appear in the GCode by
selecting the corresponding check boxes.
878
12. Settings
12.24 SolidCAM Manager settings
This page enables you to assign sequential numbers

for items (operations, splits and fixtures) in the
SolidCAM Manager tree.
When the Use automatic numbering of SolidCAM

Manager items check box is selected, all the items
in SolidCAM Manager are numbered.
When a new item is defined between two existing items, SolidCAM

performs renumbering in order to assign to each item an updated
sequential number.
12.25 Template defaults
This page enables you define the default location

of the operation templates and to specify the
default templates used for each new operation.
The content of this page is similar to that of the
Template Defaults page of the Part Settings dialog
879
12.26 Miscellaneous settings
3DConnexion
The Enable 3D mouse support check box provides

the possibility to use the SpaceNavigator 3D
mouse by 3DConnexion (www.3dconnexion.com).
This device enables you to rotate, pan and zoom

the CAD model at every stage of the CAM-Part
definition. Working with the SpaceNavigator
mouse, you can significantly speed up the geometry
definition process and facilitate viewing the model
and tool path when performing the simulation
of machining in the HostCAD, Rest Material,
SolidVerify, RapidVerify and Machine Simulation
modes.
Visual Tool Check
When the Enable visual tool check check box is

selected, a half-transparent image of a tool selected in
the Part Tool Table dialog box follows the cursor that
moves over the model when the Part Tool Table dialog
box is displayed. The tool image can be dynamically
zoomed and rotated together with the model.
880
12. Settings
12.27 Tool coolant
This page enables you define the tool coolant

options that will be applicable to the tools
used in the each newly created CAM-Part.
When a check box is selected, the related

coolant option is used.
The coolant options can be edited for each

CAM-Part separately in the Tool coolant page
of the Part Settings dialog box (see topic
2.10.10).
12.28 Gouge check
This page enables you to control the gouge

checking parameters at the system level.
The Check gouges on calculation check box

enables you to define the default state of the
corresponding edit box in the Part Settings
(see topic 2.10.11).
881
12.29 CAM Messages
There is a number of messages in SolidCAM that are displayed in response to specific user input,
such as warning messages, confirmation prompts and so forth. These messages are displayed each
time a particular action is performed (for example, deleting operations), and it might be quite
cumbersome to answer them every time.
This page provides you with the possibility

to control the visibility status of the most
frequently displayed messages.
Activate following messages
This section enables you to handle the

visibility of all frequently displayed messages
by selecting the relevant check boxes.
Each message box is controlled by the

relevant check box. When the check box is
cleared, the message is not displayed, and
confirmation of the event is performed
automatically. When the check box is selected,
the confirmation message is displayed.
Activate prompts to calculate operations
This section contains the list of operations that need confirmation before recalculation of already
calculated operation. When the check box is selected for the specific operation, the confirmation
message will be displayed before this operation is recalculated.
882
Appendix
Appendix
SolidCAM Security Hardware Key
To prevent the unauthorized access to the software, SolidCAM is

using the hardware protection key, the plug-in device that enables the
software authentication. SolidCAM hardware keys are available both
for USB and LPT ports to support both standalone and network
usage.
To view the information about the hardware key you are using, click
SolidCAM and choose Hardware Key Info from the menu or click on
the corresponding button on the SolidCAM General toolbar.
The Hardware Key Info dialog box is displayed.
Key type
This section displays the type of the key you are using: either standalone or network.
• Standalone hardware key enables you to run SolidCAM only on one computer
where the key is installed.
• Network hardware key enables you to run SolidCAM simultaneously on several
computers connected to a local area network. There are two types of network
hardware keys: non-configurable and configurable. A Non-configurable
hardware key enables you to use the same set of available SolidCAM modules
for all SolidCAM network users. A Configurable hardware key enables you to
choose a specific set of modules for each SolidCAM network user.
Expiration date
This section displays the expiration date of the key.
883
Additional features
This section lists the additional modules, with which the current key enables you to
work, such as the DNC software.
Modules
This section displays the list of CAM modules you can work with using this key.
Host support
This section displays the list of CAD hosts supported by this key.
Seats
This section displays the number of computers in the network that share the same
hardware key. In case of Standalone type, the Seats number is always 1.
Version
This section displays the version of SolidCAM supported by this key.
Evaluation
When this check box is selected, most machining modules of SolidCAM supported by
this key are available for working.
Save info
This button enables you to save the information about the key as an *.htm file.
Configurable Network hardware keys

A Configurable hardware key enables you
to choose a specific set of modules for
each SolidCAM network user.
When you start SolidCAM, choose the
seat configuration to which you want
to connect. Click on the corresponding
row in the table under Seat configuration
selection. The row will become green if
you connected to the network successfully
or red if the connection failed; in the latter
case the error message will be displayed.
884
Appendix
Seat configuration selection
Available
This column shows the maximal number of users that are licensed to work with the
modules indicated in the same row simultaneously.
Free
This column shows the number of vacant seats.
Hosts supported
This section displays the list of CAD hosts supported by this key.
Modules
This section displays the list of CAM modules you can work with using this key.
Configuration # (optional)
In case you want to know which seat configuration is used on which host, this number
enables you to identify the users that are currently using SolidCAM in the network
with the help of the Aladdin Monitor utility. You can turn on this option in SolidCAM
Settings if needed.
Automatically load this seat configuration
Select this check box if you wish to start SolidCAM always with the chosen
configuration without displaying the Hardware Key Info dialog box. In case of
connection failure the error message will be displayed.
885
CAM Modules list
M25 2.5D Milling

RM25 Profile/Pocket 2.5D Rest Material and chamfering
SP25 Special Additional 2.5D Mill Options
AFRM Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining module
DrillPocketRecog Pocket and Drill Recognition
M3 3D Milling
HSM High Speed Machining
MI4 4-Axis Indexial Milling
MI5 5-Axis Indexial Milling
MS4 Simultaneous 4-Axis Milling (C-axis)
MS5X-3 HSS
MS5X-4 Sim. 5-Axis module - 4-Axis
MS5X-5 Sim. 5-Axis module - 5-Axis
MSim Machine Simulation
T Turning
T/MT-YC Turn-Mill - XYZC-axes
T/MT-YBC Turn-Mill - XYZCB-axes
BS Back Spindle
W2 WireEDM 2-axes
W4 WireEDM 2/4 axes
DNC WinDNC application for NC data transfer
886
Appendix
SolidCAM Security Hardware Key Update
In some cases SolidCAM requires the update of security hardware keys. To update the security
hardware key, do the following:
1. Make sure that the SolidCAM security hardware key is connected to the
computer.
2. Extract the ZIP-archive <security hardware key number>.zip supplied by

SolidCAM into the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder
3. Extract the ZIP-archive customer.zip to the same folder.
4. Run the Mak_plag.bat file located in the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder. It is

recommended to run it with the Command Prompt (Start > Programs >
Accessories) window. When the Command prompt dialog box is displayed
enter the following commands:
Cd <full path for SolidCAM folder>\Util
Mak_plag
By default, the full path for SolidCAM folder is the following:

C:\Program Files\SolidCAMXXXX
5. The message: Hasp Memory updated OK will be displayed.
License expiration
When your license is about to expire (10 days and less left), the following warning message is
displayed:
This message is displayed once a day during the whole mentioned period of time.
887
888
Index
Index
Symbols
2.5D Milling 337
2D Boundary 60
2D simulation 725
3D Box dialog box 61
3D Drilling Operation 595
3D Engraving Operation 591
3D Milling 523
3D Milling Operation 524
3D Model 60
3D Model Geometry 227
3D simulation 728
4th Axis 332
5 Axis 80, 81
@tool_path_info command 878
A
Add Center Drill 718
Adding a new Parameter 619
Adding an Operation 262
Add Multi-Chain 244
Adjacent passes connection 365, 403
Adjacent tool paths connection 381
Adjusting the cutting parameters to a specific CNC-machine 192
Advanced sort 301
Advanced sorting 450
Advanced Technology 300
AFRM 636
Algorithm 690
Angle 187, 570
Angle along path 556
Angle between paths 556
Angle ramping parameters 420
Angular dimensions 179
Approach from outside 406, 441
Approach open pocket from outside 547
Approximation 850
Approximation of arcs 310
Arbor diameter 187
Arc approximation 381, 402, 563, 575
Arc by points 239
Around 4th Axis Drill Geometry 224
889
Around Profile 413, 548
Ask user to find original model if not located 854
Assigning Hole Features to Feature Sets 682
Associativity of Stock and Target models 63
Automatically remove noise from input data 80
Automatic CAM-Part definition 82, 863
Automatic CoordSys Positions definition 683
Automatic optional angle 398
Automatic Sorting 324
Automatic Stock model definition 82, 863
Automatic Target model definition 82, 864
Auto next 344
Auto-Save settings 862
Auto Select 240
Auto-to 240
Axis Tolerance 717
Axis type 68, 683
B
Background color 866
Background gradient 866
Ball nose mill 146
Base Geometry 372
Base points of rotation axes 789
Bitangency angle 586
Blind 474
Blind Simple Hol Feature 637
Boolean Operations 258
Bore 165
Boring 471
Box (Auto) 60
Bull nose mill 147
C
CAD selection 223
Calculate operations in Holes Recognition 718
Calculator 283
CAM Messages 882
CAM-Part Definition 99
CAM-Part Documentation 103
CAM-Part Lower level 54
CAM-Part name 41
CAM-Part Properties 99
CAM-Part structure 42
CAM-Part Upper level 54
890
Index
Capture Image 106

Ceiling offset 506
Center drill 160, 446
Center of circle 367
Chain Geometries 233
Chains direction 235
Chains direction dialog box 248
Chains selection 246
Chains sorting 249
Chamfer 348, 350, 391, 412, 415, 442
Chamfer drill 163
Chamfer Hole Feature segment 645
Chamfer Length 188
Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 659
Change tool 316, 323
Change tool data 316, 323
Change tool type 181
Changing Angle 676, 678, 679
Changing Diameter 676, 677, 678, 679
Changing Height 676, 677, 678, 679
Changing Upper Plane 676, 677, 678, 679
Check faces 530
Check gouges during calculation 309
Check synchronization always 75, 853
Check synchronization on user demand 76, 854
Choose STL dialog box 61
Choosing a Technological Solution 689
Choosing the tool 629, 690
Choosing the tool for the Center - Chamfer Drill Operation 694
Choosing the tool for the Center Drill Operation 692
Choosing the tool for the Chamfer Drill Operation 693
Choosing the tool for the Drill Operation 691
Choosing the tool for the Mill Operation 691
Choosing the tool for the Reaming Operation 696
Choosing the tool for the Thread Operation 695
Circular Pocket 571
Circular sorting methods 461
Clean condition 404
Clean contours of flat areas 576
Clean flat 540
Cleanup CAM-Part 129
Clearance level 54, 294
Clear offset 353, 508
Climb milling 577
Closed chains direction 248
CNC-controller 68, 849
CNC-machine kinematic type 781
891
CNC-machine model definition 798
Collapse tree 322
Color 475
Color settings 858
Compatible Hole Features 686
Compatible/Incompatible Hole features 685
Compensation 345, 411, 443, 490, 506, 551, 576
Complete Z-level 408, 442, 497, 551
Compound Hole Features 637
Compound Holes processing 646
Compressed CAM-Part 92
Compressed CAM-Part file format 92
Compressed CAM-Part settings 855
Compression factor 855
Condition 690, 707
Cone Hole Feature segment 644
Configurations page 704
Conical fillet 304
Connection type 567, 571, 572, 576
Connect islands 400
Constant depth type 346, 494
Constant step down 574
Constant Step over strategy 580
Constant Z Finish Strategy 573
Constant-Z flat floor machining 578
Constant-Z Tolerance 851
Constant-Z wall machining 574
Constraint 521
Contour 3D Operation 387
Contour style 579
Contour technology 379
Contour type 400
Conventional 577
Conversion to Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 670
Conversion to Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment 668
Conversion to Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 670
Conversion to Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment 669
Conversion to Thread Machinable Hole Feature segment 671
Converting CAM-Parts 93
Coordinate System 43
CoordSys data 54
CoordSys dialog box 44
CoordSys Manager 57
CoordSys settings 874
Copy 315
Copy as Working area 252
Corner 378, 399, 401
892
Index
Corner Radius 186

Create planar surface at Part Lower level 56, 874
Create separate folders for each CAM-Part 877
Create subfolders for split GCode files 876
Creating Feature Sets 682
Current Configuration 705
Current Stock model method 81
Current Tool Library 170
Curve 235
Curve + Close corners 237
Cut 315
Cut from 510
Cutter tip 483
Cutting angle 719
Cutting area 565
Cutting conditions 190
Cutting depth overlap 509
Cutting direction 378, 399, 500, 566, 570, 572, 577
Cutting length 188
Cylindrical/Conical face 45
Cylindrical fillet 305
Cylindrical Hole Feature segment 644
D
Default CNC-controller settings 849
Default GCode numbers 70
Default Geometry Names 860
Default sets 602
Default Sets page 616, 631
Default Tool Data page 190
Define Direction 562
Define start by angle 575
Defining a new technological solution 713
Defining operation templates 612
Defining Process Templates 274
Definition of Coordinate Systems 82, 638, 864
Delta 49
Delta depth 294, 482, 496
Depth 411
Depth associativity 295
Depth cutting type 357, 382, 495, 507
Depth Edit dialog box 480
Depth type 346, 483
Descend to cutting level with Rapid 442
Descent Angle 498, 515
Description 618
893
Diameter 186, 481
Diameter Offset Number 195, 292
Diameter value 483
Direction mode 586
Direction type 570, 571
Directory 41
Directory for Machine simulation definition 866
Disconnected Holes processing 647
Display of tool path for CAM-Part operations 35
Distance 634
DNC settings 869
Documentation Editor 103
Dove tail mill 148
Drill 159
Drill cycle type 404, 470, 484, 598
Drill depth 447, 482
Drill Geometry 219
Drill Geometry Selection dialog box 220
Drilling 470
Drilling Operation 445
Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment 659
Drill points 545
Drill Recognition Operation 473
Drive faces 530
E
Each step down 411
Editors Settings 870
Edit page 177
Enable collision control 868
Enable visual tool check 880
End mill 145
Engagement angle 306
Engraving data for Translated Surface operation 514
Engraving Limit for Translated Surface Operation 519
Engraving technology 592
Engraving tool 153
Environment 869
Equal step down 356, 395
Equal step over 375, 408, 539
Exit material 399, 400
Expand tree 322
Export all tools 183
Export selected tools 183
Expression 617, 618, 621, 708, 709
Extend to edge 585
894
Index
Extension 342, 378, 381, 405, 441

Extension/Overlap 355, 509
External corner type 304
External program settings 871
External Simulation 833
External wall angle 303
F
Face 435
Face mill 149
Face Milling Operation 371
Facet rendering 748
Facet tolerance 59
Facet tolerance for levels measuring 874
F_Boring 472
F_Drill 470
Feature Sets 636, 682
Feature Sets page 641, 685
Feed 194, 291
Fillet 401
Fillet corner 380, 399
Fillet size for last cut 351, 409, 442, 443, 496, 507, 541
Filtering Templates 272
Final cuts 301, 442
Find Holes 477
Finish 355, 410, 443, 509, 554
Finish strategies 560
Fixture 334
Flat approach/Flat retreat 492
Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 659
Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment 659
Flip 49
Floor offset 353, 409, 443, 507
Force open pockets as closed 546
Full diameter 483
Functions 616
G
Gap control 243
Gap maximum tolerance 851
Gap minimum tolerance 851
GCode 313, 837
GCode button 282
GCode generation 85, 875
GCode output in machine/part coordinates 788
895
Generating Operations 701
Geometry 217
Geometry Modify dialog box 437
Geometry page 286, 394, 433
Getting Help 38
G (Global) 618
Global TDB 703
Gouge check 309
Gouge check settings 91
Group Types 609
H
Hatch 375
Hatch angle 376, 398
Hatch+Finish type 403
Hatch Roughing 553
Hatch style 579
Hatch type 397
Head-Head machine type 781
Head-Table machine type 783
H Length 189
Holder overhang length 204
Holder page 197
Hole diameter 474
Hole Feature Groups 647
Hole Feature Model 643
Hole Feature Parameters dialog box 648
Hole Features 636
Hole Feature segments 643
Hole Feature shapes 647
Hole Features page 641, 648
Hole height 475
Holes Recognition Functions 709, 714
Holes Recognition Manager 639, 640
Holes Recognition parameters 708, 711
Holes Recognition Settings 716
Holes Recognition Toolbar 641
Holes Tree 477, 480
Holes type 474
Hole Upper level 475
Host CAD simulation 727
HR Drill Geometry Selection dialog box 474
HR Manager Toolbar 640
896
Index
I
ID Number 186
Import Tool 182
Include tool data 267, 274
Incompatible Hole Features 686
Indent according to Tools/CoordSys 324
Info 279, 317
Init 329
Inserting The Machining Process 627
Installing SolidCAM 24
Internal Post-processor 878
Interoperational tool movements 78
Interoperational Tool movements 297
Invert Check Status 373
Island offset 409, 443
Island wall angle 303
Item search in SolidCAM Manager 33
K
Keep cutting direction 377, 398
Keep tool down 369, 385, 431
L
Lead in 366, 427, 444, 522
Lead in/out arc 492
Lead out 366, 429, 444, 522
Length 188
Length Offset number 195, 292
Levels page 293, 339, 395, 439, 447
License Manager 29
Limit data for translated surface 516
Limit Geometry 232
Limits 515
Linear finish strategy 560
Linear pattern 450
Linear sorting methods 451
Link page 417, 444, 522
Loading Templates 269
Local TDB 703
Lollipop mill 155
Lollipop mill with conical shoulder 156
Lollipop mill without conical shoulder 155
Loop 238, 380, 401
Loops filter 247
897
Lower level (Depth) 294
LPT port 29
M
Mac CoordSys number 44
Machinable Hole Feature conversion 665
Machinable Hole Features 636, 659
Machinable Hole Features page 641, 673
Machine CoordSys number 54
Machine simulation 797
Machine simulation settings 866
Machining Process 690
Machining Process Define Manager 612
Machining Process Group Types 609
Machining Process Insert Manager 630
Machining Process List 606
Machining Process settings 872
Machining Process Table 602
Machining Process Table Manager 606
Mac Options 67
Major thread diameter 490
Managing CAM-Parts 95
Managing Geometries 251
Managing Hole Features 649
Managing Machinable Hole Feature Segments 673
Managing Machining Processes 611
Managing Machining Process Tables 607
Managing operation templates 613
Managing sets of cutting conditions 191
Managing SolidCAM settings 845
Managing technological solutions 699
Managing Technology 698
Managing tools 180
Mark open edges 234
Mark Open Edges dialog box 244
Max Distance between Holes 717
Maximum angle 529
Maximum step down 574
Maximum step over 563, 578
Measurement 738
Milling CAM-Part 40
Milling Part Data dialog box 42
Milling-STL CAM-Part 136
Milling type 577
Min. corner radius 401
Minimal clean condition 404
898
Index
Minimum angle 529

Minimum cut area 579
Minimum step down 574
Minimum step over 564
Min. Overlap 375
Mirror 332
Miscellaneous parameters 308
Miscellaneous settings 880
Model name 41
Model Reference 99
Modify 506
Modify Geometry 341
Modifying Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 678
Modifying Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment 675
Modifying Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 679
Modifying Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment 677
Modifying Machinable Hole Feature segments 674
Modify offset 342
MP Picture 606
Multi-Passes 491
N
Nethasp.ini 30
NethaspTCPIP.ini 30
New Milling Part dialog box 41
Normal 563
Normal to current view 48
Number of finishes 355, 509
Number of flutes 189
O
Offset 508
Offset cutting 564
Offset for check faces 531
Offset from model 597
Offset on surface 513
Offsets 352, 382, 390, 409, 443, 506, 554
One pass technology 382
One way 561, 566, 571
Open chains direction 249
Open contour strategy 551, 577
OpenGL rendering 743
Open pockets machining 405, 441, 545
Operating Feature Sets 686
Operation buttons 280
899
Operation default templates 89
Operation dialog box interface 263
Operation name 265
Operation Points 632
Operations 261
Operation Sequence 320
Operations page 641
Operation Start level 78, 298
Operation templates 600
Operation Templates page 612
Operation Tool Data 290
Operation Transformations 326
Outside Holder Length 188
Overlap 375, 408, 442, 513, 515, 538
P
Parameter 618
Parameters 601, 617
Parameters definition 632
Parameters of Machinable Hole Feature segments 659
Parameters Table 632
Parametric field menu 615
Parametric tool definition 624
Part Clearance level 78, 297
Part Parameters 619
Part settings 72, 719
Paste 315
Peck 471
Pencil milling 585
Permanent Tool 180
Pick center of tool path spiral 570
Pick origin 48
Pick X-direction 48
Pick XY origin 48
Pick Y-direction 49
Pitch 188
Pixel rendering 749
Planar face 45
Planar Hole Feature segment 645
Plunging 554
Plunging pattern 307, 404, 553
Pocket 582
Pocket-auto boundaries 584
Pocket Operation 393
Pocket Recognition Operation 433
Point to point 238
900
Index
Polar Sort 250

Position 44, 54
Preparation to Holes Recognition 638
Process Template 274
Process type 512
Profile offset 495
Profile Operation 338
Profile/Pocket Geometry 229
Profile with limit 583
Profile with offset 581
Program Number 70
R
Radius 570
Ramping 362, 417, 444
Ramping position 421
RapidVerify control panel 752
RapidVerify simulation mode 752
R_Boring 471
Reamer 164
Reaming 659
Reaming Diameter 647
Reaming Height 647
Reaming recognition 647
Rename operations 315
Renumber Tools 181
Reset according to Part Tool Table 292
Rest material 348, 412, 442, 547
Rest material and gouges filter 742
Rest Material calculation tab 81
Rest Material simulation 751
Restore Data from Model 480
Restore Data from Model to All 481
Result value 618
Return to the latest used directory 96
Reverse drilling sequence 598
Reverse tool path 384
R/O 618
Rotate 330
Rotation 55
Rotational axes direction 784
Rotational axes names 787
Rotation around axis 49
Rotation axis limits 792
Rough 354, 498, 508
Roughing 538
901
Rough tools 178
Ruled Surface 583
Run as main process/Run as background process 835
S
Safety distance 294
Same as Lead in 368
Save As 100
Save button 280
Save & Calculate button 280
Save & Copy button 282
Save Mach. stock to file 737
Saving Templates 267
Saving the updated stock in the STL format 101
Scallop 498, 513, 514, 563, 574, 578
Second offset number 292, 504
Section depth type 498
Section Geometry 231
Section geometry name 512
Segments page 706
Segments Union 657
Select Faces dialog box 434, 531
Selecting single entities 235
Selection filter 223
Selection Filter 246
Selection mode 737
Self intersections 745
Semi-finish and Finish cycles 498
Separate areas 413, 548
Sequence of drill positions 449, 484, 597
Sequence of thread positions 489
Set CCW 234
Set CW 234
Setting SolidCAM licenses on client computers 30
Shaped tool geometry definition 211
Shaped Tools 166, 208
Shaped Tools dialog box 208
Shaped Tool segments 211
Shape page 198
Sharp Corner 380, 402
Shift 55
Show Data 722
Show/Hide CoordSys in tree 323
Show/Hide Tools in tree 322
Show Last Tool Sheet 113
Show SolidCAM Manager 834
902
Index
Show sorted 598

Show tool 176, 723
Side Step 590
Simple Hole Features 637
Simulate button 281
Simulate External 314
Simulation 721
Simulation control panel 722
Simulation Controls 724
Simulation Data 722
Simulation menu 740
Simulation toolbar 731
Slot extension 496
Slot Geometry 230
Slot levels 496
Slot Mill 150
Slot Operation 493
Smart 564
Smooth 567, 571, 572
Solid Body 434
SolidCAM Coordinate System 56
SolidCAM Interface 32
SolidCAM License Server 29
SolidCAM Manager settings 879
SolidCAM Network hardware key 29
SolidCAM Network License 29
SolidCAM Security Hardware Key 883
SolidCAM Settings 843
SolidCAM Single License 25
SolidCAM standard functions 284, 622
SolidCAM tab in SolidWorks CommandManager 130
SolidCAM Template Directory 89
SolidCAM Temporary folder 855
SolidCAM toolbars in SolidWorks environment 134
Solid verification 868
SolidVerify for 3D simulation mode 747
SolidVerify for 3D tab 81
SolidVerify simulation 730
SolidVerify tab 79
Sort by Distance 249
Sort by Value 249
Sort cut order 384
SpaceNavigator 880
Sphere Hole Feature segment 646
Spin 193, 291
Spin and Feed defaults 215
Spindle direction 784
903
Spiral finish strategy 567
Spline Approximation 232, 243
Split 320
Spot drill 162
Stairs 567, 571, 572
Start Angle 491
Start from 401
Start Holes Recognition 639
Starting SolidCAM 31
Start position 344
Stay on surface within gap of 558
Step down 354, 355, 395, 539
Step over 353, 508, 562, 573
Stereolithography file (*.stl) 740
STL file 61
Stock model 59, 60
Stock splitting 743
Stop on Next 723
Subroutine Number 71
Supported CAD systems 24
Suppress 317, 614
Suppressing linked operations 319
Surface Curvature 590
Surface data for translated surfaces 513
Surface offset 514, 540, 554
Synchronization 478
Synchronization check 253, 257
Synchronization of CAM geometry with design model 853
Synchronization of design model with original model 76, 854
Synchronization of the Wireframe 252
Synchronization settings 75, 853
Synchronization tolerance 854
Synchronization when design model configuration changed 854
Synchronizaton of the 3D Model 256
Synchronize 333
System Configuration 704
System requirements 24
System settings 716
T
Table-Table machine type 782
Taper mill 151
Tapping 471
Tap tool 154
Target model 59, 62
Technological Solutions 689
904
Index
Technology 689
Technology Database 636, 689, 702
Technology Database Manager dialog box 704
Technology page 396, 440, 511, 641, 697
Technology Settings 718
Template 267
Template defaults 89
Thread 644, 659
Thread data 490
Thread diameter 187
Threading depth definition 488
Thread mill 157
Thread Milling operation 487
Thread taper 159
Through 474
Through Pocket Chain 435
Through Simple Hole Feature 637
Tip Diameter 187
Tolerance 589
Tolerance page 594
Tool Change XY 66
Tool Change Z 66
Tool coolant 881
Tool Coolant page 196
Tool coolant settings 91
Tool Curvature 590
Tool data 184
Tool facet tolerance 79
Tool facet type 79
Tool Holder 200
Tool Holder Geometry definition 204
Tool Holders dialog box 200
Tool Holding system 200
Tool Libraries 168
Tool Message page 195
Tool Number 185
Tool on working area 533
Tool options 65
Tool page 288, 445
Tool path arrangement 557
Tool path connections 566, 570, 584
Tool path coordinates 866
Tool path simulation 84
Tool path simulation settings 865
Tool path tolerance 590
Tool path trimming 536
Tool Range 175
905
Tool reference 388
Tools 143
Tool search 878
Tool search in Operation Templates 270
Tool Settings 856
Tools Filter 174
Tool sheet documentation 105
Tool sheet template definition in the XLS format 114
Tool side 340, 341, 387, 495, 505, 515
Tool start level 54
Tool Table dialog box 174
Tool Topology 185
Tool Type 144
Tool Type options 167
Tool units 178
Tool Z Level 55
Topology settings 716
Torus Hole Feature segment 645
Total depth 411
Total Length 188
Translate 331
Translated Surface Operation 511
Translation axis limits 790
Trim rounding 529
Trochoidal milling 305
T-Slot Operation 503
U
Undercut – Chamfer 654
Undercut – Cone 653
Undercut – None 653
Undercut – Planar 653
Undercut processing 653
Undercut – Sphere 654
Undercut substitution 654
Undercut – Torus 654
Units Settings 850
Unsuppress 317, 614
Unused Parameters Table 618
Updated Stock model 737, 738
Updated Stock Model calculation 527
Updated Stock Model interchangeability 528
Update stock accuracy 79, 81
Update Stock calculation 79
Update stock model method 80
Update to Machine tool table 183
906
Index
Upper level 294, 481

USB port 29
Use base points of rotation axes 796
Use Chamfer 448
Used in Current or Part Table 624
Used in MP 625
Used Parameters Table 617
Use H Length 793
use_part_shifting 794
Use profile strategy 406, 441
User Configuration 704
User-defined angle 398
User-defined parameters 619, 708, 711
User Directories Settings 848
User interface settings 873
use_rot_axis_base_point1 796
use_rot_axis_base_point2 796
Use shifting 794
use_tool_h_length 793
Using Shaped tools 213
Using the Machining processes 626
V
Variable (Define) 347
Variables 710
Variables & expressions 619
Variable step down 574
Vertical Wall with fillets 552
View 177
Visual Tool Check 880
W
Wall draft angle 302, 442
Wall finish 410, 443
Wall offset 352, 409, 443, 506, 508
Wireframe Geometry 229
Working area 524
Working Area 230
Working area definition via angle limits 528
Working area definition via Face selection 530
Working area definition via Geometry 525
Working area definition via Rest material 526
Working with Operations 311
Work Material 67
907
Z
Z-Entry 541, 555
Z-Entry angle 513
Zigzag 561, 566, 570
Z-value 634
Document Number: SCMUGENG10001

908
Index
909
2.5D Milling High-Speed Surface Machining (HSS) High-Speed Machining (HSM)
Indexed Multi-sided Machining Simultaneous 5 - axis Machining Turning and Mill-Turn up to 5 axis
Wire EDM iMachining Service and Support
© 2010 SolidCAM Ltd. All rights reserved. All brand and trade names are property of their respective owners.
www.solidcam.com

SolidCAM 2010 Milling User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SolidCAM 2010 Milling User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SOLIDCAM - THE LEADERS IN INTEGRATED CAM

The complete integrated Manufacturing Solution inside SolidWorks

All Rights Reserved.

1.1 Installing the SolidCAM Software..................................................................................................... 24

1.1.1 System requirements.................................................................................................................. 24

1.3 Starting SolidCAM............................................................................................................................... 31

1.4 SolidCAM Interface............................................................................................................................. 32

1.4.1 SolidCAM Manager................................................................................................................... 32

2.1 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part....................................................................................................... 40

2.1.1 New Milling Part dialog box.................................................................................................... 41

2.2.1 Defining the Coordinate System (CoordSys)........................................................................ 43

2.4 Stock and Target Model....................................................................................................................... 59

2.4.1 Stock model................................................................................................................................ 60

2.6 Mac Options.......................................................................................................................................... 67

2.7 Work Material........................................................................................................................................ 67

2.8 CNC-Controller and Axis Type.......................................................................................................... 68

2.8.1 Axis type...................................................................................................................................... 68

2.10 Part Settings......................................................................................................................................... 72

2.11.1 Compressed CAM-Part file format....................................................................................... 92

2.12 Managing CAM-Parts........................................................................................................................ 95

2.12.1 SolidCAM menu....................................................................................................................... 95

2.13.1 Documentation Editor.......................................................................................................... 103

2.14.1 Generating the tool sheet..................................................................................................... 106

2.16 SolidCAM controls in SolidWorks environment......................................................................... 130

2.16.1 SolidCAM tab in SolidWorks CommandManager............................................................ 130

2.17.1 Starting a new Milling-STL CAM-Part............................................................................... 136

3.1 User-Defined Tool Types.................................................................................................................. 144

3.1.1 End mill..................................................................................................................................... 145

3.3 Working with the Part Tool Table.................................................................................................... 169

3.4 Working with the Current Tool Library.......................................................................................... 170

3.5 Managing Tool Libraries.................................................................................................................... 171

3.5.1 Edit Tool Library..................................................................................................................... 171

3.6.1 Tools Filter................................................................................................................................ 174

3.7 Managing tools.................................................................................................................................... 180

3.8 Tool data.............................................................................................................................................. 184

3.8.1 Tool Topology page................................................................................................................. 185

3.9.1 Tool Holders dialog box......................................................................................................... 200

3.10.1 Shaped Tools dialog box....................................................................................................... 208

4.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................ 218

4.2 Drilling geometry................................................................................................................................ 219

4.2.1 Defining a Drilling geometry................................................................................................. 219

4.3.1 Defining a 3D Model geometry............................................................................................. 227

4.4.1 Defining the Profile/Pocket geometry................................................................................. 229

4.5.1 Geometry Name...................................................................................................................... 233

4.6.1 Chains Direction dialog box................................................................................................... 248

4.7.1 Synchronization of the Wireframe geometry...................................................................... 252

5.1 Adding an operation........................................................................................................................... 262

5.2 SolidCAM Operation Interface........................................................................................................ 263

5.2.1 Operation name....................................................................................................................... 265

5.3.1 Add Operation......................................................................................................................... 311

5.4.1 Operation Sequence................................................................................................................ 320

5.5.1 Operation transformations..................................................................................................... 327

5.6.1 Fixture dialog box.................................................................................................................... 335

6.1 Profile Operation................................................................................................................................ 338

6.1.1 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 339

6.2.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 371

6.3.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 387

6.4.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 394

6.5.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 433

6.6.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 445

6.7.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 473

6.8.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 487

6.9.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 494